Preface

Preface
Introduction
The MD500-PLUS series AC drive is a general-purpose high-performance current
vector control AC drive. It is designed to control and regulate the speed and torque of
three-phase AC asynchronous motors and permanent magnet synchronous motors.
The AC drive can be used to drive textile machines, paper machines, wire drawing
machines, machine tools, packaging machines, food machines, fans, water pumps,
and other automated production equipment.
This guide introduces parameters, detailed parameter functions, typical applications,
and communication and fault codes of the AC drive.

More Documents
Document Name Data Code Description
MD500-PLUS Series 19011581 This guide introduces the installation, wiring,
General-Purpose commissioning, troubleshooting, parameters, fault
AC Drive Quick codes, and others.
Installation and
Commissioning
Guide (delivered
with the product)
MD500-PLUS Series 19011578 This guide describes the system composition,
General-Purpose technical specifications, components, dimensions,
AC Drive Hardware options (installation accessories, cables, and
Guide peripheral electrical components), expansion cards,
as well as product-related daily maintenance and
maintenance instructions, certifications, standards,
and others.
MD500-PLUS Series 19011582 This guide introduces the installation dimensions,
General-Purpose space design, specific installation steps, wiring
AC Drive requirements, routing requirements, option
Installation Guide installation requirements, and troubleshooting of
common EMC-related problems.
MD500-PLUS Series 19011579 This guide introduces the commissioning tool,
General-Purpose process, procedure, troubleshooting, fault codes, and
AC Drive parameters of the AC drive.
Commissioning
Guide
MD500-PLUS Series 19011580 This guide introduces function application,
General-Purpose communication, fault codes, and parameters of the
AC Drive Software AC drive.
Guide

‑1‑
Preface

Revision History
Date Version Revision
November 2021 A04 Updated the software parameters.
July 2021 A03 Corrected errors.
March 2021 A02 Corrected errors.
November 2020 A01 Corrected errors.
July 2020 A00 First release.

Guide Acquisition
This guide is not delivered with the product. You can obtain the PDF version by the
following method:
Log in to Inovance's website (http://en.inovance.cn/), choose Support > Download,
search for keywords, and then download the PDF file.

‑2‑
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1 Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1 List of Function Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2 List of Monitoring Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2 Parameter Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2.1 F0 Basic Parameter Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2.2 F1 Parameters of Motor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
2.3 F2 Vector Control Parameters of Motor 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
2.4 F3 V/f Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
2.5 F4 Input Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2.6 F5 Output Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
2.7 F6 Start/Stop Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
2.8 F7 Key and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
2.9 F8 Auxilliary Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
2.10 F9 Fault and Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
2.11 FA Process Control PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
2.12 FB Wobble, Fixed Length, and Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
2.13 FC Multi-reference and Simple PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
2.14 FD Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
2.15 FE User-defined Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
2.16 FP User Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
2.17 A0 Torque Control and Restricting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
2.18 A1 Virtual DI and DO Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
2.19 A5 Control Optimization Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
2.20 A6 AI Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
2.21 A9 Vector Control Supplementary Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
2.22 AC AI/AO Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
2.23 AF Process Data Address Mapping Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
2.24 B0 Control Mode, Linear Speed, and Roll Diameter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
2.25 B1 Tension Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
2.26 B2 Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
2.27 B6 Communication Free Mapping Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
2.28 U0 Basic Monitoring Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Table of Contents

2.29 U1 Tension Control Monitoring Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

3 Function Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
3.1 Drive Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
3.1.1 Command Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
3.1.1.1 Setting Command Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
3.1.1.2 Setting Commands Through the Operating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
3.1.1.3 Setting Commands Through Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
3.1.1.4 Setting Commands Through Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
3.1.2 Frequency Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
3.1.2.1 Frequency Reference Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
3.1.2.2 Selecting a Main Frequency Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
3.1.2.3 Setting the Main Frequency Through the Operating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
3.1.2.4 Setting the Main Frequency Through AIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
3.1.2.5 Setting the Main Frequency Through Multi-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
3.1.2.6 Setting the Main Frequency Through Simple PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
3.1.2.7 Setting the Main Frequency Through PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
3.1.2.8 Setting the Main Frequency Through Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
3.1.2.9 Selecting an Auxiliary Frequency Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
3.1.2.10 Selecting Frequency Superposition Input Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
3.1.2.11 Setting the Frequency Reference Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
3.1.2.12 SOperation at Frequencies lower Than the Lower Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
3.1.2.13 Setting the Main Frequency Through Pulse Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
3.1.3 Start/Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
3.1.3.1 Startup Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
3.1.3.2 Stop Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
3.1.3.3 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531

3.2 Motor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

3.2.1 Asynchronous Motor Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
3.2.2 Synchronous Motor Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
3.3 Control Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
3.3.1 DI Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
3.3.2 DO Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
3.3.3 VDI Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
3.3.4 AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
3.3.5 AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
3.4 Control Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
3.4.1 Setting the V/f Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
3.4.2 Output Current (Torque) Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
3.4.3 Overvoltage Stall Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
3.4.4 Speed Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
3.4.5 Slip Adjustment in Vector Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
3.4.6 Over-Excitation in Vector Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
3.4.7 Torque Upper Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
3.4.8 Torque Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
3.4.9 Current Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

‑4‑
 Table of Contents

3.4.10 Improving Performance of Field-Weakening Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

3.4.11 FVC Running and Performance Improvement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
3.4.12 Auxiliary Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
3.4.13 Encoder Signal Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
3.4.14 Synchronous Motor in PMVVC Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
3.4.15 Synchronous Motor Electromagnetic Shorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
3.4.16 Wobble Control Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
3.4.17 Fixed Length Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
3.4.18 Count Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
3.4.19 PID Adjustment Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
3.5 Application Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
3.5.1 Jog Running. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
3.5.2 Frequency Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
3.5.2.1 Multi-Speed Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
3.5.2.2 Frequency Detection (FDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
3.5.2.3 Jump Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
3.5.2.4 Reverse Frequency Inhibition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
3.5.2.5 Detection Width for Frequency Reach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
3.5.2.6 Switchover Frequency of Acceleration/Deceleration Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
3.5.2.7 Detection Value for Frequency Reach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
3.5.3 Current Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
3.5.3.1 Zero Current Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
3.5.3.2 Output Current Limit Violation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
3.5.3.3 Detection Level of Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
3.5.4 Forward/Reverse Run Switchover Dead Zone Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
3.5.5 Timing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
3.5.6 Upper and Lower Limits of AI1 Voltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
3.5.7 IGBT Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
3.5.8 Cooling Fan Working Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
3.6 Tension Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
3.6.1 Selecting a Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
3.6.2 Open-Loop Torque Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
3.6.3 Closed-Loop Torque Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
3.6.4 Closed-loop Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
3.6.5 Roll Diameter Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
3.6.6 Linear Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
3.6.7 Constant Linear Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
3.6.8 Application Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
3.6.9 Tension Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
3.6.10 PID Closed-Loop Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
3.6.11 Winding Speed Limit and Unwinding Reverse Tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
3.6.12 PID Adjustment Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
3.6.13 Tension Torque Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
3.6.14 Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
3.6.15 Pre-drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652
Table of Contents

3.6.16 Constant Linear Speed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

3.6.17 Optimization Parameters for Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
3.6.18 Related I/O Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
3.6.19 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
3.7 Fault and Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
3.7.1 Startup Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
3.7.2 Undervoltage and Overvoltage Thresholds and Fast Current Limit Protection . . 661
3.7.3 Phase Loss Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
3.7.4 Overtemperature Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
3.7.5 Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
3.7.6 Load Loss Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
3.7.7 Overspeed Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
3.7.8 Excessive Speed Deviation Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
3.7.9 Power Dip Ride-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
3.7.10 Fault Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
3.7.11 Fault Protection Action Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
3.7.12 Detection of Short-Circuit to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
3.8 Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
3.9 User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
3.9.1 User-Defined Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
3.9.2 Sleep and Wakeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
3.9.3 Current Running Time Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
4 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
4.1 Parameter Communication Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
4.1.1 Parameter Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
4.1.2 Modbus Communication Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
4.1.3 Communication Data Frame Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
4.1.4 Parameter Address Expression Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
4.1.5 Group Fd: Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
5 Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
5.1 List of Fault Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706

‑6‑
 Parameter List

1 Parameter List

1.1 List of Function Parameters

If FP-00 is set to a non-zero value (password protection is enabled), the parameter
menu is accessible in parameter mode and user-modification mode only after the
correct password is entered. To disable password protection, set FP-00 to 0.
The user password is used to lock operations only through the operating panel. If the
user password is enabled, you need to enter the password every time you re-access
the operating panel to read/write parameters. However, if you read/write parameters
through communication (excluding groups FP and FF), you do not need to enter the
password.
Password protection is not available for the parameter menu in user-defined mode.
Groups F and A include standard function parameters. Group U includes the
monitoring parameters. The following symbols are used in the parameter table:
● Unchangeable
● At stop
● In real time

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F0-00 0xF000 G/P type display 1: G type (constant-torque 1 - At stop " F0-00" on
load) page 92
2: P type (fan and pump)

F0-01 0xF001 Motor 1 control 0: Sensorless vector control 0 - At stop " F0-01" on
mode (SVC) page 92
1: Feedback vector control
(FVC)
2: V/f control
3: Reserved
4: Reserved
5: Speed open loop control for
the synchronous motor
(PMVVC)

F0-02 0xF002 Command source 0: LED operating panel/LCD 0 - At stop " F0-02" on
selection operating panel/Software page 93
1: Terminal
2: Communication

‑7‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F0-03 0xF003 Main frequency 0: Digital setting (preset 0 - At stop " F0-03" on
source X selection frequency (F0-08) that can be page 94
changed by pressing UP/
DOWN, non-retentive upon
power failure)
1: Digital setting (preset
frequency (F0-08) that can be
changed by pressing UP/
DOWN, retentive at power
failure)
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse reference (DI5)
6: Multi-reference
7: Simple PLC
8: PID
9: Communication
10: Reserved
F0-04 0xF004 Auxiliary frequency 0: Digital setting (preset 0 - At stop " F0-04" on
source Y selection frequency (F0-08) that can be page 95
changed by pressing UP/
DOWN, non-retentive upon
power failure)
1: Digital setting (preset
frequency (F0-08) that can be
changed by pressing UP/
DOWN, retentive at power
failure)
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse reference (DI5)
6: Multi-reference
7: Simple PLC
8: PID
9: Communication
10: Reserved
F0-05 0xF005 Range selection of 0: Relative to the maximum 0 - In real time " F0-05" on
auxiliary frequency frequency page 97
reference Y upon 1: Relative to the main
superposition frequency X

F0-06 0xF006 Range value of 0% to 150% 100 % In real time " F0-06" on
auxiliary frequency page 98
reference Y upon
superposition

‑8‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F0-07 0xF007 Frequency source Ones (position): Frequency 0 - In real time " F0-07" on
superposition reference selection page 98
selection 0: Main frequency reference X
1: Main and auxiliary
operation result (based on
tens position)
2: Switchover between the
main frequency X and the
auxiliary frequency Y
3: Switchover between the
main frequency X and the
main and auxiliary operation
result
4: Switchover between the
auxiliary frequency Y and the
main and auxiliary operation
result
Tens (position): Main and
auxiliary operation of the
frequency reference
0: Main + Auxiliary
1: Main – Auxiliary
2: Max. (main, auxiliary)
3: Min. (main, auxiliary)
4: Main x Auxiliary

F0-08 0xF008 Preset frequency 0.00 Hz to F0-10 50 Hz In real time " F0-08" on
page 99

F0-09 0xF009 Running direction 0: Same as the default 0 - In real time " F0-09" on
direction page 100
1: Reverse to the default
direction
F0-10 0xF00A Maximum 5.00 Hz to 599.00 Hz 50 Hz At stop " F0-10" on
frequency page 100

F0-11 0xF00B Source of 0: F0-12 (Frequency upper 0 - At stop " F0-11" on

frequency upper limit) page 100
limit 1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Communication
6: Multi-speed reference

F0-12 0xF00C Frequency upper F0-14 to F0-10 50 Hz In real time " F0-12" on
limit page 101

F0-13 0xF00D Frequency upper 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0 Hz In real time " F0-13" on
limit offset page 101

F0-14 0xF00E Frequency lower 0.00 Hz to F0-12 0 Hz In real time " F0-14" on
limit page 101

‑9‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F0-15 0xF00F Carrier frequency 0.8 kHz to 16.0 kHz 6 kHz In real time " F0-15" on
page 102

F0-16 0xF010 Carrier frequency 0: No 1 - In real time " F0-16" on

adjusted with 1: Yes page 102
temperature

F0-17 0xF011 Acceleration time 0.0s to 6500.0s 20 s In real time " F0-17" on
1 page 102

F0-18 0xF012 Deceleration time 0.0s to 6500.0s 20 s In real time " F0-18" on
1 page 103

F0-19 0xF013 Acceleration/ 0: 1s 1 - At stop " F0-19" on

Deceleration time 1: 0.1s page 103
unit 2: 0.01s
F0-21 0xF015 Offset frequency of 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0 Hz In real time " F0-21" on
auxiliary frequency page 104
source upon
superposition

F0-22 0xF016 Frequency 1: 0.1 Hz 2 - At stop " F0-22" on

reference 2: 0.01 Hz page 104
resolution
F0-23 0xF017 Retention of 0: Non-retentive 0 - In real time " F0-23" on
digital setting of 1: Retentive page 104
frequency upon
stop

F0-25 0xF019 Acceleration/ 0: Maximum frequency (F0-10) 0 - At stop " F0-25" on

Deceleration time 1: Frequency reference page 105
base frequency 2: 100 Hz

F0-26 0xF01A Base frequency for 0: Running frequency 0 - At stop " F0-26" on
UP/DOWN 1: Frequency reference page 105
modification
during running

F0-27 0xF01B Main frequency 0.00% to 100.00% 10 % In real time " F0-27" on
coefficient page 105

F0-28 0xF01C Auxiliary frequency 0.00% to 100.00% 10 % In real time " F0-28" on
coefficient page 106

F1-00 0xF100 Motor type 0: Common asynchronous 0 - At stop " F1-00" on

selection motor page 106
1: Variable frequency
asynchronous motor
2: Synchronous motor

F1-01 0xF101 Rated motor 0.1–1000.0 kW 1.5 kW At stop " F1-01" on

power page 106

F1-02 0xF102 Rated motor 1 V to 2000 V 380 V At stop " F1-02" on

voltage page 107

F1-03 0xF103 Rated motor 0.1–6553.5 A 9 A At stop " F1-03" on

current page 107

‑10‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F1-04 0xF104 Rated motor 0.01 Hz to F0-10 50 Hz At stop " F1-04" on
frequency page 107

F1-05 0xF105 Rated motor 1–65535 RPM 1460 RPM At stop " F1-05" on
speed page 108

F1-06 0xF106 Asynchronous/ 0.001 Ω to 65.535 Ω 1.204 Ω At stop " F1-06" on

Synchronous page 108
motor stator
resistance
F1-07 0xF107 Asynchronous 0.001 Ω to 65.535 Ω 0.908 Ω At stop " F1-07" on
motor rotor page 108
resistance
F1-08 0xF108 Asynchronous 0.01 mH to 655.35 mH 5.28 mH At stop " F1-08" on
motor leakage page 108
inductance
F1-09 0xF109 Asynchronous 0.1 mH to 6553.5 mH 156.8 mH At stop " F1-09" on
motor mutual page 109
inductance
F1-10 0xF10A Asynchronous 0.1 A to F1-03 4.2 A At stop " F1-10" on
motor no-load page 109
current
F1-11 0xF10B Asynchronous 50.0% to 100.0% 86 % In real time " F1-11" on
motor core page 109
saturation
coefficient 1
F1-12 0xF10C Asynchronous 100.0% to 150.0% 130 % In real time " F1-12" on
motor core page 110
saturation
coefficient 2
F1-13 0xF10D Asynchronous 100.0% to 170.0% 140 % In real time " F1-13" on
motor core page 110
saturation
coefficient 3
F1-14 0xF10E Asynchronous 100.0% to 180.0% 150 % In real time " F1-14" on
motor core page 110
saturation
coefficient 4
F1-17 0xF111 Synchronous 0.01 mH to 655.35 mH 15.86 mH At stop " F1-17" on
motor axis D page 110
inductance
F1-18 0xF112 Synchronous 0.01 mH to 655.35 mH 15.86 mH At stop " F1-18" on
motor axis Q page 111
inductance
F1-19 0xF113 Synchronous 0.0 V to 6553.5 V 0 V At stop " F1-19" on
motor back EMF page 111
coefficient
F1-20 0xF114 Filter time 0.003–65.535 0.1 - In real time " F1-20" on
constant (PMVVC) page 111

‑11‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F1-21 0xF115 Oscillation 0–65535 100 - In real time " F1-21" on
suppression gain page 111
(PMVVC)

F1-23 0xF117 Percentage of the 0.00% to 100.00% 0 % At stop " F1-23" on

frictional moment page 112

F1-24 0xF118 Number of motor 0–65535 2 - In real time " F1-24" on

pole pairs page 112

F1-26 0xF11A Auto-tuning 0: Reverse run 1 - At stop " F1-26" on

direction (inertia 1: Forward run page 112
auto-tuning and
synchronous
motor auto-
tuning)

F1-27 0xF11B Encoder pulses 1–20000 1024 - At stop " F1-27" on

per revolution page 112

F1-28 0xF11C Encoder type 0: ABZ incremental encoder 0 - At stop " F1-28" on
1: 23-bit encoder page 113
2: Resolver
F1-29 0xF11D PG signal filter 0: Non-adaptive filter 1 - At stop " F1-29" on
1: Adaptive filter page 113
2: Fixed interlock
3: Automatic interlock
F1-30 0xF11E Encoder wiring Ones (position): AB signal 0 - At stop " F1-30" on
flag direction or rotational page 114
direction
0: Forward
1: Reverse
Tens (position): Reserved

F1-31 0xF11F Encoder zero 0.0° to 359.9° 0 ° At stop " F1-31" on

position angle page 114

F1-32 0xF120 Motor gear ratio 1 to 65535 1 - At stop " F1-32" on

numerator page 114

F1-33 0xF121 Motor gear ratio 1–65535 1 - At stop " F1-33" on

denominator page 114

F1-34 0xF122 Number of pole 1–32 1 - At stop " F1-34" on

pairs of resolver page 115

F1-36 0xF124 PG open circuit 0–11 1 - At stop " F1-36" on

detection page 115

‑12‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F1-37 0xF125 Auto-tuning 0: No auto-tuning 0 - At stop " F1-37" on
selection 1: Static auto-tuning on partial page 115
parameters of the
asynchronous motor (Rs, Rr,
and L0)
2: Dynamic auto-tuning on all
parameters of the
asynchronous motor (with-
load auto-tuning is supported)
3: Static auto-tuning on all
parameters of the
asynchronous motor (Rs, Rr,
L0, Lm, and IO)
4: Dynamic auto-tuning 2 of
the asynchronous motor
(inertia auto-tuning only in
FVC mode)
5: Dynamic auto-tuning 3 of
the asynchronous motor
(auto-tuning on mutual
inductance curves requires no
load, light load, or pure inertia
load; supports V/f, SVC, and
FVC modes)
11: Static auto-tuning on
partial parameters of the
synchronous motor (excluding
back EMF)
12: No-load dynamic auto-
tuning on all parameters of
the synchronous motor
13: Static auto-tuning on all
parameters of the
synchronous motor (excluding
the encoder installation angle)
14: Synchronous motor inertia
auto-tuning (only in FVC
mode)

F2-00 0xF200 Low-speed speed 1–200 30 - In real time " F2-00" on

loop Kp page 117

F2-01 0xF201 Low-speed speed 0.001s to 10.000s 0.5 s In real time " F2-01" on
loop Ti page 117

F2-02 0xF202 Switchover 0.00 Hz to F2-05 5 Hz In real time " F2-02" on

frequency 1 page 117

F2-03 0xF203 High-speed speed 1 to 200 20 - In real time " F2-03" on

loop Kp page 118

‑13‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F2-04 0xF204 High-speed speed 0.001s to 10.000s 1 s In real time " F2-04" on
loop Ti page 118

F2-05 0xF205 Switchover F2-02 to F0-10 10 Hz In real time " F2-05" on

frequency 2 page 119

F2-06 0xF206 VC slip 50% to 200% 100 % In real time " F2-06" on
compensation page 119
gain

F2-07 0xF207 Speed feedback 0.000s to 0.1s 0.004 s In real time " F2-07" on
filter time page 119

F2-08 0xF208 VC deceleration 0 to 200 64 - In real time " F2-08" on

over-excitation page 120
gain

F2-09 0xF209 Torque upper limit 0: Digital setting (F2-10) 0 - In real time " F2-09" on
source in speed 1: AI1 page 120
control (motoring) 2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Communication setting
6: Min. (AI1, AI2)
7: Max. (AI1, AI2)

F2-10 0xF20A Digital setting of 0.0% to 200.0% 150 % In real time " F2-10" on
torque upper limit page 121
in speed control
(motoring)

F2-11 0xF20B Torque upper limit 0: Digital setting (F2-10) 0 - In real time " F2-11" on
source in speed 1: AI1 page 121
control 2: AI2
(generating) 3: AI3
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Communication
6: Min. (AI1, AI2)
7: Max. (AI1, AI2)
8: Digital setting (F2-12)

F2-12 0xF20C Torque upper limit 0.0% to 200.0% 150 % In real time " F2-12" on
settings in speed page 123
control
(generating)

F2-13 0xF20D Low-speed current 0.1–10.0 1 - In real time " F2-13" on

loop Kp page 123
adjustment

F2-14 0xF20E Low-speed current 0.1–10.0 1 - In real time " F2-14" on

loop Ki adjustment page 123

F2-15 0xF20F High-speed 0.1–10.0 1 - In real time " F2-15" on

current loop Kp page 123
adjustment

‑14‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F2-16 0xF210 High-speed 0.1–10.0 1 - In real time " F2-16" on
current loop Ki page 124
adjustment

F2-17 0xF211 Speed loop Kp 1–100 30 - In real time " F2-17" on

upon zero speed page 124
lock
F2-18 0xF212 Speed loop Ti 0.001s to 10.000s 0.5 s In real time " F2-18" on
upon zero speed page 124
lock
F2-19 0xF213 Inertia 1–200 1 - In real time " F2-19" on
compensation page 124
gain

F2-20 0xF214 Speed loop 0.00 Hz to F2-02 0.05 Hz In real time " F2-20" on
switchover page 124
frequency upon
zero speed lock

F2-21 0xF215 Maximum output 100–110 100 - In real time " F2-21" on
voltage coefficient page 125

F2-22 0xF216 Output voltage 0.000s to 0.01s 0 s In real time " F2-22" on
filter time page 125

F2-23 0xF217 Zero speed lock 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " F2-23" on

1: Enabled page 125

F2-24 0xF218 Vector overvoltage 0–1000 40 - In real time " F2-24" on

suppression Kp page 126

F2-25 0xF219 Acceleration 0–200 0 - In real time " F2-25" on

compensation page 126
gain

F2-26 0xF21A Acceleration 0–500 10 - In real time " F2-26" on

compensation page 126
filter time
F2-27 0xF21B Overvoltage 0: Disabled 1 - In real time " F2-27" on
suppression in 1: Enabled page 126
vector control
mode
F2-28 0xF21C Cut-off frequency 50 Hz to 1000 Hz 500 Hz At stop " F2-28" on
of torque filter page 127
reference
F2-29 0xF21D Synchronous 50–180 80 - In real time " F2-29" on
motor initial angle page 127
detection current
F2-30 0xF21E Speed loop 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " F2-30" on
parameter auto- 1: Enabled page 127
calculation
F2-31 0xF21F Expected speed 0 Hz to 3 Hz 0 Hz At stop " F2-31" on
loop bandwidth page 127
(high speed)

‑15‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F2-32 0xF220 Expected speed 1 Hz to 10000 Hz 100 Hz In real time " F2-32" on
loop bandwidth page 128
(low speed)

F2-33 0xF221 Expected speed 1 Hz to 10000 Hz 100 Hz In real time " F2-33" on
loop bandwidth page 128
(zero speed)

F2-34 0xF222 Damping ratio of 0.1–65.000 1 - In real time " F2-34" on

expected speed page 128
loop (unchanged
generally)

F2-35 0xF223 System inertia 0.001–50.000s 0.1 s At stop " F2-35" on

(equivalent to the page 128
start time)

F2-36 0xF224 Single motor 0.001 kg*m2 to 50.000 kg*m2 0.001 kg*m2 At stop " F2-36" on
inertia (kg*m2) page 129

F2-37 0xF225 Inertia auto-tuning 20% to 100% 80 % At stop " F2-37" on

maximum page 129
frequency

F2-38 0xF226 Inertia auto-tuning 1.0s to 50.0s 10 s At stop " F2-38" on

acceleration time page 129

F2-39 0xF227 Bandwidth 1 of 1.0–200.0 Hz 5 Hz Unchangea " F2-39" on

speed loop ble page 129
dynamic
optimization test

F2-40 0xF228 Bandwidth 2 of 1.0–200.0 Hz 10 Hz Unchangea " F2-40" on

speed loop ble page 130
dynamic
optimization test

F2-41 0xF229 Bandwidth 3 of 1.0–100.0 Hz 15 Hz Unchangea " F2-41" on

speed loop ble page 130
dynamic
optimization test

F2-42 0xF22A Bandwidth 4 of 1.0–200.0 Hz 20 Hz Unchangea " F2-42" on

speed loop ble page 130
dynamic
optimization test

F2-43 0xF22B Inertia auto-tuning 0–100 30 - At stop " F2-43" on

and dynamic page 130
speed reference

F2-44 0xF22C Rotor time 0: Disabled 0 - Unchangea " F2-44" on

constant check 1: Enabled ble page 131

F2-45 0xF22D Torque amplitude 10% to 100% 30 % Unchangea " F2-45" on

of rotor time ble page 131
constant check

‑16‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F2-46 0xF22E Number of times 1–6 3 - Unchangea " F2-46" on
of rotor constant ble page 131
check
F2-47 0xF22F Inertia auto-tuning 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " F2-47" on
1: Enabled page 131

F2-48 0xF230 Speed loop 0.1–100.0 Hz 10 Hz At stop " F2-48" on

bandwidth during page 132
inertia auto-tuning

F2-49 0xF231 Back EMF 0: Disabled 0 - Unchangea " F2-49" on

calculation 1: Enabled ble page 132

F2-50 0xF232 Inertia auto-tuning 0: Acceleration/Deceleration 0 - At stop " F2-50" on

mode mode page 132
1: Triangular wave mode

F2-51 0xF233 Acceleration/ 0.1–10.0 1 - At stop " F2-51" on

deceleration page 132
coefficient during
inertia auto-tuning

F2-52 0xF234 Decoupling 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " F2-52" on

control 1: Enabled page 133

F2-53 0xF235 Power limit 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " F2-53" on

selection during 1: Enabled page 133
generating

F2-54 0xF236 Power limit during 0.0% to +200.0% 20 % At stop " F2-54" on
generating page 133

F2-55 0xF237 Flux closed loop Ones (position): Flux closed 10 - At stop " F2-55" on
and torque loop in torque control mode page 133
linearity 0: Disabled
optimization in 1: Enabled
FVC mode Tens (position): Flux closed
loop in speed control mode
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Hundreds (position): Torque
upper limit and torque
linearity in speed control
mode
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
F2-56 0xF238 AC drive output 0.0% to 170.0% 150 % At stop " F2-56" on
current upper limit page 134

‑17‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F3-00 0xF300 V/f curve setting 0: Linear V/f curve 0 - At stop " F3-00" on
1: Multi-point V/f curve page 134
2: Square V/f curve
3: 1.2-power V/f curve
4: 1.4-power V/f curve
6: 1.6-power V/f curve
8: 1.8-power V/f curve
10: V/f complete separation
mode
11: V/f half separation mode

F3-01 0xF301 Torque boost 0.0% to 30.0% 0 % In real time " F3-01" on
page 135

F3-02 0xF302 Cutoff frequency 0.00 Hz to F0-10 50 Hz At stop " F3-02" on

of torque boost page 136

F3-03 0xF303 Multi-point V/f 0.00 Hz to F3-05 0 Hz At stop " F3-03" on

frequency 1 page 136

F3-04 0xF304 Multi-point V/f 0.0% to 100.0% 0 % At stop " F3-04" on

voltage 1 page 136

F3-05 0xF305 Multi-point V/f F3-03 to F3-07 0 Hz At stop " F3-05" on

frequency 2 page 137

F3-06 0xF306 Multi-point V/f 0.0% to 100.0% 0 % At stop " F3-06" on

voltage 2 page 137

F3-07 0xF307 Multi-point V/f F3-05 to F1-04 0 Hz At stop " F3-07" on

frequency 3 page 137

F3-08 0xF308 Multi-point V/f 0.0% to 100.0% 0 % At stop " F3-08" on

voltage 3 page 137

F3-09 0xF309 V/f slip 0.0% to 200.0% 0 % In real time " F3-09" on
compensation page 138
gain

F3-10 0xF30A V/f over-excitation 0–200 64 - In real time " F3-10" on

gain page 138

F3-11 0xF30B V/f oscillation 0–100 0 - In real time " F3-11" on

suppression gain page 138

F3-12 0xF30C Oscillation 0: Inactive 3 - At stop " F3-12" on

suppression gain 1: Reserved page 138
mode 2: Reserved
3: Active
F3-13 0xF30D Voltage source for 0: Digital setting (F3-14) 0 - In real time " F3-13" on
V/f separation 1: AI1 page 139
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Multi-reference
6: Simple PLC
7: PID
8: Communication (1000H)

‑18‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F3-14 0xF30E Digital setting of 0 V to F1-02 0 V In real time " F3-14" on
voltage for V/f page 140
separation

F3-15 0xF30F Voltage rise time 0.0s to 1000.0s 0 s In real time " F3-15" on
of V/f separation page 140

F3-16 0xF310 Voltage decline 0.0s to 1000.0s 0 s In real time " F3-16" on
time of V/f page 141
separation

F3-17 0xF311 Stop mode 0: Frequency and voltage 0 - At stop " F3-17" on
selection for V/f decline to 0. page 141
separation 1: Frequency declines to 0
after voltage declines to 0.

F3-18 0xF312 V/f overcurrent 50% to 200% 150 % At stop " F3-18" on
stall action current page 141

F3-19 0xF313 V/f overcurrent 0: Disabled 1 - At stop " F3-19" on

stall 1: Enabled page 141

F3-20 0xF314 V/f overcurrent 0–100 20 - In real time " F3-20" on

stall suppression page 142
gain

F3-21 0xF315 Action current 50–200 50 - At stop " F3-21" on

compensation page 142
coefficient for V/f
speed overcurrent
stall
F3-22 0xF316 V/f overvoltage 200.0 V to 2000.0 V 770 V At stop " F3-22" on
stall action voltage page 142

F3-23 0xF317 V/f overvoltage 0: Disabled 1 - At stop " F3-23" on

stall 1: Enabled page 143

F3-24 0xF318 Suppression 0–100 30 - In real time " F3-24" on

frequency gain for page 143
V/f overvoltage
stall
F3-25 0xF319 Suppression 0–100 30 - In real time " F3-25" on
voltage gain for V/f page 143
overvoltage stall

F3-26 0xF31A Frequency rise 0–50 5 - At stop " F3-26" on

threshold during page 143
overvoltage stall

F3-27 0xF31B Slip compensation 0.1 Hz to 10.0 Hz 0.5 Hz In real time " F3-27" on
time constant page 144

F3-28 0xF31C V/f parameter 0.00–10.00 0.1 - At stop " F3-28" on

setting inertia page 144
coefficient
F3-29 0xF31D Minimum 10 to 100 50 - At stop " F3-29" on
motoring torque page 144
current

‑19‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F3-30 0xF31E Maximum 10 to 100 20 - At stop " F3-30" on
generating torque page 145
current
F3-31 0xF31F Automatic 0–100 50 - In real time " F3-31" on
frequency rise Kp page 145

F3-32 0xF320 Automatic 0–100 50 - In real time " F3-32" on

frequency rise Ki page 145

F3-33 0xF321 Online torque 80 to 150 100 - At stop " F3-33" on

compensation page 145
gain

F4-00 0xF400 DI1 function 0: No function 1 - At stop " F4-00" on

selection 1: Forward run (FWD) page 146
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause

Contin Contin Continued 11: NO input of external fault Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued 12: Multi-reference terminal 1 ued ued
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for
acceleration/deceleration
selection
17: Terminal 2 for
acceleration/deceleration
selection
18: Frequency source
switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear
(terminal, operating panel)

Contin Contin Continued 20: Command source Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued switchover terminal ued ued
21: Acceleration/Deceleration
inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset

‑20‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
Contin Contin Continued 29: Torque control inhibited 1 - At stop " F4-00" on
ued ued 30: Pulse input page 146
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification
enabled
35: PID action direction
reversal
36: External stop terminal 1
37: Command source
switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main
frequency source X and preset
frequency

Contin Contin Continued 40: Switchover between Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued auxiliary frequency source Y ued ued
and preset frequency
41: Reserved
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque
control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running
time
51: Two-wire/three-wire
control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting

‑21‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
Contin Contin Continued 53: Thickness overlaying Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued 54: Roll diameter reset ued ued
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-charge
58: Winding/Unwinding
switchover
59: Winding diameter
calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
F4-01 0xF401 DI2 function 0–93 4 - At stop " F4-01" on
selection page 155

F4-02 0xF402 DI3 function 0–93 9 - At stop " F4-02" on

selection page 157

F4-03 0xF403 DI4 function 0–93 12 - At stop " F4-03" on

selection page 159

F4-04 0xF404 DI5 function 0–93 13 - At stop " F4-04" on

selection page 161

F4-05 0xF405 DI6 function 0–93 0 - At stop " F4-05" on

selection page 163

F4-06 0xF406 DI7 function 0–93 0 - At stop " F4-06" on

selection page 165

F4-07 0xF407 DI8 function 0–93 0 - At stop " F4-07" on

selection page 167

F4-08 0xF408 DI9 function 0–93 0 - At stop " F4-08" on

selection page 169

F4-09 0xF409 DI10 function 0–93 0 - At stop " F4-09" on

selection page 171

F4-10 0xF40A DI filter time 0.000s to 1.000s 0.01 s In real time " F4-10" on
page 173

F4-11 0xF40B Terminal control 0: Two-wire mode 1 0 - At stop " F4-11" on

mode 1: Two-wire mode 2 page 174
2: Three-wire mode 1
3: Three-wire mode 2
F4-12 0xF40C Terminal UP/ 0.001 Hz/s to 65.535 Hz/s 1 Hz/s In real time " F4-12" on
DOWN change rate page 174

F4-13 0xF40D AI curve 1 -10.00 V to F4-15 -10 V In real time " F4-13" on
minimum input page 175

‑22‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F4-14 0xF40E Percentage -100.0% to 100.0% -100 % In real time " F4-14" on
corresponding to page 175
AI curve 1
minimum input

F4-15 0xF40F AI curve 1 F4-13 to 10.00 V 10 V In real time " F4-15" on

maximum input page 175

F4-16 0xF410 Percentage -100.0% to 100.0% 100 % In real time " F4-16" on
corresponding to page 176
AI curve 1
maximum input

F4-17 0xF411 AI1 fitter time 0.00s to 10.00s 0.1 s In real time " F4-17" on
page 176

F4-18 0xF412 AI curve 2 –10.00 V to F4-20 -10 V In real time " F4-18" on
minimum input page 176

F4-19 0xF413 Percentage -100.0% to +100.0% -100 % In real time " F4-19" on
corresponding to page 177
AI curve 2
minimum input

F4-20 0xF414 AI curve 2 F4-18 to 10.00 V 10 V In real time " F4-20" on

maximum input page 177

F4-21 0xF415 Percentage -100.0% to +100.0% 100 % In real time " F4-21" on
corresponding to page 177
AI curve 2
maximum input

F4-22 0xF416 AI2 fitter time 0.00s to 10.00s 0.1 s In real time " F4-22" on
page 177

F4-23 0xF417 AI curve 3 –10.00 V to F4-25 -10 V In real time " F4-23" on
minimum input page 178

F4-24 0xF418 Percentage -100.0% to +100.0% -100 % In real time " F4-24" on
corresponding to page 178
AI curve 3
minimum input

F4-25 0xF419 AI curve 3 F4-23 to 10.00 V 10 V In real time " F4-25" on

maximum input page 178

F4-26 0xF41A Percentage -100.0% to +100.0% 100 % In real time " F4-26" on
corresponding to page 179
AI curve 3
maximum input

F4-27 0xF41B AI3 filter time 0.00s to 10.00s 0.1 s In real time " F4-27" on
page 179

F4-28 0xF41C Pulse minimum 0.00 kHz to F4-30 0 kHz In real time " F4-28" on
input page 179

‑23‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F4-29 0xF41D Percentage -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " F4-29" on
corresponding to page 180
pulse minimum
input

F4-30 0xF41E Pulse maximum F4-28 to 100.00 kHz 50 kHz In real time " F4-30" on
input page 180

F4-31 0xF41F Percentage -100.0% to +100.0% 100 % In real time " F4-31" on
corresponding to page 180
pulse maximum
input

F4-32 0xF420 Pulse filter time 0.00–10.00s 0.1 s In real time " F4-32" on
page 181

F4-33 0xF421 AI curve selection Ones: AI1 0x321 - In real time " F4-33" on
1: Curve 1 (2 points, see F4-13 page 181
to F4-16)
2: Curve 2 (2 points, see F4-18
to F4-21)
3: Curve 3 (2 points, see F4-23
to F4-26)
4: Curve 4 (4 points, see A6-00
to A6-07)
5: Curve 5 (4 points, see A6-08
to A6-15)
Tens: AI2
1: Curve 1 (2 points, see F4-13
to F4-16)
2: Curve 2 (2 points, see F4-18
to F4-21)
3: Curve 3 (2 points, see F4-23
to F4-26)
4: Curve 4 (4 points, see A6-00
to A6-07)
5: Curve 5 (4 points, see A6-08
to A6-15)

Contin Contin Continued Hundreds: AI3 Contin Contin Continued Continued

ued ued 1: Curve 1 (2 points, see F4-13 ued ued
to F4-16)
2: Curve 2 (2 points, see F4-18
to F4-21)
3: Curve 3 (2 points, see F4-23
to F4-26)
4: Curve 4 (4 points, see A6-00
to A6-07)
5: Curve 5 (4 points, see A6-08
to A6-15)

‑24‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F4-34 0xF422 Setting for AI lower Ones (position): AI1 0 - In real time " F4-34" on
than the minimum 0: Percentage corresponding page 181
input to minimum input
1: 0.0%
Tens (position): AI2
0: Percentage corresponding
to minimum input
1: 0.0%
Hundreds (position): AI3
0: Percentage corresponding
to minimum input
1: 0.0%
F4-35 0xF423 DI1 delay 0.0s to 3600.0s 0 s In real time " F4-35" on
page 182

F4-36 0xF424 DI2 delay 0.0s to 3600.0s 0 s In real time " F4-36" on
page 182

F4-37 0xF425 DI3 delay 0.0s to 3600.0s 0 s In real time " F4-37" on
page 183

F4-38 0xF426 DI valid mode Ones: DI1 valid mode 0 - At stop " F4-38" on
selection 1 selection page 183
0: Active high
1: Active low
Tens: DI2 valid mode selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Hundreds: DI3 valid mode
selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Thousands: DI4 valid mode
selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Ten thousands: DI5 valid
mode selection
0: Active high
1: Active low

‑25‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F4-39 0xF427 DI valid mode Ones: DI6 valid mode 0 - At stop " F4-39" on
selection 2 selection page 184
0: Active high
1: Active low
Tens: DI7 valid mode selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Hundreds: DI8 valid mode
selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Thousands: DI9 valid mode
selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Ten thousands: DI10 valid
mode selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
F4-42 0xF42A AI input range 0: ‑10 V to +10 V 0 - In real time " F4-42" on
selection 1: 0 V to 10 V page 184

F5-01 0xF501 Expansion card 0: no output 0 - In real time " F5-01" on

relay output 1: Running page 185
function selection 2: Fault output (stop upon
fault)
3: Frequency-level detection
FDT1 output
4: Frequency reached
5: Zero speed running (no
output at stop)
6: Motor overload pre-warning
7: AC drive overload pre-
warning
8: Set count value reached
9: Designated count value
reached
10: Length reached
11: PLC cycle completed
12: Accumulative running time
reached
13: Frequency limited
14: Torque limited

‑26‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
Contin Contin Continued 15: Ready for RUN Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued 16: AI1 > AI2 ued ued
17: Frequency upper limit
reached
18: Frequency lower limit
reached (operation related)
19: Undervoltage status
output
20: Communication setting
21: Reserved
22: Reserved
23: Zero-speed running 2 (at
stop)
24: Accumulative power-on
time reached
Contin Contin Continued 25: Frequency-level detection Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued FDT2 output ued ued
26: Frequency 1 reach output
27: Frequency 2 reach output
28: Current 1 reach output
29: Current 2 reach output
30: Timing reach output
31: AI1 input limit exceeded
32: AC drive output load loss
33: Reverse running
34: Zero current status
35: Module temperature
reached
Contin Contin Continued 36: Output current limit Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued exceeded ued ued
37: Frequency lower limit
reached (having output at
stop)
38: Alarm output (direct
output at fault or alarm)
39: Current over-temperature
pre-warning
40: Current running time
reached
41: Fault output 2
42: Fault output 3

F5-02 0xF502 Control board 0–42 2 - In real time " F5-02" on

relay 1 function page 190
selection (T/A1‑T/
B1‑TC1)

‑27‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F5-03 0xF503 Control board 0–42 0 - In real time " F5-03" on
relay 2 function page 191
selection (T/A2-
TC2)

F5-04 0xF504 DO1 function 0–42 1 - In real time " F5-04" on

selection page 193

F5-05 0xF505 Extension card 0–42 4 - In real time " F5-05" on

DO2 output page 195
selection
F5-06 0xF506 FMP output 0: Running frequency 0 - In real time " F5-06" on
function selection 1: Frequency reference page 197
2: Output current
3: Output torque
4: Output power
5: Output voltage
6: Pulse input (100.0%
corresponds to 100.00 kHz)
7: AI1
8: AI2
9: AI3
10: Length

Contin Contin Continued 11: Count value Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued 12: Communication ued ued
13: Motor speed
14: Output current (100.0%
corresponds to 1000.0 A)
15: Output voltage (100.0%
corresponds to 1000.0 V)
16: Output torque (directional)
19: Taper output
20: Roll diameter output
21: Tension output
22: Encoder feedback
frequency

F5-07 0xF507 AO1 output 0: Running frequency 0 - In real time " F5-07" on
function selection 1: Frequency reference page 199
2: Output current
3: Output torque
4: Output power
5: Output voltage
6: Pulse input (100.0%
corresponds to 100.00 kHz)
7: AI1
8: AI2
9: AI3
10: Length

‑28‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
Contin Contin Continued 11: Count value Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued 12: Communication ued ued
13: Motor speed
14: Output current (100.0%
corresponds to 1000.0 A)
15: Output voltage (100.0%
corresponds to 1000.0 V)
16: Output torque (directional)
19: Taper output
20: Roll diameter output
21: Tension output
22: Encoder feedback
frequency

F5-08 0xF508 AO2 output 0: Running frequency 1 - In real time " F5-08" on
function selection 1: Frequency reference page 201
2: Output current
3: Output torque
4: Output power
5: Output voltage
6: Pulse input (100.0%
corresponds to 100.00 kHz)
7: AI1
8: AI2
9: AI3
10: Length

Contin Contin Continued 11: Count value Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued 12: Communication ued ued
13: Motor speed
14: Output current (100.0%
corresponds to 1000.0 A)
15: Output voltage (100.0%
corresponds to 1000.0 V)
16: Output torque (directional)
19: Taper output
20: Roll diameter output
21: Tension output
22: Encoder feedback
frequency

F5-09 0xF509 Maximum FMP 0.01 kHz to 100.00 kHz 50 kHz In real time " F5-09" on
output frequency page 203

F5-10 0xF50A AO1 zero offset -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " F5-10" on
coefficient page 203

F5-11 0xF50B AO1 gain -10.00 to +10.00 1 - In real time " F5-11" on
page 204

F5-12 0xF50C AO2 zero offset -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " F5-12" on
coefficient page 204

‑29‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F5-13 0xF50D AO2 gain -10.00 to +10.00 1 - In real time " F5-13" on
page 205

F5-17 0xF511 Extension card 0.0s to 3600.0s 0 s In real time " F5-17" on
relay output delay page 205

F5-18 0xF512 Control board 0.0s to 3600.0s 0 s In real time " F5-18" on
relay 1 output page 205
delay

F5-19 0xF513 Control board 0.0s to 3600.0s 0 s In real time " F5-19" on
relay 2 output page 206
delay

F5-20 0xF514 DO1 output delay 0.0s to 3600.0s 0 s In real time " F5-20" on
page 206

F5-21 0xF515 Extension card 0.0s to 3600.0s 0 s In real time " F5-21" on
DO2 output delay page 206

F5-22 0xF516 DO active mode Ones (position): Expansion 0 - In real time " F5-22" on
selection card relay page 207
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Tens (position): Control board
relay 1
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Hundreds (position): Control
board relay 2
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic

Contin Contin Continued Thousands (position): Control Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued board DO1 ued ued
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Ten thousands (position):
Expansion card DO2
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic

F6-00 0xF600 Startup mode 0: Direct startup 0 - In real time " F6-00" on
1: Flying start page 207
2: Vector pre-excitation
startup (asynchronous motor)

F6-01 0xF601 Flying start mode 0: From stop frequency 0 - At stop " F6-01" on
1: From 50 Hz page 208
2: From the maximum
frequency
3: Reserved
F6-02 0xF602 Speed of speed 1 to 100 20 - In real time " F6-02" on
tracking page 209

‑30‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F6-03 0xF603 Startup frequency 0.00 Hz to 10.00 Hz 0 Hz In real time " F6-03" on
page 209

F6-04 0xF604 Startup frequency 0.0s to 100.0s 0 s At stop " F6-04" on

hold time page 209

F6-05 0xF605 DC braking current 0% to 150% 0 % At stop " F6-05" on

at startup/Pre- page 209
excitation current
F6-06 0xF606 DC braking time at 0.0s to 100.0s 0 s At stop " F6-06" on
startup/Pre- page 210
excitation time
F6-07 0xF607 Acceleration/ 0: Linear acceleration/ 0 - At stop " F6-07" on
Deceleration mode deceleration page 210
1: S-curve acceleration/
deceleration
F6-08 0xF608 Time proportion of 0.0% to 70.0% 30 % At stop " F6-08" on
S-curve start page 210
segment

F6-09 0xF609 Time proportion of 0.0% to 70.0% 30 % At stop " F6-09" on

S-curve end page 211
segment

F6-10 0xF60A Stop mode 0: Decelerate to stop 0 - In real time " F6-10" on
1: Coast to stop page 211

F6-11 0xF60B Starting frequency 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0 Hz In real time " F6-11" on
of DC braking at page 211
stop

F6-12 0xF60C Waiting time of DC 0.0s to 100.0s 0 s In real time " F6-12" on
braking at stop page 212

F6-13 0xF60D DC braking current 0% to 150% 0 % In real time " F6-13" on

at stop page 212

F6-14 0xF60E DC braking time at 0.0s to 100.0s 0 s In real time " F6-14" on
stop page 212

F6-15 0xF60F Brake usage 0% to 100% 100 % At stop " F6-15" on

page 212

F6-16 0xF610 Closed loop 0 to 1000 500 - In real time " F6-16" on
current Kp of page 213
speed tracking

F6-17 0xF611 Closed-loop 0–1000 800 - In real time " F6-17" on

current Ki of speed page 213
tracking

F6-18 0xF612 Current of speed 30 to 200 100 - In real time " F6-18" on
tracking page 213

F6-21 0xF615 Demagnetization 0.00s to 10.00s 1 s In real time " F6-21" on

time page 214

F6-22 0xF616 Start pre-torque 0.0% to 200.0% 0 % In real time " F6-22" on
setting page 214

‑31‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F6-26 0xF61A Electromagnetic 0% to 200% 100 % In real time " F6-26" on
shorting current page 214

F6-27 0xF61B Electromagnetic 0.0s to 100.0s 0 s At stop " F6-27" on

shorting time page 214
upon startup

F6-28 0xF61C Electromagnetic 0.0s to 100.0s 0 s At stop " F6-28" on

shorting time page 215
upon stop

F6-29 0xF61D Electromagnetic 20.0–100.0 V 20 V At stop " F6-29" on

shorting voltage page 215
reserve
F6-30 0xF61E Trial current for 5.0 to 50.0 10 - At stop " F6-30" on
synchronous page 215
motor speed
tracking

F6-31 0xF61F Minimum tracking 0.0–100.0 0 - At stop " F6-31" on

frequency for page 215
synchronous
motor speed
tracking

F6-32 0xF620 Angle 0–360 0 - At stop " F6-32" on

compensation for page 215
synchronous
motor speed
tracking

F6-33 0xF621 Proportion of 0.1–10.0 1 - At stop " F6-33" on

synchronous page 216
motor speed
tracking

F6-34 0xF622 Integral of 0.1–10.0 1 - At stop " F6-34" on

synchronous page 216
motor speed
tracking

F6-35 0xF623 Maximum current 80% to 135% 80 % At stop " F6-35" on

limit for DC page 216
braking

F6-36 0xF624 Speed loop -200.0% to +200.0% 0 % In real time " F6-36" on
feedforward page 216

‑32‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F7-01 0xF701 MF.K key function 0: MF.K key disabled 0 - At stop " F7-01" on
selection 1: Switchover between page 217
operating panel control and
remote control (terminal or
communication)
2: Switchover between
forward and reverse run
3: Forward jog
4: Reverse jog

F7-02 0xF702 STOP/RES key 0: STOP/RESET key enabled 0 - In real time " F7-02" on
function only in operating panel page 218
control mode
1: STOP/RESET key enabled in
any operating mode

F7-03 0xF703 LED running BIT00: Running frequency (Hz) 0x1F - In real time " F7-03" on
display parameter BIT01: Frequency reference page 218
1 (Hz)
BIT02: Bus voltage (V)
BIT03: Output voltage (V)
BIT04: Output current (A)
BIT05: Output power (kW)
BIT06: Output torque (%)

Contin Contin Continued BIT07: DI status Contin Contin Continued Continued

ued ued BIT08: DO status ued ued
BIT09: AI1 voltage (V)
BIT10: AI2 voltage (V)
BIT11: AI3 voltage (V)
BIT12: Count value
BIT13: Length value
BIT14: Load speed display
BIT15: PID reference
F7-04 0xF704 LED running BIT00: PID feedback 0 - In real time " F7-04" on
display parameter BIT01: PLC stage page 219
2 BIT02: Pulse input frequency
(kHz)
BIT03: Running frequency 2
(Hz)
BIT04: Remaining running
time
BIT05: AI1 voltage before
correction (V)
BIT06: AI2 voltage before
correction (V)

‑33‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
Contin Contin Continued BIT07: AI3 voltage before Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued correction (V) ued ued
BIT08: Linear speed
BIT09: Current power-on time
(h)
BIT10: Current running time
(min.)
BIT11: Pulse input frequency
(Hz)
BIT12: Communication setting
BIT13: Encoder feedback
speed (Hz)
BIT14: Roll diameter (mm)
BIT15: Tension after taper (N)

F7-05 0xF705 LED stop display BIT00: Frequency reference 0x33 - In real time " F7-05" on
parameter (Hz) page 220
BIT01: Bus voltage (V)
BIT02: DI state
BIT03: DO state
BIT04: AI1 voltage (V)
BIT05: AI2 voltage (V)
BIT06: AI3 voltage (V)

Contin Contin Continued BIT07: Count value Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued BIT08: Length value ued ued
BIT09: PLC stage
BIT10: Load speed display
BIT11: PID reference
BIT12: Pulse input frequency
(kHz)
BIT13: Roll diameter (mm)
BIT14: Tension (N)

F7-06 0xF706 Load speed 0.0000 to 6.5 1 - In real time " F7-06" on
display coefficient page 220

F7-07 0xF707 Heatsink -20℃ to +120℃ 0 °C Unchangea " F7-07" on

temperature of ble page 221
IGBT
F7-08 0xF708 Product SN 0–999 0 - Unchangea " F7-08" on
ble page 221

F7-09 0xF709 Accumulative 0 h to 65535 h 0 h Unchangea " F7-09" on

running time ble page 221

F7-10 0xF70A Performance - 0 - Unchangea " F7-10" on

software version ble page 221

F7-11 0xF70B Function software - 0 - Unchangea " F7-11" on

version ble page 221

‑34‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F7-12 0xF70C Number of 0: 0 decimal place 1 - In real time " F7-12" on
decimal places for 1: 1 decimal place page 222
load speed display 2: 2 decimal places
3: 3 decimal places

F7-13 0xF70D Accumulative 0–65535 h 0 h Unchangea " F7-13" on

power-on time ble page 222

F7-14 0xF70E Accumulative 0 kWh to 65535 kWh 0 kWh Unchangea " F7-14" on
power ble page 222
consumption

F7-15 0xF70F Temporary - 0 - Unchangea " F7-15" on

performance ble page 223
software version
F7-16 0xF710 Temporary - 0 - Unchangea " F7-16" on
function software ble page 223
version
F8-00 0xF800 Jog frequency 0.00 Hz to F0-10 2 Hz In real time " F8-00" on
page 223

F8-01 0xF801 Jog acceleration 0.0s to 6500.0s 20 s In real time " F8-01" on
time page 224

F8-02 0xF802 Jog deceleration 0.0s to 6500.0s 20 s In real time " F8-02" on
time page 224

F8-03 0xF803 Acceleration time 0.0s to 6500.0s 20 s In real time " F8-03" on
2 page 224

F8-04 0xF804 Deceleration time 0.0s to 6500.0s 20 s In real time " F8-04" on
2 page 224

F8-05 0xF805 Acceleration time 0.0s to 6500.0s 20 s In real time " F8-05" on
3 page 225

F8-06 0xF806 Deceleration time 0.0s to 6500.0s 20 s In real time " F8-06" on
3 page 225

F8-07 0xF807 Acceleration time 0.0s to 6500.0s 20 s In real time " F8-07" on
4 page 225

F8-08 0xF808 Deceleration time 0.0s to 6500.0s 20 s In real time " F8-08" on
4 page 225

F8-09 0xF809 Jump frequency 1 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0 Hz In real time " F8-09" on
page 226

F8-10 0xF80A Jump frequency 2 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0 Hz In real time " F8-10" on
page 226

F8-11 0xF80B Jump frequency 0.00 Hz to 5.00 Hz 0 Hz In real time " F8-11" on
amplitude page 226

F8-12 0xF80C Forward/Reverse 0.0s to 3000.0s 0 s In real time " F8-12" on

run switchover page 227
dead zone time
F8-13 0xF80D Reverse run 0: Reverse running allowed 0 - In real time " F8-13" on
1: Reverse running inhibited page 227

‑35‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F8-14 0xF80E Running mode 0: Run at frequency lower limit 0 - In real time " F8-14" on
when frequency 1: Stop according to F6-10 page 227
reference is lower 2: Run at zero speed
than frequency 3: Coast to stop
lower limit
F8-15 0xF80F Mechanical 0.00 Hz to 10.00 Hz 0 Hz In real time " F8-15" on
braking frequency page 228

F8-16 0xF810 Accumulative 0 h to 65000 h 0 h In real time " F8-16" on

power-on time page 228
threshold setting

F8-17 0xF811 Accumulative 0 h to 65000 h 0 h In real time " F8-17" on

running time page 228
threshold setting

F8-18 0xF812 Startup protection 0: Disabled 0 - In real time " F8-18" on

1: Enabled page 229

F8-19 0xF813 Frequency 0.00 Hz to F0-10 50 Hz In real time " F8-19" on

detection value page 229
(FDT1)

F8-20 0xF814 Frequency 0.0% to 100.0% 5 % In real time " F8-20" on

detection page 229
hysteresis (FDT1)

F8-21 0xF815 Detection width 0.0% to 100.0% 0 % In real time " F8-21" on
for frequency page 230
reach
F8-22 0xF816 Jump frequency 0: Invalid 0 - In real time " F8-22" on
state during 1: Valid page 230
acceleration/
deceleration
F8-25 0xF819 Switchover 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0 Hz In real time " F8-25" on
frequency of page 230
acceleration time
1 and acceleration
time 2
F8-26 0xF81A Switchover 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0 Hz In real time " F8-26" on
frequency of page 231
deceleration time
1 and deceleration
time 2
F8-27 0xF81B Jog preferred 0: Invalid 0 - In real time " F8-27" on
1: Valid page 231

F8-28 0xF81C Frequency 0.00 Hz to F0-10 50 Hz In real time " F8-28" on

detection value page 231
(FDT2)

F8-29 0xF81D Frequency 0.0% to 100.0% 5 % In real time " F8-29" on

detection page 232
hysteresis (FDT2)

‑36‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F8-30 0xF81E Detection value 1 0.00 Hz to F0-10 50 Hz In real time " F8-30" on
for frequency page 232
reach
F8-31 0xF81F Detection width 1 0.0% to 100.0% 0 % In real time " F8-31" on
of frequency reach page 232

F8-32 0xF820 Detection value 2 0.00 Hz to F0-10 50 Hz In real time " F8-32" on
for frequency page 233
reach
F8-33 0xF821 Detection width 2 0.0% to 100.0% 0 % In real time " F8-33" on
of frequency reach page 233

F8-34 0xF822 Zero current 0.0% to 300.0% 5 % In real time " F8-34" on
detection level page 233

F8-35 0xF823 Zero current 0.01s to 600.00s 0.1 s In real time " F8-35" on
detection delay page 234

F8-36 0xF824 Output 0.0% to 300.0% 200 % In real time " F8-36" on
overcurrent page 234
threshold
F8-37 0xF825 Software 0.00s to 600.00s 0 s In real time " F8-37" on
overcurrent page 234
detection delay

F8-38 0xF826 Detection level of 0.0% to 300.0% 100 % In real time " F8-38" on
current 1 page 235

F8-39 0xF827 Detection width of 0.0% to 300.0% 0 % In real time " F8-39" on
current 1 page 235

F8-40 0xF828 Detection level of 0.0% to 300.0% 100 % In real time " F8-40" on
current 2 page 235

F8-41 0xF829 Detection width of 0.0% to 300.0% 0 % In real time " F8-41" on
current 2 page 235

F8-42 0xF82A Timing function 0: Invalid 0 - At stop " F8-42" on

1: Valid page 236

F8-43 0xF82B Timing duration 0: Set by F8-44 (Timing 0 - At stop " F8-43" on
source duration) page 236
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
F8-44 0xF82C Timing duration 0.0 min to 6500.0 min 0 min At stop " F8-44" on
page 236

F8-45 0xF82D AI1 input voltage 0.00 V to F8-46 3.1 V In real time " F8-45" on
lower limit page 237

F8-46 0xF82E AI1 input voltage F8-45 to 11.00 V 6.8 V In real time " F8-46" on
upper limit page 237

F8-47 0xF82F IGBT temperature 0℃ to 100℃ 75 °C In real time " F8-47" on

reach page 237

‑37‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F8-48 0xF830 Cooling fan 0: Working during drive 0 - In real time " F8-48" on
working mode running page 238
1: Working continuously

F8-49 0xF831 Wakeup frequency F8-51 to F0-10 0 Hz In real time " F8-49" on
page 238

F8-50 0xF832 Wakeup delay 0.0s to 6500.0s 0 s In real time " F8-50" on
page 238

F8-51 0xF833 Hibernation 0.00 Hz to F8-49 0 Hz In real time " F8-51" on

frequency page 238

F8-52 0xF834 Hibernation delay 0.0s to 6500.0s 0 s In real time " F8-52" on
page 239

F8-53 0xF835 Current running 0.0 min to 6500.0 min 0 min In real time " F8-53" on
time threshold page 239

F8-55 0xF837 Emergency stop 0.0s to 6500.0s 0 s In real time " F8-55" on
deceleration time page 239

F8-57 0xF839 Accumulative 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " F8-57" on

power 1: Enabled page 240
consumption
cleared
F8-58 0xF83A Output power 0.0% to 200.0% 100 % At stop " F8-58" on
correction page 240
coefficient
F9-00 0xF900 AC drive overload 0: Disabled 0 - In real time " F9-00" on
protection 1: Enabled page 240

F9-01 0xF901 Motor overload 0.2 to 10.00 1 - In real time " F9-01" on
protection gain page 241

F9-02 0xF902 Motor overload 50% to 100% 80 % In real time " F9-02" on
pre-warning page 241
coefficient
F9-04 0xF904 Overvoltage 350.0–820.0 V 820 V In real time " F9-04" on
threshold page 242

F9-06 0xF906 Output phase loss 0: Invalid 0 - In real time " F9-06" on
detection before 1: Valid page 242
startup

F9-07 0xF907 Detection of short 0: No detection 1 - At stop " F9-07" on

circuit to ground 1: Detection before power-on page 242
2: Detection before running
3: Detection before power-on
and running

F9-08 0xF908 Braking unit action 200.0 V to 2000.0 V 760 V In real time " F9-08" on
start voltage page 242

F9-09 0xF909 Fault auto reset 0 to 20 0 - In real time " F9-09" on

times page 243

F9-10 0xF90A DO action during 0: Disabled 0 - In real time " F9-10" on

auto fault reset 1: Enabled page 243

‑38‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F9-11 0xF90B Automatic fault 0.1s to 100.0s 1 s In real time " F9-11" on
reset interval page 244

F9-12 0xF90C Input phase loss/ Ones (position): Input phase 11 - In real time " F9-12" on
Contactor pickup loss protection selection page 244
protection 0: Input phase loss detection
inhibited
1: Input phase loss detected
by software and hardware
2: Input phase loss detected
by software
3: Input phase loss detected
by hardware
Tens (position): Contactor
pickup/Fan fault protection
0: Inhibited
1: Enabled
F9-13 0xF90D Restart interval 0.0s to 600.0s 10 s In real time " F9-13" on
upon fault reset page 245

F9-14 0xF90E 1st fault type 0 to 99 0 - Unchangea " F9-14" on

ble page 245

F9-15 0xF90F 2nd fault type 0 to 99 0 - Unchangea " F9-15" on

ble page 245

F9-16 0xF910 3rd (latest) fault 0 to 99 0 - Unchangea " F9-16" on

type ble page 245

F9-17 0xF911 Frequency upon 0 Hz to 65535 Hz 0 Hz Unchangea " F9-17" on

3rd (latest) fault ble page 246

F9-18 0xF912 Current upon 3rd 0.0–6553.5 A 0 A Unchangea " F9-18" on

(latest) fault ble page 246

F9-19 0xF913 Bus voltage upon 0.0 V to 6553.5 V 0 V Unchangea " F9-19" on
3rd (latest) fault ble page 246

F9-20 0xF914 Input terminal 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-20" on

state upon 3rd ble page 246
(latest) fault

F9-21 0xF915 Output terminal 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-21" on

state upon 3rd ble page 247
(latest) fault

F9-22 0xF916 AC drive state 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-22" on

upon 3rd (latest) ble page 247
fault
F9-23 0xF917 Power-on time 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-23" on
upon 3rd (latest) ble page 247
fault
F9-24 0xF918 Running time 0.0–6553.5 0 - Unchangea " F9-24" on
upon 3rd (latest) ble page 247
fault

‑39‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F9-25 0xF919 IGBT temperature -20℃ to +120℃ 0 °C Unchangea " F9-25" on
upon 3rd fault ble page 248
(latest)

F9-26 0xF91A Fault subcode 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-26" on

upon 3rd (latest) ble page 248
fault
F9-27 0xF91B Frequency upon 0 Hz to 65535 Hz 0 Hz Unchangea " F9-27" on
2nd fault ble page 248

F9-28 0xF91C Current upon 2nd 0.0–6553.5 A 0 A Unchangea " F9-28" on

fault ble page 248

F9-29 0xF91D Bus voltage upon 0.0 V to 6553.5V 0 V Unchangea " F9-29" on
2nd fault ble page 249

F9-30 0xF91E Input terminal 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-30" on

state upon 2nd ble page 249
fault
F9-31 0xF91F Output terminal 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-31" on
state upon 2nd ble page 249
fault
F9-32 0xF920 AC drive state 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-32" on
upon 2nd fault ble page 249

F9-33 0xF921 Power-on time 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-33" on

upon 2nd fault ble page 250

F9-34 0xF922 Running time 0.0–6553.5 0 - Unchangea " F9-34" on

upon 2nd fault ble page 250

F9-35 0xF923 IGBT temperature -20℃ to +120℃ 0 °C Unchangea " F9-35" on

upon 2nd fault ble page 250

F9-36 0xF924 Fault subcode 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-36" on

upon 2nd fault ble page 250

F9-37 0xF925 Frequency upon 0 Hz to 65535 Hz 0 Hz Unchangea " F9-37" on

1st fault ble page 251

F9-38 0xF926 Current upon 1st 0.0–6553.5 A 0 A Unchangea " F9-38" on

fault ble page 251

F9-39 0xF927 Bus voltage upon 0.0 V to 6553.5V 0 V Unchangea " F9-39" on
1st fault ble page 251

F9-40 0xF928 Input terminal 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-40" on

state upon 1st ble page 251
fault
F9-41 0xF929 Output terminal 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-41" on
state upon 1st ble page 252
fault
F9-42 0xF92A AC drive state 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-42" on
upon 1st fault ble page 252

F9-43 0xF92B Power-on time 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-43" on

upon 1st fault ble page 252

‑40‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F9-44 0xF92C Running time 0.0 to 6553.5 0 - Unchangea " F9-44" on
upon 1st fault ble page 252

F9-45 0xF92D IGBT temperature -20℃ to +120℃ 0 °C Unchangea " F9-45" on

upon 1st fault ble page 253

F9-46 0xF92E Fault subcode 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " F9-46" on

upon 1st fault ble page 253

F9-47 0xF92F Fault protection Ones (position): Value of E02, 0 - At stop " F9-47" on
action selection 0 E03, and E04 page 253
0: Coast to stop
2: Restart upon fault
Tens (position): Value of E05,
E06, and E07
0: Coast to stop
2: Restart upon fault

Contin Contin Continued Hundreds (position): Value of Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued E08 ued ued
0: Coast to stop
Thousands (position): Value of
E09
0: Coast to stop
2: Restart upon fault
Ten thousands (position):
Value of E10
0: Coast to stop
2: Restart upon fault

F9-48 0xF930 Fault protection Ones (position): Value of E11 0 - At stop " F9-48" on
action selection 1 0: Coast to stop page 254
1: Decelerate to stop
2: Restart upon fault
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Tens (position): Value of E12
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
2: Restart upon fault
4: Warning
5: Canceled

‑41‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
Contin Contin Continued Hundreds (position): Value of Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued E13 ued ued
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
2: Restart upon fault
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Thousands (position): Value of
E14
0: Coast to stop
Ten thousands (position):
Value of E15
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled
F9-49 0xF931 Fault protection Ones (position): Value of E16 0 - At stop " F9-49" on
action selection 2 0: Coast to stop page 256
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Tens (position): Value of E17
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Contin Contin Continued Hundreds (position): Value of Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued E18 ued ued
0: Coast to stop
Thousands (position): Value of
E19
0: Coast to stop
3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Ten thousands (position):
Value of E20
0: Coast to stop
3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled

‑42‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F9-50 0xF932 Fault protection Ones (position): Reserved 5040 - At stop " F9-50" on
action selection 3 0: Coast to stop page 257
Tens (position): Value of E63
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Hundreds (position): Value of
E23
0: Coast to stop
5: Canceled
Contin Contin Continued Thousands (position): Value of Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued E24 ued ued
0: Coast to stop
5: Canceled
Ten thousands (position):
Value of E25
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
F9-51 0xF933 Fault protection Ones (position): Value of E26 51111 - At stop " F9-51" on
action selection 4 0: Coast to stop page 257
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Tens position: Value of E27
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled

‑43‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
Contin Contin Continued Hundreds (position): Value of Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued E28 ued ued
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Thousands (position): Value of
E29
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Ten thousands (position):
Value of E30
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
F9-52 0xF934 Fault protection Ones (position): Value of E31 101 - At stop " F9-52" on
action selection 5 0: Coast to stop page 259
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Tens (position): Value of E40
0: Coast to stop
2: Restart upon fault
Hundreds (position): Value of
E41
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Contin Contin Continued Thousands (position): Value of Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued E42 ued ued
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
2: Restart upon fault
3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Ten thousands (position):
Value of E43
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled

‑44‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F9-53 0xF935 Fault protection Ones (position): Value of E45 0 - At stop " F9-53" on
action selection 6 0: Coast to stop page 260
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Tens (position): Value of E60
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Contin Contin Continued Hundreds (position): Value of Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued E61 ued ued
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Thousands (position): Value of
E62
0: Coast to stop
5: Canceled
Ten thousands (position):
Reserved
5: Canceled
F9-54 0xF936 Frequency 0: Current running frequency 1 - In real time " F9-54" on
selection for 1: Frequency reference page 261
continuing to run 2: Frequency upper limit
upon fault 3: Frequency lower limit
4: Backup frequency upon
abnormality

F9-55 0xF937 Backup frequency 0.0% to 100.0% 100 % In real time " F9-55" on
reference upon page 261
abnormality

F9-56 0xF938 Motor temperature 0: No sensor (AI3 input) 0 - In real time " F9-56" on
sensor type 1: PT100 page 262
2: PT1000
3: KTY84
4: PTC130
F9-57 0xF939 Motor 0℃ to 200℃ 110 °C In real time " F9-57" on
overtemperature page 262
protection
threshold
F9-58 0xF93A Motor 0℃ to 200℃ 90 °C In real time " F9-58" on
overtemperature page 262
pre-warning
threshold

‑45‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
F9-59 0xF93B Selection of power 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " F9-59" on
dip ride-through 1: Busbar voltage constant page 263
action control
2: Decelerate to stop
3: Voltage dip depression

F9-60 0xF93C Voltage to 80% to 100% 85 % In real time " F9-60" on

determine the page 263
pause of power
dip ride-through

F9-61 0xF93D Duration for 0.0–100.0s 0.5 s In real time " F9-61" on
judging voltage page 264
recovery from
power dip ride-
through

F9-62 0xF93E Threshold for 60% to 100% 80 % In real time " F9-62" on
enabling power page 264
dip ride-through

F9-63 0xF93F Runaway 0 to 10000 0 - At stop " F9-63" on

protection time in page 264
FVC mode
F9-64 0xF940 Load loss 0.0% to 100.0% 10 % In real time " F9-64" on
detection level page 265

F9-65 0xF941 Load loss 0.0s–60.0s 1 s In real time " F9-65" on

detection time page 265

F9-66 0xF942 Voltage dip 0.0s to 600.0s 0 s Unchangea " F9-66" on

suppression time ble page 265

F9-67 0xF943 Overspeed 0.0% to 50.0% 5 % In real time " F9-67" on

threshold page 266

F9-68 0xF944 Overspeed 0.0–60.0 1 - In real time " F9-68" on

detection time page 266

F9-69 0xF945 Excessive speed 0.0% to 50.0% 20 % In real time " F9-69" on
deviation page 266
threshold
F9-70 0xF946 Detection time of 0.0s to 60.0s 5 s In real time " F9-70" on
excessive speed page 267
deviation
F9-71 0xF947 Power dip ride- 0 to 100 40 - In real time " F9-71" on
through gain page 267

F9-72 0xF948 Power dip ride- 0 to 100 30 - In real time " F9-72" on
through integral page 267

F9-73 0xF949 Deceleration time 0.0s to 300.0s 20 s In real time " F9-73" on
of power dip ride- page 268
through

‑46‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
FA-00 0xFA00 PID reference 0: PID digital setting (FA-01) 0 - In real time " FA-00" on
source 1: AI1 page 268
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Communication setting
(1000H)
6: Multi-reference
FA-01 0xFA01 PID digital 0.0% to 100.0% 50 % In real time " FA-01" on
reference page 269

FA-02 0xFA02 PID feedback 0: AI1 0 - In real time " FA-02" on

source 1: AI2 page 269
2: AI3
3: AI1–AI2
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Communication
6:AI1 + AI2
7: Max. (|AI1|, |AI2|)
8: Min. (|AI1|, |AI2|)

FA-03 0xFA03 PID action 0: Forward 0 - In real time " FA-03" on

direction 1: Reverse page 270

FA-04 0xFA04 PID reference and 0 to 65535 1000 - In real time " FA-04" on
feedback range page 270

FA-05 0xFA05 Proportional gain 0.0 to 1000.0 20 - In real time " FA-05" on
Kp1 page 270

FA-06 0xFA06 Integral time Ti1 0.01s to 100.00s 2 s In real time " FA-06" on
page 271

FA-07 0xFA07 Derivative time 0.000s to 10.000s 0 s In real time " FA-07" on
Td1 page 271

FA-08 0xFA08 PID cut-off 0.00 Hz to F0-10 2 Hz In real time " FA-08" on
frequency in page 271
reverse run
FA-09 0xFA09 PID deviation limit 0.0% to 100.0% 0 % In real time " FA-09" on
page 272

FA-10 0xFA0A PID derivative limit 0.00% to 100.00% 0.1 % In real time " FA-10" on
page 272

FA-11 0xFA0B PID reference 0.00s to 650.00s 0 s In real time " FA-11" on
change time page 272

FA-12 0xFA0C PID feedback filter 0.00s to 60.00s 0 s In real time " FA-12" on
time page 273

FA-13 0xFA0D PID deviation gain 0.0% to 100.0% 100 % In real time " FA-13" on
page 273

FA-14 0xFA0E PID optimization 0–100 0 - In real time " FA-14" on

page 273

‑47‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
FA-15 0xFA0F Proportional gain 0.0 to 1000.0 20 - In real time " FA-15" on
Kp2 page 273

FA-16 0xFA10 Integral time Ti2 0.01s to 100.00s 2 s In real time " FA-16" on
page 274

FA-17 0xFA11 Derivative time 0.000s to 10.000s 0 s In real time " FA-17" on
Td2 page 274

FA-18 0xFA12 PID parameter 0: No switchover 0 - In real time " FA-18" on

switchover 1: Switchover by DI page 274
condition 2: Automatic switchover
based on deviation
3: Switchover based on
running frequency
6: Automatic adjustment
based on roll diameter
7: Automatic adjustment
based on maximum roll
diameter percentage

FA-19 0xFA13 PID parameter 0.0% to FA-20 20 % In real time " FA-19" on
switchover page 275
deviation 1
FA-20 0xFA14 PID parameter FA-19 to 100.0% 80 % In real time " FA-20" on
switchover page 276
deviation 2
FA-21 0xFA15 PID initial value 0.0% to 100.0% 0 % In real time " FA-21" on
page 276

FA-22 0xFA16 PID initial value 0.00s to 650.00s 0 s In real time " FA-22" on
holding time page 276

FA-23 0xFA17 Maximum 0.00% to 100.00% 1 % In real time " FA-23" on

deviation between page 277
two outputs in
forward direction
FA-24 0xFA18 Maximum 0.00% to 100.00% 1 % In real time " FA-24" on
deviation between page 277
two PID outputs in
reverse direction
FA-25 0xFA19 PID integral 0: Invalid 0 - In real time " FA-25" on
property 1: Valid page 277

FA-26 0xFA1A Detection level of 0.0% to 100.0% 0 % In real time " FA-26" on
PID feedback loss page 277

FA-27 0xFA1B Detection time of 0.0s to 20.0s 0 s In real time " FA-27" on
PID feedback loss page 278

FB-00 0xFB00 Wobble setting 0: Relative to central 0 - In real time " FB-00" on
mode frequency page 278
1: Relative to maximum
frequency

‑48‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
FB-01 0xFB01 Wobble amplitude 0.0% to 100.0% 0 % In real time " FB-01" on
page 278

FB-02 0xFB02 Jump frequency 0.0% to 50.0% 0 % In real time " FB-02" on
amplitude page 279

FB-03 0xFB03 Wobble cycle 0.1s to 3000.0s 10 s In real time " FB-03" on
page 279

FB-04 0xFB04 Triangular wave 0.1% to 100.0% 50 % In real time " FB-04" on
rising time of page 279
wobble
FB-05 0xFB05 Reference length 0 m to 65535 m 1000 m In real time " FB-05" on
page 280

FB-06 0xFB06 Actual length 0 m to 65535 m 0 m In real time " FB-06" on

page 280

FB-07 0xFB07 Number of pulses 0.1 to 6553.5 100 - In real time " FB-07" on
per meter page 280

FB-08 0xFB08 Reference count 1 to 65535 1000 - In real time " FB-08" on
value page 280

FB-09 0xFB09 Designated count 1 to 65535 1000 - In real time " FB-09" on
value page 281

FB-10 0xFB0A Revolution count 0: Rising edge triggered 0 - In real time " FB-10" on
reset mode 1: Level triggered page 281

FB-11 0xFB0B Revolution count 0: Disable 0 - In real time " FB-11" on

reset signal 1: Enable page 281

FB-12 0xFB0C Revolution count 0: No 0 - In real time " FB-12" on

retentive at power 1: Yes page 282
failure
FB-13 0xFB0D Revolution count 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FB-13" on
clear page 282

FB-14 0xFB0E Transmission ratio 1 to 65535 1 - In real time " FB-14" on

numerator page 282

FB-15 0xFB0F Transmission ratio 1 to 65535 1 - In real time " FB-15" on

denominator page 282

FB-16 0xFB10 Actual running 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " FB-16" on

revolutions ble page 283

FB-17 0xFB11 Running 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " FB-17" on

revolutions ble page 283

FB-18 0xFB12 Running 0: 1 revolution 0 - In real time " FB-18" on

revolution 1: 0.1 revolution page 283
accuracy

FB-19 0xFB13 Revolution count 0: Forward 0 - In real time " FB-19" on

direction 1: Reverse page 283

FC-00 0xFC00 Multi-reference 0 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-00" on

page 284

‑49‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
FC-01 0xFC01 Multi-reference 1 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-01" on
page 284

FC-02 0xFC02 Multi-reference 2 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-02" on

page 285

FC-03 0xFC03 Multi-reference 3 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-03" on

page 285

FC-04 0xFC04 Multi-reference 4 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-04" on

page 285

FC-05 0xFC05 Multi-reference 5 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-05" on

page 285

FC-06 0xFC06 Multi-reference 6 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-06" on

page 285

FC-07 0xFC07 Multi-reference 7 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-07" on

page 286

FC-08 0xFC08 Multi-reference 8 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-08" on

page 286

FC-09 0xFC09 Multi-reference 9 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-09" on

page 286

FC-10 0xFC0A Multi-reference 10 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-10" on

page 286

FC-11 0xFC0B Multi-reference 11 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-11" on

page 287

FC-12 0xFC0C Multi-reference 12 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-12" on

page 287

FC-13 0xFC0D Multi-reference 13 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-13" on

page 287

FC-14 0xFC0E Multi-reference 14 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-14" on

page 287

FC-15 0xFC0F Multi-reference 15 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " FC-15" on

page 288

FC-16 0xFC10 Simple PLC 0: Stop after running for one 0 - In real time " FC-16" on
running mode cycle page 288
1: Keep final values after
running for one cycle
2: Repeat after running for one
cycle

FC-17 0xFC11 Simple PLC Ones (position): Retentive 0 - In real time " FC-17" on
retention selection upon power failure page 288
upon power failure 0: No
1: Yes
Tens (position): Retentive
upon stop
0: No
1: Yes

‑50‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
FC-18 0xFC12 Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-18" on
PLC reference 0 page 289

FC-19 0xFC13 Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-19" on

Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 289
of PLC reference 0 F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-20 0xFC14 Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-20" on
PLC reference 1 page 290

FC-21 0xFC15 Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-21" on

Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 290
of PLC reference 1 F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-22 0xFC16 Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-22" on
PLC reference 2 page 291

FC-23 0xFC17 Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-23" on

Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 291
of PLC reference 2 F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-24 0xFC18 Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-24" on
PLC reference 3 page 291

‑51‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
FC-25 0xFC19 Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-25" on
Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 292
of PLC reference 3 F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-26 0xFC1A Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-26" on
PLC reference 4 page 292

FC-27 0xFC1B Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-27" on

Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 292
of PLC reference 4 F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-28 0xFC1C Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-28" on
PLC reference 5 page 293

FC-29 0xFC1D Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-29" on

Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 293
of PLC reference 5 F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-30 0xFC1E Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-30" on
PLC reference 6 page 293

‑52‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
FC-31 0xFC1F Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-31" on
Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 294
of PLC reference 6 F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-32 0xFC20 Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-32" on
PLC reference 7 page 294

FC-33 0xFC21 Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-33" on

Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 294
of PLC reference 7 F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-34 0xFC22 Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-34" on
PLC reference 8 page 295

FC-35 0xFC23 Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-35" on

Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 295
of PLC reference 8 F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-36 0xFC24 Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-36" on
PLC reference 9 page 296

‑53‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
FC-37 0xFC25 Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-37" on
Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 296
of PLC reference 9 F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-38 0xFC26 Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-38" on
PLC reference 10 page 296

FC-39 0xFC27 Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-39" on

Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 297
of PLC reference F0-18)
10 1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-40 0xFC28 Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-40" on
PLC reference 11 page 297

FC-41 0xFC29 Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-41" on

Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 297
of PLC reference F0-18)
11 1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-42 0xFC2A Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-42" on
PLC reference 12 page 298

‑54‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
FC-43 0xFC2B Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-43" on
Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 298
of PLC reference F0-18)
12 1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-44 0xFC2C Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-44" on
PLC reference 13 page 298

FC-45 0xFC2D Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-45" on

Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 299
of PLC reference F0-18)
13 1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-46 0xFC2E Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-46" on
PLC reference 14 page 299

FC-47 0xFC2F Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-47" on

Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 299
of PLC reference F0-18)
14 1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-48 0xFC30 Running time of 0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h) 0 s (h) In real time " FC-48" on
PLC reference 15 page 300

‑55‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
FC-49 0xFC31 Acceleration/ 0: Group 1 acceleration/ 0 - In real time " FC-49" on
Deceleration time deceleration time (F0-17 and page 300
of PLC reference F0-18)
15 1: Group 2 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-03 and
F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-05 and
F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/
deceleration time (F8-07 and
F8-08)

FC-50 0xFC32 PLC running time 0: s (second) 0 - In real time " FC-50" on
unit 1: h (hour) page 301

FC-51 0xFC33 Multi-reference 0 0: Multi-reference 0 (FC-00) 0 - In real time " FC-51" on

source 1: AI1 page 301
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: PID
6: Preset frequency (F0-08 that
can be changed by pressing
UP or DOWN key)

FD-00 0xFD00 Baud rate 0: 300 bit/s 5 - In real time " FD-00" on
1: 600 bit/s page 302
2: 1200 bit/s
3: 2400 bit/s
4: 4800 bit/s
5: 9600 bit/s
6: 19200 bit/s
7: 38400 bit/s
8: 57600 bit/s
9: 115200 bit/s
FD-01 0xFD01 Modbus data 0: No check (8-N-2) 1: Even 0 - In real time " FD-01" on
format parity check (8-E-1) page 302
2: Odd parity check (8-O-1)
3: No check (8-N-1)

FD-02 0xFD02 Local address 1 to 247 1 - In real time " FD-02" on

page 302

FD-03 0xFD03 Response delay 0–20 ms 2 ms In real time " FD-03" on

page 303

FD-04 0xFD04 Modbus 0.0s to 60.0s 0 s In real time " FD-04" on

communication page 303
timeout time
FD-06 0xFD06 Communication 0: Disabled 1 - At stop " FD-06" on
fault reset 1: Enabled page 304

‑56‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
FD-09 0xFD09 CANopen/CANlink Ones: CANopen 2 - Unchangea " FD-09" on
communication 0: Stop ble page 304
state 1: Initialized
2: Pre-running
8: Running
Tens: CANlink
0: Stop
1: Initialized
2: Pre-running
8: Running
Hundreds position: Reserved

FD-10 0xFD0A CANopen/CANlink 1: CANopen 1 - At stop " FD-10" on

switchover 2: CANlink page 304

FD-12 0xFD0C CAN baud rate 0: 20 kbit/s 5 - At stop " FD-12" on

1: 50 kbit/s page 305
2: 100 kbit/s
3: 125 kbit/s
4: 250 kbit/s
5: 500 kbit/s
6: 1 Mbit/s
FD-13 0xFD0D CAN station No. 1 to 127 1 - At stop " FD-13" on
page 305

FD-14 0xFD0E Number of CAN 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " FD-14" on

frames received ble page 305
per unit time

FD-15 0xFD0F Maximum value of 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " FD-15" on

node receiving ble page 306
error counter
FD-16 0xFD10 Maximum value of 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " FD-16" on
node sending error ble page 306
counter
FD-17 0xFD11 Bus-off count per 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " FD-17" on
unit time ble page 306

FD-19 0xFD13 CAN 1 to 15 3 - At stop " FD-19" on

communication page 307
dropping
coefficient
FD-37 0xFD25 DHCP function 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " FD-37" on
1: Enabled page 307

FD-38 0xFD26 IP address highest 0 to 255 0 - At stop " FD-38" on

byte page 307

FD-39 0xFD27 IP address second 0 to 255 0 - At stop " FD-39" on

highest byte page 307

FD-40 0xFD28 IP address third 0 to 255 0 - At stop " FD-40" on

highest byte page 308

‑57‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
FD-41 0xFD29 IP address lowest 0 to 255 0 - At stop " FD-41" on
byte page 308

FD-42 0xFD2A Subnet mask 0 to 255 0 - At stop " FD-42" on

highest byte page 308

FD-43 0xFD2B Subnet mask 0 to 255 0 - At stop " FD-43" on

second highest page 308
byte

FD-44 0xFD2C Subnet mask third 0 to 255 0 - At stop " FD-44" on

byte page 308

FD-45 0xFD2D Subnet mask 0 to 255 0 - At stop " FD-45" on

lowest byte page 309

FD-46 0xFD2E Gateway highest 0 to 255 0 - At stop " FD-46" on

byte page 309

FD-47 0xFD2F Gateway second 0 to 255 0 - At stop " FD-47" on

highest byte page 309

FD-48 0xFD30 Gateway third byte 0 to 255 0 - At stop " FD-48" on

page 309

FD-49 0xFD31 Gateway lowest 0 to 255 0 - At stop " FD-49" on

byte page 310

FD-58 0xFD3A Internet IP 0 to 255 0 - Unchangea " FD-58" on

expansion card ble page 310
error code
FD-61 0xFD3D MAC address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - At stop " FD-61" on
highest byte page 310

FD-62 0xFD3E MAC address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - At stop " FD-62" on

middle byte page 310

FD-63 0xFD3F MAC address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - At stop " FD-63" on

lowest byte page 311

FD-94 0xFD5E Modbus software 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " FD-94" on

version ble page 311

FD-95 0xFD5F CANlink software 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " FD-95" on

version ble page 311

FD-96 0xFD60 CANopen software 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " FD-96" on

version ble page 311

FE-00 0xFE00 User-defined 0 to 65535 7017 - In real time " FE-00" on

parameter 0 page 312

FE-01 0xFE01 User-defined 0 to 65535 7016 - In real time " FE-01" on

parameter 1 page 312

FE-02 0xFE02 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-02" on

parameter 2 page 312

FE-03 0xFE03 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-03" on

parameter 3 page 312

FE-04 0xFE04 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-04" on

parameter 4 page 313

‑58‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
FE-05 0xFE05 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-05" on
parameter 5 page 313

FE-06 0xFE06 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-06" on

parameter 6 page 313

FE-07 0xFE07 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-07" on

parameter 7 page 313

FE-08 0xFE08 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-08" on

parameter 8 page 314

FE-09 0xFE09 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-09" on

parameter 9 page 314

FE-10 0xFE0A User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-10" on

parameter 10 page 314

FE-11 0xFE0B User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-11" on

parameter 11 page 314

FE-12 0xFE0C User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-12" on

parameter 12 page 315

FE-13 0xFE0D User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-13" on

parameter 13 page 315

FE-14 0xFE0E User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-14" on

parameter 14 page 315

FE-15 0xFE0F User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-15" on

parameter 15 page 315

FE-16 0xFE10 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-16" on

parameter 16 page 316

FE-17 0xFE11 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-17" on

parameter 17 page 316

FE-18 0xFE12 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-18" on

parameter 18 page 316

FE-19 0xFE13 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-19" on

parameter 19 page 316

FE-20 0xFE14 User-defined 0 to 65535 6768 - In real time " FE-20" on

parameter 20 page 317

FE-21 0xFE15 User-defined 0 to 65535 6769 - In real time " FE-21" on

parameter 21 page 317

FE-22 0xFE16 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-22" on

parameter 22 page 317

FE-23 0xFE17 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-23" on

parameter 23 page 317

FE-24 0xFE18 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-24" on

parameter 24 page 318

FE-25 0xFE19 User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-25" on

parameter 25 page 318

FE-26 0xFE1A User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-26" on

parameter 26 page 318

‑59‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
FE-27 0xFE1B User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-27" on
parameter 27 page 318

FE-28 0xFE1C User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-28" on

parameter 28 page 319

FE-29 0xFE1D User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-29" on

parameter 29 page 319

FE-30 0xFE1E User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-30" on

parameter 30 page 319

FE-31 0xFE1F User-defined 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FE-31" on

parameter 31 page 319

FP-00 0x1F00 User password 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " FP-00" on

page 320

FP-01 0x1F01 Parameter 0: No action 1 - At stop " FP-01" on

initialization 1:Restore default settings page 320
(mode 1)
2: Clear records
4: Back up current user
parameters
501: Restore user backup
parameters
503:Restore default settings
(mode 2)

FP-02 0x1F02 Parameter group Ones position: Group U 111 - In real time " FP-02" on
display 0: Hide page 321
1: Display
Tens position: Group A
0: Hide
1: Display
Hundreds position: Group B
0: Hide
1: Display
Thousands position: Reserved

FP-03 0x1F03 Individualized Ones (position): Display of 11 - In real time " FP-03" on
parameter display user-defined parameter page 321
mode groups
0: Hide
1: Display
Tens (position): Display of
user-modified parameter
groups
0: Hide
1: Display

FP-04 0x1F04 Parameter 0: Modification allowed 0 - In real time " FP-04" on

modification 1: Modification prohibited page 322

A0-00 0xA000 Speed/Torque 0: Speed control 0 - At stop " A0-00" on

control mode 1: Torque control page 322

‑60‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
A0-01 0xA001 Torque reference 0: Digital setting (A0-03) 0 - At stop " A0-01" on
source 1: AI1 page 322
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Communication setting
(1000H)
6: Min. (AI1, AI2)
7: Max. (AI1, AI2)

A0-03 0xA003 Torque digital -200.0% to +200.0% 100 % In real time " A0-03" on
setting page 323

A0-04 0xA004 Torque filter time 0.000s to 5.000s 0 s In real time " A0-04" on
page 323

A0-05 0xA005 Speed limit digital -120.0% to +120.0% 0 % In real time " A0-05" on
setting page 323

A0-06 0xA006 Frequency 0.0–50.0 0 - In real time " A0-06" on

modulation page 324
coefficient in
window mode
A0-07 0xA007 Torque 0.00s to 650.00s 1 s In real time " A0-07" on
acceleration time page 324

A0-08 0xA008 Torque 0.00s to 650.00s 1 s In real time " A0-08" on

deceleration time page 324

A0-09 0xA009 Speed limit 0: Set by A0-05 0 - In real time " A0-09" on
reference source 1: Frequency source page 324

A0-10 0xA00A Speed limit offset/ 0.00 Hz to F0-10 5 Hz In real time " A0-10" on
Windows page 325
frequency

A0-11 0xA00B Effective mode of 0: Bidirectional offset valid 1 - At stop " A0-11" on
speed limit offset 1: Unidirectional offset valid page 325
2: Windows mode
A0-12 0xA00C Frequency 0.0s to 6500.0s 1 s In real time " A0-12" on
acceleration time page 325

A0-13 0xA00D Frequency 0.0s to 6500.0s 1 s In real time " A0-13" on

deceleration time page 325

A0-14 0xA00E Torque mode 0: No switchover 1 - At stop " A0-14" on

switchover 1: Switched to speed control page 326
at stop
2: Target torque at stop being
0
A1-00 0xA100 VDO1 function Same as F4-00 0 - At stop " A1-00" on
selection page 326

A1-01 0xA101 VDI2 function Same as F4-00 0 - At stop " A1-01" on

page 334

A1-02 0xA102 VDI3 function Same as F4-00 0 - At stop " A1-02" on

page 336

‑61‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
A1-03 0xA103 VDI4 function Same as F4-00 0 - At stop " A1-03" on
page 338

A1-04 0xA104 VDI5 function Same as F4-00 0 - At stop " A1-04" on

page 340

A1-05 0xA105 VDI active state Ones: VDI1 0 - At stop " A1-05" on
source 0: Set by A1-06 page 342
1: DO state
2: DI state
Tens: VDI2
0: Set by A1-06
1: DO state
2: DI state
Contin Contin Continued Hundreds: VDI3 Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued 0: Set by A1-06 ued ued
1: DO state
2: DI state
Thousands: VDI4
0: Set by A1-06
1: DO state
2: DI state
Ten thousands: VDI5
0: Set by A1-06
1: DO state
2: DI state
A1-06 0xA106 VDI state selection Ones: VDI1 0 - In real time " A1-06" on
0: Invalid page 343
1: Valid
Tens: VDI2
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Hundreds: VDI3
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Thousands: VDI4
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Ten thousands: VDI5
0: Invalid
1: Valid
A1-07 0xA107 AI1 function Same as F4-00 0 - At stop " A1-07" on
selection (used as page 344
DI)

A1-08 0xA108 AI2 function (used Same as F4-00 0 - At stop " A1-08" on
as DI) page 346

A1-09 0xA109 AI3 function Same as F4-00 0 - At stop " A1-09" on

selection (used as page 348
DI)

‑62‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
A1-10 0xA10A Active state Ones: AI1 0 - At stop " A1-10" on
selection for AI 0: Active high page 350
used as DI 1: Active low
Tens: AI2
0: Active high
1: Active low
Hundreds: AI3
0: Active high
1: Active low
A5-00 0xA500 DPWM switchover 0.00 Hz to F0-10 12 Hz In real time " A5-00" on
frequency upper page 351
limit
A5-01 0xA501 PWM modulation 0: Asynchronous modulation 0 - In real time " A5-01" on
mode 1: Synchronous modulation page 351
Synchronous modulation
mode 2
Synchronous modulation
mode 3
A5-02 0xA502 Dead-zone 0: Disabled 2 - At stop " A5-02" on
compensation 1: Enabled page 352
mode selection
A5-03 0xA503 Random PWM 0 to 10 0 - In real time " A5-03" on
depth page 352

A5-04 0xA504 Fast current limit 0: Disabled 0 - In real time " A5-04" on
1: Enabled page 353

A5-05 0xA505 Sampling delay 1 to 13 5 - In real time " A5-05" on

page 353

A5-06 0xA506 Undervoltage 150.0 V to 700.0 V 350 V In real time " A5-06" on
threshold page 353

A5-07 0xA507 SVC optimization 0: No optimization 1 - At stop " A5-07" on

selection 1: Optimization mode 1 page 353
2: Optimization mode 2

A5-13 0xA50D Bus voltage in 100–20000 5310 - Unchangea " A5-13" on

function part ble page 354

A5-14 0xA50E Temperature 0 to 1 0 - At stop " A5-14" on

correction page 354

A5-16 0xA510 Display parameter 0–100 0 - Unchangea " A5-16" on

address 1 ble page 354

A5-17 0xA511 Display parameter 0–100 1 - Unchangea " A5-17" on

address 2 ble page 354

A5-18 0xA512 Display parameter 0–100 2 - Unchangea " A5-18" on

address 3 ble page 355

A5-19 0xA513 Display parameter 0–100 3 - Unchangea " A5-19" on

address 4 ble page 355

A5-21 0xA515 Low speed carrier 0.0–16.0 0 - In real time " A5-21" on
frequency page 355

‑63‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
A5-22 0xA516 Dead-zone 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " A5-22" on
compensation 1: Enabled page 355
auto-tuning

A6-00 0xA600 Curve 4 minimum –10.00 V to A6-02 0 V In real time " A6-00" on
input page 356

A6-01 0xA601 Percentage -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " A6-01" on

corresponding to page 356
curve 4 minimum
input

A6-02 0xA602 Curve 4 inflexion A6-00 to A6-04 3 V In real time " A6-02" on
point 1 input page 356

A6-03 0xA603 Percentage -100.0% to +100.0% 30 % In real time " A6-03" on

corresponding to page 357
curve 4 inflexion
point 1 input

A6-04 0xA604 Curve 4 inflexion A6-02 to A6-06 6 V In real time " A6-04" on
point 2 input page 357

A6-05 0xA605 Percentage -100.0% to +100.0% 60 % In real time " A6-05" on

corresponding to page 357
curve 4 inflexion
point 2 input

A6-06 0xA606 Curve 4 maximum A6-04 to 10.00 V 10 V In real time " A6-06" on
input page 357

A6-07 0xA607 Percentage -100.0% to +100.0% 100 % In real time " A6-07" on
corresponding to page 358
curve 4 maximum
input

A6-08 0xA608 Curve 5 minimum -10.00 V to A6-10 -10 V In real time " A6-08" on
input page 358

A6-09 0xA609 Percentage -100.0% to +100.0% -100 % In real time " A6-09" on
corresponding to page 358
curve 5 minimum
input

A6-10 0xA60A Curve 5 inflexion A6-08 to A6-12 -3 V In real time " A6-10" on
point 1 input page 359

A6-11 0xA60B Percentage -100.0% to +100.0% -30 % In real time " A6-11" on
corresponding to page 359
curve 5 inflexion
point 1 input

A6-12 0xA60C Curve 5 inflexion A6-10 to A6-14 3 V In real time " A6-12" on
point 2 input page 359

A6-13 0xA60D Percentage -100.0% to +100.0% 30 % In real time " A6-13" on

corresponding to page 359
curve 5 inflexion
point 2 input

‑64‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
A6-14 0xA60E Curve 5 maximum A6-12 to 10.00 V 10 V In real time " A6-14" on
input page 360

A6-15 0xA60F Percentage -100.0% to +100.0% 100 % In real time " A6-15" on
corresponding to page 360
curve 5 maximum
input

A6-16 0xA610 AI1 gain -10.00 to +10.00 1 - In real time " A6-16" on
page 360

A6-17 0xA611 AI1 offset -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " A6-17" on
page 360

A6-18 0xA612 AI2 gain -10.00 to +10.00 1 - In real time " A6-18" on
page 361

A6-19 0xA613 AI2 offset -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " A6-19" on
page 361

A6-20 0xA614 AI3 gain -10.00 to +10.00 1 - In real time " A6-20" on
page 361

A6-21 0xA615 AI3 offset -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " A6-21" on
page 361

A6-22 0xA616 AI disconnection 0.0% to 100.0% 0 % In real time " A6-22" on

detection page 362
threshold
A6-23 0xA617 AI disconnection 0.0s to 6553.5s 0 s In real time " A6-23" on
detection time page 362

A6-24 0xA618 Jump point of AI1 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " A6-24" on
setting page 362

A6-25 0xA619 Jump amplitude 0.0% to 100.0% 0.1 % In real time " A6-25" on
set through AI1 page 362

A6-26 0xA61A Jump point set -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " A6-26" on
through AI2 page 363

A6-27 0xA61B Jump amplitude 0.0% to 100.0% 0.1 % In real time " A6-27" on
set through AI2 page 363

A6-28 0xA61C Jump point of AI3 -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " A6-28" on
setting page 363

A6-29 0xA61D Jump amplitude 0.0% to 100.0% 0.1 % In real time " A6-29" on
of AI3 setting page 363

‑65‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
A6-30 0xA61E Analog Ones position: AI1 0 - In real time " A6-30" on
disconnection disconnection detection page 364
detection 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Tens position: AI2
disconnection detection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Hundreds position: AI3
disconnection detection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
A9-00 0xA900 Online auto-tuning 0: Disabled 0 - In real time " A9-00" on
on the rotor time 1: Enabled page 364
constant of the
asynchronous
motor
A9-01 0xA901 Rotor resistance 0–100 5 - In real time " A9-01" on
gain for page 365
asynchronous
motor auto-tuning
in FVC mode
A9-02 0xA902 Rotor resistance 2–100 Hz 7 Hz In real time " A9-02" on
start frequency for page 365
asynchronous
motor auto-tuning
in FVC mode
A9-03 0xA903 Magnetic field 30–150 40 - In real time " A9-03" on
efficient for page 365
asynchronous
motor observation
in FVC mode
A9-04 0xA904 Maximum torque 30 to 150 80 - In real time " A9-04" on
limit coefficient for page 365
the asynchronous
motor field-
weakening range

A9-05 0xA905 Asynchronous 5 ms to 32 ms 15 ms In real time " A9-05" on

motor speed filter page 366
time in SVC mode

‑66‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
A9-06 0xA906 Speed feedback 0: No operation 0 - In real time " A9-06" on
handling in speed 1: Minimum synchronization page 366
control of frequency limited based on
asynchronous load change
motor in SVC 2: Fixed current output during
mode low-speed running
3: Fixed current output during
low-speed running
4: Low torque optimization

A9-07 0xA907 Magnetic field 0.0 to 8.0 2 - In real time " A9-07" on
regulation page 366
bandwidth of
asynchronous
motor in SVC
mode
A9-08 0xA908 Low-speed 30 to 170 100 - In real time " A9-08" on
running current of page 366
asynchronous
motor in SVC
mode
A9-09 0xA909 Switchover 0.1 Hz to 1.0 Hz 0.3 Hz At stop " A9-09" on
frequency of page 367
output fixed
current of
asynchronous
motor in SVC
mode
A9-10 0xA90A Speed fluctuation 80 to 100 95 - At stop " A9-10" on
suppression page 367
coefficient of
asynchronous
motor in SVC
mode
A9-11 0xA90B Acceleration/ 10s to 3000s 200 s At stop " A9-11" on
Deceleration time page 367
of asynchronous
motor in SVC
mode
A9-12 0xA90C Quick auto-tuning 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " A9-12" on
of stator 1: Enabled page 367
resistance before
asynchronous
motor startup

‑67‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
A9-13 0xA90D Quick auto-tuning 0 to 65535 10 - At stop " A9-13" on
of stator page 368
resistance
coefficient 1 of
asynchronous
motor
A9-14 0xA90E Quick auto-tuning 0 to 65535 10 - At stop " A9-14" on
of stator page 368
resistance
coefficient 2 of
asynchronous
motor
A9-17 0xA911 Synchronous 0.0 to 359.9 0 - Unchangea " A9-17" on
motor real-time ble page 368
angle

A9-18 0xA912 Initial position 0: Detected upon running 0 - In real time " A9-18" on
angle detection of 1: Not detected page 369
synchronous 2: Detected upon initial
motor power-on

A9-20 0xA914 Flux weakening 0: Automatic mode 1 - At stop " A9-20" on

mode selection 1: Synchronous motor page 369
adjustment mode
2: Synchronous motor hybrid
mode
3: Disabled
A9-21 0xA915 Flux weakening 0 to 50 5 - In real time " A9-21" on
gain of page 369
synchronous
motor
A9-22 0xA916 Output voltage 0% to 50% 5 % In real time " A9-22" on
upper limit margin page 369
of synchronous
motor
A9-23 0xA917 Maximum force 20% to 300% 100 % In real time " A9-23" on
adjustment gain of page 370
synchronous
motor
A9-24 0xA918 Exciting current 40% to 200% 100 % In real time " A9-24" on
adjustment gain page 370
calculated by
synchronous
motor
A9-25 0xA919 Estimated 5% to 1000% 30 % In real time " A9-25" on
synchronous page 370
motor speed
integral gain in
SVC mode

‑68‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
A9-26 0xA91A Estimated 5% to 300% 20 % In real time " A9-26" on
synchronous page 370
motor speed
proportional gain
in SVC mode
A9-27 0xA91B Estimated 10 to 2000 100 - In real time " A9-27" on
synchronous page 371
motor speed filter
in SVC mode
A9-28 0xA91C Minimum carrier 0.8 to F0-15.0 2 - In real time " A9-28" on
frequency of page 371
synchronous
motor in SVC
mode
A9-29 0xA91D Low speed 0% to 80% 30 % In real time " A9-29" on
excitation current page 371
of synchronous
motor in SVC
mode
A9-30 0xA91E Low-speed closed- 0% to 65535% 0 % In real time " A9-30" on
loop current (for page 371
VVC)

A9-31 0xA91F Oscillation 0% to 65535% 0 % In real time " A9-31" on

suppression page 372
damping
coefficient (for
VVC)

A9-32 0xA920 Reserved 0 to 65535 0 - In real time " A9-32" on

parameter 8 for page 372
synchronous
motor control
A9-33 0xA921 Reserved 0 to 5 0 - At stop " A9-33" on
parameter 9 for page 372
synchronous
motor control
A9-34 0xA922 Reserved 0% to 65535% 0 % In real time " A9-34" on
parameter 10 for page 372
synchronous
motor control
A9-35 0xA923 Performance fault 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " A9-35" on
subcode upon 1st ble page 373
fault
A9-36 0xA924 Performance fault 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " A9-36" on
subcode upon 2nd ble page 373
fault
A9-37 0xA925 Performance fault 0 to 65535 0 - Unchangea " A9-37" on
subcode upon 3rd ble page 373
fault

‑69‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
A9-40 0xA928 Low-speed closed- 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " A9-40" on
loop current 1: Enabled page 373
selection (for VVC)

A9-41 0xA929 Low-speed closed- 30% to 200% 50 % At stop " A9-41" on

loop current (for page 374
VVC)

A9-42 0xA92A Oscillation 0% to 500% 100 % In real time " A9-42" on

suppression page 374
damping
coefficient (for
VVC)

A9-43 0xA92B Initial position 0 to 5 0 - At stop " A9-43" on

compensation page 374
angle (for VVC)

A9-44 0xA92C Initial position 0.0 to 360.0 0 - In real time " A9-44" on
compensation page 374
angle of
synchronous
motor
A9-45 0xA92D Synchronous 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " A9-45" on
motor low-speed 1: Enabled page 375
handling

A9-46 0xA92E Switchover 0.01 to F0-10 5 - At stop " A9-46" on

frequency for page 375
synchronous
motor low-speed
handling

A9-47 0xA92F Synchronous 10 to 200 100 - At stop " A9-47" on

motor low-speed page 375
handling current

A9-48 0xA930 Synchronous 0 to 300 32 - At stop " A9-48" on

motor low-speed page 375
handling feedback
suppression
coefficient
A9-49 0xA931 Synchronous 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " A9-49" on
motor energy- 1: Enabled page 376
saving control

A9-50 0xA932 Maximum flux 200–1000 1000 - At stop " A9-50" on

weakening current page 376
limit margin

‑70‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
A9-51 0xA933 Advanced settings Ones: Rotor resistance and 111 - At stop " A9-51" on
for asynchronous leakage inductance DC offset page 376
motor parameter 0: Standard offset
auto-tuning 1: Large offset
Tens: New rotor resistance
and leakage inductance auto-
tuning algorithm
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Contin Contin Continued Hundreds: New mutual Contin Contin Continued Continued
ued ued inductance static auto-tuning ued ued
algorithm
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Thousands: Stator resistance
auto-tuning algorithm
0: Current open loop
1: Current closed loop

A9-52 0xA934 U0-06 feedback 0: Motoring torque being 1 - In real time " A9-52" on
torque selection positive and generating page 377
torque being negative
1: Torque direction being
positive in the case of positive
speed direction; torque
direction being negative in the
case of negative speed
direction
A9-54 0xA936 Transistor voltage 0 to 10000 700 - At stop " A9-54" on
drop page 377

A9-55 0xA937 Dead-zone time 0 0 to 10000 352 - At stop " A9-55" on

page 377

A9-56 0xA938 Dead-zone time 1 0 to 10000 1052 - At stop " A9-56" on

page 377

A9-57 0xA939 Dead-zone time 2 0 to 10000 1270 - At stop " A9-57" on

page 378

A9-58 0xA93A Dead-zone time 3 0 to 10000 1358 - At stop " A9-58" on

page 378

A9-59 0xA93B Dead-zone time 4 0 to 10000 1404 - At stop " A9-59" on

page 378

A9-60 0xA93C Dead-zone time 5 0 to 10000 1449 - At stop " A9-60" on

page 378

A9-61 0xA93D Dead-zone time 6 0 to 10000 1661 - At stop " A9-61" on

page 379

A9-62 0xA93E Dead-zone time 7 0 to 10000 1689 - At stop " A9-62" on

page 379

‑71‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
A9-63 0xA93F Dead-zone 0 to 10000 94 - At stop " A9-63" on
compensation page 379
current 0
A9-64 0xA940 Dead-zone 0 to 10000 376 - At stop " A9-64" on
compensation page 379
current 1
A9-65 0xA941 Dead-zone 0 to 10000 658 - At stop " A9-65" on
compensation page 380
current 2
A9-66 0xA942 Dead-zone 0 to 10000 940 - At stop " A9-66" on
compensation page 380
current 3
A9-67 0xA943 Dead-zone 0 to 10000 1222 - At stop " A9-67" on
compensation page 380
current 4
A9-68 0xA944 Dead-zone 0 to 10000 1504 - At stop " A9-68" on
compensation page 380
current 5
A9-69 0xA945 Dead-zone 0 to 10000 3478 - At stop " A9-69" on
compensation page 380
current 6
A9-70 0xA946 Dead-zone 0 to 10000 5452 - At stop " A9-70" on
compensation page 381
current 7
A9-71 0xA944 Elastic oscillation 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " A9-71" on
suppression 1: Self-adaptive based on the page 381
target frequency
2: Frequency reference

A9-72 0xA945 Elastic oscillation 20 ms to 1000 ms 300 ms In real time " A9-72" on
suppression filter page 381
time
A9-73 0xA946 Elastic oscillation 10 to 1000 100 - In real time " A9-73" on
suppression gain page 381

AC-00 0xAC00 AI1 measured -10.000 V to +10.000 V 2 V In real time " AC-00" on
voltage 1 page 382

AC-01 0xAC01 AI1 displayed -10.000 V to +10.000 V 2 V In real time " AC-01" on
voltage 1 page 382

AC-02 0xAC02 AI1 measured -10.000 V to +10.000 V 8 V In real time " AC-02" on
voltage 2 page 382

AC-03 0xAC03 AI1 displayed -10.000 V to +10.000 V 8 V In real time " AC-03" on
voltage 2 page 383

AC-04 0xAC04 AI2 measured -10.000 V to +10.000 V 2 V In real time " AC-04" on
voltage 1 page 383

AC-05 0xAC05 AI2 displayed -10.000 V to +10.000 V 2 V In real time " AC-05" on
voltage 1 page 383

‑72‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
AC-06 0xAC06 AI2 measured -10.000 V to +10.000 V 8 V In real time " AC-06" on
voltage 2 page 384

AC-07 0xAC07 AI2 displayed -10.000 V to +10.000 V 8 V In real time " AC-07" on
voltage 2 page 384

AC-08 0xAC08 AI3 measured -10.000 V to +10.000 V 2 V In real time " AC-08" on
voltage 1 page 384

AC-09 0xAC09 AI3 displayed -10.000 V to +10.000 V 2 V In real time " AC-09" on
voltage 1 page 385

AC-10 0xAC0A AI3 measured -10.000 V to +10.000 V 8 V In real time " AC-10" on
voltage 2 page 385

AC-11 0xAC0B AI3 displayed -10.000 V to +10.000 V 8 V In real time " AC-11" on
voltage 2 page 385

AC-12 0xAC0C AO1 measured -10.000 V to +10.000 V 2 V In real time " AC-12" on
voltage 1 page 386

AC-13 0xAC0D AO1 target voltage -10.000 V to +10.000 V 2 V In real time " AC-13" on
1 page 386

AC-14 0xAC0E AO1 measured -10.000 V to +10.000 V 8 V In real time " AC-14" on
voltage 2 page 386

AC-15 0xAC0F AO1 target voltage -10.000 V to +10.000 V 8 V In real time " AC-15" on
2 page 387

AC-16 0xAC10 AO2 measured -10.000 V to +10.000 V 2 V In real time " AC-16" on
voltage 1 page 387

AC-17 0xAC11 AO2 target voltage -10.000 V to +10.000 V 2 V In real time " AC-17" on
1 page 387

AC-18 0xAC12 AO2 measured -10.000 V to +10.000 V 8 V In real time " AC-18" on
voltage 2 page 388

AC-19 0xAC13 AO2 target voltage -10.000 V to +10.000 V 8 V In real time " AC-19" on
2 page 388

AC-20 0xAC14 PT100 measured 0.000 V to 3.3 V 0.44 V In real time " AC-20" on
voltage 1 page 388

AC-21 0xAC15 PT100 displayed 0.000 V to 3.3 V 0.44 V In real time " AC-21" on
voltage 1 page 389

AC-22 0xAC16 PT100 measured 0.000 V to 3.3 V 2.16 V In real time " AC-22" on
voltage 2 page 389

AC-23 0xAC17 PT100 displayed 0.000 V to 3.3 V 2.16 V In real time " AC-23" on
voltage 2 page 389

AC-24 0xAC18 PT1000 measured 0.000 V to 3.3 V 1.136 V In real time " AC-24" on
voltage 1 page 390

AC-25 0xAC19 Voltage 1 display 0.000 V to 3.3 V 1.136 V In real time " AC-25" on
on the PT1000 page 390

AC-26 0xAC1A PT1000 measured 0.000 V to 3.3 V 2.122 V In real time " AC-26" on
voltage 2 page 390

AC-27 0xAC1B Voltage 2 display 0.000 V to 3.3 V 2.122 V In real time " AC-27" on
on the PT1000 page 391

‑73‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
AC-28 0xAC1C AO1 measured 0.000 mA to 20.000 mA 4 mA In real time " AC-28" on
current 1 page 391

AC-29 0xAC1D AO1 target current 0.000 mA to 20.000 mA 4 mA In real time " AC-29" on
1 page 391

AC-30 0xAC1E AO1 measured 0.000 mA to 20.000 mA 16 mA In real time " AC-30" on
current 2 page 392

AC-31 0xAC1F AO1 target current 0.000 mA to 20.000 mA 16 mA In real time " AC-31" on
2 page 392

AF-00 0xAF00 RPDO1-SubIndex0- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-00" on

H page 392

AF-01 0xAF01 RPDO1-SubIndex0- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-01" on

L page 393

AF-02 0xAF02 RPDO1-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-02" on

H page 393

AF-03 0xAF03 RPDO1-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-03" on

L page 393

AF-04 0xAF04 RPDO1-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-04" on

H page 393

AF-05 0xAF05 RPDO1-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-05" on

L page 394

AF-06 0xAF06 RPDO1-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-06" on

H page 394

AF-07 0xAF07 RPDO1-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-07" on

L page 394

AF-08 0xAF08 RPDO2-SubIndex0- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-08" on

H page 394

AF-09 0xAF09 RPDO2-SubIndex0- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-09" on

L page 395

AF-10 0xAF0A RPDO2-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-10" on

H page 395

AF-11 0xAF0B RPDO2-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-11" on

L page 395

AF-12 0xAF0C RPDO2-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-12" on

H page 395

AF-13 0xAF0D RPDO2-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-13" on

L page 395

AF-14 0xAF0E RPDO2-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-14" on

H page 396

AF-15 0xAF0F RPDO2-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-15" on

L page 396

AF-16 0xAF10 RPDO3-SubIndex0- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-16" on

H page 396

AF-17 0xAF11 RPDO3-SubIndex0- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-17" on

L page 396

‑74‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
AF-18 0xAF12 RPDO3-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-18" on
H page 397

AF-19 0xAF13 RPDO3-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-19" on

L page 397

AF-20 0xAF14 RPDO3-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-20" on

H page 397

AF-21 0xAF15 RPDO3-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-21" on

L page 397

AF-22 0xAF16 RPDO3-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-22" on

H page 398

AF-23 0xAF17 RPDO3-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-23" on

L page 398

AF-24 0xAF18 RPDO4-SubIndex0- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-24" on

H page 398

AF-25 0xAF19 RPDO4-SubIndex0- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-25" on

L page 398

AF-26 0xAF1A RPDO4-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-26" on

H page 399

AF-27 0xAF1B RPDO4-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-27" on

L page 399

AF-28 0xAF1C RPDO4-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-28" on

H page 399

AF-29 0xAF1D RPDO4-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-29" on

L page 399

AF-30 0xAF1E RPDO4-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-30" on

H page 400

AF-31 0xAF1F RPDO4-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-31" on

L page 400

AF-32 0xAF20 TPDO1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-32" on

SubIndexO-H page 400

AF-33 0xAF21 TPDO1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-33" on

SubIndexO-L page 400

AF-34 0xAF22 TPDO1-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-34" on

H page 400

AF-35 0xAF23 TPDO1-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-35" on

L page 401

AF-36 0xAF24 TPDO1-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-36" on

H page 401

AF-37 0xAF25 TPDO1-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-37" on

L page 401

AF-38 0xAF26 TPDO1-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-38" on

H page 401

AF-39 0xAF27 TPDO1-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-39" on

L page 402

‑75‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
AF-40 0xAF28 TPDO2-SubIndex0- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-40" on
H page 402

AF-41 0xAF29 TPDO2-SubIndex0- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-41" on

L page 402

AF-42 0xAF2A TPDO2-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-42" on

H page 402

AF-43 0xAF2B TPDO2-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-43" on

L page 403

AF-44 0xAF2C TPDO2-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-44" on

H page 403

AF-45 0xAF2D TPDO2-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-45" on

L page 403

AF-46 0xAF2E TPDO2-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-46" on

H page 403

AF-47 0xAF2F TPDO2-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-47" on

L page 404

AF-48 0xAF30 TPDO3-SubIndex0- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-48" on

H page 404

AF-49 0xAF31 TPDO3-SubIndex0- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-49" on

L page 404

AF-50 0xAF32 TPDO3-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-50" on

H page 404

AF-51 0xAF33 TPDO3-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-51" on

L page 405

AF-52 0xAF34 TPDO3-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-52" on

H page 405

AF-53 0xAF35 TPDO3-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-53" on

L page 405

AF-54 0xAF36 TPDO3-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-54" on

H page 405

AF-55 0xAF37 TPDO3-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-55" on

L page 405

AF-56 0xAF38 TPDO4-SubIndex0- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-56" on

H page 406

AF-57 0xAF39 TPDO4-SubIndex0- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-57" on

L page 406

AF-58 0xAF3A TPDO4-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-58" on

H page 406

AF-59 0xAF3B TPDO4-SubIndex1- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-59" on

L page 406

AF-60 0xAF3C TPDO4-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-60" on

H page 407

AF-61 0xAF3D TPDO4-SubIndex2- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-61" on

L page 407

‑76‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
AF-62 0xAF3E TPDO4-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-62" on
H page 407

AF-63 0xAF3F TPDO4-SubIndex3- 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " AF-63" on

L page 407

AF-66 0xAF42 Number of valid 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - Unchangea " AF-66" on

RPDOs ble page 408

AF-67 0xAF43 Number of valid 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - Unchangea " AF-67" on

TPDOs ble page 408

B0-00 0xB000 Tension control 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " B0-00" on

mode 1: Open loop torque control page 408
2: Closed loop speed control
3: Closed loop torque control
4: Constant linear speed
control
B0-01 0xB001 Winding mode 0: Winding 0 - In real time " B0-01" on
1: Unwinding page 409

B0-02 0xB002 Unwinding reverse 0.0 m/min to 500.0 m/min 0 m/min In real time " B0-02" on
tightening page 409
selection
B0-03 0xB003 Mechanical 0.01–300.00 1 - In real time " B0-03" on
transmission ratio page 410

B0-04 0xB004 Linear speed input 0: No input 0 - At stop " B0-04" on

source 1: AI1 page 410
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse input (DI5)
5: Communication setting
(1000H)
6: Communication setting
(731AH)

B0-05 0xB005 Maximum linear 0.0 m/min to 6500.0 m/min 1000 m/min In real time " B0-05" on
speed page 411

B0-06 0xB006 Minimum linear 0.0 m/min to 6500.0 m/min 20 m/min In real time " B0-06" on
speed for winding page 411
diameter
calculation
B0-07 0xB007 Winding diameter 0: Calculated based on linear 0 - At stop " B0-07" on
calculation speed page 411
method 1:Calculated based on
accumulative thickness
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse input (DI5)
6: Communication
7: Specified by B0-14

‑77‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
B0-08 0xB008 Maximum roll 0.1–6000.0 mm 500 mm In real time " B0-08" on
diameter page 412

B0-09 0xB009 Reel diameter 0.1–6000.0 mm 100 mm In real time " B0-09" on
page 413

B0-10 0xB00A Initial roll 0: B0-11 to B0-13 setting 0 - At stop " B0-10" on
diameter source 1: AI1 setting page 413
2: AI2 setting
3: AI3 setting
4: Communication setting
(1000H)

B0-11 0xB00B Initial roll 0.1–6000.0 mm 100 mm In real time " B0-11" on
diameter 1 page 413

B0-12 0xB00C Initial roll 0.1–6000.0 mm 100 mm In real time " B0-12" on
diameter 2 page 414

B0-13 0xB00D Initial roll 0.1–6000.0 mm 100 mm In real time " B0-13" on
diameter 3 page 414

B0-14 0xB00E Current roll 0.1–6000.0 mm 100 mm In real time " B0-14" on
diameter page 414

B0-15 0xB00F Roll diameter filter 0.00s to 10.00s 5 s In real time " B0-15" on
time page 414

B0-16 0xB010 Winding diameter 0.0–1000.0 0 - In real time " B0-16" on

change rate page 415

B0-17 0xB011 Roll diameter 0: Disabled 0 - In real time " B0-17" on

change direction 1: Decrease disabled during page 415
limit winding, and increase
disabled during unwinding

B0-18 0xB012 Roll diameter reset 0–1 0 - In real time " B0-18" on
during running page 415

B0-19 0xB013 Pre-drive speed -100.0% to +200.0% 0 % In real time " B0-19" on
gain page 416

B0-20 0xB014 Pre-charge torque 0: Set by F2-09 1 - At stop " B0-20" on

limit source 1: Set based on tension page 416
control torque

B0-21 0xB015 Pre-drive torque -100.0% to +100.0% 0 % In real time " B0-21" on
correction page 416

B0-23 0xB017 Pre-drive 0.0s to 6000.0s 20 s In real time " B0-23" on

acceleration time page 417

B0-24 0xB018 Pre-drive 0.0s to 6000.0s 20 s In real time " B0-24" on

deceleration time page 417

B0-25 0xB019 Pre-drive winding 0: Disabled 0 - In real time " B0-25" on

diameter 1: Enabled page 417
calculation
B0-26 0xB01A Tension frequency 0.0% to 100.0% 50 % In real time " B0-26" on
limit page 418

‑78‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
B0-27 0xB01B Tension frequency 0.00 Hz to 100.00 Hz 5 Hz In real time " B0-27" on
limit offset page 418

B0-28 0xB01C Tension frequency 0: Disabled 0 - In real time " B0-28" on

limit 1: Enabled page 418

B0-29 0xB01D Pulses per 1–60000 1 - In real time " B0-29" on

revolution page 419

B0-30 0xB01E Revolutions per 1 to 10000 1 - In real time " B0-30" on

layer page 419

B0-31 0xB01F Material thickness 0: Digit setting 0 - At stop " B0-31" on

reference source 1: AI1 setting page 420
2: AI2 setting
3: AI3
B0-32 0xB020 Material thickness 0.01–100.00 mm 0.01 mm In real time " B0-32" on
0 page 420

B0-33 0xB021 Material thickness 0.01–100.00 mm 0.01 mm In real time " B0-33" on
1 page 420

B0-34 0xB022 Material thickness 0.01–100.00 mm 0.01 mm In real time " B0-34" on
2 page 421

B0-35 0xB023 Material thickness 0.01–100.00 mm 0.01 mm In real time " B0-35" on
3 page 421

B0-36 0xB024 Maximum 0.01 mm to 100.00 mm 1 mm In real time " B0-36" on

thickness page 421

B0-37 0xB025 Winding diameter 0: Disabled 0 - In real time " B0-37" on

not reset upon 1: Enabled page 421
stop

B0-38 0xB026 Closed-loop 0: Torque calculated through 0 - At stop " B0-38" on

tension torque PID only page 422
mode selection 1: Torque calculated through
main + PID
B0-40 0xB028 Minimum pre-drive 0.0% to 100.0% 0 % In real time " B0-40" on
torque limit page 422

B0-41 0xB029 Constant linear 0: AI1 0 - At stop " B0-41" on

speed source 1: AI2 page 422
selection 2: AI3
3: Pulse setting (DI5)
Communication setting
(1000H)
5: Communication setting
(731AH)

B1-00 0xB100 Tension reference 0: B0-01 setting 0 - At stop " B1-00" on

source 1: AI1 setting page 423
2: AI2 setting
3: AI3 setting
4: Pulse setting (DI5)
5: Communication setting
(1000H)

‑79‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
B1-01 0xB101 Tension digital 0 N to 65000 N 50 N In real time " B1-01" on
setting page 423

B1-02 0xB102 Maximum tension 0 N to 65000 N 500 N In real time " B1-02" on
page 424

B1-03 0xB103 Zero-speed 0.0% to 20.0% 0 % In real time " B1-03" on

threshold page 424

B1-04 0xB104 Zero-speed 0.0% to 100.0% 0 % In real time " B1-04" on

tension rise page 424

B1-05 0xB105 Frequency 0.0s to 6500.0s 0 s In real time " B1-05" on

acceleration time page 425
in torque control
mode
B1-06 0xB106 Frequency 0.0s to 6500.0s 0 s In real time " B1-06" on
deceleration time page 425
in torque control
mode
B1-07 0xB107 Friction force 0.0% to 50.0% 0 % In real time " B1-07" on
compensation page 425

B1-08 0xB108 Mechanical inertia 0 N m2 to 65535 N m2 0 N•m2 In real time " B1-08" on
compensation page 425
coefficient
B1-09 0xB109 Correction 0.0% to 200.0% 100 % In real time " B1-09" on
coefficient of page 426
acceleration
inertia
compensation

B1-10 0xB10A Correction 0.0% to 200.0% 100 % In real time " B1-10" on
coefficient of page 426
deceleration
inertia
compensation

B1-11 0xB10B Material density 0 kg/m3 to 65535 kg/m3 0 kg/m3 In real time " B1-11" on
page 427

B1-12 0xB10C Material width 0 mm to 65535 mm 0 mm In real time " B1-12" on

page 427

B1-13 0xB10D Inertia 0 ms to 1000 ms 0 ms In real time " B1-13" on

compensation exit page 427
delay

B1-14 0xB10E Transition 0.00 Hz to 20.00 Hz 2 Hz In real time " B1-14" on

frequency for zero page 428
speed
compensation

B1-15 0xB10F Open-loop torque 0: Disabled 0 - In real time " B1-15" on

reverse 1: Enabled page 428

‑80‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
B1-16 0xB110 Tension closed- 0.0% to 200.0% 100 % In real time " B1-16" on
loop torque page 428
control limit
B1-17 0xB111 Friction force -50.0 to +50.0 0 - In real time " B1-17" on
compensation page 429
correction
coefficient
B1-18 0xB112 Friction force 0: Frequency 0 - At stop " B1-18" on
compensation 1: Linear speed page 429
curve 2: Multi-friction compensation
curve 1
3: Multi-friction compensation
curve 2
B1-19 0xB113 Multi-friction force 0.0–50.0 0 - In real time " B1-19" on
compensation page 430
torque 1

B1-20 0xB114 Multi-friction force 0.0–50.0 0 - In real time " B1-20" on

compensation page 430
torque 2

B1-21 0xB115 Multi-friction force 0.0–50.0 0 - In real time " B1-21" on

compensation page 430
torque 3

B1-22 0xB116 Multi-friction force 0.0–50.0 0 - In real time " B1-22" on

compensation page 430
torque 4

B1-23 0xB117 Multi-friction force 0.0–50.0 0 - In real time " B1-23" on

compensation page 431
torque 5

B1-24 0xB118 Multi-friction force 0.0–50.0 0 - In real time " B1-24" on

compensation page 431
torque 6

B1-25 0xB119 Multi-friction force 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0 Hz In real time " B1-25" on
compensation page 431
inflection point 1

B1-26 0xB11A Multi-friction force 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0 Hz In real time " B1-26" on
compensation page 432
inflection point 2

B1-27 0xB11B Multi-friction force 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0 Hz In real time " B1-27" on
compensation page 432
inflection point 3

B1-28 0xB11C Multi-friction force 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0 Hz In real time " B1-28" on
compensation page 432
inflection point 4

B1-29 0xB11D Multi-friction force 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0 Hz In real time " B1-29" on
compensation page 432
inflection point 5

‑81‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
B1-30 0xB11E Multi-friction force 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0 Hz In real time " B1-30" on
compensation page 433
inflection point 6

B1-31 0xB11F Tension 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " B1-31" on

establishment 1: Enabled page 433

B1-32 0xB120 Tension 0.0% to 100.0% 2 % In real time " B1-32" on

establishment page 433
dead zone
B1-33 0xB121 Tension 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0.1 Hz In real time " B1-33" on
establishment page 434
frequency

B1-34 0xB122 Terminal torque 0.0% to 500.0% 50 % In real time " B1-34" on
boost proportion page 434

B1-35 0xB123 Terminal torque 0.0–50.0s 0 s In real time " B1-35" on

boost cancellation page 434
time
B1-37 0xB125 Initial roll 0: Disabled 0 - At stop " B1-37" on
diameter auto- 1: Enabled page 434
tuning

B1-38 0xB126 Rod length 1 mm to 65535 mm 300 mm At stop " B1-38" on

page 435

B1-39 0xB127 Rod angle 0.1° to 360.0° 40 ° At stop " B1-39" on

page 435

B2-00 0xB200 Taper curve 0: Curve taper 0 - At stop " B2-00" on

1: Multi-liner taper page 435

B2-01 0xB201 Tension taper 0: B2-02 setting 0 - At stop " B2-01" on

source selection 1: AI1 setting page 436
2: AI2 setting
3: AI3 setting
4: Communication setting
(1000H)

B2-02 0xB202 Digital setting of 0.0% to 100.0% 0 % In real time " B2-02" on
taper page 436

B2-03 0xB203 Correction 0 mm to 10000 mm 0 mm In real time " B2-03" on

coefficient of taper page 436
compensation

B2-05 0xB205 Setting channel of 0: B2-06 setting 0 - At stop " B2-05" on

external taper AO 1: AI1 setting page 437
2: AI2 setting
3: AI3 setting
4: Communication setting
(1000H)

B2-06 0xB206 External taper 0.0% to 100.0% 100 % In real time " B2-06" on
setting page 437

‑82‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
B2-08 0xB208 Minimum winding 0.0% to 100.0% 100 % In real time " B2-08" on
diameter taper page 438

B2-09 0xB209 Linear taper B0-09 to B0-08 150 mm In real time " B2-09" on
switchover point 1 page 438

B2-10 0xB20A Taper of 0.0% to 100.0% 100 % In real time " B2-10" on
switchover point 1 page 438

B2-11 0xB20B Linear taper B2-09 to B0-08 200 mm In real time " B2-11" on
switchover point 2 page 438

B2-12 0xB20C Taper of 0.0% to 100.0% 90 % In real time " B2-12" on

switchover point 2 page 438

B2-13 0xB20D Linear taper B2-11 to B0-08 250 mm In real time " B2-13" on
switchover point 3 page 439

B2-14 0xB20E Taper of 0.0% to 100.0% 80 % In real time " B2-14" on

switchover point 3 page 439

B2-15 0xB20F Linear taper B2-13 to B0-08 300 mm In real time " B2-15" on
switchover point 4 page 439

B2-16 0xB210 Taper of 0.0% to 100.0% 70 % In real time " B2-16" on

switchover point 4 page 439

B2-17 0xB211 Linear taper B2-15 to B0-08 400 mm In real time " B2-17" on
switchover point 5 page 440

B2-18 0xB212 Taper of 0.0% to 100.0% 50 % In real time " B2-18" on

switchover point 5 page 440

B2-19 0xB213 Taper at maximum 0.0 to 100.0 30 - In real time " B2-19" on
roll diameter page 440

B6-00 0xB600 Source address 1 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0xE012 - In real time " B6-00" on
page 441

B6-01 0xB601 Mapping address 1 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0x500E - In real time " B6-01" on
page 441

B6-02 0xB602 Write gain 1 0.00–100.00 10 - In real time " B6-02" on

page 441

B6-03 0xB603 Read gain 1 0.00–100.00 0.1 - In real time " B6-03" on
page 441

B6-04 0xB604 Source address 2 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-04" on
page 442

B6-05 0xB605 Mapping address 2 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-05" on
page 442

B6-06 0xB606 Write gain 2 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-06" on

page 442

B6-07 0xB607 Read gain 2 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-07" on

page 443

B6-08 0xB608 Source address 3 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-08" on
page 443

B6-09 0xB609 Mapping address 3 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-09" on
page 443

‑83‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
B6-10 0xB60A Write gain 3 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-10" on
page 443

B6-11 0xB60B Read gain 3 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-11" on

page 444

B6-12 0xB60C Source address 4 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-12" on
page 444

B6-13 0xB60D Mapping address 4 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-13" on
page 444

B6-14 0xB60E Write gain 4 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-14" on

page 444

B6-15 0xB60F Read gain 4 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-15" on

page 445

B6-16 0xB610 Source address 5 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-16" on
page 445

B6-17 0xB611 Mapping address 5 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-17" on
page 445

B6-18 0xB612 Write gain 5 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-18" on

page 446

B6-19 0xB613 Read gain 5 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-19" on

page 446

B6-20 0xB614 Source address 6 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-20" on
page 446

B6-21 0xB615 Mapping address 6 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-21" on
page 446

B6-22 0xB616 Write gain 6 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-22" on

page 447

B6-23 0xB617 Read gain 6 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-23" on

page 447

B6-24 0xB618 Source address 7 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-24" on
page 447

B6-25 0xB619 Mapping address 7 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-25" on
page 447

B6-26 0xB61A Write gain 7 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-26" on

page 448

B6-27 0xB61B Read gain 7 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-27" on

page 448

B6-28 0xB61C Source address 8 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-28" on
page 448

B6-29 0xB61D Mapping address 8 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-29" on
page 449

B6-30 0xB61E Write gain 8 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-30" on

page 449

B6-31 0xB61F Read gain 8 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-31" on

page 449

‑84‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
B6-32 0xB620 Source address 9 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-32" on
page 449

B6-33 0xB621 Mapping address 9 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-33" on
page 450

B6-34 0xB622 Write gain 9 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-34" on

page 450

B6-35 0xB623 Read gain 9 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-35" on

page 450

B6-36 0xB624 Source address 10 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-36" on
page 451

B6-37 0xB625 Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-37" on
10 page 451

B6-38 0xB626 Write gain 10 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-38" on

page 451

B6-39 0xB627 Read gain 10 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-39" on

page 451

B6-40 0xB628 Source address 11 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-40" on
page 452

B6-41 0xB629 Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-41" on
11 page 452

B6-42 0xB62A Write gain 11 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-42" on

page 452

B6-43 0xB62B Read gain 11 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-43" on

page 453

B6-44 0xB62C Source address 12 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-44" on
page 453

B6-45 0xB62D Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-45" on
12 page 453

B6-46 0xB62E Write gain 12 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-46" on

page 453

B6-47 0xB62F Read gain 12 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-47" on

page 454

B6-48 0xB630 Source address 13 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-48" on
page 454

B6-49 0xB631 Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-49" on
13 page 454

B6-50 0xB632 Write gain 13 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-50" on

page 454

B6-51 0xB633 Read gain 13 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-51" on

page 455

B6-52 0xB634 Source address 14 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-52" on
page 455

B6-53 0xB635 Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-53" on
14 page 455

‑85‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
B6-54 0xB636 Write gain 14 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-54" on
page 456

B6-55 0xB637 Read gain 14 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-55" on

page 456

B6-56 0xB638 Source address 15 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-56" on
page 456

B6-57 0xB639 Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-57" on
15 page 456

B6-58 0xB63A Write gain 15 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-58" on

page 457

B6-59 0xB63B Read gain 15 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-59" on

page 457

B6-60 0xB63C Source address 16 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-60" on
page 457

B6-61 0xB63D Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-61" on
16 page 457

B6-62 0xB63E Write gain 16 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-62" on

page 458

B6-63 0xB63F Read gain 16 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-63" on

page 458

B6-64 0xB640 Source address 17 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-64" on
page 458

B6-65 0xB641 Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-65" on
17 page 459

B6-66 0xB642 Write gain 17 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-66" on

page 459

B6-67 0xB643 Read gain 17 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-67" on

page 459

B6-68 0xB644 Source address 18 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-68" on
page 459

B6-69 0xB645 Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-69" on
18 page 460

B6-70 0xB646 Write gain 18 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-70" on

page 460

B6-71 0xB647 Read gain 18 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-71" on

page 460

B6-72 0xB648 Source address 19 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-72" on
page 461

B6-73 0xB649 Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-73" on
19 page 461

B6-74 0xB64A Write gain 19 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-74" on

page 461

B6-75 0xB64B Read gain 19 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-75" on

page 461

‑86‑
 Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
B6-76 0xB64C Source address 20 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-76" on
page 462

B6-77 0xB64D Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-77" on
20 page 462

B6-78 0xB64E Write gain 20 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-78" on

page 462

B6-79 0xB64F Read gain 20 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-79" on

page 463

B6-80 0xB650 Source address 21 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-80" on
page 463

B6-81 0xB651 Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-81" on
21 page 463

B6-82 0xB652 Write gain 21 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-82" on

page 463

B6-83 0xB653 Read gain 21 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-83" on

page 464

B6-84 0xB654 Source address 22 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-84" on
page 464

B6-85 0xB655 Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-85" on
22 page 464

B6-86 0xB656 Write gain 22 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-86" on

page 464

B6-87 0xB657 Read gain 22 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-87" on

page 465

B6-88 0xB658 Source address 23 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-88" on
page 465

B6-89 0xB659 Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-89" on
23 page 465

B6-90 0xB65A Write gain 23 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-90" on

page 466

B6-91 0xB65B Read gain 23 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-91" on

page 466

B6-92 0xB65C Source address 24 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-92" on
page 466

B6-93 0xB65D Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-93" on
24 page 466

B6-94 0xB65E Write gain 24 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-94" on

page 467

B6-95 0xB65F Read gain 24 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-95" on

page 467

B6-96 0xB660 Source address 25 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-96" on
page 467

B6-97 0xB661 Mapping address 0 to value of 0xFFFF 0 - In real time " B6-97" on
25 page 467

‑87‑
Parameter List

Parame Address Name Value Range Default Unit Change Page

ter Method
B6-98 0xB662 Write gain 25 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-98" on
page 468

B6-99 0xB663 Read gain 25 0.00–100.00 0 - In real time " B6-99" on

page 468

1.2 List of Monitoring Parameters

Table 1–1 Monitoring parameters

Parameter Name Basic Unit Communication

Address
Group U0: basic monitoring parameters

U0-00 Running frequency (Hz) 0.01 Hz 0x7000

U0-01 Frequency reference (Hz) 0.01 Hz 0x7001

U0-02 Bus voltage (V) 0.1 V 0x7002

U0-03 Output voltage (V) 1V 0x7003

U0-04 Output current (A) 0.1 A 0x7004

U0-05 Output power (kW) 0.1 kW 0x7005

U0-06 Output torque (%) 0.1% 0x7006

U0-07 DI state 1 0x7007

U0-08 DO state 1 0x7008
U0-09 AI1 voltage (V) 0.01 V 0x7009

U0-10 AI2 voltage (V) 0.01 V 0x700A

U0-11 AI3 voltage (V) 0.01 V 0x700B

U0-12 Count value 1 0x700C

U0-13 Length value 1 0x700D

U0-14 Load speed display 1 0x700E

U0-15 PID reference 1 0x700F

U0-16 PID feedback 1 0x7010
U0-17 PLC stage 1 0x7011

U0-18 Pulse input reference (kHz) 0.01 kHz 0x7012

U0-19 Feedback speed (Hz) 0.01 Hz 0x7013

U0-20 Remaining running time 0.1 min 0x7014

U0-21 AI1 voltage before correction 0.001 V 0x7015

U0-22 AI2 voltage (V)/current (mA) before 0.001 V 0x7016

correction
U0-23 AI3 voltage before correction 0.001 V 0x7017

U0-24 Linear speed 1 m/min 0x7018

U0-25 Current power-on time 1 min 0x7019

U0-26 Current running time 0.1 min 0x701A

‑88‑
 Parameter List

Parameter Name Basic Unit Communication

Address
U0-27 Pulse input reference (Hz) 1Hz 0x701B

U0-28 Communication 0.01% 0x701C

U0-29 Encoder feedback speed (Hz) 0.01 Hz 0x701D

U0-30 Display of main frequency X 0.01 Hz 0x701E

U0-31 Display of auxiliary frequency Y 0.01 Hz 0x701F

U0-32 Any memory address 1 0x7020

U0-33 Synchronous motor rotor position 0.1° 0x7021

U0-34 Motor temperature 1℃ 0x7022

U0-35 Target torque (%) 0.1% 0x7023

U0-36 Resolver position 1 0x7024

U0-37 Power factor angle 0.1° 0x7025

U0-38 ABZ position 1 0x7026

U0-39 Target voltage upon V/f separation 1V 0x7027

U0-40 Output voltage upon V/f separation 1V 0x7028

U0-41 DI state display 1 0x7029

U0-42 DO state display 1 0x702A

U0-43 DI function state display 1 (function 01 to 1 0x702B

40)

U0-44 DI function state display 2 (functions 41 to 1 0x702C

80)

U0-45 Fault information 1 0x702D

U0-46 Inverter unit temperature 1℃ 0x702E

U0-47 PTC channel voltage before correction 0.001 V 0x702F

U0-48 PTC channel voltage after correction 0.001 V 0x7030

U0-49 Number of offset pulses of position lock 1 0x7031

U0-50 Roll diameter 1 mm 0x7032

U0-51 Tension (after taper setting) 1N 0x7033

U0-58 Z signal counting 1 0x7034

U0-59 Frequency reference (%) 0.01% 0x7035

U0-60 Running frequency (%) 0.01% 0x7036

U0-61 AC drive state 1 0x7037

U0-62 Current fault code 1 0x7038
U0-63 Running frequency (after droop) 0.01 Hz 0x7039

U0-64 Back EMF 0.1 V 0x703A

U0-65 Stator resistance auto-tuning upon startup 1 0x703B

U0-66 Communication extension card model 1 0x703C

U0-67 Software version of the communication 1 0x703D
extension card
U0-68 AC drive state on the communication 1 0x703E
extension card
U0-69 Frequency transmitted to the 1 0x703F
communication extension card/0.01 Hz

‑89‑
Parameter List

Parameter Name Basic Unit Communication

Address
U0-70 Speed transmitted to the communication 1 RPM 0x7040
extension card/RPM
U0-71 Current specific to communication 1 0x7041
extension card (A)

U0-72 Communication card error state 1 0x7042

U0-73 Target torque before filter 0.1 0x7043

U0-74 Target torque after filter 0.1 0x7044

U0-75 Torque reference after acceleration/ 0.1 0x7045

deceleration
U0-76 Torque upper limit in the motoring state 0.1 0x7046

U0-77 Torque upper limit in the generating state 0.01 0x7047

U0-80 EtherCAT slave name 1 0x7048

U0-81 EtherCAT slave alias 1 0x7049
U0-82 EtherCAT ESM transmission fault code 1 0x704A
U0-83 EtherCAT XML file version 0.01 0x704B
U0-84 Times of EtherCAT synchronization loss 1 0x704C

U0-85 Maximum error value and invalid frames of 1 0x704D

EtherCAT port 0 per unit time

U0-86 Maximum error value and invalid frames of 1 0x7050

EtherCAT port 1 per unit time

U0-87 Maximum forwarding error of the EtherCAT 1 0x7051

port per unit time

U0-88 Maximum error of the EtherCAT data frame 1 0x7058

processing unit per unit time

U0-89 Maximum link loss of the EtherCAT port per 1 0x7059

unit time
U0-96 No-load current of asynchronous motor 0.1 0x7060
vector online observation
U0-97 Mutual inductive reactance of asynchronous 0.1 0x7061
motor vector online observation
Group U1: tension control monitoring parameters

U1-00 Linear speed 0.1 m/min 0x7100

U1-01 Current roll diameter 0.1 mm 0x7101

U1-02 Linear speed synchronous frequency 0.01 Hz 0x7102

U1-03 PID output frequency 0.01 Hz 0x7103

U1-04 Current tension reference 1N 0x7104

U1-05 Tension reference after taper 1N 0x7105

U1-06 Open-loop torque 0.1% 0x7106

U1-07 PID output torque 0.1% 0x7107

U1-08 Tension control mode 1 0x7108

U1-09 PID reference 0.1% 0x7109
U1-10 PID feedback 0.1% 0x710A
U1-11 Tension PID proportional gain 1 0x710B

‑90‑
 Parameter List

Parameter Name Basic Unit Communication

Address
U1-12 Tension PID integral time Ti 1s 0x710C

U1-13 Tension PID differential time Td 1s 0x710D

U1-14 Tension time 1s 0x710E
U1-15 Winding/Unwinding mode 1 0x710F

‑91‑
Parameter Groups

2 Parameter Groups

2.1 F0 Basic Parameter Group

F0-00 G/P type display

Address: 0xF000
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
1: G type (constant-torque load)
2: P type (fan and pump)
Description
1: G type (constant-torque load)
The G type models typically carry constant-torque loads with large overload
capacity. The overload capacity is 150% in general. Such loads include conveyor
belts and cranes, for example.
2: P type (fan and pump)
The P type models typically carry variable-torque loads such as fan and water
pump.

F0-01 Motor 1 control mode

Address: 0xF001
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Sensorless vector control (SVC)
1: Feedback vector control (FVC)
2: V/f control
3: Reserved
4: Reserved
5: Speed open loop control for the synchronous motor (PMVVC)
Description
0: Sensorless vector control (SVC)
It is a type of open-loop vector control applicable to high-performance control
applications, where one AC drive can drive only one motor. It is used for loads
such as machine tools, centrifuges, wire drawing machines, and injection molding
machines.

‑92‑
 Parameter Groups

1: Feedback vector control (FVC)

It is a type of closed-loop vector control. An encoder must be installed at the
motor end, and the AC drive must be equipped with a PG card of the same type as
the encoder. It is applicable to scenarios requiring high-precision speed control or
torque control. One AC drive can drive only one motor. It is used for loads such as
high-speed paper machines, cranes, and elevators.
2: V/f control (open loop speed control)
It is applicable to scenarios with low requirements on load control performance,
such as fans and pumps. If one AC drive controls multiple motors, only the V/f
control mode can be used.
3 and 4: Reserved
5: Speed open loop control for the synchronous motor (PMVVC)
It is suitable for loads with low precision requirements, such as fans and pumps.

F0-02 Command source selection

Address: 0xF002
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: LED operating panel/LCD operating panel/Software
1: Terminal
2: Communication
Description
It is used to determine the input channel of the AC drive control commands, such
as run, stop, forward run, reverse run, and jog operation.
0: LED operating panel/LCD operating panel/Software
Control commands are input using the RUN, STOP/RES, and MF.K keys on the
operating panel or using the control panel of the software. This mode is suitable
for initial commissioning.
1: Terminal
Control commands are input through the DIs of the AC drive. The DI control
commands can be set according to different scenarios, such as start/stop,
forward/reverse run, jog, two-wire/three-wire mode, multi-speed, and other
functions. It is suitable for most applications.
2: Communication
Control commands are input through remote communication. The AC drive must
be equipped with a communication card to communicate with the host
controller. It is suitable for remote control or centralized control systems of
multiple equipment.

‑93‑
Parameter Groups

F0-03 Main frequency source X selection

Address: 0xF003
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Digital setting (preset frequency (F0-08) that can be changed by pressing UP/
DOWN, non-retentive upon power failure)
1: Digital setting (preset frequency (F0-08) that can be changed by pressing UP/
DOWN, retentive at power failure)
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse reference (DI5)
6: Multi-reference
7: Simple PLC
8: PID
9: Communication
10: Reserved
Description
0: Digital setting (non-retentive at power failure)
The initial value of the frequency reference is the value of F0-08 (preset
frequency). This value can be changed by using the ▲ and ▼ keys on the
operating panel (or UP and DOWN of the multi-function input terminal). When the
AC drive is powered on again after power failure, the set frequency reverts to the
value of F0-08.
1: Digital setting (retentive at power failure)
The initial value of the frequency reference is the value of F0-08 (preset
frequency). This value can be changed by using the ▲ and ▼ keys on the
operating panel (or UP and DOWN of the multi-function input terminal). When the
AC drive is powered on again after power failure, the frequency reference is that
before the last power failure. The value set by pressing ▲/▼ or pressing UP/
DOWN is retained.
2: AI1
The frequency reference is input by current or voltage signal through the AI1. The
frequency is calculated according to the preset AI curve.
3: AI2
The frequency reference is input by current or voltage signal through the AI2. The
frequency is calculated according to the preset AI curve.
4: AI3
The frequency reference is input by current or voltage signal through the AI3. The
frequency is calculated according to the preset AI curve.

‑94‑
 Parameter Groups

5: Pulse reference (DI5)

The frequency upper limit is set through the DI5. The frequency is calculated
based on the curve of the relationship between the pulse frequency and the
setting frequency.
6: Multi-reference
In multi-reference control mode, different combinations of DI terminal states
correspond to different frequency references. The four multi-reference terminals
can provide 16 state combinations, corresponding to 16 reference values.
7: Simple PLC
Simple PLC is a multi-speed running command that can control the running time
and the acceleration and deceleration time. Parameters FC-00 to FC-15 are used
to set the values of each frequency. FC-18 to FC-49 are used to set the running
time and the acceleration and deceleration time of each frequency. Up to 16
speeds can be set.
8: PID
PID is selected as the main frequency. PID control is a general process control
method. PID control is used to form a closed-loop system in which each
controlled variable is stabilized at the target level through proportional, integral,
and differential calculation of the difference between the feedback signal and the
target signal of the controlled variable. Generally, PID output can be used as the
frequency reference for on-site closed-loop process control applications, such as
closed-loop pressure control and closed-loop tension control.
9: Communication
The main frequency is set through communication. Frequency reference is input
through remote communication. The AC drive must be equipped with a
communication card to realize communication with the host controller. It is
suitable for remote control or centralized control systems of multiple equipment.
10: Reserved

F0-04 Auxiliary frequency source Y selection

Address: 0xF004
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑95‑
Parameter Groups

0: Digital setting (preset frequency (F0-08) that can be changed by pressing UP/
DOWN, non-retentive upon power failure)
1: Digital setting (preset frequency (F0-08) that can be changed by pressing UP/
DOWN, retentive at power failure)
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse reference (DI5)
6: Multi-reference
7: Simple PLC
8: PID
9: Communication
10: Reserved
Description
0: Digital setting (non-retentive at power failure)
The initial value of the frequency reference is the value of F0-08 (preset
frequency). The value can be changed by using the ▲ and ▼ keys on the
operating panel (or UP and DOWN of the multi-function input terminal). When the
AC drive is powered on again after power failure, the set frequency reverts to the
value of F0-08.
1: Digital setting (retentive at power failure)
The initial value of the frequency reference is the value of F0-08 (preset
frequency). This value can be changed by using the ▲ and ▼ keys on the
operating panel (or UP and DOWN of the multi-function input terminal). When the
AC drive is powered on again after power failure, the frequency reference is that
before the last power failure. The value set by pressing ▲/▼ or pressing UP/
DOWN is retained.
2: AI1
The frequency reference is input by current or voltage signal through the AI1. The
frequency is calculated according to the preset AI curve.
3: AI2
The frequency reference is input by current or voltage signal through the AI2. The
frequency is calculated according to the preset AI curve.
4: AI3
The frequency reference is input by current or voltage signal through the AI3
terminal. The frequency is calculated according to the preset AI curve.
5: Pulse reference (DI5)
The frequency upper limit is set through the DI5. The frequency is calculated
based on the curve of the relationship between the pulse frequency and the
setting frequency.

‑96‑
 Parameter Groups

6: Multi-reference
In multi-reference control mode, different combinations of DI terminal states
correspond to different frequency references. The four multi-reference terminals
can provide 16 state combinations, corresponding to 16 reference values.
7: Simple PLC
Simple PLC is a multi-speed running command that can control the running time
and the acceleration and deceleration time. Parameters FC-00 to FC-15 are used
to set the values of each frequency. FC-18 to FC-49 are used to set the running
time and the acceleration and deceleration time of each frequency. Up to 16
speeds can be set.
8: PID
PID is selected as the main frequency. PID control is a general process control
method. PID control is used to form a closed-loop system in which each
controlled variable is stabilized at the target level through proportional, integral,
and differential calculation of the difference between the feedback signal and the
target signal of the controlled variable. Generally, PID output can be used as the
frequency reference for on-site closed-loop process control applications, such as
closed-loop pressure control and closed-loop tension control.
9: Communication
The main frequency is set through communication. Frequency reference is input
through remote communication. The AC drive must be equipped with a
communication card to communicate with the host controller. It is suitable for
remote control or centralized control systems of multiple equipment.
10: Reserved

F0-05 Range selection of auxiliary frequency reference Y upon superposition

Address: 0xF005
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Relative to the maximum frequency
1: Relative to the main frequency X
Description
0: Relative to the maximum frequency
The auxiliary frequency at superposition is equal to the auxiliary frequency source
range (F0-06) multiplied by the maximum frequency (F0-10).
1: Relative to the main frequency X
The auxiliary frequency at superposition is equal to the auxiliary frequency source
range (F0-06) multiplied by the main frequency X.

‑97‑
Parameter Groups

F0-06 Range of auxiliary frequency reference Y upon superposition

Address: 0xF006
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 150 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0% to 150%
Description

F0-07 Frequency source superposition selection

Address: 0xF007
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 44 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
Ones (position): Frequency reference selection
0: Main frequency reference X
1: Main and auxiliary operation result (based on tens position)
2: Switchover between the main frequency X and the auxiliary frequency Y
3: Switchover between the main frequency X and the main and auxiliary operation
result
4: Switchover between the auxiliary frequency Y and the main and auxiliary
operation result
Tens (position): Main and auxiliary operation of the frequency reference
0: Main + Auxiliary
1: Main – Auxiliary
2: Max. (main, auxiliary)
3: Min. (main, auxiliary)
4: Main x Auxiliary
Description
Ones position: Frequency reference selection
0: Main frequency reference X
The running frequency of the AC drive is directly determined by the main
frequency reference X.
1: Main and auxiliary operation result (based on the tens place)
The running frequency of the AC drive is the calculation result of the main and
auxiliary frequencies, and the calculation method is determined by the tens
position of the value of F0-07.

‑98‑
 Parameter Groups

2: Switchover between the main frequency reference X and auxiliary frequency

reference Y
The running frequency of the AC drive is selected or switched between the main
frequency reference X and the auxiliary frequency reference Y through the DI. In
this case, the function of the DI must be set to the frequency source switching
function. For example, if the DI2 is used for switchover, set F4-01 to 18.
3: Switchover between the main frequency reference X and the main and auxiliary
operation result
The running frequency of the AC drive is selected or switched between the main
frequency reference X and the main and auxiliary operation result through the DI.
4: Switchover between the auxiliary frequency reference Y and the main and
auxiliary operation result
The running frequency of the AC drive is selected or switched between the
auxiliary frequency reference Y and the main and auxiliary operation result
through the DI.
Tens (position): Frequency reference main and auxiliary operation
0: Main + Auxiliary
The main and auxiliary operation result is the main frequency X plus the auxiliary
frequency Y.
1: Main – Auxiliary
The main and auxiliary operation result is the main frequency X minus the
auxiliary frequency Y.
2: Maximum value
The main and auxiliary operation result is the larger value between the main
frequency X and the auxiliary frequency Y.
3: Minimum value
The main and auxiliary operation result is the smaller value between the main
frequency X and the auxiliary frequency Y.
4: Main x Auxiliary
The main and auxiliary operation result is the main frequency X multiplied by the
auxiliary frequency Y.

F0-08 Preset frequency

Address: 0xF008
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to F0-10
Description
This parameter defines the target frequency.

‑99‑
Parameter Groups

F0-09 Running direction

Address: 0xF009
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Same as the default direction
1: Reverse to the default direction
Description
You can change the rotation direction of the motor by modifying this parameter
without changing the motor wiring. Modifying this parameter is equivalent to
exchanging any two of the motor's U, V, W wires.

F0-10 Maximum frequency

Address: 0xF00A
Min.: 5 Unit: Hz
Max.: 599 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: At stop
Value Range:
5.00 Hz to 599.00 Hz
Description
This parameter defines the maximum output frequency of the AC drive.

F0-11 Source of the frequency upper limit

Address: 0xF00B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 6 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: F0-12 (Frequency upper limit)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Communication
6: Multi-speed reference
Description
0: F0-12 (Frequency upper limit)
The frequency upper limit is set by F0-12.
1: AI1
The frequency upper limit is input by current or voltage signal through the AI1.
The frequency is calculated according to the preset AI curve.

‑100‑
 Parameter Groups

2: AI2
The frequency upper limit is input by current or voltage signal through the AI2.
The frequency is calculated according to the preset AI curve.
3: AI3
The frequency upper limit is input by current or voltage signal through the AI3.
The frequency is calculated according to the preset AI curve.
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
The frequency upper limit is set through the DI5. The frequency is calculated
based on the curve of the relationship between the pulse frequency and the
maximum frequency.
5: Communication
The frequency upper limit is set through communication.
6: Multi-reference

F0-12 Frequency upper limit

Address: 0xF00C
Min.: F0-14 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
F0-14 to F0-10
Description
This parameter defines the maximum running frequency allowed for the motor.

F0-13 Frequency upper limit offset

Address: 0xF00D
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to F0-10
Description
This parameter defines the offset of the frequency upper limit. It is used to adjust
the output frequency upon minimum frequency reference signal when the
frequency is set by an external analog signal (voltage or current).

F0-14 Frequency lower limit

Address: 0xF00E
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-12 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time

‑101‑
Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0.00 Hz to F0-12
Description
This parameter defines the minimum running frequency for the motor.

F0-15 Carrier frequency

Address: 0xF00F
Min.: 0.8 Unit: kHz
Max.: 16 Data type: UInt16
Default: 6 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.8 kHz to 16.0 kHz
Description
The carrier frequency of the AC drive determines the number of times that the
power switching device (such as IGBT) of the drive unit is turned on and off, so it
is also called the switching frequency. It mainly affects the following aspects:
The power loss of the power module IGBT is related to the carrier frequency. As
the carrier frequency increases, the power loss increases and the power module
heats up, which is unfavorable to the AC drive.
When the carrier frequency is high, the waveform of the secondary current output
by the AC drive is sinusoidal and smooth. In this way, the harmonic is low, but the
interference is relatively strong, and the vice versa. When the carrier frequency is
too low, the effective torque of the motor decreases, the loss increases, and the
temperature increases. On the contrary, when the carrier frequency is too high,
the loss of the AC drive itself increases, the IGBT temperature rises, and the
change rate dv/dt of the output voltage increases, which has great influence on
the insulation of the motor.

F0-16 Carrier frequency change with temperature

Address: 0xF010
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: No
1: Yes
Description
This parameter defines whether the carrier frequency changes with the
temperature.

F0-17 Acceleration time 1

Address: 0xF011

‑102‑
 Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description
The acceleration time indicates the time required for the output frequency to rise
from 0 to F0-25 (acceleration/deceleration base frequency). It is usually
determined by the rise of the frequency reference signal. The frequency reference
rise rate must be limited to prevent overcurrent during acceleration of the motor.
The acceleration time must be set to ensure that the acceleration current is below
the overcurrent capacity of the AC drive to avoid that the AC drive trips due to
overcurrent stall.

F0-18 Deceleration time 1

Address: 0xF012
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description
The deceleration time indicates the time required for the output frequency to
decrease from F0-25 (acceleration/deceleration base frequency) to 0. The
deceleration time is usually determined by the fall of the frequency reference
signal. The frequency reference drop rate must be limited to prevent overvoltage
during deceleration of the motor.
The deceleration time must be set to ensure that the smoothing circuit voltage
will not be excessive to avoid that the AC drive trips due to overvoltage stall.

F0-19 Acceleration/Deceleration time unit

Address: 0xF013
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: 1s
1: 0.1s
2: 0.01s
Description
This parameter defines the acceleration/deceleration time unit.

‑103‑
Parameter Groups

F0-21 Frequency offset of auxiliary frequency source upon superposition

Address: 0xF015
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to F0-10
Description
This parameter defines the offset of the auxiliary frequency during superposition.
It is used to adjust the auxiliary frequency upon minimum frequency reference
signal when the frequency is set by an external analog signal (voltage or current).

F0-22 Frequency reference resolution

Address: 0xF016
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: At stop
Value Range:
1: 0.1 Hz
2: 0.01 Hz
Description
This parameter defines the decimal places of the frequency reference.

F0-23 Retention of digital setting of frequency upon stop

Address: 0xF017
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Non-retentive
1: Retentive
Description
0: Non-retentive
F0-08 (preset frequency) is set through the operating panel and the frequency is
modified by using the ▲ and ▼ keys or UP and DOWN of terminals. When the AC
drive stops, the modification will be cleared.
1: Retentive
F0-08 (preset frequency) is set through the operating panel and the frequency is
modified by using the ▲ and ▼ keys or UP and DOWN of terminals. When the AC
drive stops, the modification will be retained.

‑104‑
 Parameter Groups

F0-25 Acceleration/Deceleration time base frequency

Address: 0xF019
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Maximum frequency (F0-10)
1: Frequency reference
2: 100 Hz
Description
This parameter defines the target frequency during acceleration and the start
frequency during deceleration.

F0-26 Base frequency for UP/DOWN modification during running

Address: 0xF01A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Running frequency
1: Frequency reference
Description
This parameter defines the base frequency from which the target frequency is
adjusted by using the UP/DOWN key of the operating panel during operation.
If it is set to 0 and the running frequency is 25 Hz, the target frequency will change
from 25 Hz at a certain rate when the UP key is pressed.
If it is set to 1, the target frequency will change from the original target frequency
when the UP key is pressed.

F0-27 Main frequency coefficient

Address: 0xF01B
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00% to 100.00%
Description
This parameter defines the main frequency reference coefficient when the
frequency superposition mode is Main x Auxiliary. The value 100.00% corresponds
to the target main frequency reference.

‑105‑
Parameter Groups

F0-28 Auxiliary frequency coefficient

Address: 0xF01C
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00% to 100.00%
Description
This parameter defines the auxiliary frequency reference coefficient when the
frequency superposition mode is Main x Auxiliary. The value 100.00% corresponds
to the target auxiliary frequency reference.

2.2 F1 Parameters of Motor 1

F1-00 Motor type selection

Address: 0xF100
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Common asynchronous motor
1: Variable frequency asynchronous motor
2: Synchronous motor
Description
A variable frequency motor can adjust its frequency and speed according to the
load. Where the voltage is low, it can reduce the frequency and start reliably.
Where the load is light, it can reduce the frequency, speed, and current to save
electric energy.
A common asynchronous motor is suitable for applications with normal voltage
but often full load. It is designed based on constant frequency and constant
voltage. Therefore, it may not meet all the frequency and speed change
requirements.

F1-01 Rated motor power

Address: 0xF101
Min.: 0.1 Unit: kW
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1.5 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.1kW to 1000.0kW

‑106‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
This parameter indicates the power of the motor during normal operation. Its
value is the motor rated voltage multiplied by the motor rated current. Select a
proper motor power on the premise that the motor can meet the requirements of
mechanical load. Factors such as motor heating, allowable overload capacity, and
starting capacity must be considered.

F1-02 Rated motor voltage

Address: 0xF102
Min.: 1 Unit: V
Max.: 2000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 380 Change: At stop
Value Range:
1 V to 2000 V
Description
The rated motor voltage indicates the voltage of the motor during normal
operation, which usually refers to the line voltage.

F1-03 Rated motor current

Address: 0xF103
Min.: 0.1 Unit: A
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 9 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.1–6553.5 A
Description
The rated motor current indicates the current of the motor during normal
operation, which usually refers to the line current.

F1-04 Rated motor frequency

Address: 0xF104
Min.: 0.01 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.01 Hz to F0-10
Description
The rated motor frequency indicates the frequency of the power supply
connected to the stator winding under the rated operation state of the motor.

‑107‑
Parameter Groups

F1-05 Rated motor speed

Address: 0xF105
Min.: 1 Unit: RPM
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1460 Change: At stop
Value Range:
1 RPM to 65535 RPM
Description
This is the speed of the rotor in RPM when the motor is running in rated
conditions.

F1-06 Asynchronous/Synchronous motor stator resistance

Address: 0xF106
Min.: 0.001 Unit: Ω
Max.: 65.535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1.204 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.001 Ω to 65.535 Ω
Description
This parameter indicates the DC resistance of stator winding of asynchronous
motor, which can be obtained by motor auto-tuning.

F1-07 Asynchronous motor rotor resistance

Address: 0xF107
Min.: 0.001 Unit: Ω
Max.: 65.535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.908 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.001 Ω to 65.535 Ω
Description
This parameter defines the DC resistance of rotor winding of the asynchronous
motor, which can be obtained by static auto-tuning or dynamic auto-tuning of the
motor.

F1-08 Leakage inductive reactance of the asynchronous motor

Address: 0xF108
Min.: 0.01 Unit: mH
Max.: 655.35 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5.28 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.01 mH to 655.35 mH

‑108‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
The leakage inductive reactance of the asynchronous motor is caused by the
leakage flux of motor winding. In the winding of the motor, when current is
introduced, magnetic flux will be generated. The magnetic flux can be divided into
two parts based on the path: main flux and leakage flux. The leakage flux can be
described by an inductance, namely, leakage inductance. This parameter can be
obtained by static auto-tuning or dynamic auto-tuning of the motor.

F1-09 Mutual inductive reactance of the asynchronous motor

Address: 0xF109
Min.: 0.1 Unit: mH
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 156.8 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.1 mH to 6553.5 mH
Description
When the current in one coil of the motor changes, induced EMF is generated in
the coil adjacent to it. This mutually induced EMF can be expressed by mutual
inductance.
The mutual inductance of a motor can be roughly divided into two types. One is
the interphase inductance of the stator, which is the reactance between two
phases of the stator. The other is the inductance between the stator and the
rotor. The former does not change with the rotation of the rotor, while the latter
changes accordingly with the rotation of the rotor.
Both types of mutual inductance can be obtained through static or dynamic
motor auto-tuning.

F1-10 Asynchronous motor no-load current

Address: 0xF10A
Min.: 0.1 Unit: A
Max.: F1-03 Data type: UInt16
Default: 4.2 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.1 A to F1-03 (Rated motor current)
Description
This parameter defines the current passing through the three-phase winding of
the stator when the motor is running without load. It can be obtained by dynamic
auto-tuning of the motor.

F1-11 Asynchronous motor core saturation coefficient 1

Address: 0xF10B

‑109‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 50 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 86 Change: In real time
Value Range:
50.0% to 100.0%
Description
Asynchronous motor core saturation coefficient 1

F1-12 Asynchronous motor core saturation coefficient 2

Address: 0xF10C
Min.: 100 Unit: %
Max.: 150 Data type: UInt16
Default: 130 Change: In real time
Value Range:
100.0% to 150.0%
Description
Asynchronous motor core saturation coefficient 2

F1-13 Asynchronous motor core saturation coefficient 3

Address: 0xF10D
Min.: 100 Unit: %
Max.: 170 Data type: UInt16
Default: 140 Change: In real time
Value Range:
100.0% to 170.0%
Description
Asynchronous motor core saturation coefficient 3

F1-14 Asynchronous motor core saturation coefficient 4

Address: 0xF10E
Min.: 100 Unit: %
Max.: 180 Data type: UInt16
Default: 150 Change: In real time
Value Range:
100.0% to 180.0%
Description
Asynchronous motor core saturation coefficient 4

F1-17 Synchronous motor axis D inductance

Address: 0xF111
Min.: 0.01 Unit: mH

‑110‑
 Parameter Groups

Max.: 655.35 Data type: UInt16

Default: 15.86 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.01 mH to 655.35 mH
Description
This parameter defines the inductance of the main pole axis (longitudinal axis) of
the synchronous motor.

F1-18 Synchronous motor axis Q inductance

Address: 0xF112
Min.: 0.01 Unit: mH
Max.: 655.35 Data type: UInt16
Default: 15.86 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.01 mH to 655.35 mH
Description
This parameter defines the inductance of the center line (quadrature axis)
between the adjacent pole axes of the synchronous motor rotor.

F1-19 Synchronous motor back EMF coefficient

Address: 0xF113
Min.: 0 Unit: V
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0 V to 6553.5V
Description
Used to set the RMS value of the motor back EMF at the rated frequency (F1-04).

F1-20 Filter time constant (PMVVC)

Address: 0xF114
Min.: 0.003 Unit: -
Max.: 65.535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.003 to 65.535
Description
This parameter specifies the filter time constant in PMVVC mode.

F1-21 Oscillation suppression gain (PMVVC)

Address: 0xF115

‑111‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter specifies oscillation suppression gain in PMVVC mode.

F1-23 Percentage of the frictional moment

Address: 0xF117
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.00% to 100.00%
Description

F1-24 Number of motor pole pairs

Address: 0xF118
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description

F1-26 Auto-tuning direction (inertia auto-tuning and synchronous motor auto-

tuning)
Address: 0xF11A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Reverse run
1: Forward run
Description

F1-27 Encoder pulses per revolution

Address: 0xF11B

‑112‑
 Parameter Groups

Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 20000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1024 Change: At stop
Value Range:
1 to 20000
Description
This is the number of pulses generated per revolution of the encoder disk. In
feedback vector control (FVC) mode, an improper number of pulses may cause
malfunction of the motor. Therefore, set a proper encoder pulses.

F1-28 Encoder type

Address: 0xF11C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: ABZ incremental encoder
1: 23-bit encoder
2: Resolver
Description
Encoders are classified into incremental encoders and absolute encoders.
An incremental encoder converts displacement into periodic electrical signals,
and then converts the electrical signals into pulses that are counted. The number
of pulses describes the magnitude of the displacement.

Each position of an absolute encoder corresponds to a certain digital code.

Therefore, its indication is related only to the start and end positions of the
measurement.

F1-29 PG signal filter

Address: 0xF11D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Non-adaptive filter
1: Adaptive filter
2: Fixed interlock
3: Automatic interlock

‑113‑
Parameter Groups

Description

F1-30 Encoder wiring flag

Address: 0xF11E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 11 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
Ones (position): AB signal direction or rotational direction
0: Forward
1: Reverse
Tens (position): Reserved
Description

F1-31 Encoder zero position angle

Address: 0xF11F
Min.: 0 Unit: °
Max.: 359.9 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0° to 359.9°
Description

F1-32 Motor gear ratio numerator

Address: 0xF120
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
1 to 65535
Description

F1-33 Motor gear ratio denominator

Address: 0xF121
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop

‑114‑
 Parameter Groups

Value Range:
1 to 65535
Description

F1-34 Number of pole pairs of resolver

Address: 0xF122
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 32 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
1 to 32
Description
A resolver is an electromagnetic transducer, also known as a synchronous
resolver. It is a small AC motor used to measure angles. Consisting of stators and
rotors, it is used to measure the shaft angular displacement and angular velocity
of a revolving object.
This parameter indicates the number of pole pairs of a resolver. A larger number
of pole pairs indicates higher accuracy.

F1-36 PG open circuit detection

Address: 0xF124
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 11 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 11
Description
Used to enable or disable the PG open circuit detection.

F1-37 Auto-tuning selection

Address: 0xF125
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 14 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑115‑
Parameter Groups

0: No auto-tuning
1: Static auto-tuning on partial parameters of the asynchronous motor
2: Dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters of the asynchronous motor
3: With-load auto-tuning on all parameters of the asynchronous motor
4: Asynchronous motor inertia auto-tuning (only in FVC mode)
11: Static auto-tuning on partial parameters of the synchronous motor (excluding
back EMF)
12: No-load dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters of the synchronous motor
13: Static auto-tuning on all parameters of the synchronous motor (excluding the
encoder installation angle)
14: Synchronous motor inertia auto-tuning (only in FVC mode)
Description
0: No auto-tuning
Auto-tuning is not performed.
1: Static auto-tuning on partial parameters of the asynchronous motor
This mode applies to scenarios where motors cannot be disconnected from the
load and dynamic auto-tuning is not allowed.
Auto-tuning is performed on partial motor parameters including F1‑06
(Asynchronous motor stator resistance), F1‑07 (Asynchronous motor rotor
resistance), and F1‑08 (asynchronous motor leakage inductance).

2: Dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters of the asynchronous motor

This mode applies to scenarios where the motor can be disconnected from the
load.
Auto-tuning is performed on all the motor parameters, including F1‑06
(Asynchronous motor stator resistance), F1‑07 (Asynchronous motor rotor
resistance), F1‑08 (Asynchronous motor leakage inductance), F1‑09
(Asynchronous motor mutual inductance), and F1‑10 (Asynchronous motor no-
load current).

3: With-load auto-tuning on all parameters of asynchronous motor

This mode applies to scenarios where motors cannot be disconnected from the
load and dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters is not allowed.
Auto-tuning is performed on all the motor parameters, including F1‑06
(Asynchronous motor stator resistance), F1‑07 (Asynchronous motor rotor
resistance), F1‑08 (Asynchronous motor leakage inductance), F1‑09
(Asynchronous motor mutual inductance), F1‑10 (Asynchronous motor no-load
current),
and F1‑30 (Encoder phase sequence).

‑116‑
 Parameter Groups

4: Asynchronous motor inertia auto-tuning (only in FVC mode)

11: Static auto-tuning on partial parameters of the synchronous motor (excluding
back EMF)
12: No-load dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters of the synchronous motor
13: Static auto-tuning on all parameters of the synchronous motor (excluding the
encoder installation angle)
14: Synchronous motor inertia auto-tuning (only in FVC mode)

2.3 F2 Vector Control Parameters of Motor 1

F2-00 Low-speed speed loop Kp

Address: 0xF200
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 30 Change: In real time
Value Range:
1 to 200
Description
This parameter indicates the speed loop PID control parameter Kp, which affects
the response to the motor speed. A larger Kp value indicates higher sensitivity and
more intensive tuning. A smaller Kp value indicates lower sensitivity and less
intensive tuning. The low-speed speed loop Kp is effective at low speed.

F2-01 Low-speed speed loop Ti

Address: 0xF201
Min.: 0.001 Unit: s
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.001s to 10.000s
Description
The reciprocal of the speed loop integral time constant is the integral gain. The
speed loop integral time constant affects the steady-state speed error of the
motor and the stability of the speed loop system. If the speed loop integral time
constant increases, the speed loop response slows down. At this time, the
proportional gain of the speed loop needs to be increased to fasten the speed
loop response. The low speed loop Ti is used at low speed.

F2-02 Switchover frequency 1

Address: 0xF202

‑117‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F2-05 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to F2-05
Description
The speed loop PI parameters are divided into two groups: low speed and high
speed. If the running frequency is lower than switchover frequency 1 (F2-02), the
speed loop PI parameters are adjusted by F2-00 and F2-01. If the running
frequency is higher than switchover frequency 2 (F2-05), the speed loop PI
parameters are adjusted by F2-03 and F3-04. If the running frequency is between
switchover frequency 1 and switchover frequency 2, the speed loop PI parameters
switch linearly between the two groups of PI parameters. The parameter value
must be lower than F2‑05 (Switching frequency 2).

F2-03 High-speed speed loop Kp

Address: 0xF203
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
1 to 200
Description
This parameter indicates the speed loop PID control parameter Kp, which affects
the response to the motor speed. A larger Kp value indicates higher sensitivity and
more intensive tuning. A smaller Kp value indicates lower sensitivity and less
intensive tuning. The high-speed speed loop Kp is effective at high speed.

F2-04 High-speed speed loop Ti

Address: 0xF204
Min.: 0.001 Unit: s
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.001s to 10.000s
Description
The reciprocal of the speed loop integral time constant is the integral gain. The
speed loop integral time constant affects the steady-state speed error of the
motor and the stability of the speed loop system. If the speed loop integral time
constant increases, the speed loop response slows down. At this time, the
proportional gain of the speed loop needs to be increased to fasten the speed
loop response. The high speed loop Ti is used at high speed.

‑118‑
 Parameter Groups

F2-05 Switchover frequency 2

Address: 0xF205
Min.: F2-02 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
F2-02 to F0-10
Description
The speed loop PI parameters are divided into two groups: low speed and high
speed. When the running frequency is lower than F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1),
the speed loop PI is adjusted by F2-00 and F2-01. If the running frequency is
higher than switchover frequency 2 (F2-05), the speed loop PI parameters are
adjusted by F2-03 and F2-04. If the running frequency is between switchover
frequency 1 and switchover frequency 2, the speed loop PI parameters switch
linearly between the two groups of PI parameters. This parameter must be set to
a value lower than switchover frequency 2 (F2-05).

F2-06 VC slip compensation gain

Address: 0xF206
Min.: 50 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
50% to 200%
Description
In SVC control mode, this parameter is used to adjust the speed stability accuracy
of the motor. For example, when the running frequency of the motor is lower than
the output frequency of the AC drive, you can increase the value of this
parameter.
In FVC mode, this parameter can be used to adjust output current of the AC drive.
For example, decrease this parameter gradually when a high-power AC drive is
used to control a motor with low load capacity. Generally, you do not need to
change the value of this parameter.

F2-07 Speed feedback filter time

Address: 0xF207
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 0.1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.004 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000s to 0.1s

‑119‑
Parameter Groups

Description
In FVC mode (F0-01 set to 1), the speed loop feedback filter time is effective.
Adjusting the parameter can improve the motor stability. A larger value indicates
better motor stability but slower dynamic response, and a smaller value indicates
faster dynamic response. A small value of this parameter will result in motor
oscillation. Generally, the motor stability can meet requirements, and you do not
need to modify this parameter.

F2-08 VC deceleration over-excitation gain

Address: 0xF208
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 64 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 200
Description

F2-09 Torque upper limit source in speed control (motoring)

Address: 0xF209
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 7 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Digital setting (F2-10)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Communication setting
6: Min. (AI1, AI2)
7: Max. (AI1, AI2)
Description
0: Digital setting (F2‑10)
The torque upper limit in speed control mode is set by F2-10 (digital setting of
torque upper limit in speed control).
1: AI1
The torque upper limit is input by current or voltage signal through the AI1. The
torque is calculated according to the preset AI curve.
2: AI2
The torque upper limit is input by current or voltage signal through the AI2. The
torque is calculated according to the preset AI curve.

‑120‑
 Parameter Groups

3: AI3
The torque upper limit is input by current or voltage signal through the AI3. The
torque is calculated according to the preset AI curve.
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
The torque upper limit in speed control mode is set through the DI5. The torque is
calculated based on the curve of the relationship between the pulse frequency
and running frequency.
5: Communication setting
The main frequency is set through communication. The running frequency is
input through remote communication. The AC drive must be equipped with a
communication card to communicate with the host controller. This mode applies
to remote control or centralized control systems of multiple equipment.
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
The torque upper limit in speed control mode is the smaller value between AI1
and AI2 inputs.
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
The torque upper limit in speed control mode is the larger value between AI1 and
AI2 inputs.

F2-10 Setting of torque upper limit in speed control (motoring)

Address: 0xF20A
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 150 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 200.0%
Description
The torque upper limit under motoring state takes the rated current of the AC
drive as the base value.

F2-11 Torque upper limit source in speed control (generating)

Address: 0xF20B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 8 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑121‑
Parameter Groups

0: Digital setting (F2-10)

1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Communication
6: Min. (AI1, AI2)
7: Max. (AI1, AI2)
8: Digital setting (F2-12)
Description
0: Digital setting (F2‑10)
The torque upper limit in speed control mode is set by F2-10 (digital setting of
torque upper limit in speed control).
1: AI1
The torque upper limit is input by current or voltage signal through the AI1. The
frequency is calculated according to the preset AI curve.
2: AI2
The torque upper limit is input by current or voltage signal through the AI2. The
frequency is calculated according to the preset AI curve.
3: AI3
The torque upper limit is input by current or voltage signal through the AI3. The
frequency is calculated according to the preset AI curve.
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
The torque upper limit in speed control mode is set through the DI5. The
frequency is calculated based on the curve of the relationship between the pulse
frequency and running frequency.
5: Communication
The main frequency is set through communication. The running frequency is
input through remote communication. The AC drive must be equipped with a
communication card to communicate with the host controller. This mode applies
to remote control or centralized control systems of multiple equipment.
6: Min. (AI1, AI2)
The torque upper limit in speed control mode is the smaller value between AI1
and AI2 inputs.
7: Max. (AI1, AI2)
The torque upper limit in speed control mode is the larger value between AI1 and
AI2 inputs.
8: Digital setting (F2‑12)
The torque upper limit in speed control mode is set by F2-12 (torque upper limit
reference in speed control (generating)).

‑122‑
 Parameter Groups

F2-12 Setting of torque upper limit in speed control (generating)

Address: 0xF20C
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 150 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 200.0%
Description
The torque upper limit under generating state takes the rated current of the AC
drive as the base value.

F2-13 Low-speed current loop Kp adjustment

Address: 0xF20D
Min.: 0.1 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1–10.0
Description

F2-14 Low-speed current loop Ki adjustment

Address: 0xF20E
Min.: 0.1 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1–10.0
Description

F2-15 High-speed current loop Kp adjustment

Address: 0xF20F
Min.: 0.1 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1–10.0
Description

‑123‑
Parameter Groups

F2-16 High-speed current loop Ki adjustment

Address: 0xF210
Min.: 0.1 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1–10.0
Description

F2-17 Speed loop Kp upon zero speed lock

Address: 0xF211
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 30 Change: In real time
Value Range:
1 to 100
Description

F2-18 Speed loop Ti upon zero speed lock

Address: 0xF212
Min.: 0.001 Unit: s
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.001s to 10.000s
Description

F2-19 Inertia compensation gain

Address: 0xF213
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
1 to 200
Description

F2-20 Speed loop switchover frequency upon zero speed lock

Address: 0xF214

‑124‑
 Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F2-02 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.05 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to F2-02
Description

F2-21 Maximum output voltage coefficient

Address: 0xF215
Min.: 100 Unit: -
Max.: 110 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
100–110
Description
This parameter defines the boost capacity of the maximum output voltage of the
AC drive.
Increasing F2-21 will improve the maximum loading capacity in motor field
weakening area. However, this will increase motor current ripples and heat the
motor. Decreasing F2-21 will lower the maximum loading capacity in motor field
weakening area. However, this will reduce motor current ripples and motor
heating values. Generally, this parameter needs no modification.

F2-22 Output voltage filter time

Address: 0xF216
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 0.01 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000s to 0.01s
Description
-

F2-23 Zero speed lock

Address: 0xF217
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

‑125‑
Parameter Groups

Description
-

F2-24 Vector overvoltage suppression Kp

Address: 0xF218
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 40 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–1000
Description
-

F2-25 Acceleration compensation gain

Address: 0xF219
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 200
Description
-

F2-26 Acceleration rate compensation filter time

Address: 0xF21A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–500
Description
-

F2-27 Overvoltage suppression in vector control mode

Address: 0xF21B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

‑126‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
-

F2-28 Cut-off frequency of torque filter

Address: 0xF21C
Min.: 50 Unit: Hz
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 500 Change: At stop
Value Range:
50 Hz to 1000 Hz
Description
-

F2-29 Synchronous motor initial angle detection current

Address: 0xF21D
Min.: 50 Unit: -
Max.: 180 Data type: UInt16
Default: 80 Change: In real time
Value Range:
50–180
Description
-

F2-30 Speed loop parameter auto-calculation

Address: 0xF21E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
-

F2-31 Expected speed loop bandwidth (high speed)

Address: 0xF21F
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 Hz to 3 Hz

‑127‑
Parameter Groups

Description
-

F2-32 Expected speed loop bandwidth (low speed)

Address: 0xF220
Min.: 1 Unit: Hz
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
1 Hz to 10000 Hz
Description
-

F2-33 Expected speed loop bandwidth (zero speed)

Address: 0xF221
Min.: 1 Unit: Hz
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
1 Hz to 10000 Hz
Description
-

F2-34 Expected speed loop damping ratio (unchanged generally)

Address: 0xF222
Min.: 0.1 Unit: -
Max.: 65 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1 to 65.000
Description
-

F2-35 System inertia (equivalent to the start time)

Address: 0xF223
Min.: 0.001 Unit: s
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.001s to 50.000s

‑128‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
-

F2-36 Single motor inertia (kg*m2)

Address: 0xF224
Min.: 0.001 Unit: kg*m2
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.001 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.001 kg*m2 to 50.000 kg*m2
Description
-

F2-37 Inertia auto-tuning maximum frequency

Address: 0xF225
Min.: 20 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 80 Change: At stop
Value Range:
20% to 100%
Description

F2-38 Inertia auto-tuning acceleration time

Address: 0xF226
Min.: 1 Unit: s
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: At stop
Value Range:
1.0s to 50.0s
Description

F2-39 Bandwidth 1 of speed loop dynamic optimization test

Address: 0xF227
Min.: 1 Unit: Hz
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
1.0 Hz to 200.0 Hz

‑129‑
Parameter Groups

Description

F2-40 Bandwidth 2 of speed loop dynamic optimization test

Address: 0xF228
Min.: 1 Unit: Hz
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
1.0 Hz to 200.0 Hz
Description

F2-41 Bandwidth 3 of speed loop dynamic optimization test

Address: 0xF229
Min.: 1 Unit: Hz
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 15 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
1.0 Hz to 100.0 Hz
Description

F2-42 Bandwidth 4 of speed loop dynamic optimization test

Address: 0xF22A
Min.: 1 Unit: Hz
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
1.0 Hz to 200.0 Hz
Description

F2-43 Inertia auto-tuning and dynamic speed reference

Address: 0xF22B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 30 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0–100

‑130‑
 Parameter Groups

Description

F2-44 Rotor time constant check

Address: 0xF22C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description

F2-45 Torque amplitude of rotor time constant check

Address: 0xF22D
Min.: 10 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 30 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
10% to 100%
Description

F2-46 Number of times of rotor time constant check

Address: 0xF22E
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 6 Data type: UInt16
Default: 3 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
1 to 6
Description

F2-47 Inertia auto-tuning

Address: 0xF22F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

‑131‑
Parameter Groups

Description

F2-48 Speed loop bandwidth during inertia auto-tuning

Address: 0xF230
Min.: 0.1 Unit: Hz
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.1 Hz to 100.0 Hz
Description

F2-49 Back EMF calculation

Address: 0xF231
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description

F2-50 Inertia auto-tuning mode

Address: 0xF232
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Acceleration/Deceleration mode
1: Triangular wave mode
Description

F2-51 Inertia auto-tuning acceleration/deceleration coefficient

Address: 0xF233
Min.: 0.1 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑132‑
 Parameter Groups

0.1–10.0
Description

F2-52 Decoupling control

Address: 0xF234
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description

F2-53 Generating power limit

Address: 0xF235
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description

F2-54 Power limit during generating

Address: 0xF236
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0% to 200.0%
Description

F2-55 Flux closed loop and torque linearity optimization in FVC mode
Address: 0xF237
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1111 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑133‑
Parameter Groups

Ones (position): Flux closed loop in torque control mode

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Tens (position): Flux closed loop in speed control mode
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Hundreds (position): Torque upper limit and torque linearity in speed control
mode
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description

F2-56 AC drive output current upper limit

Address: 0xF238
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 170 Data type: UInt16
Default: 150 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0% to 170.0%
Description

2.4 F3 V/f Control Parameters

F3-00 V/f curve setting

Address: 0xF300
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 11 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Linear V/f curve
1: Multi-point V/f curve
2: Square V/f curve
3: 1.2-power V/f curve
4: 1.4-power V/f curve
6: 1.6-power V/f curve
8: 1.8-power V/f curve
10: V/f complete separation mode
11: V/f half separation mode
Description

‑134‑
 Parameter Groups

0: Linear V/f curve

Under the rated frequency, the output voltage of the AC drive changes linearly
with the output frequency. This curve is suitable for general mechanical drive
applications such as large-inertia fan acceleration, punch presses, centrifuges,
and water pumps.
1: Multi-point V/f curve
The frequency ranges from 0.00 Hz to the rated motor frequency. The range of the
voltage points is 0.0% to 100.0%, which corresponds to the range of 0 V to the
rated motor voltage. The multi-point V/f curve references are typically determined
based on load of the motor. Ensure that the following conditions are met: F3‑03
≤ F3‑05 ≤ F3‑07.
2: Square V/f curve
Under the rated frequency, the output voltage changes with the output frequency
of the AC drive according to the 2-power curve. This curve is suitable for
applications with light loads that seldom change, such as fans and water pumps.
3: 1.2-power V/f curve
Under the rated frequency, the output voltage changes with the output frequency
of the AC drive according to the 1.2-power curve.
4: 1.4-power V/f curve
Under the rated frequency, the output voltage changes with the output frequency
of the AC drive according to the 1.4-power curve.
6: 1.6-power V/f curve
Under the rated frequency, the output voltage changes with the output frequency
of the AC drive according to the 1.6-power curve.
8: 1.8-power V/f curve
Under the rated frequency, the output voltage changes with the output frequency
of the AC drive according to the 1.8-power curve.
10: V/f complete separation mode
The output frequency and output voltage of the AC drive are independent of each
other. The output frequency is determined by the frequency source, and the
output voltage is determined by voltage source for V/f separation. This curve is
generally applicable to scenarios such as motor torque control.
11: V/f half separation mode
In this mode, the voltage (V) is proportional to the frequency (f). The relationship
between V and f can be set by the voltage source, and it is also related to the
rated motor voltage and rated motor frequency in group F1. Assume that the
voltage source input is X (0 to 100%), the relationship between V and f is as
follows: V/f = 2 x X x (Rated motor voltage)/(Rated motor frequency)

F3-01 Torque boost

Address: 0xF301

‑135‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 30 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 30.0%
Description
The torque boost function generally applies to the AC drive at low frequency. The
output torque of the AC drive in V/f control mode is proportional to the frequency.
Under the condition of low frequency, the torque of the motor is very low when
the motor runs at low speed. This parameter is used to increase the output
voltage of the AC drive, therefore increasing the current and output torque.
Set this parameter to a proper value to avoid triggering the overload protection
mistakenly.

F3-02 Cutoff frequency of torque boost

Address: 0xF302
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to F0-10
Description
When the running frequency reaches the cutoff frequency of torque boost, the
torque boost function is disabled.

F3-03 Multi-point V/f frequency 1

Address: 0xF303
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F3-05 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to F3-05
Description
This parameter defines frequency 1 in the multi-point V/f curve.

F3-04 Multi-point V/f voltage 1

Address: 0xF304
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑136‑
 Parameter Groups

0.0% to 100.0%
Description
This parameter defines voltage 1 in the multi-point V/f curve.

F3-05 Multi-point V/f frequency 2

Address: 0xF305
Min.: F3-03 Unit: Hz
Max.: F3-07 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
F3-03 to F3-07
Description
This parameter defines frequency 2 in the multi-point V/f curve.

F3-06 Multi-point V/f voltage 2

Address: 0xF306
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
This parameter defines voltage 2 in the multi-point V/f curve.

F3-07 Multi-point V/f frequency 3

Address: 0xF307
Min.: F3-05 Unit: Hz
Max.: F1-04 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
F3-05 to F1-04
Description
This parameter defines frequency 3 in the multi-point V/f curve.

F3-08 Multi-point V/f voltage 3

Address: 0xF308
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%

‑137‑
Parameter Groups

Description
This parameter defines voltage 3 in the multi-point V/f curve.

F3-09 V/f slip compensation gain

Address: 0xF309
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 200.0%
Description
In V/f mode, increasing the output frequency compensates for the motor speed
deceleration. A higher gain indicates a higher compensation frequency. However,
an excessively high gain can incur overcompensation.

F3-10 V/f over-excitation gain

Address: 0xF30A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 64 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 200
Description
A larger over-excitation gain indicates better suppression effect. When a braking
resistor, braking unit, or energy feedback unit is used, set this parameter to 0.
Otherwise, overcurrent may occur during operation.

F3-11 V/f oscillation suppression gain

Address: 0xF30B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–100
Description
A larger oscillation gain indicates better suppression effect.

F3-12 Oscillation suppression gain mode

Address: 0xF30C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16

‑138‑
 Parameter Groups

Default: 3 Change: At stop

Value Range:
0: Inactive
1: Reserved
2: Reserved
3: Active
Description
In V/f mode, speed and current oscillation typically occurs when the motor runs at
low frequency, which may lead to overcurrent of the AC drive. In this case, you
can enable this function to eliminate oscillation.

F3-13 Voltage source for V/f separation

Address: 0xF30D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 8 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Digital setting (F3-14)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Multi-reference
6: Simple PLC
7: PID
8: Communication (1000H)
Description
This parameter sets the target voltage in V/f separation mode.
0: Digital setting (F3‑14)
The V/f separation voltage is set by F3-14 (voltage digital setting of V/f separation).
1: AI1
The V/f separation voltage is input by current or voltage signal through the AI1.
The frequency is calculated according to the AI curve.
2: AI2
The V/f separation voltage is input by current or voltage signal through the AI2.
The frequency is calculated according to the AI curve.
3: AI3
The V/f separation voltage is input by current or voltage signal through the AI3.
The frequency is calculated according to the AI curve.

‑139‑
Parameter Groups

4: The Pulse reference (DI5)

The V/f separation voltage is set through the DI5. The frequency is calculated
based on the curve of the relationship between the pulse frequency and running
frequency.
5: Multi-reference
In multi-reference mode, different combinations of DI terminal states correspond
to different reference values. The four multi-reference terminals can provide 16
state combinations, corresponding to 16 reference values (percentage x
maximum frequency) of parameters in group FC.
6: Simple PLC
The V/f separation voltage is set by simple PLC. For details, see the function
description of simple PLC.
7: PID
The V/f separation voltage is set by PID. For details, see the PID function
description.
8: Communication
The main frequency is set through communication. The running frequency is
input through remote communication. The AC drive must be equipped with a
communication card to communicate with the host controller. This mode applies
to remote control or centralized control systems of multiple equipment.

F3-14 Digital setting of voltage for V/f separation

Address: 0xF30E
Min.: 0 Unit: V
Max.: F1-02 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 V to F1-02
Description
The reference value is from 0 V to the rated voltage.

F3-15 Voltage rise time of V/f separation

Address: 0xF30F
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 1000.0s
Description
Indicates the time required for the output voltage to increase from 0 to the set V/f
separation voltage.

‑140‑
 Parameter Groups

F3-16 Voltage decline time of V/f separation

Address: 0xF310
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 1000.0s
Description
Indicates the time required for the output voltage to decline from the set V/f
separation voltage to 0.

F3-17 Stop mode selection for V/f separation

Address: 0xF311
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Frequency and voltage decline to 0.
1: Frequency declines to 0 after voltage declines to 0.
Description
0: Frequency and voltage decline to 0.
1: Frequency declines after voltage declines to 0.

F3-18 V/f overcurrent stall action current

Address: 0xF312
Min.: 50 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 150 Change: At stop
Value Range:
50% to 200%
Description
When the motor current reaches the value of this parameter, the AC drive starts
the overcurrent stall function. The default value is 150%, indicating 1.5 times the
rated current of the AC drive.

F3-19 V/f overcurrent stall

Address: 0xF313
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑141‑
Parameter Groups

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
Determines whether the V/f overcurrent stall function is enabled.

F3-20 V/f overcurrent stall suppression gain

Address: 0xF314
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–100
Description
When the current exceeds the overcurrent stall action current, the overcurrent
stall suppression function is triggered, and the output frequency decreases. When
the current falls below the overcurrent stall threshold, the output frequency
increases to the target frequency, and the actual acceleration time prolongs
automatically. A larger parameter value indicates better suppression effect.

F3-21 Action current compensation coefficient for V/f speed multiplying

overcurrent stall
Address: 0xF315
Min.: 50 Unit: -
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: At stop
Value Range:
50 to 200
Description
This parameter reduces the overcurrent stall action current at high speed. It is
invalid when set to 50%. The recommended value for F3-18 in the flux weakening
area is 100%.

F3-22 Overvoltage stall action voltage in V/f mode

Address: 0xF316
Min.: 200 Unit: V
Max.: 2000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 770 Change: At stop
Value Range:
200.0 V to 2000.0 V
Description
When the bus voltage reaches the value of this parameter, the AC drive starts
overvoltage stall protection.

‑142‑
 Parameter Groups

F3-23 Overvoltage stall in V/f mode

Address: 0xF317
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (default)
The function of F3-23 is the same as that of F9‑04.
When a braking resistor, braking unit, or energy feedback unit is used, set this
parameter to 0. Otherwise, the deceleration time may be prolonged.

F3-24 Frequency gain for overvoltage stall suppression in V/f mode

Address: 0xF318
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 30 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–100
Description
Increasing F3‑24 will improve the control effect of the bus voltage, but the output
frequency will fluctuate. If the output frequency fluctuates greatly, reduce F3‑24
appropriately.

F3-25 Voltage gain for overvoltage stall suppression in V/f mode

Address: 0xF319
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 30 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–100
Description
This parameter is used to suppress the bus voltage. Increasing the parameter
value reduces the overshoot of the bus voltage.

F3-26 Frequency rise threshold during overvoltage stall

Address: 0xF31A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16

‑143‑
Parameter Groups

Default: 5 Change: At stop

Value Range:
0–50
Description
The running frequency may increase when overvoltage stall suppression is
enabled. This parameter limits the increase of the running frequency.

F3-27 Slip compensation time constant

Address: 0xF31B
Min.: 0.1 Unit: Hz
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1 Hz to 10.0 Hz
Description
This parameter defines the time constant of the slip compensation frequency. The
larger the time constant is, the more stable the frequency of the slip
compensation is, and the less the frequency is affected by load disturbance and
noise. However, the response to load changes will be slower.

F3-28 V/f parameter setting inertia coefficient

Address: 0xF31C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.00 to 10.00
Description

F3-29 Minimum motoring torque current

Address: 0xF31D
Min.: 10 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: At stop
Value Range:
10 to 100
Description

‑144‑
 Parameter Groups

F3-30 Maximum generating torque current

Address: 0xF31E
Min.: 10 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: At stop
Value Range:
10 to 100
Description

F3-31 Automatic frequency rise Kp

Address: 0xF31F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–100
Description

F3-32 Automatic frequency rise Ki

Address: 0xF320
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–100
Description

F3-33 Online torque compensation gain

Address: 0xF321
Min.: 80 Unit: -
Max.: 150 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: At stop
Value Range:
80–150

‑145‑
Parameter Groups

Description
In V/f mode, F3-01 increases the output voltage of the AC drive according to a
fixed curve. When F3-33 is larger than or equal to 100 or F3-01 is set to 0, the
automatic torque boost compensation is an additional boost value related to the
load plus the output voltage set by F3-01. The greater the F3-33, the greater the
torque boost compensation. When F3-33 is smaller than 100 and F3-01 is set to a
non-zero value, the automatic torque boost compensation is disabled.

2.5 F4 Input Terminal

F4-00 DI1 function selection

Address: 0xF400
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑146‑
 Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑147‑
Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Reserved
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/Three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Roll diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
0: No function
The DI terminal has no function.
1: Forward run
The operation mode of the AC drive is forward run. FWD indicates forward run. In
two-wire mode 1 (F4‑11 = 0), activating the terminal sets the AC drive to forward
run. In two-wire mode 2 (F4‑11 = 1), activating the terminal gives a running
command.

‑148‑
 Parameter Groups

2: Reverse run
The operation mode of the AC drive is reverse run. REV indicates reverse run. In
three-wire mode 1 (F4‑11 = 2), activating the terminal sets the AC drive to reverse
run. In three-wire mode 2 (F4‑11 = 3), activating the terminal sets the forward/
reverse run direction.
3: Three-wire operation control
The AC drive operation mode is three-wire control mode. To set the running
command through the terminal, set F4-11 (Terminal control mode) to 2 (Three-
wire mode 1) or 3 (three-wire mode 2), and set this parameter to 3. The three-wire
control modes include three-wire mode 1 and three-wire mode 2.
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
The terminal is used to set the AC drive to FJOG mode. In the jog mode, the AC
drive runs at low speed for a short time, which is generally used for maintenance
and commissioning of field equipment.
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
The terminal is used to set the AC drive to RJOG mode.
6: Terminal UP
The terminal is used to increase the frequency when the frequency is set through
the terminal. When the terminal is active, the effect is equivalent to holding down
the increment key. When the terminal is inactive, the effect is equivalent to
releasing the increment key.
7: Terminal DOWN
The terminal is used to decrease the frequency when the frequency is set through
the terminal. When the terminal is active, the effect is equivalent to holding down
the decrement key. When the terminal is inactive, the effect is equivalent to
releasing the decrement key.
8: Coast to stop
Once the AC drive receives a stop command, it immediately stops output and the
load then coasts to stop based on the mechanical inertia. The AC drive stops by
stopping the output. At this time, the power supply of the motor is cut off and the
drive system is in a free braking state. Since the stop time is determined by the
inertia of the system, this is also called inertia stop.
9: Fault reset (RESET). Activating the terminal resets the AC drive upon a fault.
This function is the same as that of the STOP/RES key on the operating panel. This
function can remotely reset the AC drive upon a fault.
10: Running pause
With this function enabled, the AC drive decelerates to stop with all running
parameters memorized (such as PLC, wobble, and PID parameters). When the
terminal is inactive, the AC drive resumes its status before stop.
11: NO input of external fault
The AC drive reports Err15 upon receiving an external signal.

‑149‑
Parameter Groups

12-15: Multi-reference terminals 1–4

The AC drive selects the multi-reference as the main frequency. The setting of 16
speeds or 16 references can be implemented through combinations of 16 states of
these four terminals. This function is applicable to applications where continuous
adjustment of the AC drive running frequency is not required and only several
frequency values are required.
16-17: Terminal 1 to 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
Four groups of acceleration and deceleration time can be switched through four
states of these two terminals. The acceleration time indicates the time required
by the AC drive to accelerate from 0 Hz to the acceleration/deceleration base
frequency (F0‑25). The deceleration time indicates the time required by the AC
drive to decelerate from the acceleration/deceleration base frequency (F0‑25) to 0
Hz.
18: Frequency source switchover
This function enables selection of different frequency reference input mode. The
frequency reference is set by F0-07 (Final frequency reference setting selection).
19: UP and DOWN setting clear
When the main frequency is set through the operating panel and this terminal is
active, the frequency set through the UP/DOWN keys on the operating panel can
be cleared, and the frequency will be reset to the value of F0-08.
20: Command source switchover terminal 1
When the running command is set through the terminal (F0‑02=1) and this
terminal is active, the control mode can be switched between the terminal and
the operating panel.
When the running command is set through communication (F0-02 = 2) and this
terminal is active, the control mode can be switched between the communication
and the operating panel.
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibition
The terminal is used to keep the AC drive at the current running frequency
regardless of changes of the external input frequency (unless a stop command is
received).
22: PID pause
PID is invalid temporarily. The AC drive maintains the current output frequency
without supporting PID adjustment of the frequency source.
23: PLC state reset
The terminal is used to restore the AC drive to the initial state of the simple PLC.
24: Wobble pause
In the wobble process, when this terminal is active, the wobble function pauses
(the AC drive outputs at the center frequency).
25: Counter input
In the count process, when the terminal is active, a count pulse is input.

‑150‑
 Parameter Groups

26: Counter reset

In the count process, when the terminal is active, the counter status is cleared.
27: Length count input
In the fixed length process, when the terminal is active, the length count is input.
28: Length reset
In the fixed length process, when the terminal is active, the length is cleared.
29: Torque control inhibited
When the terminal is active, the AC drive switches from the torque control mode
to the speed control mode. When the terminal is inactive, the AC drive switches
back to the
torque control mode:
30: Pulse input
When DI5 is used as the pulse input terminal, DI5 must be allocated with this
function.
32: Immediate DC braking
The terminal is used to directly switch the AC drive to the DC braking state. DC
braking means that the AC drive outputs DC to the stator winding of the
asynchronous motor to form a static magnetic field,
enabling the motor to brake with energy consumption. In this state, the rotor cuts
the static magnetic field to generate braking torque, which stops the motor
quickly.
33: NC input of external fault
The AC drive reports Err15 upon receiving an external signal.
34: Frequency modification enabled
When the terminal is active, the frequency can be modified. When the terminal is
inactive, the frequency cannot be modified.
35: PID action direction reversal
The PID action direction is reversed to the direction set by FA-03 (PID action
direction).
36: External stop terminal 1
When the running command is set through the operating panel (F0‑02 = 0), this
terminal is used to stop the AC drive, which functions the same as the STOP/RES
key on the operating panel.
37: Command source switchover terminal 2
This function enables the switchover between the terminal control and the
communication control.
If the running command is given by terminal, the terminal being active switches
the system to the communication control mode.
If the running command is given by communication, the terminal being active
switches the system to the terminal control mode.

‑151‑
Parameter Groups

38: PID integral pause

The integral adjustment function pauses when the terminal is active. However,
the proportional and derivative adjustment functions are still valid.
39: Switchover between main frequency reference X and preset frequency
This function is used to switch from main frequency reference X to F0-08 (Preset
frequency).
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency reference Y and preset frequency
This function is used to switch from auxiliary frequency reference Y to F0-08
(Preset frequency).
41: Reserved
42: Position lock enabled
When the terminal is active, the AC drive decelerates to 0 Hz and then enters the
position lock state.
43: PID parameter switchover
If PID parameters are switched over through DI (FA‑18 = 1), the following
conditions are true. When the terminal is inactive, the PID parameters are FA-05 to
FA‑07 (proportional gain Kp1, integral time Ti1, and differential time Td1). When
the terminal is active, the PID parameters are FA-15 to FA‑17 (PID gain Kp2,
integral time Ti2, and differential time Td2).
44: User-defined fault 1
When the AC drive reports Err27, the AC drive will action according to the value of
F9-49 (Fault protection action selection).
45: User-defined fault 2
When the AC drive reports Err28, the AC drive will action according to the value of
F9-49 (Fault protection action selection).
46: Switchover between speed control and torque control
The terminal is used to switch between the speed control mode and the torque
control mode.
When A0‑00 (speed/torque control mode) is set to 0, the torque control mode is
used when the terminal is active, and the speed control mode is used when the
terminal is inactive.
When A0‑00 (speed/torque control mode) is set to 1, the speed control mode is
used when the terminal is active, and
torque control mode is used when the terminal is inactive.

‑152‑
 Parameter Groups

47: Emergency stop

When the system is in the emergency state, the AC drive decelerates according to
F8-55 (Terminal deceleration time for emergency stop). When the deceleration
time for emergency stop is 0s in V/f mode, the AC drive decelerates according to
the minimum unit time. The input terminal does not need to be kept in the closed
state. Even if it stays closed only for a short moment, the AC drive will come to an
emergency stop. Different from general deceleration, if the emergency stop input
terminal is opened after the deceleration time for emergency stop expires and the
running signal is still active on the AC drive terminal, the AC drive will not restart.
To restart the AC drive in this case, disconnect the running terminal and input the
running command.
48: External stop terminal 2
The terminal is used to make the AC drive decelerate to stop in any control mode
(operating panel, terminal, or communication control). In this case, the
deceleration time is fixed to deceleration time 4 (F8‑08).
49: Deceleration DC braking
The AC drive decelerates to F6-11 (Shutdown DC injection braking start frequency)
and then enters the DC braking state.
50: Clear the current running time
The terminal is used to clear the current operation time of the AC drive. If the
current running time is less than the set value (greater than 0) of F8-53 (Current
running time reached), and the terminal is active, the current running timing is
cleared. If the current running time is greater than the set value (greater than 0) of
F8-53, and the terminal is active, the current running time is not cleared.
51: Two-wire/Three-wire control switchover
The terminal is used to switch between two-wire control and three-wire control.
When F4‑11 is set to 0 (Two-wire mode 1) and the terminal is active, the AC drive
switches to three-wire mode 1. When the terminal is inactive, two-wire mode 1 is
used.
When F4‑11 is set to 1 (Two-wire mode 2) and the terminal is active, the AC drive
switches to three-wire mode 2.
When F4‑11 is set to 2 (Three-wire mode 1) and the terminal is active, the AC drive
switches to two-wire mode 1.
When F4‑11 is set to 3 (Three-wire mode 2) and the terminal is active, the AC drive
switches to two-wire mode 2.
52: Electromagnetic shorting
When the terminal is active, the AC drive enters the electromagnetic shorting
state.
53 Thickness overlaying
When the roll diameter is calculated based on accumulative thickness, this
terminal records the number of revolutions.

‑153‑
Parameter Groups

54: Roll diameter reset

When this terminal is active, the initial roll diameter is reset. The initial roll
diameter must be reset when the roll is replaced in the tension mode.
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
In the tension mode, B0-11/12/13 is selected as the initial roll diameter through
terminal combinations. When these two terminals are inactive, the minimum
winding diameter (B0-09) is used as the initial roll diameter. When only the
terminal for initial roll diameter 1 selection is active, B0-11 is used as the initial
roll diameter. When only the terminal for initial roll diameter 2 selection is active,
B0-12 is used as the initial roll diameter. When these two terminals are active, B0-
13 is used as the initial roll diameter.
57: Pre-drive
When the terminal is active, the AC drive switches to the pre-drive speed control
mode. This function is used to synchronize the linear speed for the axis that
requires automatic reel replacement when the tension mode is used. When the
terminal is deactivated after reel replacement, the tension control can function
properly.
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
This terminal is used for winding/unwinding switchover in the tension mode.
59: Roll diameter calculation disabled
When this terminal is active, the roll diameter calculation is disabled. In the
tension mode, to avoid influence on the winding diameter calculation for
automatic roll replacement and pre-drive, winding diameter calculation can be
disabled.
60: Exit tension mode
This terminal is used to exit the tension control mode.
61: Terminal tension rise
When the terminal is activated, the tension torque is increased by certain ratio.
After the terminal is deactivated, the boost part will be canceled gradually based
on time.
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
In the tension mode, B0‑32/33/34/35 is selected as the material thickness through
terminal combinations. When these two terminals are inactive, B0‑32 is selected
as the material thickness. When only the terminal for thickness selection 1 is
active, B0‑33 is selected as the material thickness. When only the terminal for
thickness selection 2 is active, B0‑34 is selected as the material thickness. When
these two terminals are active, B0‑35 is selected as the material thickness.
64-89: Reserved
90: Water cooling system fault
When the water cooling system of T13 models encounters a fault, the terminal
receives the signal and the AC drive reports the E64 alarm.

‑154‑
 Parameter Groups

91: Low liquid level fault

When the liquid in the water tank of T13 models is too low, the terminal receives
the signal and the AC drive reports the A63 alarm.
92: Revolution count reset
The number of revolutions counted will be cleared after this terminal is activated.
93: Reserved

F4-01 DI2 function selection

Address: 0xF401
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 4 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑155‑
Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑156‑
 Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Motor selection
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Winding diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Used to set the function of DI2 terminal.
The setting is similar to that of F4-00.

F4-02 DI3 function selection

Address: 0xF402
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 9 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑157‑
Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑158‑
 Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Motor selection
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Winding diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Used to set the function of DI3 terminal.
The setting is similar to that of F4-00.

F4-03 DI4 function selection

Address: 0xF403
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 12 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑159‑
Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑160‑
 Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Motor selection
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Winding diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Used to set the function of DI4 terminal.
The setting is similar to that of F4-00.

F4-04 DI5 function selection

Address: 0xF404
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 13 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑161‑
Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑162‑
 Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Motor selection
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Winding diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Used to set the function of DI5 terminal.
The setting is similar to that of F4-00.

F4-05 DI6 function selection

Address: 0xF405
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑163‑
Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑164‑
 Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Motor selection
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Winding diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Used to set the function of DI6 terminal.
The setting is similar to that of F4-00.

F4-06 DI7 function selection

Address: 0xF406
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑165‑
Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑166‑
 Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Motor selection
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Winding diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Used to set the function of DI7 terminal.
The setting is similar to that of F4-00.

F4-07 DI8 function selection

Address: 0xF407
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑167‑
Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑168‑
 Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Motor selection
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Winding diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Used to set the function of DI8 terminal.
The setting is similar to that of F4-00.

F4-08 DI9 function selection

Address: 0xF408
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑169‑
Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11:NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16:Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25:Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enable
35: PID action direction reversal

‑170‑
 Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Motor selection
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover59: Winding diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Used to set the function of DI9.
The setting is similar to that of F4-00.

F4-09 DI10 function selection

Address: 0xF409
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑171‑
Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑172‑
 Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Motor selection
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Winding diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Used to set the function of DI10.
The setting is similar to that of F4-00.

F4-10 DI filter time

Address: 0xF40A
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.01 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑173‑
Parameter Groups

0.000s to 1.000s
Description
It is used to set the software filter time of DI terminal status. If DI terminals are
liable to be interfered, which may cause malfunction, increase the value of this
parameter to enhance the anti-interference capability. However, increasing the DI
filter time will slow the response of DI terminals.

F4-11 Terminal control mode

Address: 0xF40B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Two-wire mode 1
1: Two-wire mode 2
2: Three-wire mode 1
3: Three-wire mode 2
Description
This parameter defines the mode in which the AC drive is controlled by external
terminals.
0: Two-wire mode 1
Two DI terminals are connected. One is used to start/stop the AC drive in forward
run mode, and the other is used to start/stop the AC drive in reverse run mode.
1: Two-wire mode 2
Two DI terminals are connected. One is used to start/stop the AC drive, and the
other is used to control the running direction.
2: Three-wire mode 1
Three DI terminals are connected. One is used to start/stop the AC drive, and the
other two are used to control the running direction.
3: Three-wire mode 2
Three DI terminals are connected. One is used to start the AC drive, one is used to
stop the AC drive, and the last one is used to control the running direction.

F4-12 Terminal UP/DOWN change rate

Address: 0xF40C
Min.: 0.001 Unit: Hz/s
Max.: 65.535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.001 Hz/s to 65.535 Hz/s
Description

‑174‑
 Parameter Groups

This parameter defines the change rate when the frequency is adjusted through
terminal UP/DOWN.
When the DI terminal function is set to the function of terminal UP or DOWN, this
parameter must be set (values of F4‑00 to F4‑09 are 6 or 7).

F4-13 AI curve 1 minimum input

Address: 0xF40D
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: F4-15 Data type: Int16
Default: -10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.00 V to F4-15
Description
When the main frequency is set by analog input, the AI terminals are used as
frequency sources. Five types of AI curves can be set for each AI terminal. The AI
curve is used to set the mapping between the analog input voltage (or current)
and the percentage corresponding to the maximum frequency (F0‑10). The x axis
of the AI curve represents the analog input voltage or current. The y axis
represents the set value corresponding to the analog input, that is, the
percentage corresponding to the maximum frequency (F0‑10). Five AI curves are
provided. Curves 1 to 3 are two-point curves, and their relevant parameters are
F4-13 to F4-27. Curves 4 and 5 are four-point curves, and their relevant
parameters are A6-00 to A6-15. The two points on curves 1 to 3 are the minimum
input point and the maximum input point. F4-13 corresponds to the x axis of the
AI curve 1 minimum input, that is, the minimum analog input voltage or current.

F4-14 Percentage corresponding to AI curve 1 minimum input

Address: 0xF40E
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: -100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
F4-14 corresponds to the y axis of the AI curve 1 minimum input, that is, the set
value corresponding to the minimum analog input.

F4-15 AI curve 1 maximum input

Address: 0xF40F
Min.: F4-13 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16

‑175‑
Parameter Groups

Default: 10 Change: In real time

Value Range:
F4-13 to 10.00 V
Description
F4-15 corresponds to the x axis of AI curve 1 maximum input, that is, the
maximum analog input voltage or current.

F4-16 Percentage corresponding to AI curve 1 maximum input

Address: 0xF410
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
F4-16 corresponds to the y axis of the AI curve 1 maximum input, that is, the set
value corresponding to the maximum analog input.

F4-17 AI1 fitter time

Address: 0xF411
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00s to 10.00s
Description
Indicates the software filter time of AI1.
The longer the AI filter time, the stronger the anti-interference ability and the
slower the response speed to the analog detection. The shorter the AI filter time,
the weaker the anti-interference ability and the faster the response speed to
analog detection.
When the field analog signal is easy to be interfered, the stability of the analog
signal can be enhanced by increasing the AI filtering time.

F4-18 AI curve 2 minimum input

Address: 0xF412
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: F4-20 Data type: Int16
Default: -10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.00 V to F4-20

‑176‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
F4-18 corresponds to the x axis of the AI curve 2 minimum input, that is, the
minimum analog input voltage or current.

F4-19 Percentage corresponding to AI curve 2 minimum input

Address: 0xF413
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: -100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
F4-19 corresponds to the y axis of the AI curve 2 minimum input, that is, the set
value corresponding to the minimum analog input.

F4-20 AI curve 2 maximum input

Address: 0xF414
Min.: F4-18 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
F4-18 to 10.00 V
Description
F4-20 corresponds to the x axis of the AI curve 2 maximum input, that is, the
maximum analog input voltage or current.

F4-21 Percentage corresponding to AI curve 2 maximum input

Address: 0xF415
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to 100.0%
Description
F4-21 corresponds to the y axis of AI curve 2 maximum input, that is, the set value
corresponding to the maximum analog input.

F4-22 AI2 fitter time

Address: 0xF416
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16

‑177‑
Parameter Groups

Default: 0.1 Change: In real time

Value Range:
0.00s to 10.00s
Description
Indicates the software filter time of AI2.
The longer the AI filter time, the stronger the anti-interference ability and the
slower the response speed to the analog detection. The shorter the AI filter time,
the weaker the anti-interference ability and the faster the response speed to
analog detection.
When the field analog signal is easy to be interfered, the stability of the analog
signal can be enhanced by increasing the AI filtering time.

F4-23 AI curve 3 minimum input

Address: 0xF417
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: F4-25 Data type: Int16
Default: -10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.00 V to F4-25
Description
F4-23 corresponds to the x axis of the AI curve 3 minimum input, that is, the
minimum analog input voltage or current.

F4-24 Percentage corresponding to AI curve 3 minimum input

Address: 0xF418
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: -100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
F4-24 corresponds to the y axis of AI curve 3 minimum input, that is, the set value
corresponding to the minimum analog input.

F4-25 AI curve 3 maximum input

Address: 0xF419
Min.: F4-23 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
F4-23 to 10.00 V

‑178‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
F4-25 corresponds to the x axis of AI curve 3 maximum input, that is, the
maximum analog input voltage or current.

F4-26 Percentage corresponding to AI curve 3 maximum input

Address: 0xF41A
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
F4-26 corresponds to the y axis of AI curve 3 maximum input, that is, the set value
corresponding to the maximum analog input.

F4-27 AI3 filter time

Address: 0xF41B
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00s to 10.00s
Description
Indicates the software filter time of AI3.
The longer the AI filter time, the stronger the anti-interference ability and the
slower the response speed to the analog detection. The shorter the AI filter time,
the weaker the anti-interference ability and the faster the response speed to
analog detection.
When the field analog signal is easy to be interfered, the stability of the analog
signal can be enhanced by increasing the AI filtering time.

F4-28 Pulse minimum input

Address: 0xF41C
Min.: 0 Unit: kHz
Max.: F4-30 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 kHz to F4-30
Description

‑179‑
Parameter Groups

When the DI5 high-speed pulse is used to set the main frequency, the relationship
curve between the pulse frequency and the frequency reference must be defined.
The frequency reference is the percentage corresponding to the maximum
frequency (F0-10). The x axis of the curve represents the DI5 pulse frequency and
the y axis represents the percentage corresponding to the maximum frequency
(F0‑10). The curve is a two-point curve, which includes the minimum pulse input
and maximum pulse input points.
F4‑28 corresponds to the x axis of the minimum pulse input, that is, the minimum
input frequency of the pulse.

F4-29 Percentage corresponding to pulse minimum input

Address: 0xF41D
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
F4-29 corresponds to the y axis of the minimum pulse input, that is, the set value
corresponding to the minimum pulse input.

F4-30 Pulse maximum input

Address: 0xF41E
Min.: F4-28 Unit: kHz
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
F4-28 to 100.00 kHz
Description
F4‑30 corresponds to the x axis of the maximum pulse input, that is, the maximum
input frequency of the pulse.

F4-31 Percentage corresponding to pulse maximum input

Address: 0xF41F
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
F4-31 corresponds to the y axis of the maximum pulse input, that is, the set value
corresponding to the maximum pulse input.

‑180‑
 Parameter Groups

F4-32 Pulse filter time

Address: 0xF420
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00s to 10.00s
Description
Indicates the filter time of the frequency reference.

F4-33 AI curve selection

Address: 0xF421
Min.: 0x111 Unit: -
Max.: 0x555 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0x321 Change: In real time
Value Range:
Ones: AI1
1: Curve 1 (2 points, see F4-13 to F4-16)
2: Curve 2 (2 points, see F4-18 to F4-21)
3: Curve 3 (2 points, see F4-23 to F4-26)
4: Curve 4 (4 points, see A6-00 to A6-07)
5: Curve 5 (4 points, see A6-08 to A6-15)
Tens: AI2
1: Curve 1 (2 points, see F4-13 to F4-16)
2: Curve 2 (2 points, see F4-18 to F4-21)
3: Curve 3 (2 points, see F4-23 to F4-26)
4: Curve 4 (4 points, see A6-00 to A6-07)
5: Curve 5 (4 points, see A6-08 to A6-15)
Hundreds: AI3
1: Curve 1 (2 points, see F4-13 to F4-16)
2: Curve 2 (2 points, see F4-18 to F4-21)
3: Curve 3 (2 points, see F4-23 to F4-26)
4: Curve 4 (4 points, see A6-00 to A6-07)
5: Curve 5 (4 points, see A6-08 to A6-15)
Description
The curves for AI1 to AI3 are set through the ones, tens, and hundreds positions of
this parameter. The three AI terminals can be allocated with any of the five curves.
When the main frequency is set by analog input, the AI terminals are used as
frequency sources. Five types of different AI curves can be set for each AI terminal.

F4-34 Selection of AI smaller than the minimum input setting

Address: 0xF422

‑181‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0x111 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
Ones (position): AI1
0: Percentage corresponding to minimum input
1: 0.0%
Tens (position): AI2
0: Percentage corresponding to minimum input
1: 0.0%
Hundreds (position): AI3
0: Percentage corresponding to minimum input
1: 0.0%
Description
The settings for AI1 to AI3 less than minimum input are set through the ones, tens,
and hundreds positions of this parameter. When the analog input voltage is less
than the minimum input set by F4‑13, the corresponding setting value is
calculated according to the minimum input or 0.0% defined by this parameter.

F4-35 DI1 delay

Address: 0xF423
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 3600 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 3600.0s
Description
This parameter defines the delay of the DI state change. The delay setting
function is available only for DI1, DI2, and DI3 currently.

F4-36 DI2 delay

Address: 0xF424
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 3600 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 3600.0s
Description
This parameter defines the delay of the DI state change. The delay setting
function is available only for DI1, DI2, and DI3 currently.

‑182‑
 Parameter Groups

F4-37 DI3 delay

Address: 0xF425
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 3600 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 3600.0s
Description
This parameter defines the delay of the DI state change. The delay setting
function is available only for DI1, DI2, and DI3 currently.

F4-38 DI valid mode selection 1

Address: 0xF426
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 11111 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
Ones: DI1 valid mode selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Tens: DI2 valid mode selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Hundreds: DI3 valid mode selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Thousands: DI4 valid mode selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Ten thousands: DI5 valid mode selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Description
The active mode for terminals DI1 to DI5 are set by ones, tens, hundreds,
thousands, and ten thousands of this parameter.
0: Active high
The DI terminals (DI1 to DI5) are active when connected to COM and inactive
when disconnected from COM.
1: Active low
The DI terminals (DI1 to DI5) are inactive when connected to COM and active
when disconnected from COM.

‑183‑
Parameter Groups

F4-39 DI valid mode selection 2

Address: 0xF427
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 11111 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
Ones: DI6 valid mode selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Tens: DI7 valid mode selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Hundreds: DI8 valid mode selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Thousands: DI9 valid mode selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Ten thousands: DI10 valid mode selection
0: Active high
1: Active low
Description
The active mode for terminals DI6 to DI10 are set by ones, tens, hundreds,
thousands, and ten thousands of this parameter.
0: Active high
The DI terminals (DI6 to DI10) are active when connected to COM and inactive
when disconnected from COM.
1: Active low
The DI terminals (DI6 to DI10) are inactive when connected to COM and active
when disconnected from COM.

F4-42 AI input range selection

Address: 0xF42A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: ‑10 V to +10 V
1: 0 V to 10 V
Description
0: ‑10 V to +10 V, applicable to new control boards
1: 0 V to 10 V, applicable to old control boards

‑184‑
 Parameter Groups

2.6 F5 Output Terminal

F5-01 Expansion card relay output function selection

Address: 0xF501
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 51 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: No output
1: Running
2: Fault output (stop upon fault)
3: Frequency-level detection FDT1 output
4: Frequency reached
5: Zero speed running (no output at stop)
6: Motor overload pre-warning
7: AC drive overload pre-warning
8: Set count value reached
9: Designated count value reached
10: Length reached
11: PLC cycle completed
12: Accumulative running time reached
13: Frequency limited
14: Torque limited
15: Ready for run

‑185‑
Parameter Groups

16: AI1 > AI2

17: Frequency upper limit reached
18: Frequency lower limit reached (operation related)
19: Undervoltage status output
20: Communication setting
21: Reserved
22: Reserved
23: Zero-speed running 2 (at stop)
24: Accumulative power-on time reached
25: Frequency-level detection FDT2 output
26: Frequency 1 reach output
27: Frequency 2 reach output
28: Current 1 reach output
29: Current 2 reach output
30: Timing reach output
31: AI1 input limit exceeded
32: AC drive output load loss
33: Reverse running
34: Zero current status
35: Module temperature reached
36: Output current limit exceeded
37: Frequency lower limit reached (having output at stop)
38: Alarm output (direct output at fault or alarm)
39: Current over-temperature pre-warning
40: Current running time reached
41: Fault output 2
42: Fault output 3
Description
This parameter is used to set the relay terminal function of the expansion card.
0: No output
The output terminal has no function.
1: Running
When the AC drive is running with output frequency (can be 0), the terminal
outputs an active signal.
2: Fault output (stop upon fault)
When the AC drive stops upon fault, an active signal is output.
3: Frequency-level detection FDT1 output
When the running frequency is higher than the detected value, the DO outputs an
active signal. When the running frequency is lower than the result of the detected
value minus the FDT hysteresis value (F8‑19 x F8-20), the active signal is canceled.

‑186‑
 Parameter Groups

4: Frequency reached
When the running frequency of the AC drive is within a certain range (target
frequency ± F8-21 x maximum frequency), the DO outputs an active signal.
5: Zero speed running (no output at stop)
When the output frequency is 0 during AC drive running, an active signal is output.
When the AC drive is in the stop state, the signal is inactive.
6: Motor overload pre-warning
The AC drive determines whether the motor load exceeds the overload pre-
warning threshold according to the overload pre-warning coefficient (F9‑02)
before performing the protection action. The terminal outputs an active signal
when the overload pre-warning threshold is exceeded.
7: AC drive overload pre-warning
The terminal outputs an active signal 10s before the AC drive performs overload
protection.
8: Set count value reached
The terminal outputs an active signal when the count value reaches the value of
FB‑08.
9: Designated count value reached
The terminal outputs an active signal when the count value reaches the value of
FB‑09.
10: Length reached
The terminal outputs an active signal when the detected actual length exceeds
the value of FB‑05.
11: Simple PLC cycle completed
The terminal outputs a pulse signal with the width of 250 ms when the simple PLC
completes one cycle.
12: Accumulative running time reached
The terminal outputs an active signal when the accumulative running time of the
AC drive exceeds the value of F8-17 (Accumulative power-on time threshold).
13: Frequency limited
The terminal outputs an active signal when the frequency reference exceeds the
frequency upper or lower limit, and the output frequency of AC drive reaches the
upper or lower limit.
14: Torque limited
The terminal outputs an active signal when the output torque of the AC drive
reaches the toque limit in speed control mode.
15: Ready to run
The terminal outputs an active signal when the AC drive is ready for running
without any fault after power-on.
16: AI1 > AI2
The terminal outputs an active signal when the AI1 input is higher than the AI2
input.

‑187‑
Parameter Groups

17: Frequency upper limit reached

The terminal outputs an active signal when the running frequency reaches the
frequency upper limit (F0‑12).
18: Frequency lower limit reached (no output at stop)
If F8-14 (running mode when frequency reference lower than lower limit) is set to
1 (stop), the terminal outputs an inactive signal no matter whether the running
frequency reaches the frequency lower limit.
When F8-14 is set to 0 (run at the lower limit frequency) or 2 (run at zero speed)
and the running frequency reaches the lower limit, the terminal outputs an active
signal.
19: Undervoltage state
The terminal outputs an active signal when undervoltage occurs on the AC drive.
20: Communication setting
Whether the terminal is active or inactive is determined by communication
address 0x2001.
21: Reserved
22: Reserved
23: Zero-speed running 2 (at stop)
When the output frequency is 0 during AC drive running, an active signal is output.
When the AC drive stops, the active signal is retained.
24: Accumulative power-on time reached
The terminal outputs an active signal when the accumulative power-on time of
the AC drive (F7-13) exceeds the value of F8-16 (Accumulative power-on time
threshold).
25: Frequency-level detection FDT2 output
When the running frequency is higher than the detected value, the DO outputs an
active signal. When the running frequency is lower than the result of the detected
value minus the frequency detection hysteresis value (F8‑28 x F8-29), the active
signal is canceled.
26: Frequency 1 reached
When the running frequency of the AC drive is within the detection range of F8-30
(Frequency detection value 1), the DO outputs an active signal.
Frequency detection range: F8‑30 - F8‑31 x F0‑10 (Maximum frequency) to F8‑30 +
F8‑31 x F0‑10
27: Frequency 2 reached
When the running frequency of the AC drive is within the detection range of F8-32
(Frequency detection value 2), the DO outputs an active signal.
Frequency detection range: F8‑32 - F8‑33 x F0‑10 (Maximum frequency) to F8‑32 +
F8‑33 x F0‑10
28: Current 1 reached
When the output current of the AC drive is within the detection range of F8-38
(Detection level of current 1), the DO outputs an active signal.

‑188‑
 Parameter Groups

Current detection range = F8‑38 ‑ F8-39 x F1‑03 (Rated motor current) to F8‑38 +
F8‑39 x F1 03.
29: Current 2 reached
When the output current of the AC drive is within the detection range of F8-40
(Detection level of current 2), the DO outputs an active signal.
Current detection range = F8‑40 ‑ F8-41 x F1‑03 (Rated motor current) to F8‑40 +
F8‑41 x F1 03.
30: Timing reached
With the timing function (F8-42) enabled, when the current running time of the AC
drive reaches the set time, the terminal outputs an active signal. The timing
duration is set by F8-43 and F8-44.
31: AI1 input limit exceeded
The terminal outputs an active signal when AI1 input is higher than the value of
F8‑46 (AI1 input voltage upper limit) or lower than the value of F8‑45 (AI1 input
voltage lower limit).
32: AC drive output load loss
The terminal outputs an active signal when load loss occurs.
33: Reverse running
The terminal outputs an active signal when the AC drive runs in the reverse
direction.
34: Zero current state
When the output current of the AC drive is within the zero-current range for a time
exceeding F8-35 (Zero current detection delay), the DO outputs an active signal.
Zero current detection range = 0 to F8‑34 x F1‑03
35: Module temperature reached
The terminal outputs an active signal when the inverter heatsink temperature
(F7‑07) reaches the value of F8‑47 (IGBT temperature reach).
36: Output current limit exceeded
When the output current of the AC drive is greater than F8-36 (Output overcurrent
threshold) for a time exceeding F8-37 (Output overcurrent detection delay), the
DO outputs an active signal.
37: Frequency lower limit reached (having output at stop)
The terminal outputs an active signal when the running frequency reaches the
frequency lower limit (F0‑14). The terminal also outputs the active signal when
the AC drive stops.
38: Alarm output (direct output at fault or alarm)
If a fault occurs on the AC drive and the AC drive continues to run upon fault, the
DO outputs an active signal.
For details about the fault protection action, see F9-47 to F9‑50.

‑189‑
Parameter Groups

39: Motor overtemperature

The terminal outputs an active signal when the motor temperature reaches the
value of F9-58 (Motor overtemperature pre-warning threshold). You can check the
motor temperature using U0-34.
40: Current running time reached
The terminal outputs an active signal when the current operation time of the AC
drive is longer than the value of F8-53 (current running time threshold).
41: Fault output 2
When a fault occurs on the AC drive (undervoltage excluded), the DO terminal
outputs an active signal.
42: Fault output 3
When a fault occurs on the AC drive, the DO terminal outputs an active signal.
43 to 51: Reserved

F5-02 Control board relay 1 function selection (T/A1‑T/B1‑TC1)

Address: 0xF502
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 51 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: No output
1: Running
2: Fault output (stop upon fault)
3: Frequency-level detection FDT1 output
4: Frequency reached
5: Zero speed running (no output at stop)
6: Motor overload pre-warning
7: AC drive overload pre-warning
8: Set count value reached
9: Designated count value reached
10: Length reached
11: PLC cycle completed
12: Accumulative running time reached
13: Frequency limited
14: Torque limited
15: Ready for run

‑190‑
 Parameter Groups

16: AI1 > AI2

17: Frequency upper limit reached
18: Frequency lower limit reached (operation related)
19: Undervoltage status output
20: Communication setting
21: Reserved
22: Reserved
23: Zero-speed running 2 (at stop)
24: Accumulative power-on time reached
25: Frequency-level detection FDT2 output
26: Frequency 1 reach output
27: Frequency 2 reach output
28: Current 1 reach output
29: Current 2 reach output
30: Timing reach output
31: AI1 input limit exceeded
32: AC drive output load loss
33: Reverse running
34: Zero current status
35: Module temperature reached
36: Output current limit exceeded
37: Frequency lower limit reached (having output at stop)
38: Alarm output (direct output at fault or alarm)
39: Current over-temperature pre-warning
40: Current running time reached
41: Fault output 2
42: Fault output 3
Description
Used to set the terminal function of the control board relay (T/A1-T/B1-T/C1).
The setting is similar to that of F5-01.

F5-03 Control board relay 2 function selection (T/A2-TC2)

Address: 0xF503
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 51 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑191‑
Parameter Groups

0: No output
1: Running
2: Fault output (stop upon fault)
3: Frequency-level detection FDT1 output
4: Frequency reached
5: Zero speed running (no output at stop)
6: Motor overload pre-warning
7: AC drive overload pre-warning
8: Set count value reached
9: Designated count value reached
10: Length reached
11: PLC cycle completed
12: Accumulative running time reached
13: Frequency limited
14: Torque limited
15: Ready for run

‑192‑
 Parameter Groups

16: AI1 > AI2

17: Frequency upper limit reached
18: Frequency lower limit reached (operation related)
19: Undervoltage status output
20: Communication setting
21: Reserved
22: Reserved
23: Zero-speed running 2 (at stop)
24: Accumulative power-on time reached
25: Frequency-level detection FDT2 output
26: Frequency 1 reach output
27: Frequency 2 reach output
28: Current 1 reach output
29: Current 2 reach output
30: Timing reach output
31: AI1 input limit exceeded
32: AC drive output load loss
33: Reverse running
34: Zero current status
35: Module temperature reached
36: Output current limit exceeded
37: Frequency lower limit reached (having output at stop)
38: Alarm output (direct output at fault or alarm)
39: Current over-temperature pre-warning
40: Current running time reached
41: Fault output 2
42: Fault output 3
Description
Used to set the terminal function of the control board relay (T/A2-T/C2).
The setting is similar to that of F5-01.

F5-04 DO1 function selection

Address: 0xF504
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 51 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑193‑
Parameter Groups

0: No output
1: Running
2: Fault output (stop upon fault)
3: Frequency-level detection FDT1 output
4: Frequency reached
5: Zero speed running (no output at stop)
6: Motor overload pre-warning
7: AC drive overload pre-warning
8: Set count value reached
9: Designated count value reached
10: Length reached
11: PLC cycle completed
12: Accumulative running time reached
13: Frequency limited
14: Torque limited
15: Ready for run

‑194‑
 Parameter Groups

16: AI1 > AI2

17: Frequency upper limit reached
18: Frequency lower limit reached (operation related)
19: Undervoltage status output
20: Communication setting
21: Reserved
22: Reserved
23: Zero-speed running 2 (at stop)
24: Accumulative power-on time reached
25: Frequency-level detection FDT2 output
26: Frequency 1 reach output
27: Frequency 2 reach output
28: Current 1 reach output
29: Current 2 reach output
30: Timing reach output
31: AI1 input limit exceeded
32: AC drive output load loss
33: Reverse running
34: Zero current status
35: Module temperature reached
36: Output current limit exceeded
37: Frequency lower limit reached (having output at stop)
38: Alarm output (direct output at fault or alarm)
39: Current over-temperature pre-warning
40: Current running time reached
41: Fault output 2
42: Fault output 3
Description
Used to set the function of DO1.
The setting is similar to that of F5-01.

F5-05 Expansion card DO2 output selection

Address: 0xF505
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 51 Data type: UInt16
Default: 4 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑195‑
Parameter Groups

0: No output
1: Running
2: Fault output (stop upon fault)
3: Frequency-level detection FDT1 output
4: Frequency reached
5: Zero speed running (no output at stop)
6: Motor overload pre-warning
7: AC drive overload pre-warning
8: Set count value reached
9: Designated count value reached
10: Length reached
11: PLC cycle completed
12: Accumulative running time reached
13: Frequency limited
14: Torque limited
15: Ready for run

‑196‑
 Parameter Groups

16: AI1 > AI2

17: Frequency upper limit reached
18: Frequency lower limit reached (operation related)
19: Undervoltage status output
20: Communication setting
21: Reserved
22: Reserved
23: Zero-speed running 2 (at stop)
24: Accumulative power-on time reached
25: Frequency-level detection FDT2 output
26: Frequency 1 reach output
27: Frequency 2 reach output
28: Current 1 reach output
29: Current 2 reach output
30: Timing reach output
31: AI1 input limit exceeded
32: AC drive output load loss
33: Reverse running
34: Zero current status
35: Module temperature reached
36: Output current limit exceeded
37: Frequency lower limit reached (having output at stop)
38: Alarm output (direct output at fault or alarm)
39: Current over-temperature pre-warning
40: Current running time reached
41: Fault output 2
42: Fault output 3
Description
Used to set the function of DO2 on the expansion card.
The setting is similar to that of F5-01.

F5-06 FMP output function selection

Address: 0xF506
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 22 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑197‑
Parameter Groups

0: Running frequency
1: Frequency reference
2: Output current
3: Output torque
4: Output power
5: Output voltage
6: Pulse input (100.0% corresponds to 100.00 kHz)
7: AI1
8: AI2
9: AI3
10: Length
11: Count value
12: Communication
13: Motor speed
14: Output current (100.0% corresponds to 1000.0 A)
15: Output voltage (100.0% corresponds to 1000.0 V)
16: Output torque (directional)
19: Taper output
20: Roll diameter output
21: Tension output
22: Encoder feedback frequency
Description
This parameter takes effect only when F4-41 is set to 1.

‑198‑
 Parameter Groups

0: Running frequency (100.0% corresponding to the maximum frequency F0-10)

1: Frequency reference
2: Output current (100.0% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor current)
3: Motor output torque (100.0% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor torque)
(absolute value, percentage of the rated motor torque)
4: Output power (100.0% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor power)
5: Output voltage (100.0% corresponding to 1.2 times the rated motor voltage)
6: Pulse input (100.0% corresponding to 100.0 kHz)
7: AI1 (100.0% corresponding to 10 V)
8: AI2 (100.0% corresponding to 10 V)
9: AI3 (100.0% corresponding to 10 V)
10: Length (100.0% corresponding to FB-05)
11: Count value (100.0% corresponding to FB-08)
12: Communication setting (100.0% corresponding to the AO communication
setting)
13: Motor speed (100.0% corresponding to the maximum frequency F0-10)
14: Output current (100.0% corresponding to 1000.0 A)
15: Output voltage (100.0% corresponding to 1000.0 V)
16: Motor output torque (100.0% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor torque
in one direction; 50% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor torque in the
other direction)
(actual value, percentage of the rated motor torque)
19: Taper output
20: Roll diameter output (100.0% corresponding to the maximum roll diameter
B0-08)
21: Tension output (100.0% corresponding to the maximum tension B1-02)
22: Encoder feedback frequency (100.0% corresponding to the maximum
frequency F0‑10)

F5-07 AO1 function selection

Address: 0xF507
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 22 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑199‑
Parameter Groups

0: Running frequency
1: Frequency reference
2: Output current
3: Output torque
4: Output power
5: Output voltage
6: Pulse input (100.0% corresponds to 100.00 kHz)
7: AI1
8: AI2
9: AI3
10: Length
11: Count value
12: Communication
13: Motor speed
14: Output current (100.0% corresponds to 1000.0 A)
15: Output voltage (100.0% corresponds to 1000.0 V)
16: Output torque (directional)
19: Taper output
20: Roll diameter output
21: Tension output
22: Encoder feedback frequency
Description

‑200‑
 Parameter Groups

0: Running frequency (100.0% corresponding to the maximum frequency F0-10)

1: Frequency reference
2: Output current (100.0% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor current)
3: Motor output torque (100.0% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor torque)
(absolute value, percentage of the rated motor torque)
4: Output power (100.0% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor power)
5: Output voltage (100.0% corresponding to 1.2 times the rated motor voltage)
6: Pulse input (100.0% corresponding to 100.0 kHz)
7: AI1 (100.0% corresponding to 10 V)
8: AI2 (100.0% corresponding to 10 V)
9: AI3 (100.0% corresponding to 10 V)
10: Length (100.0% corresponding to FB-05)
11: Count value (100.0% corresponding to FB-08)
12: Communication setting (100.0% corresponding to the AO communication
setting)
13: Motor speed (100.0% corresponding to the maximum frequency F0-10)
14: Output current (100.0% corresponding to 1000.0 A)
15: Output voltage (100.0% corresponding to 1000.0 V)
16: Motor output torque (100.0% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor torque
in one direction; 50% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor torque in the
other direction)
(actual value, percentage of the rated motor torque)
19: Taper output
20: Roll diameter output (100.0% corresponding to the maximum roll diameter
B0-08)
21: Tension output (100.0% corresponding to the maximum tension B1-02)
22: Encoder feedback frequency (100.0% corresponding to the maximum
frequency F0‑10)

F5-08 AO2 output selection

Address: 0xF508
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 22 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑201‑
Parameter Groups

0: Running frequency
1: Frequency reference
2: Output current
3: Output torque
4: Output power
5: Output voltage
6: Pulse input (100.0% corresponds to 100.00 kHz)
7: AI1
8: AI2
9: AI3
10: Length
11: Count value
12: Communication
13: Motor speed
14: Output current (100.0% corresponds to 1000.0 A)
15: Output voltage (100.0% corresponds to 1000.0 V)
16: Output torque (directional)
19: Taper output
20: Roll diameter output
21: Tension output
22: Encoder feedback frequency
Description

‑202‑
 Parameter Groups

0: Running frequency (100.0% corresponding to the maximum frequency F0-10)

1: Frequency reference
2: Output current (100.0% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor current)
3: Motor output torque (100.0% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor torque)
(absolute value, percentage of the rated motor torque)
4: Output power (100.0% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor power)
5: Output voltage (100.0% corresponding to 1.2 times the rated motor voltage)
6: Pulse input (100.0% corresponding to 100.0 kHz)
7: AI1 (100.0% corresponding to 10 V)
8: AI2 (100.0% corresponding to 10 V)
9: AI3 (100.0% corresponding to 10 V)
10: Length (100.0% corresponding to FB-05)
11: Count value (100.0% corresponding to FB-08)
12: Communication setting (100.0% corresponding to the AO communication
setting)
13: Motor speed (100.0% corresponding to the maximum frequency F0-10)
14: Output current (100.0% corresponding to 1000.0 A)
15: Output voltage (100.0% corresponding to 1000.0 V)
16: Motor output torque (100.0% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor torque
in one direction; 50% corresponding to 2 times the rated motor torque in the
other direction)
(actual value, percentage of the rated motor torque)
19: Taper output
20: Roll diameter output (100.0% corresponding to the maximum roll diameter
B0-08)
21: Tension output (100.0% corresponding to the maximum tension B1-02)
22: Encoder feedback frequency (100.0% corresponding to the maximum
frequency F0‑10)

F5-09 Maximum FMP output frequency

Address: 0xF509
Min.: 0.01 Unit: kHz
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.01 kHz to 100.00 kHz
Description
This parameter indicates the maximum frequency (0.01 kHz to 100.00 kHz) of the
FMP terminal output pulse.

F5-10 AO1 zero offset coefficient

Address: 0xF50A

‑203‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: -100 Unit: %

Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to 100.0%
Description
On the AO curve, if b indicates zero offset, k indicates gain, and X indicates
standard output, the actual output Y is kX plus b (Y = kX + b). The zero offset
coefficient 100% of AO1 and AO2 corresponds to 10 V (or 20 mA). The standard
output refers to the value corresponding to the analog output of 0 to 10 V (or 0 to
20 mA) with no zero offset or gain adjustment.
Zero offset = Zero offset coefficient x 10 V (20 mA)
The AC drive supports two AOs, namely, AO1 and AO2. AO1 and AO2 can be used
to indicate the internal running parameters in the analog mode. The indicated
parameters are defined by F5-07 and F5‑08.

F5-11 AO1 gain

Address: 0xF50B
Min.: -10 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
–10.00 to +10.00
Description
On the AO curve, if b indicates zero offset, k indicates gain, and X indicates
standard output, the actual output Y is kX plus b (Y = kX + b). The zero offset
coefficient 100% of AO1 and AO2 corresponds to 10 V (or 20 mA). The standard
output refers to the value corresponding to the analog output of 0 to 10 V (or 0 to
20 mA) with no zero offset or gain adjustment.
Zero offset = Zero offset coefficient x 10 V (20 mA)
The AC drive supports two AOs, namely, AO1 and AO2. AO1 and AO2 can be used
to indicate the internal running parameters in the analog mode. The indicated
parameters are defined by F5-07 and F5‑08.

F5-12 AO2 zero offset coefficient

Address: 0xF50C
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description

‑204‑
 Parameter Groups

On the AO curve, if b indicates zero offset, k indicates gain, and X indicates

standard output, the actual output Y is kX plus b (Y = kX + b). The zero offset
coefficient 100% of AO1 and AO2 corresponds to 10 V (or 20 mA). The standard
output refers to the value corresponding to the analog output of 0 to 10 V (or 0 to
20 mA) with no zero offset or gain adjustment.
Zero offset = Zero offset coefficient x 10 V (20 mA)
The AC drive supports two AOs, namely, AO1 and AO2. AO1 and AO2 can be used
to indicate the internal running parameters in the analog mode. The indicated
parameters are defined by F5-07 and F5‑09.

F5-13 AO2 gain

Address: 0xF50D
Min.: -10 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
–10.00 to +10.00
Description
On the AO curve, if b indicates zero offset, k indicates gain, and X indicates
standard output, the actual output Y is kX plus b (Y = kX + b). The zero offset
coefficient 100% of AO1 and AO2 corresponds to 10 V (or 20 mA). The standard
output refers to the value corresponding to the analog output of 0 to 10 V (or 0 to
20 mA) with no zero offset or gain adjustment.
Zero offset = Zero offset coefficient x 10 V (20 mA)
The AC drive supports two AOs, namely, AO1 and AO2. AO1 and AO2 can be used
to indicate the internal running parameters in the analog mode. The indicated
parameters are defined by F5-07 and F5‑10.

F5-17 Expansion card relay output delay

Address: 0xF511
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 3600 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 3600.0s
Description
This parameter indicates the output delay of relay on the expansion card. F5‑01
outputs an active signal after the set delay.

F5-18 Control board relay 1 output delay

Address: 0xF512

‑205‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 3600 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 3600.0s
Description
This parameter indicates the output delay of relay 1 on the control board. F5‑02
outputs an active signal after the set delay.

F5-19 Control board relay 2 output delay

Address: 0xF513
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 3600 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 3600.0s
Description
This parameter indicates the output delay of relay 2 on the control board. F5‑03
outputs an active signal after the set delay.

F5-20 DO1 output delay

Address: 0xF514
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 3600 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 3600.0s
Description
This parameter indicates the delay of DO1 output. F5‑04 outputs an active signal
after the set delay.

F5-21 Expansion card DO2 output delay

Address: 0xF515
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 3600 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 3600.0s
Description
This parameter indicates the expansion card DO2 output delay. F5‑05 outputs an
active signal after the set delay.

‑206‑
 Parameter Groups

F5-22 DO active mode selection

Address: 0xF516
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 11111 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
Ones (position): Expansion card relay
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Tens (position): Control board relay 1
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Hundreds (position): Control board relay 2
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Thousands (position): Control board DO1
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Ten thousands (position): Extension card DO2
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Description
The ones, tens, hundreds, thousands, and ten thousands positions of this
parameter are used to set the DOs to which F5-01 to F5-05 correspond.
0: Positive logic (same as NO contact)
Active state: The DO and the COM/ CME terminal are internally connected.
Inactive state: The DO terminal is disconnected from the COM/CME terminal.
1: Negative logic (same as NC contact)
Active state The DO terminal is disconnected from the COM/CME terminal.
Inactive state: The DO terminal and the COM/CME terminal are internally
connected.

2.7 F6 Start/Stop Control

F6-00 Start mode

Address: 0xF600
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑207‑
Parameter Groups

0: Direct startup
1: Flying start
2: Vector pre-excitation startup (asynchronous motor)
Description
0: Direct start
This mode is applicable to most loads. Startup with the startup frequency is
applicable to load hoisting applications such as elevators and cranes.
1: Flying start
In some applications, the motor rotates before the AC drive is started. With this
setting, the AC drive can automatically follow the motor speed and direction,
which realizes smooth startup of the spinning motor without impact. For
example, during the operation of the AC drive, due to the instantaneous power
failure of the power grid, the AC drive is powered down and restarted. Due to
inertia, the motor is in a rotating state. In this case, to recover control on the
asynchronous motor, the AC drive must detect the current speed of the motor to
avoid overcurrent, overvoltage, and even burn-out of the power transistor of the
AC drive.
2: Pre-excitation start (asynchronous motor)
This mode applies only to asynchronous motors in SVC or FVC mode. Performing
pre-excitation on the motor before start improves the responsiveness of the
motor and reduces the starting current. The time sequence of the pre-excitation
start is the same as that of the DC braking restart.

F6-01 Flying start mode

Address: 0xF601
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: From stop frequency
1: From 50 Hz
2: From the maximum frequency
3: Reserved
Description
In different modes, the initial frequency of flying start is different upon restart.
The motor running direction cannot be searched upon flying start. Therefore, the
motor running direction in the current startup command must be the same as
that upon the previous motor stop. If the direction is different, the flying start
fails.
The search mode from the stop frequency is to search for a speed of 0 Hz from the
previous stop frequency. If an external force drives the motor to a higher speed
than the stop speed, this mode is not applicable.

‑208‑
 Parameter Groups

F6-02 Flying start speed

Address: 0xF602
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
1 to 100
Description

F6-03 Startup frequency

Address: 0xF603
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to 10.00 Hz
Description
This parameter defines the startup frequency for direct start of the AC drive. When
the startup frequency is higher than the frequency reference, the AC drive will not
start but stay standby.

F6-04 Startup frequency hold time

Address: 0xF604
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0s to 100.0s
Description
This parameter defines the hold time during which the output frequency remains
at the startup frequency. After this hold time elapses, the AC drive will accelerate
to the reference frequency.

F6-05 DC braking current/Pre-excitation current at startup

Address: 0xF605
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 150 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0% to 150%
Description

‑209‑
Parameter Groups

When startup with DC braking is enabled, the AC drive starts only after DC braking
upon receiving the start command. A greater DC braking current indicates greater
braking force. 100% corresponds to the rated motor current. The upper limit of
the current is 80% of the rated current of the AC drive.
The current upper limit can be set through F6‑34, and the upper current limit can
be set to 135% of the rated current of the AC drive.

F6-06 Startup DC braking time/pre-excitation time

Address: 0xF606
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0s to 100.0s
Description
This parameter defines the time for DC braking at startup, which is valid only
when the startup mode is direct start.

F6-07 Acceleration/Deceleration mode

Address: 0xF607
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration
1: S-curve acceleration/deceleration
Description
This parameter defines the frequency change mode during the AC drive start and
stop process.
0: The output frequency increases or decreases linearly.
1: The output frequency increases or decreases according to the S-curve when the
target frequency changes dynamically. This mode is applicable to applications
requiring supreme riding comfort and real-time fast response.

F6-08 Time proportion of S-curve start segment

Address: 0xF608
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 70 Data type: UInt16
Default: 30 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0% to 70.0%

‑210‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
The sum of F6‑08 (Time proportion of S-curve start segment) and F6‑09 (Time
proportion of S-curve end segment) must be less than or equal to 100%.

F6-09 Time proportion of S-curve end segment

Address: 0xF609
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 70 Data type: UInt16
Default: 30 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0% to 70.0%
Description
The sum of F6‑08 (Time proportion of S-curve start segment) and F6‑09 (Time
proportion of S-curve end segment) must be less than or equal to 100%.

F6-10 Stop mode

Address: 0xF60A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
Description
0: Decelerate to stop
Upon receiving the stop command, the AC drive decreases the output frequency
to 0 based on the deceleration time and then stops.
1: Coast to stop
Upon receiving the stop command, the AC drive immediately stops output. The
motor then coasts to stop according to the mechanical inertia.

F6-11 Starting frequency of DC braking at stop

Address: 0xF60B
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
The AC drive starts DC braking when the running frequency decreases to the value
of this parameter during deceleration to stop.

‑211‑
Parameter Groups

F6-12 Waiting time of DC braking at stop

Address: 0xF60C
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 100.0s
Description
When the running frequency decreases to the start frequency of DC braking at
stop, the AC drive stops output for a period of time and then starts DC braking.
Such delay is intended to prevent faults such as overcurrent from occurring when
DC braking starts at a high speed.

F6-13 DC braking current at stop

Address: 0xF60D
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 150 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0% to 150%
Description
When startup with DC braking is enabled, the AC drive starts only after DC braking
upon receiving the start command. A greater DC braking current indicates greater
braking force. 100% corresponds to the rated motor current. The upper limit of
the current is 80% of the rated current of the AC drive.
The current upper limit can be set through F6‑34, and the upper current limit can
be set to 135% of the rated current of the AC drive.

F6-14 DC braking time at stop

Address: 0xF60E
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 100.0s
Description
This parameter indicates the hold time of DC braking. If this parameter is set to 0,
DC braking is disabled.

F6-15 Brake usage rate

Address: 0xF60F
Min.: 0 Unit: %

‑212‑
 Parameter Groups

Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16

Default: 100 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0% to 100%
Description
Indicates the braking usage rate.

F6-16 Closed loop current Kp of flying start

Address: 0xF610
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 500 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–1000
Description
This parameter defines the proportional gain of the current suppression PI
regulator during speed tracking of flying start. It is valid when F6‑01 is set to 0, 1,
or 2.

F6-17 Closed-loop current Ki of torque tracking

Address: 0xF611
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 800 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–1000
Description
This parameter defines the integral gain of the current suppression PI regulator
during speed tracking of flying start. It is valid when F6‑01 is set to 0, 1, or 2.

F6-18 Flying start current

Address: 0xF612
Min.: 30 Unit: -
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
30 to 200
Description
Overcurrent may occur on the asynchronous motor during flying start due to large
slip. The current must be limited for preventing overcurrent. This parameter
defines the motor current to be suppressed during speed tracking of flying start.

‑213‑
Parameter Groups

F6-21 Demagnetization time

Address: 0xF615
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00s to 10.00s
Description
In the vector mode, when flying start is enabled (F6-00 = 1), the AC drive cannot be
started when the motor has residual magnetism. The AC drive can only be started
after the voltage output of the AC drive is disconnected for at least the
demagnetization time set by F6-21.

F6-22 Startup pre-torque setting

Address: 0xF616
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 200.0%
Description

F6-26 Electromagnetic shorting current

Address: 0xF61A
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0% to 200%
Description

F6-27 Electromagnetic shorting time upon startup

Address: 0xF61B
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0s to 100.0s
Description

‑214‑
 Parameter Groups

F6-28 Electromagnetic shorting time upon stop

Address: 0xF61C
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0s to 100.0s
Description

F6-29 Electromagnetic shorting voltage reserve

Address: 0xF61D
Min.: 20 Unit: V
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: At stop
Value Range:
20.0 V to 100.0 V
Description

F6-30 Trial current for synchronous motor speed tracking

Address: 0xF61E
Min.: 5 Unit: -
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: At stop
Value Range:
5.0 to 50.0
Description

F6-31 Minimum tracking frequency for synchronous motor speed tracking

Address: 0xF61F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0–100.0
Description

F6-32 Angle compensation for synchronous motor speed tracking

Address: 0xF620

‑215‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 360 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0–360
Description

F6-33 Proportion of synchronous motor speed tracking

Address: 0xF621
Min.: 0.1 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.1–10.0
Description

F6-34 Integral of synchronous motor speed tracking

Address: 0xF622
Min.: 0.1 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.1–10.0
Description

F6-35 Maximum current limit for DC braking

Address: 0xF623
Min.: 80 Unit: %
Max.: 135 Data type: UInt16
Default: 80 Change: At stop
Value Range:
80% to 135%
Description
The base value is the rated current of the AC drive. The DC braking current set by
F6-05 and F6-13 is restricted by this parameter.

F6-36 Speed loop feedforward

Address: 0xF624

‑216‑
 Parameter Groups

Min.: -200 Unit: %

Max.: 200 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-200.0% to +200.0%
Description

2.8 F7 Key and Display

F7-01 MF.K key function selection

Address: 0xF701
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 4 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: MF.K key disabled
1: Switchover between operating panel control and remote control (terminal or
communication)
2: Switchover between forward and reverse run
3: Forward jog
4: Reverse jog
Description
The MF.K key is a multi-functional key. This parameter is used to set the function
of the MF.K key.
0: MF.K key disabled
The MF.K key does not work.
1: Switchover between remote control (terminal or communication) and
operating panel control. When F0-02 is set to 0 (operating panel), the MF.K does
not work. When F0-02 is set to 1 (terminal), the MF.K key is used for switchover
between the terminal control and operating panel control. When F0-02 is set to 2
(communication), the MF.K key is used for switchover between the
communication control and operating panel control.
2: Switchover between forward and reverse run
The MF.K key is used for changing the direction of the frequency reference. This
function is valid only when the operating panel is set as the command source.

‑217‑
Parameter Groups

3: Forward jog
The MF.K key is used for enabling forward jog (FJOG). This function is valid only
when the operating panel is set as the command source.
4: Reverse jog
The MF.K key is used for enabling reverse jog (RJOG). This function is available
only when the operating panel is set as the command source.

F7-02 STOP/RES key function

Address: 0xF702
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: STOP/RESET key enabled only in operating panel control mode
1: STOP/RESET key enabled in any operating mode
Description
The STOP/RESET key on the operating panel is used for stop/reset. This
parameter is used for setting the function of this key.
0: STOP/RESET key enabled only in operating panel control mode
The STOP/RESET key is valid only in operating panel control mode.
1: STOP/RESET key enabled in any operating mode
The STOP/RESET key is valid in any operating mode.

F7-03 LED running display parameter 1

Address: 0xF703
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0x1F Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑218‑
 Parameter Groups

Bit00: Running frequency (Hz)

Bit01: Frequency reference (Hz)
Bit02: Bus voltage (V)
Bit03: Output voltage (V)
Bit04: Output current (A)
Bit05: Output power (kW)
Bit06: Output torque (%)
Bit07: DI status
Bit08: DO status
Bit09: AI1 voltage (V)
Bit10: AI2 voltage (V)
Bit11: AI3 voltage (V)
Bit12: Count value
Bit13: Length value
Bit14: Load speed display
Bit15: PID reference
Description
If a parameter needs to be displayed during running, set its corresponding bit to
1. After converting this binary number to a hexadecimal number, set it in F7-03.

F7-04 LED running display parameter 2

Address: 0xF704
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
Bit00: PID feedback
Bit01: PLC stage
Bit02: Pulse input reference (kHz)
Bit03: Running frequency 2 (Hz)
Bit04: Remaining running time
Bit05: AI1 voltage before correction (V)
Bit06: AI2 voltage before correction (V)
Bit07: AI3 voltage before correction (V)
Bit08: Linear speed
Bit09: Current power-on time (h)
Bit10: Current running time (min.)
Bit11: Pulse input reference (Hz)
Bit12: Communication setting
Bit13: Encoder feedback speed (Hz)
Bit14: Roll diameter (mm)
Bit15: Tension after taper (N)

‑219‑
Parameter Groups

Description
If a parameter needs to be displayed during running, set its corresponding bit to
1. After converting this binary number to a hexadecimal number, set it in F7‑04

F7-05 LED stop display parameter

Address: 0xF705
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0x33 Change: In real time
Value Range:
Bit00: Frequency reference (Hz)
Bit01: Bus voltage (V)
Bit02: DI state
Bit03: DO state
Bit04: AI1 voltage (V)
Bit05: AI2 voltage (V)
Bit06: AI3 voltage (V)
Bit07: Count value
Bit08: Length value
Bit09: PLC stage
Bit10: Load speed display
Bit11: PID reference
Bit12: Pulse input frequency (kHz)
Bit13: Roll diameter (mm)
Bit14: Tension (N)
Description
If a parameter needs to be displayed when the AC drive stops, set its
corresponding bit to 1. After converting this binary number to a hexadecimal
number, set it in F7-05.

F7-06 Load speed display coefficient

Address: 0xF706
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 6.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0000 to 6.5
Description
This parameter defines the ratio of the actual speed with load to motor speed.

‑220‑
 Parameter Groups

F7-07 Inverter heatsink temperature

Address: 0xF707
Min.: -20 Unit: °C
Max.: 120 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-20℃ to +120℃
Description
Indicates the inverter heatsink temperature.

F7-08 Product No.

Address: 0xF708
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 999 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0–999
Description
This parameter shows the product No. of the AC drive.

F7-09 Accumulative running time

Address: 0xF709
Min.: 0 Unit: h
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 h to 65535 h
Description
This parameter shows the accumulative running time of the AC drive.

F7-10 Performance software version

Address: 0xF70A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.00 to 0.00
Description
Indicates the performance software version of the AC drive.

F7-11 Function software version

Address: 0xF70B

‑221‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.00 to 0.00
Description
Indicates the function software version of the AC drive.

F7-12 Number of decimal places for load speed display

Address: 0xF70C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: 0 decimal place
1: 1 decimal place
2: 2 decimal places
3: 3 decimal places
Description
This parameter is used to set the number of decimal places of U0-14 (Load speed).
0: 0 decimal places
No decimal places are retained.
1: 1 decimal place
One decimal place is retained after the decimal point.
2: 2 decimal places
Two decimal places are retained after the decimal point.
3: 3 decimal places
Three decimal places are retained after the decimal point.

F7-13 Accumulative power-on time

Address: 0xF70D
Min.: 0 Unit: h
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 h to 65535 h
Description
This parameter shows the accumulative power-on duration of the AC drive.

F7-14 Accumulative power consumption

Address: 0xF70E

‑222‑
 Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: kWh

Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 kWh to 65535 kWh
Description
This parameter shows the accumulative power consumption of the AC drive.

F7-15 Temporary performance software version

Address: 0xF70F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.00 to 0.00
Description
Indicates the temporary performance software version of the AC drive.

F7-16 Temporary function software version

Address: 0xF710
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.00 to 0.00
Description
Indicates the temporary function software version of the AC drive.

2.9 F8 Auxilliary Function

F8-00 Jog frequency

Address: 0xF800
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
This parameter defines the running frequency of the AC drive in the jogging mode.

‑223‑
Parameter Groups

F8-01 Jog acceleration time

Address: 0xF801
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description
This parameter defines the acceleration time of the AC drive in the jogging mode.

F8-02 Jog deceleration time

Address: 0xF802
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description
This parameter defines the deceleration time of the AC drive in the jogging mode.

F8-03 Acceleration time 2

Address: 0xF803
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description
The AC drive provides four groups of acceleration time, which can be switched by
using the DI. This parameter defines the second group of acceleration time.

F8-04 Deceleration time 2

Address: 0xF804
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description
The AC drive provides four groups of deceleration time, which can be switched by
using the DI. This parameter defines the second group of deceleration time.

‑224‑
 Parameter Groups

F8-05 Acceleration time 3

Address: 0xF805
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description
The AC drive provides four groups of acceleration time, which can be switched by
using the DI. This parameter defines the third group of acceleration time.

F8-06 Deceleration time 3

Address: 0xF806
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description
The AC drive provides four groups of deceleration time, which can be switched by
using the DI. This parameter defines the third group of deceleration time.

F8-07 Acceleration time 4

Address: 0xF807
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description
The AC drive provides four groups of acceleration time, which can be switched by
using the DI. This parameter defines the fourth group of acceleration time.

F8-08 Deceleration time 4

Address: 0xF808
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s

‑225‑
Parameter Groups

Description
The AC drive provides four groups of deceleration time, which can be switched by
using the DI. This parameter defines the fourth group of deceleration time.

F8-09 Jump frequency 1

Address: 0xF809
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
The jump frequency enables the AC drive to avoid any frequency at which a
mechanical resonance may occur. This parameter defines the first jump
frequency. If it is set to 0, the first jump frequency is canceled.

F8-10 Jump frequency 2

Address: 0xF80A
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
The jump frequency enables the AC drive to avoid any frequency at which a
mechanical resonance may occur. This parameter defines the second jump
frequency. If it is set to 0, the second jump frequency function is disabled.

F8-11 Jump frequency amplitude

Address: 0xF80B
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: 5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to 5.00 Hz
Description

‑226‑
 Parameter Groups

When the running frequency approaches the jump frequency during acceleration,
the AC drive runs for a period at the current running frequency and then jumps
over the jump frequency. The jump amplitude is twice the value of F8-11 (jump
frequency amplitude).
When the running frequency decelerates to the value close to the jump frequency
during deceleration, the AC drive runs for a period at the current running
frequency and then jumps over the jump frequency. The jump amplitude is twice
the value of F8-11 (jump frequency amplitude).

F8-12 Dead-zone time of forward/reverse run

Address: 0xF80C
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 3,000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 3000.0s
Description
This parameter defines the transition time at 0 Hz output during transition
between forward running and reverse running.

F8-13 Reverse run control

Address: 0xF80D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Reverse running allowed
1: Reverse running inhibited
Description
When F8‑13 is valid, the motor runs at zero frequency after a reverse command is
input to the AC drive.

F8-14 Running mode when frequency reference is lower than frequency lower limit
Address: 0xF80E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Run at frequency lower limit
1: Stop according to F6-10
2: Run at zero speed
3: Coast to stop

‑227‑
Parameter Groups

Description
0: Run at frequency lower limit
If the frequency reference is lower than the frequency lower limit, the AC drive
runs at the frequency lower limit.
1: Stop according to F6-10
If the frequency reference is lower than the frequency lower limit, the AC drive
stops in the mode set by F6-10.
2: Run at zero speed
If the frequency reference is lower than the frequency lower limit, the AC drive
runs at zero speed.
3: Coast to stop
If the frequency reference is lower than the frequency lower limit, the AC drive
coasts to stop.

F8-15 Mechanical braking frequency

Address: 0xF80F
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to 10.00Hz
Description

F8-16 Accumulative power-on time threshold

Address: 0xF810
Min.: 0 Unit: h
Max.: 65000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–65000 h
Description
This parameter is used to set the accumulative power-on time threshold of the AC
drive. When F7-13 (Accumulative power-on time threshold) exceeds F8-16
(Accumulative power-on time threshold), the DO outputs an active signal.

F8-17 Accumulative running time threshold

Address: 0xF811
Min.: 0 Unit: h
Max.: 65000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time

‑228‑
 Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0–65000 h
Description
This parameter is used to set the accumulative running time threshold of the AC
drive. When F7‑09 (Accumulative running time) exceeds F8-20 (Accumulative
running time threshold), the DO outputs an active signal.

F8-18 Protection upon start

Address: 0xF812
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
The AC drive is equipped with the startup protection function to prevent the
motor from responding to commands upon unexpected power-on or fault reset.

F8-19 Frequency detection value (FDT1)

Address: 0xF813
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
When the running frequency is higher than the frequency detection value (FDT1),
the DO outputs an active signal. When the running frequency is lower than the
result of frequency detection value (FDT1) minus frequency detection hysteresis
(FDT1), the DO outputs an inactive signal. The valid range is from 0.00 Hz to F0-10
(Maximum frequency).

F8-20 Frequency detection hysteresis (FDT1)

Address: 0xF814
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%

‑229‑
Parameter Groups

Description
Frequency detection hysteresis (FDT1) = F8-19 x F8-20 When the running
frequency is higher than F8-19, the DO outputs an active signal. When the running
frequency is lower than a specific value (F8-19 - F8-19 x F8-20), the DO outputs an
inactive signal.

F8-21 Detection width for frequency reach

Address: 0xF815
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
Detection width for frequency reach = F8-21 (Detection width of frequency reach)
x F0-10 (Maximum frequency) The DO outputs an active signal when the running
frequency of the AC drive is in the specific range (Frequency reference ± F0‑10 x
F8‑21).

F8-22 Jump frequency state during acceleration/deceleration

Address: 0xF816
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Inactive
1: Active
Description
Used to enable or disable the jump frequency function during acceleration/
deceleration.
0: Inactive
During acceleration and deceleration, if the running frequency reaches the jump
frequency boundary, the AC drive will continue to run at the running frequency.
1: Active
During acceleration or deceleration, upon the moment that the running frequency
reaches the jump frequency, the AC drive will jump over the jump frequency with
the amplitude twice the value of F8-11 (jump frequency amplitude).

F8-25 Switchover frequency of acceleration time 1 and acceleration time 2

Address: 0xF819
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz

‑230‑
 Parameter Groups

Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16

Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
This function is used to switch the acceleration/deceleration time based on the
running frequency range when the AC drive is running. This function is active
when the DI is not allocated with function 16 (acceleration/deceleration time
selection terminal 1) or 17 (acceleration/deceleration time selection terminal 2).
The valid range is from 0.00 Hz to F0-10 (Maximum frequency).

F8-26 Switchover frequency of deceleration time 1 and deceleration time 2

Address: 0xF81A
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
This function is used to switch the acceleration/deceleration time based on the
running frequency range when the AC drive is running. This function is active
when the DI is not allocated with function 16 (acceleration/deceleration time
selection terminal 1) or 17 (acceleration/deceleration time selection terminal 2).
The valid range is from 0.00 Hz to F0-10 (Maximum frequency).

F8-27 Set highest priority to jog function

Address: 0xF81B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
This parameter defines whether to set the highest priority to the terminal jog
function. When F8-27 is set to 1, and any of F4-00 to F4-09 is set to 4 (forward jog)
or 5 (reverse jog), the AC drive enters the jog running status immediately.

F8-28 Frequency detection value (FDT2)

Address: 0xF81C
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz

‑231‑
Parameter Groups

Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16

Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
When the running frequency is higher than the frequency detection value (FDT2),
the DO outputs an active signal. When the running frequency is lower than the
result of frequency detection value (FDT2) minus frequency detection hysteresis
(FDT2), the DO outputs an inactive signal. The valid range is from 0.00 Hz to F0-10
(Maximum frequency).

F8-29 Frequency detection hysteresis (FDT2)

Address: 0xF81D
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
Frequency detection hysteresis (FDT2) = F8-28 x F8-29 When the running
frequency is higher than F8-28, the DO outputs an active signal. When the running
frequency is lower than a specific value (F8-28 - F8-28 x F8-29), the DO outputs an
inactive signal.

F8-30 Detection value 1 for frequency reach

Address: 0xF81E
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
When the running frequency of the AC drive is in the frequency detection range,
the DO outputs an active signal. The valid range is 0.00 Hz to F0-10 (Maximum
frequency).

F8-31 Detection width 1 of frequency reach

Address: 0xF81F
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time

‑232‑
 Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
Detection width 1 of frequency reach = F0-10 (Maximum frequency) x F8-31;
Frequency detection range = F8-30 (Detection value 1 of frequency reach) - F8‑31
(Detection width 1 of frequency reach) x F0‑10 (Maximum frequency) to F8-30
(Detection value 1 of frequency reach) + F8‑31 (Detection width 1 of frequency
reach) x F0‑10 (Maximum frequency)

F8-32 Detection value 2 for frequency reach

Address: 0xF820
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
When the running frequency of the AC drive is in the frequency detection range,
the DO outputs an active signal. The valid range is from 0.00 Hz to F0-10
(Maximum frequency).

F8-33 Detection width 2 of frequency reach

Address: 0xF821
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
Detection width 2 of frequency reach = F0-10 (Maximum frequency) x F8-33;
Frequency detection range = F8-32 (Detection value 2 of frequency reach) - F8‑33
(Detection width 2 of frequency reach) x F0‑10 to F8-32 (Detection value 2 of
frequency reach) + F8‑33 (Detection width 2 of frequency reach) x F0‑10

F8-34 Zero current detection level

Address: 0xF822
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 300 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑233‑
Parameter Groups

0.0% to 300.0%
Description
When the output current of the AC drive is lower than or equal to F8-34 (Zero
current detection level) for a period exceeding F8-35 (Zero current detection
delay), the DO outputs an active signal.

F8-35 Zero current detection delay

Address: 0xF823
Min.: 0.01 Unit: s
Max.: 600 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.01s to 600.00s
Description
When the output current of the AC drive is lower than or equal to F8-34 (Zero
current detection level) for a period exceeding F8-35 (Zero current detection
delay), the DO outputs an active signal.

F8-36 Output overcurrent threshold

Address: 0xF824
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 300 Data type: UInt16
Default: 200 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 300.0%
Description
When the output current of the AC drive is higher than F8-36 (Output current
threshold) for a period exceeding F8-37 (Output overcurrent detection delay), the
DO outputs an active signal.

F8-37 Software overcurrent detection delay

Address: 0xF825
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 600 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00s to 600.00s
Description
When the output current of the AC drive is higher than F8-36 (Output current
threshold) for a period exceeding F8-37 (Output overcurrent detection delay), the
DO outputs an active signal.

‑234‑
 Parameter Groups

F8-38 Detection level of current 1

Address: 0xF826
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 300 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 300.0%
Description
When the output current of the AC drive is in the range of F8-38 (Detection level of
current 1) ± F8‑39 (Detection width of current 1) x F1-03 (Rated motor current),
the DO outputs an active signal.

F8-39 Detection width of current 1

Address: 0xF827
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 300 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 300.0%
Description
Detection width of current 1 = F8-39 (detection width of current 1) x F1-03 (Rated
motor current)

F8-40 Detection level of current 2

Address: 0xF828
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 300 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 300.0%
Description
When the output current of the AC drive is in the range of F8-40 (Detection level of
current 2) ± F8‑41 (Detection width of current 2) x F1-03 (Rated motor current),
the DO outputs an active signal.

F8-41 Detection width of current 2

Address: 0xF829
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 300 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 300.0%

‑235‑
Parameter Groups

Description
Detection width of current 2 = F8-41 (detection width of current 2) x F1-03 (Rated
motor current)

F8-42 Timing function

Address: 0xF82A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
When F8-42 is set to 1 and the current running of the AC drive reaches the
specified timing duration, the DO outputs an active signal. The timing duration is
set by F8-43 and F8-44.

F8-43 Scheduled running time selection

Address: 0xF82B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Set by F8-44 (Timing duration)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Description
When this parameter is set to 0, the scheduled running time is set by F8-44.
When this parameter is set to 1, the scheduled running time equals to the result of
(AI1 voltage/10 V) x F8-44. 100% of analog input corresponds to the value of F8‑44.
When this parameter is set to 2, the scheduled running time equals to the result of
(AI2 voltage/10 V) x F8-44 100% of analog input corresponds to the value of F8-44.

F8-44 Scheduled running time

Address: 0xF82C
Min.: 0 Unit: min
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0 min to 6500.0 min

‑236‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
The scheduled running time is set by F8-43 and F8-44.

F8-45 AI1 input voltage lower limit

Address: 0xF82D
Min.: 0 Unit: V
Max.: F8-46 Data type: UInt16
Default: 3.1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 V to F8-46
Description
When the AI1 input is higher than F8-46 (AI1 input voltage upper limit) or lower
than F8-45 (AI1 input voltage lower limit), the DO outputs an "AI1 input limit
exceeded" active signal to indicate whether the AI1 input voltage is in the setting
range.

F8-46 AI1 input voltage upper limit

Address: 0xF82E
Min.: F8-45 Unit: V
Max.: 11 Data type: UInt16
Default: 6.8 Change: In real time
Value Range:
F8-45 to 11.00 V
Description
When the AI1 input is higher than F8-46 (AI1 input voltage upper limit) or lower
than F8-45 (AI1 input voltage lower limit), the DO outputs an "AI1 input limit
exceeded" active signal to indicate whether the AI1 input voltage is in the set
range.

F8-47 Module temperature reached

Address: 0xF82F
Min.: 0 Unit: °C
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 75 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0°C to 100℃
Description
When the heatsink temperature reaches the value of F8-47, the DO outputs an
active signal.

‑237‑
Parameter Groups

F8-48 Cooling Fan control

Address: 0xF830
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Working during drive running
1: Working continuously
Description
When this parameter is set to 0, the fan works when the AC drive is running. When
the AC drive stops, the fan works if the heatsink temperature is higher than 40°C
and stops if the heatsink temperature is lower than 40°C.
When this parameter is set to 1, the fan keeps working after power-on.

F8-49 Wakeup frequency

Address: 0xF831
Min.: F8-51 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
F8-51 to F0-10
Description
In hibernating state, when the frequency reference is equal to or larger than F8-49
(Wakeup frequency) and the current running command is valid, the AC drive
wakes up after the time set by F8-50 (Wakeup delay) expires.

F8-50 Wakeup delay

Address: 0xF832
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description
In hibernating state, when the frequency reference is equal to or larger than F8-49
(Wakeup frequency) and the current running command is valid, the AC drive
wakes up after the time set by F8-50 (Wakeup delay) expires.

F8-51 Hibernation frequency

Address: 0xF833
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz

‑238‑
 Parameter Groups

Max.: F8-49 Data type: UInt16

Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F8-49
Description
During AC drive running, when the frequency reference is lower than or equal to
F8-51 (Hibernating frequency), the AC drive enters the hibernating state and
coasts to stop after the time set by F8-52 (Hibernating delay) expires.

F8-52 Hibernation delay time

Address: 0xF834
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description
During AC drive running, when the frequency reference is lower than or equal to
F8-51 (Hibernating frequency), the AC drive enters the hibernating state and
coasts to stop after the time set by F8-52 (Hibernating delay) expires.

F8-53 Current running time reached

Address: 0xF835
Min.: 0 Unit: min
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0 min to 6500.0 min
Description
When the current running time reaches the value of F8-53, the DO outputs an
active signal. It is valid only for the current AC drive running. The previous running
time is not added.

F8-55 Deceleration time for emergency stop

Address: 0xF837
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s

‑239‑
Parameter Groups

Description
This parameter defines the deceleration time for emergency stop.

F8-57 Accumulative power consumption cleared

Address: 0xF839
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
When this parameter is set to 1, the accumulative output power consumption of
the AC drive will be cleared.

F8-58 Output power correction coefficient

Address: -
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.0% to +200.0%
Description
When the output power (U0-05) is not equal to expected value, perform linear
correction on the output power via this parameter.

2.10 F9 Fault and Protection

F9-00 AC drive overload suppression

Address: 0xF900
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description

‑240‑
 Parameter Groups

This parameter indicates the troubleshooting when the AC drive overloads. When
this parameter is set to 0, the AC drive will report a fault upon overload and the
output will be blocked. When this parameter is set to 1, in case that the drive is
about to be overloaded, the AC drive automatically lowers down the output
current to about the rated current. This can avoid overload; however, the running
speed may be reduced or block may occur.
For lifting load, set this parameter to 0.

F9-01 Motor overload protection gain

Address: 0xF901
Min.: 0.2 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.2 to 10.00
Description
The motor overload protection gain is calculated according to the percentage of
time during which the motor runs continuously at a certain overload threshold
without reporting an overload fault.
This parameter is used to adjust the actual overload fault report time of the AC
drive when motor overload occurs.

F9-02 Motor overload pre-warning coefficient

Address: 0xF902
Min.: 50 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 80 Change: In real time
Value Range:
50% to 100%
Description
The motor overload pre-warning coefficient is calculated according to the
percentage of time during which the motor runs continuously at a certain
overload threshold without reporting overload pre-warning. This function is used
to give a pre-warning signal to the control system through DO before motor
overload protection.
This signal is used to determine how long in advance to send the pre-warning
signal before the motor overload protection is triggered. A larger coefficient
means later transmission of the pre-warning signal.
When the accumulative output current of the AC drive is higher than the value of
the overload time (value Y of motor overload protection inverse time-lag curve)
multiplied by F9-02 (Motor overload pre-warning coefficient), the multi-functional
DO of the AC drive outputs a motor overload pre-warning signal.

‑241‑
Parameter Groups

F9-04 Overvoltage threshold

Address: 0xF904
Min.: 350 Unit: V
Max.: 820 Data type: UInt16
Default: 820 Change: In real time
Value Range:
350.0 V to 820.0 V
Description
When the bus voltage is higher than the value of F9-04, the AC drive reports E05.00
to E07.00.

F9-06 Output phase loss detection before startup

Address: 0xF906
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
It takes about several seconds to detect output phase loss during running. For
low-frequency running applications or applications where risks exist during
startup, this function enables quick detection of output phase loss during startup.
However, it is not suitable for applications that have strict requirements on
startup time.

F9-07 Detection of software short-circuited to ground

Address: 0xF907
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: No detection
1: Detection before power-on
2: Detection before running
3: Detection before power-on and running
Description

F9-08 Braking unit applied voltage

Address: 0xF908
Min.: 200 Unit: V

‑242‑
 Parameter Groups

Max.: 2000 Data type: UInt16

Default: 760 Change: In real time
Value Range:
200.0 V to 2000.0 V
Description
Used to adjust the energy consumption efficiency of the braking resistor. When
the motor is in the power generation state, the voltage of the DC bus in the AC
drive will rise. The braking unit can be used to control the voltage of the DC bus to
consume the regenerative electric energy generated by the motor through the
braking resistor or send back the regenerative electric energy to the power
supply.
Application scenarios:
In the V/f control mode, if the actual deceleration time of the motor is far longer
than the set deceleration time, the motor decelerates too slowly. To enable the
motor to decelerate quickly by enhancing the energy consumption of the braking
resistor, you can set F9‑08 (Braking unit applied voltage) to 690 V if the following
conditions are met: The AC drive is equipped with a braking resistor or an energy
feedback unit; The input voltage of the AC drive is 360 V to 420 V.

F9-09 Fault automatic reset times

Address: 0xF909
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 20 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–20
Description
This parameter defines the number of auto fault reset attempts of the AC drive. If
the number of reset attempts exceeds the value of this parameter, the AC drive
will remain in the faulty state.

F9-10 DO action during auto fault reset

Address: 0xF90A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Not act
1: Act

‑243‑
Parameter Groups

Description
Used to determine whether the fault output function of the DO takes effect during
the automatic fault reset of the AC drive. The fault output function of the DO is
defined by setting F5‑04 to 2.

F9-11 Fault auto reset interval

Address: 0xF90B
Min.: 0.1 Unit: s
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1s to 100.0s
Description
This parameter defines the delay of auto fault reset after the AC drive reports a
fault.

F9-12 Input phase loss/Contactor pickup protection

Address: 0xF90C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 13 Data type: UInt16
Default: 11 Change: In real time
Value Range:
Ones (position): Input phase loss protection selection
0: Input phase loss detection inhibited
1: Input phase loss detected by software and hardware
2: Input phase loss detected by software
3: Input phase loss detected by hardware
Tens (position): Contactor pickup/Fan fault protection
0: Inhibited
1: Enabled
Description
This function parameter determines whether to perform input phase loss or
contactor pickup protection through the ones and tens position.
After the input phase loss protection function is enabled, if the three-phase input
power supply is abnormal, or the driver board, lightning protection board, main
control board, or rectifier bridge is abnormal, the AC drive will report E12.00
(input phase loss).
For models of 450 kW and below, the tens position is used to set the contactor
pickup protection function. For for models of 500 kW and above, the tens position
is used to set the fan fault selection.

‑244‑
 Parameter Groups

F9-13 Restart interval upon fault reset

Address: 0xF90D
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 600 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 600.0s
Description
Restart interval upon fault reset

F9-14 1st fault type

Address: 0xF90E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 99 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0–99
Description
This parameter shows the fault codes of the latest three (1st, 2nd, and 3rd (latest))
faults. The host controller reads the communication address to obtain the fault
code of the AC drive and triggers the AC drive to report the fault. The fault code
can be viewed on the operating panel.

F9-15 2nd fault type

Address: 0xF90F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 99 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0–99
Description
This parameter shows the fault codes of the latest three (1st, 2nd, and 3rd (latest))
faults. The host controller reads the communication address to obtain the fault
code of the AC drive and triggers the AC drive to report the fault. The fault code
can be viewed on the operating panel.

F9-16 3rd (latest) fault type

Address: 0xF910
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 99 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable

‑245‑
Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0–99
Description
This parameter shows the fault codes of the latest three (1st, 2nd, and 3rd (latest))
faults. The host controller reads the communication address to obtain the fault
code of the AC drive and triggers the AC drive to report the fault. The fault code
can be viewed on the operating panel.

F9-17 Frequency upon the 3rd fault (latest)

Address: 0xF911
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 Hz to 65535 Hz
Description
This parameter shows the frequency of the AC drive upon the latest fault.

F9-18 Current upon the 3rd fault (latest)

Address: 0xF912
Min.: 0 Unit: A
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.0 A to 6553.5 A
Description
This parameter shows the current of the AC drive upon the latest fault.

F9-19 Bus voltage upon 3rd fault (latest)

Address: 0xF913
Min.: 0 Unit: V
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.0 V to 6553.5V
Description
This parameter shows the bus voltage of the AC drive upon the latest fault.

F9-20 Input terminal state upon the 3rd fault (latest)

Address: 0xF914
Min.: 0 Unit: -

‑246‑
 Parameter Groups

Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16

Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter shows the input terminal state of the AC drive upon the latest
fault.

F9-21 Output terminal state upon the 3rd fault (latest)

Address: 0xF915
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter shows the output terminal state of the AC drive upon the latest
fault.

F9-22 AC drive state upon the 3rd fault (latest)

Address: 0xF916
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter shows the state of the AC drive upon the latest fault.

F9-23 Power-on time upon the 3rd fault (latest)

Address: 0xF917
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter shows the power-on duration of the AC drive upon the latest fault.

F9-24 Running time upon the 3rd fault (latest)

Address: 0xF918

‑247‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.0–6553.5
Description
This parameter shows the operation time of the AC drive upon the latest fault.

F9-25 IGBT temperature upon the 3rd fault (latest)

Address: 0xF919
Min.: -20 Unit: °C
Max.: 120 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-20℃ to +120℃
Description
This parameter shows the IGBT temperature of the AC drive upon the latest fault.

F9-26 Fault subcode upon the 3rd fault (latest)

Address: 0xF91A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description

F9-27 Frequency upon the 2nd fault

Address: 0xF91B
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 Hz to 65535 Hz
Description
This parameter shows the frequency of the AC drive upon the second fault.

F9-28 Current upon the 2nd fault

Address: 0xF91C
Min.: 0 Unit: A

‑248‑
 Parameter Groups

Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16

Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.0 A to 6553.5 A
Description
This parameter shows the current of the AC drive upon the second fault.

F9-29 Bus voltage upon the 2nd fault

Address: 0xF91D
Min.: 0 Unit: V
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.0 V to 6553.5V
Description
This parameter shows the bus voltage of the AC drive upon the second fault.

F9-30 Input terminal state upon the 2nd fault

Address: 0xF91E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter shows the input terminal state of the AC drive upon the second
fault.

F9-31 Output terminal state upon the 2nd fault

Address: 0xF91F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter show the output terminal state of the AC drive upon the second
fault.

F9-32 AC drive state upon 2nd fault

Address: 0xF920

‑249‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter shows the state of the AC drive upon the second fault.

F9-33 Power-on time upon the 2nd fault

Address: 0xF921
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter shows the power-on duration of the AC drive upon the second
fault.

F9-34 Running time upon the 2nd fault

Address: 0xF922
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.0–6553.5
Description
This parameter shows the operation time of the AC drive upon the second fault.

F9-35 IGBT temperature upon the 2nd fault

Address: 0xF923
Min.: -20 Unit: °C
Max.: 120 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-20℃ to +120℃
Description
This parameter shows the IGBT temperature of the AC drive upon the second
fault.

F9-36 Fault subcode upon the 2nd fault

Address: 0xF924

‑250‑
 Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description

F9-37 Frequency upon the 1st fault

Address: 0xF925
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 Hz to 65535 Hz
Description
This parameter shows the frequency of the AC drive upon the first fault.

F9-38 Current upon the 1st fault

Address: 0xF926
Min.: 0 Unit: A
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.0 A to 6553.5 A
Description
This parameter shows the current of the AC drive upon the first fault.

F9-39 Bus voltage upon the 1st fault

Address: 0xF927
Min.: 0 Unit: V
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.0 V to 6553.5V
Description
This parameter shows the bus voltage of the AC drive upon the first fault.

F9-40 Input terminal state upon the 1st fault

Address: 0xF928
Min.: 0 Unit: -

‑251‑
Parameter Groups

Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16

Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter shows the input terminal state of the AC drive upon the first fault.

F9-41 Output terminal state upon the 1st fault

Address: 0xF929
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter shows the output terminal state of the AC drive upon the first
fault.

F9-42 AC drive state upon the 1st fault

Address: 0xF92A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter shows the state of the AC drive upon the first fault.

F9-43 Power-on time upon the 1st fault

Address: 0xF92B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter shows the power-on duration of the AC drive upon the first fault.

F9-44 Running time upon the 1st fault

Address: 0xF92C
Min.: 0 Unit: -

‑252‑
 Parameter Groups

Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16

Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.0–6553.5
Description
This parameter shows the operation time of the AC drive upon the first fault.

F9-45 IGBT temperature upon the 1st fault

Address: 0xF92D
Min.: -20 Unit: °C
Max.: 120 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-20℃ to +120℃
Description
This parameter shows the IGBT temperature of the AC drive upon the first fault.

F9-46 Fault subcode upon the 1st fault

Address: 0xF92E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description

F9-47 Fault protection action selection 0

Address: 0xF92F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 22022 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑253‑
Parameter Groups

Ones (position): Value of E02, E03, and E04

0: Coast to stop
2: Restart upon fault
Tens (position): Value of E05, E06, and E07
0: Coast to stop
2: Restart upon fault
Hundreds (position): Value of E08
0: Coast to stop
Thousands (position): Value of E09
0: Coast to stop
2: Restart upon fault
Ten thousands (position): Value of E10
0: Coast to stop
2: Restart upon fault
Description
The fault protection actions are set by the ones, tens, hundreds, thousands, and
ten thousands places of this parameter.
0: Coast to stop
The AC drive coasts to stop.
2: Restart upon fault
The AC drive will restart upon faults.

F9-48 Fault protection action selection 1

Address: 0xF930
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 50555 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑254‑
 Parameter Groups

Ones (position): Value of E11

0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
2: Restart upon fault
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Tens (position): Value of E12
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
2: Restart upon fault
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Hundreds (position): Value of E13
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
2: Restart upon fault
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Thousands (position): Value of E14
0: Coast to stop
Ten thousands (position): Value of E15
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Description
The fault protection actions are set by the ones, tens, hundreds, thousands, and
ten thousands places of this parameter.
0: Coast to stop
The AC drive coasts to stop.
1: Decelerate to stop
The AC drive decelerates to stop.
2: Restart upon fault
The AC drive will restart upon faults.
3: Electromagnetic shorting
The AC drive enters the electromagnetic shorting state.
4: Warning
The AC drive continues to run.
5: Disabled
Fault detection is disabled.

‑255‑
Parameter Groups

F9-49 Fault protection action selection 2

Address: 0xF931
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 55055 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
Ones (position): Value of E16
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Tens (position): Value of E17
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Hundreds (position): Value of E18
0: Coast to stop
Thousands (position): Value of E19
0: Coast to stop
3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Ten thousands (position): Value of E20
0: Coast to stop
3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Description
The fault protection actions are set by the ones, tens, hundreds, thousands, and
ten thousands places of this parameter.
0: Coast to stop
The AC drive coasts to stop.
1: Decelerate to stop
The AC drive decelerates to stop.
2: Restart upon fault
The AC drive will restart upon faults.
3: Electromagnetic shorting
The AC drive enters the electromagnetic shorting state.
4: Warning
The AC drive continues to run.
5: Disabled
Fault detection is disabled.

‑256‑
 Parameter Groups

F9-50 Fault protection action selection 3

Address: 0xF932
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 55550 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5040 Change: At stop
Value Range:
Ones (position): Reserved
0: Coast to stop
Tens (position): Value of E63
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Hundreds (position): Value of E23
0: Coast to stop
5: Canceled
Thousands (position): Value of E24
0: Coast to stop
5: Canceled
Ten thousands (position): Value of E25
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Description
The fault protection actions are set by the ones, tens, hundreds, thousands, and
ten thousands places of this parameter.
0: Coast to stop
The AC drive coasts to stop.
1: Decelerate to stop
The AC drive decelerates to stop.
2: Restart upon fault
The AC drive will restart upon faults.
3: Electromagnetic shorting
The AC drive enters the electromagnetic shorting state.
4: Warning
The AC drive continues to run.
5: Disabled
Fault detection is disabled.

F9-51 Fault protection action selection 4

Address: 0xF933

‑257‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 55555 Data type: UInt16
Default: 51111 Change: At stop
Value Range:
Ones (position): Value of E26
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Tens position: Value of E27
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Hundreds (position): Value of E28
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Thousands (position): Value of E29
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Ten thousands (position): Value of E30
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Description
The fault protection actions are set by the ones, tens, hundreds, thousands, and
ten thousands places of this parameter.
0: Coast to stop
The AC drive coasts to stop.
1: Decelerate to stop
The AC drive decelerates to stop.
2: Restart upon fault
The AC drive will restart upon faults.
3: Electromagnetic shorting
The AC drive enters the electromagnetic shorting state.

‑258‑
 Parameter Groups

4: Warning
The AC drive continues to run.
5: Disabled
Fault detection is disabled.

F9-52 Fault protection action selection 5

Address: 0xF934
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 55525 Data type: UInt16
Default: 101 Change: At stop
Value Range:
Ones (position): Value of E31
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Tens (position): Value of E40
0: Coast to stop
2: Restart upon fault
Hundreds (position): Value of E41
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Thousands (position): Value of E42
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
2: Restart upon fault
3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Ten thousands (position): Value of E43
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Description
The fault protection actions are set by the ones, tens, hundreds, thousands, and
ten thousands places of this parameter.
0: Coast to stop
The AC drive coasts to stop.

‑259‑
Parameter Groups

1: Decelerate to stop
The AC drive decelerates to stop.
2: Restart upon fault
The AC drive will restart upon faults.
3: Electromagnetic shorting
The AC drive enters the electromagnetic shorting state.
4: Warning
The AC drive continues to run.
5: Disabled
Fault detection is disabled.

F9-53 Fault protection action selection 6

Address: 0xF935
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 55555 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
Ones (position): Value of E45
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Tens (position): Value of E60
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Hundreds (position): Value of E61
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to stop
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Thousands (position): Value of E62
0: Coast to stop
5: Canceled
Ten thousands (position): Reserved
5: Canceled
Description
The fault protection actions are set by the ones, tens, hundreds, thousands, and
ten thousands places of this parameter.
0: Coast to stop
The AC drive coasts to stop.

‑260‑
 Parameter Groups

1: Decelerate to stop
The AC drive decelerates to stop.
2: Restart upon fault
The AC drive will restart upon faults.
3: Electromagnetic shorting
The AC drive enters the electromagnetic shorting state.
4: Warning
The AC drive continues to run.
5: Disabled
Fault detection is disabled.

F9-54 Frequency for continuing to run upon fault

Address: 0xF936
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 4 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Current running frequency
1: Frequency reference
2: Frequency upper limit
3: Frequency lower limit
4: Alternative frequency upon exception
Description
This parameter defines the frequency at which the AC drive continues to run when
it is faulty. If a fault occurs during the running of the AC drive and the fault
protection action is set to "Continue to run", the AC drive displays A** and
continues to run at the frequency set by F9-54.

F9-55 Backup frequency upon fault

Address: 0xF937
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the alternative frequency of the AC drive upon fault. If a
fault occurs during running and the fault protection action is to run at the
alternative frequency upon error (F9‑54 = 4), the AC drive displays A** and
continues running at the alternative frequency.

‑261‑
Parameter Groups

F9-56 Motor temperature sensor type

Address: 0xF938
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 4 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: No sensor (AI3 input)
1: PT100
2: PT1000
3:KTY84
4:PTC130
Description
AI3 can be used to for input of the motor temperature sensor. Four sensors,
including PT100, PT1000, PTC130, and KTY84 are supported. The sensor is
connected to the AI3 and GND terminals. To use the sensor, set the sensor type
correctly. The motor temperature is displayed by U0-34.

F9-57 Motor overtemperature protection threshold

Address: 0xF939
Min.: 0 Unit: °C
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 110 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0°C to 200°C
Description
Used to set the motor overtemperature protection threshold. When the motor
temperature exceeds the value of F9-57 (Motor overheat protection threshold),
the AC drive reports a motor overheat fault (Err45) and acts as selected by F9-48.

F9-58 Motor overtemperature pre-warning threshold

Address: 0xF93A
Min.: 0 Unit: °C
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 90 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0°C to 200°C
Description
Used to set the motor overtemperature pre-warning threshold. When the motor
temperature exceeds the value of F9-58 (Motor overheat pre-waring threshold),
the DO allocated with function 39 (Motor overheat) outputs an active signal.

‑262‑
 Parameter Groups

F9-59 Selection of power dip ride-through action

Address: 0xF93B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Decelerate
2: Decelerate to stop
3: Voltage dip suppression
Description
This parameter defines whether the AC drive runs continuously upon
instantaneous power failure. When instantaneous power failure occurs, the AC
drive keeps the motor in the power generating state to keep the bus voltage at a
value around the "voltage threshold for enabling power dip ride-through". This
prevents the AC drive from stopping due to undervoltage.
0: Disabled
The power dip ride-through function is disabled.
1: Decelerate
When power failure occurs, the bus voltage stays at a value around the "voltage
threshold for enabling power dip ride-through". In this mode, when the grid
voltage recovers, the AC drive accelerates to the target frequency based on the
acceleration time.
2: Decelerate to stop
When power failure occurs, the AC drive decelerates to stop. In this mode, when
the grid voltage recovers, the AC drive decelerates to 0 Hz and stops. The AC drive
will start again only when a new startup command is received.
3: Voltage dip suppression
In this mode, the AC drive will not stop due to undervoltage caused by voltage
dip. The voltage dip suppression time is set by F9-66.

F9-60 Voltage to determine the pause of power dip ride-through

Address: 0xF93C
Min.: 80 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 85 Change: In real time
Value Range:
80% to 100%
Description

‑263‑
Parameter Groups

This parameter defines the voltage threshold for recovering from power dip ride-
through. 100% corresponds to 540 V. This value is slightly lower than the bus
voltage before power failure.
Upon power loss, the bus voltage is maintained at about F9‑62 (Threshold of
power dip ride-through function enabled). When the power supply recovers, the
bus voltage rises from F9‑62 (Threshold of power dip ride-through function
enabled) to F9‑60 (Threshold of power dip ride-through function disabled). During
this period, the output frequency of the AC drive keeps decreasing until the bus
voltage reaches F9‑60 (Threshold of power dip ride-through function disabled).

F9-61 Duration for judging voltage recovery from power dip ride-through
Address: 0xF93D
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 100.0s
Description
Used to set the time required for the bus voltage to rise from F9‑60 (Threshold of
power dip ride-through function disabled) to the voltage before power loss.

F9-62 Voltage to determine the action of power dip ride-through

Address: 0xF93E
Min.: 60 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 80 Change: In real time
Value Range:
60% to 100%
Description
This parameter defines the bus voltage level upon power failure. When a power
loss occurs, the bus voltage is retained at a value around F9-62 (Threshold of
power dip ride-through function enabled).

F9-63 Runaway protection time in FVC mode

Address: 0xF93F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000

‑264‑
 Parameter Groups

Description

F9-64 Load loss detection level

Address: 0xF940
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
When the output current of the AC drive falls below F9-64 (Load loss detection
level) for longer than the time set by F9-65 (Load loss detection time), the AC drive
performs load loss protection action (selected through F9-49, coast to stop by
default).
Once the load recovers during protection, the AC drive will restore to run at the
frequency reference.

F9-65 Load loss detection time

Address: 0xF941
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 60 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s–60.0s
Description
When the output current of the AC drive falls below F9-64 (Load loss detection
level) for longer than the time set by F9-65 (Load loss detection time), the AC drive
performs load loss protection action (selected through F9-49, coast to stop by
default).
Once the load recovers during protection, the AC drive will restore to run at the
frequency reference.

F9-66 Voltage dip suppression time

Address: 0xF942
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 600 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.0s to 600.0s
Description

‑265‑
Parameter Groups

F9-67 Overspeed detection level

Address: 0xF943
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 50.0%
Description
During overspeed protection, when the detected motor speed exceeds F0-10
(Maximum frequency) for a percentage higher than F9-67 (Overspeed detection
level) and for longer than the time set by F9-68 (Overspeed detection time), the AC
drive reports a motor overspeed fault (Err43) and acts as selected by F9-50 (Fault
protection action selection 4).
When F9-68 (Overspeed detection time) is set to 0.0s, the overspeed detection
function is disabled.
The overspeed protection is valid only in the FVC mode (F0-01 = 1).

F9-68 Overspeed detection time

Address: 0xF944
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 60 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0–60.0
Description
During overspeed protection, when the detected motor speed exceeds F0-10
(Maximum frequency) for a percentage higher than F9-67 (Overspeed detection
level) and for longer than the time set by F9-68 (Overspeed detection time), the AC
drive reports a motor overspeed fault (Err43) and acts as selected by F9-50 (Fault
protection action selection 4).
When F9-68 (Overspeed detection time) is set to 0.0s, the overspeed detection
function is disabled.
The overspeed protection is valid only in the FVC mode (F0-01 = 1).

F9-69 Excessive speed deviation threshold

Address: 0xF945
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 50.0%
Description

‑266‑
 Parameter Groups

When the detected motor speed is larger than the value of F9-69 (Detection level
of speed error) for longer than the time set by F9-70 (Detection time of speed
error), the AC drive reports the excessive speed deviation fault (E42.00) and acts
as selected by F9-50 (Fault protection action selection 4).
If F9-70 (Detection time of speed error) is set to 0.0s, the excessive speed
deviation detection function is s disabled.
The excessive speed deviation detection function is valid only in the FVC mode.

F9-70 Excessive speed deviation detection time

Address: 0xF946
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 60 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s–60.0s
Description
When the detected motor speed is larger than the value of F9-69 (Detection level
of speed error) for longer than the time set by F9-70 (Detection time of speed
error), the AC drive reports the excessive speed deviation fault (E42.00) and acts
as selected by F9-50 (Fault protection action selection 4).
If F9-70 (Detection time of speed error) is set to 0.0s, the excessive speed
deviation detection function is disabled.
The excessive speed deviation detection function is valid only in the FVC mode.

F9-71 Power dip ride-through gain

Address: 0xF947
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 40 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–100
Description
This parameter is valid only in the "keep bus voltage constant" mode (F9‑59 = 1).
If undervoltage occurs frequently during power dip ride-through, increase the
power dip ride-through gain and integral coefficient.

F9-72 Power dip ride-through integral

Address: 0xF948
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 30 Change: In real time

‑267‑
Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0–100
Description
This parameter is valid only in the "keep bus voltage constant" mode (F9‑59 = 2).
If undervoltage occurs frequently during power dip ride-through, increase the
power dip ride-through gain and integral coefficient.

F9-73 Deceleration time of power dip ride-through

Address: 0xF949
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 300 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 300.0s
Description
This parameter is valid only in the "decelerate to stop" mode (F9‑59 = 2).
When the bus voltage is lower than the value of F9‑62, the AC drive decelerates to
stop. The deceleration time is determined by this parameter instead of F0‑18.

2.11 FA Process Control PID

FA-00 PID reference source

Address: 0xFA00
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 6 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: PID digital setting (FA-01)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Communication setting (1000H)
6: Multi-reference
Description
This parameter specifies the PID reference source. The PID reference source is a
relative value. The value 100% corresponds to 100% of the feedback signal of the
controlled system.
0: PID digital setting of (FA‑01)
The PID reference source is set by FA-01 (PID reference value).

‑268‑
 Parameter Groups

1: AI1
The PID reference source is set by AI1.
2: AI2
The PID reference source is set by AI2.
3: AI3
The PID reference source is set by AI3.
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
The PID reference is set by the pulse frequency through the DI5. The frequency is
calculated according to the corresponding relationship curve between the pulse
frequency and running frequency.
5: Communication setting (1000H)
The PID reference source is set by remote communication.
6: Multi-reference
In the multi-reference mode, different combinations of DI states correspond to
different frequency references. The four multi-reference terminals provide 16
state combinations, corresponding to 16 target frequency values. Note: When
FA‑00 is set to 6 (Multi-reference), FC-51 (Reference 0 source) cannot be set to 5
(PID reference).

FA-01 PID digital reference

Address: 0xFA01
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
When FA-00 (PID reference setting channel) is set to 0, this parameter must be set.
When the parameter value is set to 100%, it corresponds to the maximum
feedback value.

FA-02 PID feedback source

Address: 0xFA02
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 8 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑269‑
Parameter Groups

0: AI1
1: AI2
2: AI3
3: AI1 – AI2
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Communication
6:AI1 + AI2
7: Max. (|AI1|, |AI2|)
8: Min. (|AI1|, |AI2|)
Description
This parameter defines the PID feedback source.

FA-03 PID action direction

Address: 0xFA03
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Forward
1: Reverse
Description
0: Forward
When the feedback value is lower than the PID reference, the output frequency of
the AC drive increases.
1: Reverse
When the feedback value is lower than the PID reference, the output frequency of
the AC drive decreases.

FA-04 PID reference and feedback range

Address: 0xFA04
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1000 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter is used for display of the PID reference and feedback, which are
dimensionless. For example, if this parameter is set to 1000, the PID reference (0%
to 100%) corresponds linearly to the feedback value (0 to 1000).

FA-05 Proportional gain Kp1

Address: 0xFA05

‑270‑
 Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0–1000.0
Description
This parameter defines the proportional gain Kp in PID control. The deviation
reduction speed depends on the proportional coefficient Kp. A larger Kp value
tends to reduce the deviation faster, but may cause system oscillation, especially
at large hysteresis. A smaller Kp value indicates lower possibility of oscillation but
also slower deviation reduction.

FA-06 Integral time Ti1

Address: 0xFA06
Min.: 0.01 Unit: s
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.01s to 100.00s
Description
This parameter defines the integral time Ti in PID control. It determines the
integral adjustment intensity of the PID controller. Shorter integral time indicates
greater adjustment intensity.

FA-07 Derivative time Td1

Address: 0xFA07
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000s to 10.000s
Description
This parameter defines the derivative time Td in PID control. It determines the
deviation variation adjustment intensity of the PID controller. Longer derivative
time indicates greater adjustment intensity.

FA-08 PID cut-off frequency in reverse run

Address: 0xFA08
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑271‑
Parameter Groups

0.00 Hz to value of F0-10

Description
When the frequency source is only the PID, the PID cut-off frequency in reverse
direction is the minimum value of the current PID output. When the frequency
source is main frequency + PID, FA‑08 acts on the main frequency + PID and
outputs the minimum frequency value after "main frequency + PID" operation.

FA-09 PID deviation limit

Address: 0xFA09
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
When the deviation is within the PID deviation limit, no adjustment is required.
This parameter helps balance the accuracy and stability of the system output.

FA-10 PID differential limit

Address: 0xFA0A
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00% to 100.00%
Description
It is used to set the PID differential output range. In PID control, the differential
operation may easily cause system oscillation. Therefore, the PID differential
regulation is restricted to a small range.

FA-11 PID reference change time

Address: 0xFA0B
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 650 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00s to 650.00s
Description
This parameter defines the time required for the PID reference to change from
0.0% to 100.0%.

‑272‑
 Parameter Groups

FA-12 PID feedback filter time

Address: 0xFA0C
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 60 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00s to 60.00s
Description
This parameter defines the filter time of PID feedback. The filter helps to reduce
interference on the feedback but degrades the responsiveness of the process
closed-loop system.

FA-13 PID deviation gain

Address: 0xFA0D
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description

FA-14 PID optimization

Address: 0xFA0E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–100
Description

FA-15 Proportional gain Kp2

Address: 0xFA0F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0–1000.0

‑273‑
Parameter Groups

Description
This parameter defines the proportional gain Kp in PID control. The deviation
reduction speed depends on the proportional coefficient Kp. A larger Kp tends to
reduce the deviation faster, but may cause system oscillation, especially at large
hysteresis. A smaller Kp indicates lower possibility of oscillation but also slower
deviation reduction.

FA-16 Integral time Ti2

Address: 0xFA10
Min.: 0.01 Unit: s
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.01s to 100.00s
Description
This parameter defines the integral time Ti in PID control. It determines the
integral adjustment intensity of the PID controller. Shorter integral time indicates
greater adjustment intensity.

FA-17 Derivative time Td2

Address: 0xFA11
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000s to 10.000s
Description
This parameter defines the derivative time Td in PID control. It determines the
deviation variation adjustment intensity of the PID controller. Longer derivative
time indicates greater adjustment intensity.

FA-18 PID parameter switchover condition

Address: 0xFA12
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 7 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑274‑
 Parameter Groups

0: No switchover
1: Switchover by DI
2: Automatic switchover based on deviation
3: Switchover based on running frequency
6: Automatic adjustment based on roll diameter
7: Automatic adjustment based on maximum roll diameter percentage
Description
This parameter defines the switchover between two groups of PID parameters.
0: No switchover
No switchover is performed.
1: Switchover by DI
To use this function, the DI must be assigned with function 43 (PID parameter
switchover). If the DI is inactive, parameter group 1 (FA‑05 to FA‑07) is selected. If
the DI is active, parameter group 2 (FA‑15 to FA‑17) is selected.
2: Auto switchover based on deviation
If the absolute value of the deviation between the setting and the feedback is less
than FA‑19 (PID parameter switchover deviation 1), parameter group 1 is selected.
If the absolute value of the deviation between the setting and the feedback is
greater than FA‑20 (PID parameter switchover deviation 2), parameter group 2 is
selected. If the absolute value of the deviation between the setting and the
feedback is between FA-19 (PID parameter switchover deviation 1) and FA-20 (PID
parameter switchover deviation 2), the PID parameters are linear interpolation
values of the two sets of PID parameters.
3: Switchover based on running frequency
PID parameters are switched automatically based on the running frequency of the
AC drive.
6: Automatic adjustment based on roll diameter
When the current roll diameter changes between the maximum roll diameter
(B0‑08) and the minimum roll diameter (B0‑09), the PID parameters are the linear
interpolation values of the two sets of PID parameters. The minimum roll
diameter corresponds to parameter group 1 (FA‑05 to FA‑07), and the maximum
roll diameter corresponds to parameter group 2 (FA‑15 to FA‑17).
7: Automatic adjustment based on maximum roll diameter percentage
When the current roll diameter changes between the maximum roll diameter
(B0‑08) x FA‑20 and the maximum roll diameter (B0‑08) x FA-19, the PID
parameters are the linear interpolation values of the two sets of PID parameters.

FA-19 PID parameter switchover deviation 1

Address: 0xFA13
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: FA-20 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time

‑275‑
Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0.0% to FA-20
Description
The value 100% corresponds to the maximum deviation between the reference
and feedback. The setting range is 0.0% to FA-20 (PID parameter switchover
deviation 2).

FA-20 PID parameter switchover deviation 2

Address: 0xFA14
Min.: FA-19 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 80 Change: In real time
Value Range:
FA-19 to 100.0%
Description
The value 100% corresponds to the maximum deviation between the reference
and feedback. The setting range is FA-19 (PID parameter switchover deviation 1)
to 100.0%.

FA-21 PID initial value

Address: 0xFA15
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
When the AC drive starts up, the PID starts closed-loop algorithm only after the
PID output is fixed to the PID initial value (FA-21) and lasts the time longer than
the value of FA-22 (PID initial value active time).

FA-22 PID initial value holding time

Address: 0xFA16
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 650 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00s to 650.00s
Description
When the AC drive starts up, the PID starts closed-loop algorithm only after the
PID output is fixed to the PID initial value (FA-21) and lasts the time longer than
the value of FA-22 (PID initial value active time).

‑276‑
 Parameter Groups

FA-23 Maximum deviation between two PID outputs in forward direction

Address: 0xFA17
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00% to 100.00%
Description

FA-24 Maximum deviation between two PID outputs in reverse direction

Address: 0xFA18
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00% to 100.00%
Description

FA-25 PID integral property

Address: 0xFA19
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
0: Disabled. When the integral pause is disabled, it remains inactive no matter
whether the multi-functional DI is active.
1: Enabled. When the integral pause is enabled and the DI allocated with the PID
integral pause function is active (F4-00 = 22), the PID integral operation stops. In
this case, only proportional and differential operations take effect.

FA-26 Detection level of PID feedback loss

Address: 0xFA1A
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%

‑277‑
Parameter Groups

Description
This parameter is used to determine whether the PID feedback is lost. If the PID
feedback is lower than the value of FA-26 (Detection level of PID feedback loss)
and the lasting time exceeds the value of FA-27 (Detection time of PID feedback
loss), the AC drive reports E31.00.
When this parameter is set to 0, feedback loss detection is disabled.

FA-27 Detection time of PID feedback loss

Address: 0xFA1B
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 20 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 20.0s
Description
This parameter is used to determine whether the PID feedback is lost. If the PID
feedback is lower than the value of FA-26 (Detection level of PID feedback loss)
and the lasting time exceeds the value of FA-27 (Detection time of PID feedback
loss), the AC drive reports E31.00.

2.12 FB Wobble, Fixed Length, and Count

FB-00 Wobble setting mode

Address: 0xFB00
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Relative to the center frequency
1: Relative to the maximum frequency
Description
0: Relative to the central frequency (F0-07, frequency reference superposition). It
is a variable wobble system and the wobble changes with the central frequency
(frequency reference).
1: Relative to the maximum frequency (F0-10, maximum frequency). It is a fixed
wobble system, and the wobble is calculated based on the maximum frequency.

FB-01 Wobble amplitude

Address: 0xFB01
Min.: 0 Unit: %

‑278‑
 Parameter Groups

Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16

Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
When FB-01 is set to 0, the wobble amplitude is 0 and the wobble function does
not work. When the wobble is related to the central frequency (FB-00 = 0), the
wobble is calculated based on the following formula: wobble = F0-07 x FB-01.
When the wobble is related to the maximum frequency (FB-00 = 1), the wobble is
calculated based on the following formula: wobble = F0-10 x FB-01.

FB-02 Jump frequency amplitude

Address: 0xFB02
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 50.0%
Description
This parameter and the wobble are used to define the jump frequency, namely,
jump frequency = wobble x FB-02. The wobble running frequency is limited by the
frequency upper limit and frequency lower limit.

FB-03 Wobble cycle

Address: 0xFB03
Min.: 0.1 Unit: s
Max.: 3,000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1s to 3000.0s
Description
This parameter defines the time of a complete wobble cycle.

FB-04 Triangular wave rising time coefficient

Address: 0xFB04
Min.: 0.1 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1% to 100.0%

‑279‑
Parameter Groups

Description
It is the percentage of triangular wave rising time to FB-03 (Wobble cycle).

FB-05 Set length

Address: 0xFB05
Min.: 0 Unit: m
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1000 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 m to 65535 m
Description
This parameter specifies the length value to be controlled in fixed length control
mode.

FB-06 Actual length

Address: 0xFB06
Min.: 0 Unit: m
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 m to 65535 m
Description
The actual length is a monitored value. Actual length (FB-06) = Number of pulses
sampled by terminal/Number of pulses each meter (FB-07)

FB-07 Number of pulses per meter

Address: 0xFB07
Min.: 0.1 Unit: -
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1–6553.5
Description
Indicates the number of pulses output per 1 m. The length pulse is sampled by
DI5. DI5 must be allocated with the length count input function (F4-04 = 27).

FB-08 Set count value

Address: 0xFB08
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1000 Change: In real time

‑280‑
 Parameter Groups

Value Range:
1 to 65535
Description
When the count value reaches FB-08, the DO outputs an active signal indicating
that the count value has reached.

FB-09 Designated count value

Address: 0xFB09
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1000 Change: In real time
Value Range:
1 to 65535
Description
When the count value reaches FB-09, the DO outputs an active signal indicating
that the designated count value has reached. FB-09 must be lower than or equal
to FB-08 (Set count value).

FB-10 Revolution count reset mode

Address: 0xFB0A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Rising edge triggered
1: Level triggered
Description
Used to set the revolution counting reset mode.
0: Rising edge triggered
1: Level triggered

FB-11 Revolution count reset signal

Address: 0xFB0B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Disable
1: Enable
Description
Clear the number of revolutions. When this parameter is set to 1, the number of
revolutions is cleared.

‑281‑
Parameter Groups

FB-12 Revolution count retention upon power failure

Address: 0xFB0C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: No
1: Yes
Description
When this parameter is set to 0, the number of revolutions is not retentive upon
power failure. When this parameter is set to 1, the number of revolutions is
retentive upon power failure.

FB-13 Revolution count clear

Address: 0xFB0D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Indicates the original value of resolution count.

FB-14 Transmission ratio numerator

Address: 0xFB0E
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
1 to 65535
Description

FB-15 Transmission ratio denominator

Address: 0xFB0F
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
1 to 65535
Description

‑282‑
 Parameter Groups

FB-16 Actual running revolutions

Address: 0xFB10
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Indicates the number of revolutions after FB-13 is superposed.

FB-17 Running revolutions

Address: 0xFB11
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Indicates the number of running resolutions upon last count reset.

FB-18 Running revolution accuracy

Address: 0xFB12
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: 1 revolution
1: 0.1 revolution
Description
0 indicates that the unit of revolution count is 1, and 1 indicates that the unit of
revolution count is 0.1.

FB-19 Revolution count direction

Address: 0xFB13
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Forward
1: Reverse

‑283‑
Parameter Groups

Description
0 indicates that the directions are consistent, and 1 indicates that the directions
are reverse.

2.13 FC Multi-reference and Simple PLC

FC-00 Multi-reference 0
Address: 0xFC00
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
This parameter indicates the frequency reference of each speed. FC-00 to FC‑15
correspond to 16 (from 0 to 15) frequency setting values. The frequency setting
values are calculated as percentages corresponding to the maximum frequency.
The value 100% corresponds to F0‑10 (Maximum frequency). The AC drive
provides four multi-reference terminals, which have 16 state combinations,
corresponding to 16 frequency setting values.
When the simple PLC is used as the main frequency source, you need to set
parameters in group FC. In some industrial applications, the AC motor is only
used to realize the functions of start/stop, time- and segment-based speed
regulation, and simple automatic forward and reverse run. A PLC is required for
other control functions. However, the simple PLC is able to provide the control
functions without a PLC. Simple PLCs are typically used in industrial equipment
such as mixture mixing and industrial washing machines. When the simple PLC is
used as the main frequency (F0-03 = 7),
the parameters in group FC need to be set.

FC-01 Multi-reference 1
Address: 0xFC01
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

‑284‑
 Parameter Groups

FC-02 Multi-reference 2
Address: 0xFC02
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

FC-03 Multi-reference 3
Address: 0xFC03
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

FC-04 Multi-reference 4
Address: 0xFC04
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

FC-05 Multi-reference 5
Address: 0xFC05
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

FC-06 Multi-reference 6
Address: 0xFC06

‑285‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: -100 Unit: %

Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

FC-07 Multi-reference 7
Address: 0xFC07
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

FC-08 Multi-reference 8
Address: 0xFC08
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

FC-09 Multi-reference 9
Address: 0xFC09
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

FC-10 Multi-reference 10
Address: 0xFC0A
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16

‑286‑
 Parameter Groups

Default: 0 Change: In real time

Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

FC-11 Multi-reference 11
Address: 0xFC0B
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

FC-12 Multi-reference 12
Address: 0xFC0C
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

FC-13 Multi-reference 13
Address: 0xFC0D
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

FC-14 Multi-reference 14
Address: 0xFC0E
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑287‑
Parameter Groups

-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

FC-15 Multi-reference 15
Address: 0xFC0F
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
Same as FC-00

FC-16 Simple PLC running mode

Address: 0xFC10
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Stop after running for one cycle
1: Keep final values after running for one cycle
2: Repeat after running for one cycle
Description
When the simple PLC is used as the main frequency source, the running mode of
the simple PLC is set by FC‑16. FC-17 is used to determine whether the running
stage and running frequency of the PLC before power failure are memorized upon
power failure or shutdown.
0: Stop after running for one cycle
The AC drive stops automatically after running for one cycle and starts again only
after receiving a running command.
1: Keep the final value after running for one cycle
The AC drive keeps the final running frequency and direction after running for one
cycle and starts to run from the initial PLC state upon restart.
2: Repeat after running for one cycle
The AC drive automatically starts another cycle after running for one cycle and
stops only after receiving a stop command.

FC-17 Simple PLC retention selection upon power failure

Address: 0xFC11
Min.: 0 Unit: -

‑288‑
 Parameter Groups

Max.: 11 Data type: UInt16

Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
Ones (position): Retention selection upon power failure
0: No
1: Yes
Tens (position): Retention selection upon stop
0: No
1: Yes
Description
When the simple PLC is used as the main frequency, the running mode of the
simple PLC is set by FC-16.
FC-17 is used to determine whether the running stage and running frequency of
the PLC before power failure are memorized upon power failure or shutdown.
Ones (position): Retention selection upon power failure
This parameter defines whether the PLC process starts all over again upon power-
on. When it is set to 1, the AC drive retains the PLC running stage and running
frequency before power failure and continues to run from the retained values
after the drive is powered on again.
Tens: Retention selection upon stop
This parameter defines whether the PLC process starts all over again upon
startup. When it is set to 1, the AC drive retains the PLC running stage and running
frequency before stop and continues to run from the retained values after the
drive is started again.

FC-18 Running time of speed reference 0 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC12
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-19 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 0 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC13
Min.: 0 Unit: -

‑289‑
Parameter Groups

Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16

Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-20 Running time of speed reference 1 by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC14
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-21 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 1 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC15
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

‑290‑
 Parameter Groups

FC-22 Running time of speed reference 2 by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC16
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-23 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 2 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC17
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-24 Running time of speed reference 3 by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC18
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

‑291‑
Parameter Groups

FC-25 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 3 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC19
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-26 Running time of speed reference 4 by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC1A
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-27 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 4 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC1B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)

‑292‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-28 Running time of speed reference 5 by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC1C
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-29 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 5 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC1D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-30 Running time of speed reference 6 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC1E
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑293‑
Parameter Groups

0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)

Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-31 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 6 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC1F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-32 Running time of speed reference 7 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC20
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-33 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 7 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC21
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time

‑294‑
 Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-34 Running time of speed reference 8 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC22
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-35 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 8 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC23
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

‑295‑
Parameter Groups

FC-36 Running time of speed reference 9 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC24
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-37 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 9 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC25
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-38 Running time of speed reference 10 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC26
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

‑296‑
 Parameter Groups

FC-39 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 10 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC27
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-40 Running time of speed reference 11 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC28
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-41 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 11 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC29
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)

‑297‑
Parameter Groups

Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-42 Running time of speed reference 12 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC2A
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-43 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 12 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC2B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-44 Running time of speed reference 13 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC2C
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑298‑
 Parameter Groups

0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)

Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-45 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 13 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC2D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-46 Running time of speed reference 14 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC2E
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-47 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 14 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC2F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time

‑299‑
Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-48 Running time of the 15th speed reference set by simple PLC
Address: 0xFC30
Min.: 0 Unit: s (h)
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s (h) to 6553.5s (h)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of the 16 multi-speed references. The running time of
each reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

FC-49 Acceleration/deceleration time of speed reference 15 set by simple PLC

Address: 0xFC31
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Group 1 acceleration/deceleration time (F0-17 and F0-18)
1: Group 2 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-03 and F8-04)
2: Group 3 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-05 and F8-06)
3: Group 4 acceleration/deceleration time (F8-07 and F8-08)
Description
FC‑18 to FC‑49 respectively define the running time and acceleration and
deceleration time of each of 16 multi-speed references. The running time of each
speed reference is the sum of acceleration or deceleration time and running time
at constant speed and target frequency.

‑300‑
 Parameter Groups

FC-50 PLC running time unit

Address: 0xFC32
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: s (second)
1: h (hour)
Description
This parameter defines the unit of the PLC running time for each speed.

FC-51 Multi-reference 0 setting mode

Address: 0xFC33
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 6 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Multi-reference 0 (FC-00)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: PID
6: Preset frequency (F0-08 that can be changed by pressing UP or DOWN key)
Description
Multi-reference 0 can be selected through seven ways, including digital setting,
analog input, pulse frequency, PID, and preset frequency.
0: Multi-reference 0 (FC-00)
The frequency reference of multi-reference 0 is set by FC‑00.
1: AI1
The frequency reference of multi-reference 0 is set by AI1.
2: AI2
The frequency reference of multi-reference 0 is set by AI2.
3: AI3
The frequency reference of multi-reference 0 is set by AI3 input.
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
The frequency reference of multi-reference 0 is set by pulse frequency.
5: PID
The frequency reference of multi-reference 0 is set by PID.
6: Preset frequency (F0‑08)
The frequency reference of multi-reference 0 is set by F0‑08 (preset frequency).

‑301‑
Parameter Groups

2.14 FD Communication Parameters

FD-00 Baud rate

Address: 0xFD00
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 9 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: 300 bit/s
1: 600 bit/s
2: 1200 bit/s
3: 2400 bit/s
4: 4800 bit/s
5: 9600 bit/s
6: 19200 bit/s
7: 38400 bit/s
8: 57600 bit/s
9: 115200 bit/s
Description
This parameter defines the speed of data transmission between the host
controller and the AC drive. A higher baud rate indicates faster communication.
Note that the baud rate of the host controller must be the same as that of the AC
drive. Otherwise, communication will fail.

FD-01 Modbus data format

Address: 0xFD01
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: No check (8-N-2) 1: Even parity check (8-E-1)
2: Odd parity check (8-O-1)
3: No check (8-N-1)
Description
This parameter defines the format of Modbus data transmitted between the host
controller and the AC drive. The data format set in the host controller must be the
same as that set in the AC drive. Otherwise, communication will fail.

FD-02 Local address

Address: 0xFD02
Min.: 1 Unit: -

‑302‑
 Parameter Groups

Max.: 247 Data type: UInt16

Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
1 to 247
Description
When the local address is set to 0 (broadcast address), host controller broadcast
is enabled.
The local address must be unique in the range of 1 to 247, which is the basis for
point-point communication between the AC drive and the host controller.

FD-03 Response delay

Address: 0xFD03
Min.: 0 Unit: ms
Max.: 20 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 ms to 20 ms
Description
This parameter defines the interval from the end of data receiving by the AC drive
to the start of data transmission to the host controller.
If the response delay is shorter than the system processing time, the system
processing time prevails, which means the system sends data to the host
controller immediately after data processing is completed. If the response delay is
longer than the system processing time, the AC drive sends data to the host
controller only after the response delay elapses.

FD-04 Modbus communication timeout time

Address: 0xFD04
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 60 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s–60.0s
Description
When it is set to 0.0s, the Modbus communication timeout time is invalid. It is set
to 0.0s under normal circumstances. This parameter is used to monitor
communication status in a system with continuous communication.
When it is set to an effective value, if the time interval between the current
communication and the next communication exceeds Fd-04 (Modbus
communication interruption detection time), the system reports a
communication fault (Err16).

‑303‑
Parameter Groups

FD-06 Communication fault reset

Address: 0xFD06
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
This parameter defines whether to reset the communication fault.

FD-09 CANopen/CANlink communication state

Address: 0xFD09
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 999 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
Ones: CANopen
0: Stop
1: Initialized
2: Pre-running
8: Running
Tens: CANlink
0: Stop
1: Initialized
2: Pre-running
8: Running
Hundreds position: Reserved
Description
This read-only parameter is used to monitor the communication status.

FD-10 CANopen/CANlink switchover

Address: 0xFD0A
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
1: CANopen
2: CANlink
Description
Used to select the CAN communication protocol for the CANlink expansion card.

‑304‑
 Parameter Groups

If it is set to 1, CANopen communication is selected.

If it is set to 2, CANlink communication is selected.

FD-12 CAN baud rate

Address: 0xFD0C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 6 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: 20 kbit/s
1: 50 kbit/s
2: 100 kbit/s
3: 125 kbit/s
4: 250 kbit/s
5: 500 kbit/s
6: 1 Mbit/s
Description
This parameter defines the baud rate for CAN communication, including CANlink
and CANopen communication. In the same network, baud rates of all stations
must be consistent. Otherwise, communication will fail.
It is valid only for the CANlink communication expansion card.

FD-13 CAN station number

Address: 0xFD0D
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 127 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
1 to 127
Description
This parameter defines the CAN station number, including station numbers for
CANlink and CANopen communication. In the same network, all station numbers
must be unique. Otherwise, communication will fail.
It is valid only for the CANlink communication expansion card.

FD-14 Number of CAN frames received per unit of time

Address: 0xFD0E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:

‑305‑
Parameter Groups

0 to 65535
Description
This parameter is used to monitor the bus load. It defines the number of CAN
frames received by the station per second.
It is valid only for the CANlink communication expansion card.

FD-15 Maximum value of error counters received by the node

Address: 0xFD0F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter is used to monitor bus errors. It defines the maximum value of
error counters received by the node through CAN.
It is valid only for the CANlink communication expansion card.

FD-16 Maximum value of error counters sent by the node

Address: 0xFD10
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter is used to monitor bus errors. This parameter defines the
maximum value of error counters sent by the node through CAN.
It is valid only for the CANlink communication expansion card.

FD-17 Bus disconnection times per unit of time

Address: 0xFD11
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
This parameter is used to monitor bus errors. This parameter defines the CAN bus
disconnection times of the node.
It is valid only for the CANlink communication expansion card.

‑306‑
 Parameter Groups

FD-19 CAN communication disconnection coefficient

Address: 0xFD13
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 15 Data type: UInt16
Default: 3 Change: At stop
Value Range:
1 to 15
Description

FD-37 DHCP function

Address: 0xFD25
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description

FD-38 IP address highest byte

Address: 0xFD26
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 255 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 255
Description

FD-39 IP address second highest byte

Address: 0xFD27
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 255 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 255
Description

‑307‑
Parameter Groups

FD-40 IP address third byte

Address: 0xFD28
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 255 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 255
Description

FD-41 IP address lowest byte

Address: 0xFD29
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 255 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 255
Description

FD-42 Subnet mask highest byte

Address: 0xFD2A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 255 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 255
Description

FD-43 Subnet mask second highest byte

Address: 0xFD2B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 255 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 255
Description

FD-44 Subnet mask third byte

Address: 0xFD2C

‑308‑
 Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 255 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 255
Description

FD-45 Subnet mask lowest byte

Address: 0xFD2D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 255 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 255
Description

FD-46 Gateway highest byte

Address: 0xFD2E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 255 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 255
Description

FD-47 Gateway second highest byte

Address: 0xFD2F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 255 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 255
Description

FD-48 Gateway third highest byte

Address: 0xFD30
Min.: 0 Unit: -

‑309‑
Parameter Groups

Max.: 255 Data type: UInt16

Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 255
Description

FD-49 Gateway lowest byte

Address: 0xFD31
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 255 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 255
Description

FD-58 Internet IP extension card error code

Address: 0xFD3A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 255 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 255
Description

FD-61 MAC address high byte

Address: 0xFD3D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

FD-62 MAC address middle byte

Address: 0xFD3E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop

‑310‑
 Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

FD-63 MAC address low byte

Address: 0xFD3F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

FD-94 Modbus software version

Address: 0xFD5E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description

FD-95 CANlink software version

Address: 0xFD5F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description

FD-96 CANopen software version

Address: 0xFD60
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535

‑311‑
Parameter Groups

Description

2.15 FE User-defined Parameters

FE-00 User-defined parameter 0

Address: 0xFE00
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 7017 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Group FE consists of user-defined parameters. Users can add commonly used
parameters to group FE for easier check and modification.

FE-01 User-defined parameter 1

Address: 0xFE01
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 7016 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-02 User-defined parameter 2

Address: 0xFE02
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-03 User-defined parameter 3

Address: 0xFE03
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16

‑312‑
 Parameter Groups

Default: 0 Change: In real time

Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-04 User-defined parameter 4

Address: 0xFE04
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-05 User-defined parameter 5

Address: 0xFE05
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-06 User-defined parameter 6

Address: 0xFE06
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-07 User-defined parameter 7

Address: 0xFE07
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time

‑313‑
Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-08 User-defined parameter 8

Address: 0xFE08
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-09 User-defined parameter 9

Address: 0xFE09
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-10 User-defined parameter 10

Address: 0xFE0A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-11 User-defined parameter 11

Address: 0xFE0B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑314‑
 Parameter Groups

0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-12 User-defined parameter 12

Address: 0xFE0C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-13 User-defined parameter 13

Address: 0xFE0D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-14 User-defined parameter 14

Address: 0xFE0E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-15 User-defined parameter 15

Address: 0xFE0F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535

‑315‑
Parameter Groups

Description
Same as FE-00

FE-16 User-defined parameter 16

Address: 0xFE10
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-17 User-defined parameter 17

Address: 0xFE11
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-18 User-defined parameter 18

Address: 0xFE12
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-19 User-defined parameter 19

Address: 0xFE13
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535

‑316‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
Same as FE-00

FE-20 User-defined parameter 20

Address: 0xFE14
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 6768 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-21 User-defined parameter 21

Address: 0xFE15
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 6769 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-22 User-defined parameter 22

Address: 0xFE16
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-23 User-defined parameter 23

Address: 0xFE17
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535

‑317‑
Parameter Groups

Description
Same as FE-00

FE-24 User-defined parameter 24

Address: 0xFE18
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-25 User-defined parameter 25

Address: 0xFE19
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-26 User-defined parameter 26

Address: 0xFE1A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-27 User-defined parameter 27

Address: 0xFE1B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535

‑318‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
Same as FE-00

FE-28 User-defined parameter 28

Address: 0xFE1C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-29 User-defined parameter 29

Address: 0xFE1D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-30 User-defined parameter 30

Address: 0xFE1E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Same as FE-00

FE-31 User-defined parameter 31

Address: 0xFE1F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535

‑319‑
Parameter Groups

Description
Same as FE-00

2.16 FP User Parameters

FP-00 User password

Address: 0x1F00
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description
Used to set the user password.

FP-01 Parameter initialization

Address: 0x1F01
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 503 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: No operation
1: Restore to factory parameter mode 1
2: Clear records
4: Recover user backup parameters
501: Back up current user parameters
503: Restore to factory parameter mode 2
Description
This parameter is used to set the corresponding action upon parameter
initialization of the AC drive.
0: No operation
The AC drive does not perform any operation.
1: Restore to factory parameter mode 1
Most of the AC drive parameters are restored to factory settings. However, motor
parameters, F0‑22 (decimal places of frequency reference), fault records, F7‑09
(accumulative running time), F7‑13 (accumulative power-on time), F7‑14
(accumulative power consumption), and F7‑07 (IGBT heatsink temperature) are
not restored.
2: Clear records
The fault records, F7‑09 (accumulative running time), F7‑13 (accumulative power-
on time), and F7-14 (accumulative power consumption) are cleared.

‑320‑
 Parameter Groups

4: Back up current user parameters

The current parameter settings are backed up.
501: Restore user backup parameters
Parameters backed up by setting FP-01 to 4 are restored.
503: Restore to factory parameter mode 2
All AC drive parameters, excluding manufacturer parameters in group FF, FP-00,
and FP-01, are restore to default settings.

FP-02 Parameter display selection

Address: 0x1F02
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1111 Data type: UInt16
Default: 111 Change: In real time
Value Range:
Ones position: Group U
0: Hide
1: Display
Tens position: Group A
0: Hide
1: Display
Hundreds position: Group B
0: Hide
1: Display
Thousands position: Reserved
Description
This parameter is used to determine whether the parameters of groups U, A, B,
and C are displayed on the operating panel.

FP-03 Display selection of customized parameters

Address: 0x1F03
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 11 Data type: UInt16
Default: 11 Change: In real time
Value Range:
Ones (position): Display of user-defined parameter groups
0: Hide
1: Display
Tens (position): Display of user-modified parameter groups
0: Hide
1: Display

‑321‑
Parameter Groups

Description
This parameter is used to determine whether the user-customized parameter
group and the user-modified parameter group are displayed on the operating
panel.

FP-04 Parameter modification property

Address: 0x1F04
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Modification allowed
1: Modification prohibited
Description
Used to determine whether the parameters can be modified.

2.17 A0 Torque Control and Restricting Parameters

A0-00 Speed/Torque control mode

Address: 0xA000
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Speed control
1: Torque control
Description
Two control modes, speed control and torque control, are provided under vector
control (FVC or SVC).

A0-01 Torque setting source selection

Address: 0xA001
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 7 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑322‑
 Parameter Groups

0: Digital setting (A0-03)

1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Communication setting (1000H)
6: Min. (AI1, AI2)
7: Max. (AI1, AI2)
Description
This parameter is used to set the torque setting source. Eight torque setting
sources are available.

A0-03 Torque digital setting

Address: 0xA003
Min.: -200 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: Int16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-200.0% to +200.0%
Description
This parameter defines digital setting of the torque in torque control mode. The
torque reference is a relative value. The value 100.0% corresponds to the rated
motor torque. Check U0-06 to obtain the motor output torque, and the value
100% corresponds to the rated motor torque. The value ranges from‑ 200.0% to
+200.0%.
When the parameter value is positive, the AC drive runs in the forward direction.
When the parameter value is negative, the AC drive runs in the reverse direction.

A0-04 Torque filter time

Address: 0xA004
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000s to 5.000s
Description
This parameter specifies the torque filter time.

A0-05 Speed limit digital setting

Address: 0xA005
Min.: -120 Unit: %

‑323‑
Parameter Groups

Max.: 120 Data type: Int16

Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-120.0% to +120.0%
Description

A0-06 Frequency modulation coefficient in window mode

Address: 0xA006
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0–50.0
Description

A0-07 Torque acceleration time

Address: 0xA007
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 650 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00s to 650.00s
Description

A0-08 Torque deceleration time

Address: 0xA008
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 650 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00s to 650.00s
Description

A0-09 Speed limit reference source

Address: 0xA009
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16

‑324‑
 Parameter Groups

Default: 0 Change: In real time

Value Range:
0: A0-05
1: Frequency source
Description

A0-10 Speed limit offset/Windows frequency

Address: 0xA00A
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description

A0-11 Effective mode of speed limit offset

Address: 0xA00B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Bidirectional offset valid
1: Unidirectional offset valid
2: Windows mode
Description

A0-12 Frequency acceleration time

Address: 0xA00C
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description

A0-13 Frequency deceleration time

Address: 0xA00D

‑325‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description

A0-14 Torque mode switchover

Address: 0xA00E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Not switched
1: Switched to speed mode upon stop
2: Target torque changed to 0 upon stop
Description

2.18 A1 Virtual DI and DO Parameters

A1-00 VDI1 function selection

Address: 0xA100
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑326‑
 Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑327‑
Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Reserved
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/Three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Roll diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Used to set the function of VDI1.
0: No function
The DI terminal has no function.
1: Forward run
The operation mode of the AC drive is forward run. FWD indicates forward run. In
two-wire mode 1 (F4‑11=0), activating the terminal sets the AC drive to forward
run. In two-wire mode 2 (F4‑11=1), activating the terminal gives a running
command.

‑328‑
 Parameter Groups

2: Reverse run
The operation mode of the AC drive is reverse run. REV indicates reverse run. In
three-wire mode 1 (F4‑11=2), activating the terminal sets the AC drive to reversely
run. In three-wire mode 2 (F4‑11=3), activating the terminal sets the forward/
reverse run direction.
3: Three-wire operation control
The AC drive operation mode is three-wire control mode. To set the running
command through the terminal, set F4-11 (Terminal control mode) to 2 (Three-
wire mode 1) or 3 (three-wire mode 2), and set this parameter to 3. The three-wire
control modes include three-wire mode 1 and three-wire mode 2.
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
The terminal is used to set the AC drive to FJOG mode. In the jog mode, the AC
drive runs at low speed for a short time, which is generally used for maintenance
and commissioning of field equipment.
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
The terminal is used to set the AC drive to RJOG mode.
6: Terminal UP
The terminal is used to increase the frequency when the frequency is set through
the terminal. When this terminal is active, it works as if the increment key is
pressed and held. When this terminal is inactive, it works as if the increment key is
released.
7: Terminal DOWN
The terminal is used to decrease the frequency when the frequency is set through
the terminal. When this terminal is active, it works as if the decrement key is
pressed and held. When this terminal is inactive, it works as if the decrement key
is released.
8: Coast to stop
Once the AC drive receives a stop command, it immediately stops output and the
load then coasts to stop based on the mechanical inertia. The AC drive stops by
stopping the output. At this time, the power supply of the motor is cut off and the
drive system is in a free braking state. Since the stop time is determined by the
inertia of the system, this is also called inertia stop.
9: Fault reset (RESET). Used to reset the fault of the AC drive, which functions the
same as the STOP/RES key on the operating panel. This function can remotely
reset the AC drive upon a fault.
10: Running pause
By selecting this function, the AC drive decelerates to stop with all running
parameters memorized (such as PLC, wobble, and PID parameters). When the
terminal is inactive, the AC drive resumes its status before stop.
11: NO input of external fault
The AC drive reports Err15 upon receiving an external signal.

‑329‑
Parameter Groups

12-15: Multi-reference terminals 1–4

The AC drive selects the multi-reference as the main frequency. The settings of 16
speeds or 16 references can be implemented through combinations of 16 states of
these four terminals. It is suitable for applications where the running frequency of
the AC drive does not require continuous adjustment, and only several frequency
values need to be used.
16-17: Terminal 1 to 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
Four groups of acceleration and deceleration time can be switched through four
states of these two terminals. The acceleration time indicates the time required
by the AC drive to accelerate from 0 Hz to the acceleration/deceleration time base
frequency (F0‑25). The deceleration time indicates the time required by the AC
drive to decelerate from the acceleration/deceleration base frequency (F0‑25) to 0
Hz.
18: Frequency source switchover
Used to select the frequency reference input mode. The frequency reference is set
by F0-07 (Final frequency reference setting selection).
19: UP and DOWN setting clear
When the main frequency is set through the operating panel and this terminal is
active, the frequency (set through the increment/decrement keys on the
operating panel) can be cleared, and the frequency will be reset to the value of
F0-08.
20: Command source switchover terminal 1
When the running command is set through the terminal (F0‑02=1) and this
terminal is active, the control mode can be switched between the terminal and
the operating panel.
When the running command is set through communication (F0-02=2) and this
terminal is active, the control mode can be switched between the communication
and the operating panel.
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
The terminal is used to maintain the current running frequency of the AC drive
regardless of changes of the external input frequency (unless a stop command is
received).
22: PID pause
PID is invalid temporarily. The AC drive maintains the current output frequency
without supporting PID adjustment of frequency source.
23: PLC state reset
The terminal is used to restore the AC drive to the initial state of the simple PLC.
24: Wobble pause
In the wobble process, when this terminal is active, the wobble function pauses
(the AC drive outputs at the center frequency).
25: Counter input
In the count process, when the terminal is active, a count pulse is input.

‑330‑
 Parameter Groups

26: Counter reset

In the count process, when the terminal is active, the counter status is cleared.
27: Length count input
In the fixed length process, when the terminal is active, the length count is input.
28: Length reset
In the fixed length process, when the terminal is active, the length is cleared.
29: Torque control prohibited
When the terminal is active, the AC drive switches from the torque control mode
to the speed control mode. When the terminal is inactive, the AC drive switches
back to the torque control mode.

30: Pulse input

When DI5 is used as the pulse input terminal, DI5 must be allocated with this
function.
32: Immediate DC braking
The terminal is used to directly switch the AC drive to the DC braking state. DC
braking means that the AC drive outputs DC to the stator winding of the
asynchronous motor to form a static magnetic field to enable the motor to brake
with energy consumption. In this state, the rotor cuts the static magnetic field to
generate braking torque, which stops the motor quickly.

33: NC input of external fault

The AC drive reports Err15 upon receiving an external signal.
34: Frequency modification enabled
When the terminal is active, the frequency can be modified. When the terminal is
inactive, the frequency cannot be modified.
35: PID action direction reversal
The PID action direction is reversed to the direction set by FA-03 (PID action
direction).
36: External stop terminal 1
When the running command is set through the operating panel (F0‑02 = 0), this
terminal is used to stop the AC drive, which functions the same as the STOP/RES
key on the operating panel.
37: Command source switchover terminal 2
Used for switchover between terminal control and communication control.
If the command source is set to terminal control, the terminal being active
switches the system to communication control.
If the command source is set to communication control, the terminal being active
switches the system to terminal control.
38: PID integral pause
The integral adjustment function pauses when the terminal is active. However,
the proportional and derivative adjustment functions are still valid.

‑331‑
Parameter Groups

39: Switchover between main frequency reference X and preset frequency

Used to switch from main frequency reference X to F0-08 (Preset frequency).
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency reference Y and preset frequency
Used to switch from auxiliary frequency reference Y to F0-08 (Preset frequency).
41: Reserved
42: Position lock enabled
When the terminal is active, the AC drive decelerates to 0 Hz and then enters the
position lock state.
43: PID parameter switchover
If PID parameters are switched over through the DI terminal (FA‑18 = 1), the
following conditions are true. When the terminal is inactive, the PID parameters
are FA-05 to FA‑07 (proportional gain Kp1, integral time Ti1, and differential time
Td1). When the terminal is active, the PID parameters are FA-15 to FA‑17 (PID gain
Kp2, integral time Ti2, and differential time Td2).
44: User-defined fault 1
When the AC drive reports Err27, the AC drive will take measures according to the
value of F9-49 (Fault protection action selection).
45: User-defined fault 2
When the AC drive reports Err28, the AC drive will take measures according to the
value of F9-49 (Fault protection action selection).
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
The terminal is used to switch between speed control and torque control.
When A0‑00 (speed/torque control mode) is set to 0, the torque control mode is
used when the terminal is active, and the speed control mode is used when the
terminal is inactive.
When A0‑00 (speed/torque control mode) is set to 1, the speed control mode is
used when the terminal is active, and the torque control mode is used when the
terminal is inactive.

47: Emergency stop

When the system is in the emergency state, the AC drive decelerates according to
F8-55 (Terminal deceleration time for emergency stop). When the deceleration
time for emergency stop is 0s in V/f mode, the AC drive decelerates according to
the minimum unit time. The terminal does not need to be kept in the closed state.
Even if it stays closed only for a short moment, the AC drive will come to an
emergency stop. Different from general deceleration, if the emergency stop input
terminal is opened after the deceleration time for emergency stop expires and the
running signal is still active on the AC drive terminal, the AC drive will not restart.
To restart the AC drive in this case, disconnect the running terminal and input the
running command.

‑332‑
 Parameter Groups

48: External stop terminal 2

The terminal is used to make the AC drive decelerate to stop in any control mode
(operating panel, terminal, or communication control). In this case, the
deceleration time is fixed to deceleration time 4 (F8‑08).
49: Deceleration DC braking
The AC drive decelerates to F6-11 (Shutdown DC injection braking start frequency)
and then enters the DC braking state.
50: Clear the current running time
The terminal is used to clear the current running time of the AC drive. If the
current running time is shorter than the set value (greater than 0) of F8-53
(Current running time reached) and the terminal is active, the current running
timing is cleared. If the current running time is longer than the set value (greater
than 0) of F8-53 and the terminal is active, and the current running time is not
cleared.
51: Two-wire/Three-wire control switchover
Used to switch between two-wire and three-wire control.
When F4‑11 is set to 0 (Two-wire mode 1) and the terminal is active, the AC drive
switches to three-wire mode 1. When the terminal is inactive, two-wire mode 1 is
used.
When F4‑11 is set to 1 (Two-wire mode 2) and the terminal is active, the AC drive
switches to three-wire mode 2.
When F4‑11 is set to 2 (Three-wire mode 1) and the terminal is active, the AC drive
switches to two-wire mode 1.
When F4‑11 is set to 3 (Three-wire mode 2) and the terminal is active, the AC drive
switches to two-wire mode 2.
52: Electromagnetic shorting
When the terminal is active, the AC drive enters the electromagnetic shorting
state.
53 Thickness overlaying
When the roll diameter is calculated based on accumulative thickness, this
terminal records the number of revolutions.
54: Roll diameter reset
When this terminal is active, the initial roll diameter is reset. When the roll is
replaced in the tension mode, the initial roll diameter must be reset.
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
In the tension mode, B0-11/12/13 is selected as the initial roll diameter through
terminal combinations. When these two terminals are inactive, the minimum roll
diameter (B0-09) is used as the initial roll diameter. When only the terminal for
initial roll diameter 1 selection is active, B0-11 is used as the initial roll diameter.
When only the terminal for initial roll diameter 2 selection is active, B0-12 is used
as the initial roll diameter. When these two terminals are active, B0-13 is used as
the initial roll diameter.

‑333‑
Parameter Groups

57: Pre-drive
When the terminal is active, the AC drive switches to the pre-drive speed control
mode. This function is used to synchronize the linear speed for the axis that
requires automatic reel replacement when the tension mode is used. When the
terminal is deactivated after reel replacement, the tension control can function
properly.
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
This terminal is used for winding/unwinding switchover in the tension mode.
59: Roll diameter calculation disabled
When this terminal is active, the roll diameter calculation is disabled. In the
tension mode, if automatic roll replacement and pre-drive are required, winding
diameter calculation can be disabled to avoid influence on the winding diameter
calculation.
60: Exit tension mode
Used to exit the tension control mode.
61: Terminal tension rise
When the terminal is activated, the tension torque is increased by certain ratio.
After the DI terminal is deactivated, the boost part will be canceled gradually
based on time.
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
In the tension mode, B0‑32/33/34/35 is selected as the material thickness through
terminal combinations. When these two terminals are inactive, B0‑32 is selected
as the material thickness. When only the terminal for thickness selection 1 is
active, B0‑33 is selected as the material thickness. When only the terminal for
thickness selection 2 is active, B0‑34 is selected as the initial roll diameter. When
these two terminals are active, B0‑35 is selected as the material thickness.
64-89: Reserved
90: Water cooling system fault
When the water cooling system of T13 models encounters a fault, the terminal
receives the signal and the AC drive reports the E64 alarm.
91: Low liquid level fault
When the liquid in the water tank of T13 models is too low, the terminal receives
the signal and the AC drive reports the A63 alarm.
92: Revolution count reset
The number of revolutions counted will be cleared after this terminal is activated.
93: Reserved

A1-01 VDI2 function

Address: 0xA101
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16

‑334‑
 Parameter Groups

Default: 0 Change: At stop

Value Range:
0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑335‑
Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Reserved
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Roll diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Used to set the function of VDI2 terminal. The setting is similar to that of A1-00.

A1-02 VDI3 function selection

Address: 0xA102
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑336‑
 Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑337‑
Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Reserved
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Roll diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Used to set the function of VDI3 terminal. The setting is similar to that of A1-00.

A1-03 VDI4 function

Address: 0xA103
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑338‑
 Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑339‑
Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Reserved
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Roll diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Used to set the function of VDI4 terminal. The setting is similar to that of A1-00.

A1-04 VDI5 function selection

Address: 0xA104
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑340‑
 Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑341‑
Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Reserved
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Roll diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Used to set the function of VDI5 terminal. The setting is similar to that of A1-00.

A1-05 VDI state setting mode

Address: 0xA105
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 22222 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑342‑
 Parameter Groups

Ones: VDI1
0: Set by A1-06
1: DO state
2: DI state
Tens: VDI2
0: Set by A1-06
1: DO state
2: DI state
Hundreds: VDI3
0: Set by A1-06
1: DO state
2: DI state
Thousands: VDI4
0: Set by A1-06
1: DO state
2: DI state
Ten thousands: VDI5
0: Set by A1-06
1: DO state
2: DI state
Description
The VDI state can be set in two modes, which is selected in A1-05.
When A1-05 is set to 0, the VDI state is determined by the state of the VDO and
VDIx is uniquely bound to VDOx (x ranges from 1 to 5).
When A1-05 is set to 1, the VDI state is determined by the binary bit of A1-06.

A1-06 VDI state selection

Address: 0xA106
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 11111 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑343‑
Parameter Groups

Ones: VDI1
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Tens: VDI2
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Hundreds: VDI3
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Thousands: VDI4
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Ten thousands: VDI5
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Description
This parameter defines whether VDIx (x ranges from 1 to 5) is active or inactive.

A1-07 AI1 function selection (used as DI)

Address: 0xA107
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑344‑
 Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑345‑
Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Reserved
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Roll diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 163: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Same as F4-00

A1-08 AI2 function selection (used as DI)

Address: 0xA108
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑346‑
 Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑347‑
Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Reserved
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Roll diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Same as F4-00

A1-09 AI3 function selection (used as DI)

Address: 0xA109
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 93 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑348‑
 Parameter Groups

0: No function
1: Forward run (FWD)
2: Reverse run (REV)
3: Three-wire control
4: Forward jog (FJOG)
5: Reverse jog (RJOG)
6:Terminal (UP)
7:Terminal (DOWN)
8: Coast to stop
9: Fault reset (RESET)
10: Running pause
11: NO input of external fault
12: Multi-reference terminal 1
13: Multi-reference terminal 2
14: Multi-reference terminal 3
15: Multi-reference terminal 4
16: Terminal 1 for acceleration/deceleration selection
17: Terminal 2 for acceleration/deceleration selection
18: Frequency source switchover
19: UP and DOWN setting clear (terminal, operating panel)
20: Command source switchover terminal
21: Acceleration/Deceleration inhibited
22: PID pause
23: PLC state reset
24: Wobble pause
25: Counter input (DI5)
26: Counter reset
27: Length count input (DI5)
28: Length reset
29: Torque control inhibited
30: Pulse input
31: Reserved
32: Immediate DC braking
33: NC input of external fault
34: Frequency modification enabled
35: PID action direction reversal

‑349‑
Parameter Groups

36: External stop terminal 1

37: Command source switchover terminal 2
38: PID integral pause
39: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
40: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
41: Reserved
42: Position lock enabled
43: PID parameter switchover
44: User-defined fault 1
45: User-defined fault 2
46: Speed control/Torque control switchover
47: Emergency stop
48: External stop terminal 2
49: Deceleration DC braking
50: Clear the current running time
51: Two-wire/three-wire control switchover
52: Electromagnetic shorting
53: Thickness overlaying
54: Roll diameter reset
55: Initial roll diameter 1
56: Initial roll diameter 2
57: Pre-drive
58: Winding/Unwinding switchover
59: Roll diameter calculation disabled
60: Exit tension control
61: Terminal tension rise
62: Thickness selection 1
63: Thickness selection 2
90: Water cooling system fault
91: Low liquid level fault
92: Revolution count reset
93: Reserved
Description
Same as F4-00

A1-10 Active state selection for AI used as DI

Address: 0xA10A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 111 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑350‑
 Parameter Groups

Ones: AI1
0: Active high
1: Active low
Tens: AI2
0: Active high
1: Active low
Hundreds: AI3
0: Active high
1: Active low
Description
0: Active high
If the AI terminal is a high level terminal, this terminal is active when the value of
the corresponding bit of A1‑10 is set to 0 and inactive when set to 1.
0: Active low
If the AI terminal is a low level terminal, this terminal is inactive when the value of
the corresponding bit of A1‑10 is set to 0 and active when set to 1.

2.19 A5 Control Optimization Parameters

A5-00 DPWM switchover frequency upper limit

Address: 0xA500
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 12 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
The AC drive has two PWM modes, including CPWM and DPWM. When the running
frequency is higher than A5‑00 (Switchover frequency), the DPWM mode is used.
When the running frequency is lower than A5‑00 (Switchover frequency), the
CPWM mode is used. The DPWM mode is used to improve the AC drive efficiency,
and the CPWM mode is used to reduce the motor noise.
Increasing A5-00 to the maximum frequency will reduce the motor noise.

A5-01 PWM modulation mode

Address: 0xA501
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑351‑
Parameter Groups

0: Asynchronous modulation
1: Synchronous modulation
Synchronous modulation mode 2
Synchronous modulation mode 3
Description
When the result of the carrier frequency divided by the running frequency is
smaller than 10, output current oscillation or large current harmonic waves may
occur. To address the problem, set this parameter to 1 (synchronous modulation).
0: Asynchronous modulation
In this mode, the carrier frequency and signal wave frequency are not
synchronized. Usually, the carrier frequency keeps unchanged. When the signal
wave frequency changes, the carrier ratio will change accordingly.
2: Synchronous modulation mode 2
3: Synchronous modulation mode 3

A5-02 Dead zone compensation mode selection

Address: 0xA502
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
A dead zone must be reserved for the switch signals of the upper and lower switch
transistors on the same bridge arm of the AC drive. Dead zone compensation can
improve the current waveform when the motor runs at low frequency.

A5-03 Random PWM depth

Address: 0xA503
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–10
Description
If the motor noise is loud, setting A5-03 to a non-zero value can improve the
motor noise. The higher the value, the better the effect. However, if the value is
too high, the motor control may be affected. Therefore, set this parameter to 1
first during commissioning and then increase it by 1 each time according to the
field application.

‑352‑
 Parameter Groups

A5-04 Fast current limit

Address: 0xA504
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
This function is used to minimize the possibility of overcurrent faults, ensuring
normal operation of the AC drive.
Disable this function in hoist applications such as cranes.

A5-05 Sampling delay

Address: 0xA505
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 13 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
1 to 13
Description

A5-06 Undervoltage threshold

Address: 0xA506
Min.: 150 Unit: V
Max.: 700 Data type: UInt16
Default: 350 Change: In real time
Value Range:
150.0V to 700.0V
Description
When the bus voltage is lower than the value set by A5-06, the AC drive reports
E09.00.

A5-07 SVC optimization selection

Address: 0xA507
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑353‑
Parameter Groups

0: No optimization
1: Optimization mode 1
2: Optimization mode 2
Description

A5-13 Bus voltage in function part

Address: 0xA50D
Min.: 100 Unit: -
Max.: 20000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5310 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
100 to 20000
Description

A5-14 Temperature correction

Address: 0xA50E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0–1
Description

A5-16 Display parameter address 1

Address: 0xA510
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0–100
Description

A5-17 Display parameter address 2

Address: 0xA511
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: Unchangeable

‑354‑
 Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0–100
Description

A5-18 Display parameter address 3

Address: 0xA512
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0–100
Description

A5-19 Display parameter address 4

Address: 0xA513
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 3 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0–100
Description

A5-21 Low speed carrier frequency

Address: 0xA515
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 16 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0–16.0
Description
This parameter is used to set the carrier frequency of the motor at low speed to
lower the motor noise in the V/f or FVC mode. The carrier frequency is the smaller
one between F0-15 and A5-21. When the value of A5-21 is greater than or equal to
4 kHz, the value of A5-21 is active. When the value of A5-21 is lower than 4 kHz, 4
kHz is used.

A5-22 Dead-zone compensation auto-tuning

Address: 0xA516

‑355‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description

2.20 A6 AI Curve

A6-00 Curve 4 minimum input

Address: 0xA600
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: A6-02 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.00 V to A6-02
Description
This parameter defines the x axis of the minimum input point on AI curve 4, that
is, the minimum analog input voltage or current.

A6-01 Percentage corresponding to curve 4 minimum input

Address: 0xA601
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the y axis of the minimum input point on AI curve 4, that
is, the setting value that the AI minimum input corresponds.

A6-02 Curve 4 inflexion 1 input

Address: 0xA602
Min.: A6-00 Unit: V
Max.: A6-04 Data type: Int16
Default: 3 Change: In real time
Value Range:
Value of A6-00 to value of A6-04

‑356‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
This parameter defines the x axis of inflexion 1 on AI curve 4, that is, the analog
input voltage or current at inflexion 1.

A6-03 Percentage corresponding to curve 4 inflexion point 1 input

Address: 0xA603
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 30 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the y axis of inflexion 1 on AI curve 4, that is, the setting
value at inflexion 1.

A6-04 Curve 4 inflexion 2 input

Address: 0xA604
Min.: A6-02 Unit: V
Max.: A6-06 Data type: Int16
Default: 6 Change: In real time
Value Range:
A6-02 to A6-06
Description
This parameter defines the x axis of inflexion 2 on AI curve 4, that is, the analog
input voltage or current at inflexion 2.

A6-05 Corresponding setting of curve 4 inflexion 2 input

Address: 0xA605
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 60 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the y axis of inflexion 2 on AI curve 4, that is, the setting
value at inflexion 2.

A6-06 Curve 4 maximum input

Address: 0xA606
Min.: A6-04 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16

‑357‑
Parameter Groups

Default: 10 Change: In real time

Value Range:
A6-04 to 10.00 V
Description
This parameter defines the x axis of the maximum input point on AI curve 4, that
is, the maximum analog input voltage or current.

A6-07 Percentage corresponding to curve 4 maximum input

Address: 0xA607
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the y axis of the maximum input point on AI curve 4, that
is, the setting value that the AI maximum input corresponds.

A6-08 Curve 5 minimum input

Address: 0xA608
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: A6-10 Data type: Int16
Default: -10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.00 V to A6-10
Description
This parameter defines the x axis of the minimum input on AI curve 5, that is, the
minimum analog input voltage or current.

A6-09 Percentage corresponding to curve 5 minimum input

Address: 0xA609
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: -100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the y axis of the minimum input point on AI curve 5, that
is, the setting value that the AI minimum input corresponds.

‑358‑
 Parameter Groups

A6-10 Curve 5 inflexion 1 input

Address: 0xA60A
Min.: A6-08 Unit: V
Max.: A6-12 Data type: Int16
Default: -3 Change: In real time
Value Range:
A6-08 to A6-12
Description
This parameter defines the x axis of inflexion 1 on AI curve 5, that is, the analog
input voltage or current at inflexion 1.

A6-11 Corresponding setting of curve 5 inflexion 1 input

Address: 0xA60B
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: -30 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the y axis of inflexion 1 on AI curve 5, that is, the setting
value at inflexion 1.

A6-12 Curve 5 inflexion 2 input

Address: 0xA60C
Min.: A6-10 Unit: V
Max.: A6-14 Data type: Int16
Default: 3 Change: In real time
Value Range:
A6-10 to A6-14
Description
This parameter defines the x axis of inflexion 2 on AI curve 5, that is, the analog
input voltage or current at inflexion 2.

A6-13 Corresponding setting of curve 5 inflexion 2 input

Address: 0xA60D
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 30 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%

‑359‑
Parameter Groups

Description
This parameter defines the y axis of inflexion 2 on AI curve 5, that is, the setting
value at inflexion 2.

A6-14 Curve 5 maximum input

Address: 0xA60E
Min.: A6-12 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
A6-12 to 10.00 V
Description
This parameter defines the x axis of the maximum input point on AI curve 5, that
is, the maximum analog input voltage or current.

A6-15 Percentage corresponding to curve 5 maximum input

Address: 0xA60F
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the y axis of the maximum input point on AI curve 5, that
is, the setting value that the AI maximum input value corresponds.

A6-16 AI1 gain

Address: 0xA610
Min.: -10 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
–10.00 to +10.00
Description
This parameter defines the AI1 voltage correction gain.

A6-17 AI1 offset

Address: 0xA611
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time

‑360‑
 Parameter Groups

Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the zero offset coefficient for AI1 voltage correction.

A6-18 AI2 gain

Address: 0xA612
Min.: -10 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
–10.00 to +10.00
Description
This parameter defines the AI2 voltage correction gain.

A6-19 AI2 offset

Address: 0xA613
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the zero offset coefficient for AI2 voltage correction.

A6-20 AI3 gain

Address: 0xA614
Min.: -10 Unit: -
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
–10.00 to +10.00
Description
This parameter defines the AI3 voltage correction gain.

A6-21 AI3 offset

Address: 0xA615
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑361‑
Parameter Groups

-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the zero offset coefficient for AI3 voltage correction.

A6-22 AI disconnection detection threshold

Address: 0xA616
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
This parameter indicates the AI disconnection detection threshold. 100%
corresponds to 10 V.

A6-23 AI disconnection detection time

Address: 0xA617
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6553.5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6553.5s
Description
This parameter indicates the AI disconnection detection time in the unit of 0.1s.

A6-24 Jump point set through AI1

Address: 0xA618
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the jump point set through AI1.

A6-25 Jump amplitude set through AI1

Address: 0xA619
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.1 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑362‑
 Parameter Groups

0.0% to 100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the jump amplitude set through AI1.

A6-26 Jump point set through AI2

Address: 0xA61A
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the jump point set through AI2.

A6-27 Jump amplitude set through AI2

Address: 0xA61B
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the jump amplitude set through AI2.

A6-28 Jump point set through AI3

Address: 0xA61C
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
This parameter defines the jump point set through AI3.

A6-29 Jump amplitude set through AI3

Address: 0xA61D
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%

‑363‑
Parameter Groups

Description
This parameter defines the jump amplitude set through AI3.

A6-30 Analog disconnection detection

Address: 0xA61E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 111 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
Ones position: AI1 disconnection detection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Tens position: AI2 disconnection detection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Hundreds position: AI3 disconnection detection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
After AI1 disconnection detection is enabled, when the voltage detected at AI1 is
lower than the threshold set by A6-22 for over the time set by A6-23, the AC drive
reports fault E48.01.
After AI2 disconnection detection is enabled, when the voltage detected at AI2 is
lower than the threshold set by A6-22 for over the time set by A6-23, the AC drive
reports fault E48.02.
After AI3 disconnection detection is enabled, when the voltage detected at AI3 is
lower than the threshold set by A6-22 for over the time set by A6-23, the AC drive
reports fault E48.03.

2.21 A9 Vector Control Supplementary Parameters

A9-00 Online auto-tuning of rotor time constant for asynchronous motors

Address: 0xA900
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

‑364‑
 Parameter Groups

Description

A9-01 Auto-tuning of rotor resistance gain for asynchronous motors in FVC mode
Address: 0xA901
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–100
Description

A9-02 Start frequency auto-tuning of the rotor resistance for asynchronous motors
in FVC mode
Address: 0xA902
Min.: 2 Unit: Hz
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 7 Change: In real time
Value Range:
2 Hz to 100 Hz
Description

A9-03 Observed magnetic field coefficient of asynchronous motors in FVC mode

Address: 0xA903
Min.: 30 Unit: -
Max.: 150 Data type: UInt16
Default: 40 Change: In real time
Value Range:
30 to 150
Description

A9-04 Maximum torque limit coefficient in the field-weakening range for

asynchronous motors
Address: 0xA904
Min.: 30 Unit: -
Max.: 150 Data type: UInt16
Default: 80 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑365‑
Parameter Groups

30 to 150
Description

A9-05 Speed filter time of asynchronous motor in SVC mode

Address: 0xA905
Min.: 5 Unit: ms
Max.: 32 Data type: UInt16
Default: 15 Change: In real time
Value Range:
5 ms to 32 ms
Description

A9-06 Speed feedback handling in speed control of asynchronous motor in SVC

mode
Address: 0xA906
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 4 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: No operation
1: Minimum synchronization frequency limited based on load change
2: Fixed current output during low-speed running
3: Fixed current output during low-speed running and light load
4: Low torque optimization
Description

A9-07 Magnetic field regulation bandwidth of asynchronous motor in SVC mode

Address: 0xA907
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 8 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0–8.0
Description

A9-08 Low-speed running current of asynchronous motor in SVC mode

Address: 0xA908

‑366‑
 Parameter Groups

Min.: 30 Unit: -
Max.: 170 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
30–170
Description

A9-09 Switchover frequency of output fixed current for asynchronous motor in SVC
mode
Address: 0xA909
Min.: 0.1 Unit: Hz
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.3 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.1 Hz to 1.0 Hz
Description

A9-10 Speed fluctuation suppression coefficient of asynchronous motor in SVC

mode
Address: 0xA90A
Min.: 80 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 95 Change: At stop
Value Range:
80 to 100
Description

A9-11 Acceleration/Deceleration time of asynchronous motor in SVC mode

Address: 0xA90B
Min.: 10 Unit: s
Max.: 3000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 200 Change: At stop
Value Range:
10s to 3000s
Description

A9-12 Quick auto-tuning of stator resistance before asynchronous motor startup

Address: 0xA90C

‑367‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description

A9-13 Quick auto-tuning of stator resistance coefficient 1 for the asynchronous

motor
Address: 0xA90D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description

A9-14 Quick auto-tuning of stator resistance coefficient 2 for the asynchronous

motor
Address: 0xA90E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description

A9-17 Synchronous motor real-time angle

Address: 0xA911
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 359.9 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0.0–359.9
Description

‑368‑
 Parameter Groups

A9-18 Initial position angle detection of synchronous motor

Address: 0xA912
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Detected upon running
1: Not detected
2: Detected upon initial running after power-on
Description

A9-20 Flux weakening mode

Address: 0xA914
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Automatic mode
1: Synchronous motor adjustment mode
2: Synchronous motor hybrid mode
3: Disabled
Description

A9-21 Flux weakening gain of synchronous motor

Address: 0xA915
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0–50
Description

A9-22 Upper limit margin of synchronous motor output voltage

Address: 0xA916
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0% to 50%

‑369‑
Parameter Groups

Description

A9-23 Maximum force adjustment gain of synchronous motor

Address: 0xA917
Min.: 20 Unit: %
Max.: 300 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
20% to 300%
Description

A9-24 Exciting current adjustment gain calculated by synchronous motor

Address: 0xA918
Min.: 40 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
40% to 200%
Description

A9-25 Estimated speed integral gain of synchronous motor in SVC mode

Address: 0xA919
Min.: 5 Unit: %
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 30 Change: In real time
Value Range:
5% to 1000%
Description

A9-26 Estimated speed proportional gain of synchronous motor in SVC mode

Address: 0xA91A
Min.: 5 Unit: %
Max.: 300 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
5% to 300%

‑370‑
 Parameter Groups

Description

A9-27 Estimated synchronous motor speed filter in SVC mode

Address: 0xA91B
Min.: 10 Unit: -
Max.: 2000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
10–2000
Description

A9-28 Minimum carrier frequency of synchronous motor in SVC mode

Address: 0xA91C
Min.: 0.8 Unit: -
Max.: F0-15 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.8 to F0-15
Description

A9-29 Low speed excitation current of synchronous motor in SVC mode

Address: 0xA91D
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 80 Data type: UInt16
Default: 30 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0% to 80%
Description

A9-30 Low-speed closed-loop current (for VVC)

Address: 0xA91E
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0% to 65535%

‑371‑
Parameter Groups

Description

A9-31 Oscillation suppression damping coefficient (for VVC)

Address: 0xA91F
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0% to 65535%
Description

A9-32 Reserved parameter 8 for synchronous motor control

Address: 0xA920
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description

A9-33 Reserved parameter 9 for synchronous motor control

Address: 0xA921
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0–5
Description

A9-34 Reserved parameter 10 for synchronous motor control

Address: 0xA922
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0% to 65535%

‑372‑
 Parameter Groups

Description

A9-35 Performance fault subcode upon 1st fault

Address: 0xA923
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description

A9-36 Performance fault subcode upon 2nd fault

Address: 0xA924
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description

A9-37 Performance fault subcode upon 3rd fault

Address: 0xA925
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to 65535
Description

A9-40 Low-speed closed-loop current selection (for VVC)

Address: 0xA928
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

‑373‑
Parameter Groups

Description

A9-41 Low-speed closed-loop current (for VVC)

Address: 0xA929
Min.: 30 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: At stop
Value Range:
30% to 200%
Description

A9-42 Oscillation suppression damping coefficient (for VVC)

Address: 0xA92A
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0% to 500%
Description

A9-43 Initial position compensation angle (for VVC)

Address: 0xA92B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0–5
Description

A9-44 Initial position compensation angle of synchronous motor

Address: 0xA92C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 360 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0–360.0

‑374‑
 Parameter Groups

Description

A9-45 Synchronous motor low-speed handling

Address: 0xA92D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description

A9-46 Switchover frequency for synchronous motor low-speed handling

Address: 0xA92E
Min.: 0.01 Unit: -
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.01 to value of F0-10
Description

A9-47 Synchronous motor low-speed handling current

Address: 0xA92F
Min.: 10 Unit: -
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: At stop
Value Range:
10 to 200
Description

A9-48 Synchronous motor low-speed handling feedback suppression coefficient

Address: 0xA930
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 300 Data type: UInt16
Default: 32 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0–300

‑375‑
Parameter Groups

Description

A9-49 Synchronous motor energy-saving control

Address: 0xA931
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description

A9-50 Maximum flux weakening current limit margin

Address: 0xA932
Min.: 200 Unit: -
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1000 Change: At stop
Value Range:
200 to 1000
Description

A9-51 Advanced settings for asynchronous motor parameter auto-tuning

Address: 0xA933
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1111 Data type: UInt16
Default: 111 Change: At stop
Value Range:
Ones: Rotor resistance and leakage inductance DC offset
0: Standard offset
1: Large offset
Tens: New rotor resistance and leakage inductance auto-tuning algorithm
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Hundreds: New mutual inductance static auto-tuning algorithm
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Thousands: Stator resistance auto-tuning algorithm
0: Current open loop
1: Current closed loop

‑376‑
 Parameter Groups

Description

A9-52 U0-06 feedback torque selection

Address: 0xA934
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Motoring torque being positive and generating torque being negative
1: Torque direction being positive in the case of positive speed direction; torque
direction being negative in the case of negative speed direction
Description

A9-54 Transistor voltage drop

Address: 0xA936
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 700 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

A9-55 Dead-zone time 0

Address: 0xA937
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 352 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

A9-56 Dead-zone time 1

Address: 0xA938
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1052 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑377‑
Parameter Groups

0 to 10000
Description

A9-57 Dead-zone time 2

Address: 0xA939
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1270 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

A9-58 Dead-zone time 3

Address: 0xA93A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1358 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

A9-59 Dead-zone time 4

Address: 0xA93B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1404 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

A9-60 Dead-zone time 5

Address: 0xA93C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1449 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000

‑378‑
 Parameter Groups

Description

A9-61 Dead-zone time 6

Address: 0xA93D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1661 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

A9-62 Dead-zone time 7

Address: 0xA93E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1689 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

A9-63 Dead-zone compensation current 0

Address: 0xA93F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 94 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

A9-64 Dead-zone compensation current 1

Address: 0xA940
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 376 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

‑379‑
Parameter Groups

A9-65 Dead-zone compensation current 2

Address: 0xA941
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 658 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

A9-66 Dead-zone compensation current 3

Address: 0xA942
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 940 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

A9-67 Dead-zone compensation current 4

Address: 0xA943
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1222 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

A9-68 Dead-zone compensation current 5

Address: 0xA944
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1504 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

A9-69 Dead-zone compensation current 6

Address: 0xA945

‑380‑
 Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 3478 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

A9-70 Dead-zone compensation current 7

Address: 0xA946
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5452 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0 to 10000
Description

A9-71 Elastic oscillation suppression

Address: 0xA944
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 2 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Self-adaptive based on the target frequency
2: Frequency reference
Description

A9-72 Elastic oscillation suppression filter time

Address: 0xA945
Min.: 20 Unit: ms
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 300 Change: In real time
Value Range:
20 ms to 1000 ms
Description

A9-73 Elastic oscillation suppression gain

Address: 0xA946

‑381‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 10 Unit: -
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
10 to 1000
Description

2.22 AC AI/AO Correction

AC-00 AI1 measured voltage 1

Address: 0xAC00
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is conducted on AI1, a correction curve is
obtained based on two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and
a displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the AI1 voltage before correction (U0‑21).

AC-01 AI1 displayed voltage 1

Address: 0xAC01
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is conducted on AI1, a correction curve is
obtained based on two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and
a displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the AI1 voltage before correction (U0‑21).

AC-02 AI1 measured voltage 2

Address: 0xAC02
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16

‑382‑
 Parameter Groups

Default: 8 Change: In real time

Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is conducted on AI1, a correction curve is
obtained based on two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and
a displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the AI1 voltage before correction (U0‑21).

AC-03 AI1 displayed voltage 2

Address: 0xAC03
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 8 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is conducted on AI1, a correction curve is
obtained based on two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and
a displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the AI1 voltage before correction (U0‑21).

AC-04 AI2 measured voltage 1

Address: 0xAC04
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to 10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is conducted on AI2, a correction curve is
obtained based on two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and
a displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the AI2 voltage before correction (U0‑22).

AC-05 AI2 displayed voltage 1

Address: 0xAC05
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑383‑
Parameter Groups

-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is conducted on AI2, a correction curve is
obtained based on two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and
a displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the AI2 voltage before correction (U0‑22).

AC-06 AI2 measured voltage 2

Address: 0xAC06
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 8 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is conducted on AI2, a correction curve is
obtained based on two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and
a displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the AI2 voltage before correction (U0‑22).

AC-07 AI2 displayed voltage 2

Address: 0xAC07
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 8 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is conducted on AI2, a correction curve is
obtained based on two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and
a displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the AI2 voltage before correction (U0‑22).

AC-08 AI3 measured voltage 1

Address: 0xAC08
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V

‑384‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
When analog voltage correction is conducted on AI3, a correction curve is
obtained based on two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and
a displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the AI3 voltage before correction (U0‑23).

AC-09 AI3 displayed voltage 1

Address: 0xAC09
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is conducted on AI3, a correction curve is
obtained based on two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and
a displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the AI3 voltage before correction (U0‑23).

AC-10 AI3 measured voltage 2

Address: 0xAC0A
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 8 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is conducted on AI3, a correction curve is
obtained based on two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and
a displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the AI3 voltage before correction (U0‑23).

AC-11 AI3 displayed voltage 2

Address: 0xAC0B
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 8 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V

‑385‑
Parameter Groups

Description
When analog voltage correction is conducted on AI3, a correction curve is
obtained based on two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and
a displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the AI3 voltage before correction (U0‑23).

AC-12 AO1 measured voltage 1

Address: 0xAC0C
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is carried out on the AO1 terminal, a correction
curve is formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a target voltage
and a measured voltage. The target voltage is the expected output voltage, and
the measured voltage is the output voltage actually measured.

AC-13 AO1 target voltage 1

Address: 0xAC0D
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is carried out on the AO1 terminal, a correction
curve is formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a target voltage
and a measured voltage. The target voltage is the expected output voltage, and
the measured voltage is the output voltage actually measured.

AC-14 AO1 measured voltage 2

Address: 0xAC0E
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 8 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V

‑386‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
When analog voltage correction is carried out on the AO1 terminal, a correction
curve is formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a target voltage
and a measured voltage. The target voltage is the expected output voltage, and
the measured voltage is the output voltage actually measured.

AC-15 AO1 target voltage 2

Address: 0xAC0F
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 8 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is carried out on the AO1 terminal, a correction
curve is formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a target voltage
and a measured voltage. The target voltage is the expected output voltage, and
the measured voltage is the output voltage actually measured.

AC-16 AO2 measured voltage 1

Address: 0xAC10
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is carried out on the AO2 terminal, a correction
curve is formed through two points, and each point corresponds
to a target voltage and a measured voltage. The target voltage is the expected
output voltage, and the measured voltage is the output voltage actually
measured.

AC-17 AO2 target voltage 1

Address: 0xAC11
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description

‑387‑
Parameter Groups

When analog voltage correction is carried out on the AO2 terminal, a correction
curve is formed through two points, and each point corresponds
to a target voltage and a measured voltage. The target voltage is the expected
output voltage, and the measured voltage is the output voltage actually
measured.

AC-18 AO2 measured voltage 2

Address: 0xAC12
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 8 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is carried out on the AO2 terminal, a correction
curve is formed through two points, and each point corresponds
to a target voltage and a measured voltage. The target voltage is the expected
output voltage, and the measured voltage is the output voltage actually
measured.

AC-19 AO2 target voltage 2

Address: 0xAC13
Min.: -10 Unit: V
Max.: 10 Data type: Int16
Default: 8 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-10.000 V to +10.000 V
Description
When analog voltage correction is carried out on the AO2 terminal, a correction
curve is formed through two points, and each point corresponds
to a target voltage and a measured voltage. The target voltage is the expected
output voltage, and the measured voltage is the output voltage actually
measured.

AC-20 PT100 measured voltage 1

Address: 0xAC14
Min.: 0 Unit: V
Max.: 3.3 Data type: Int16
Default: 0.44 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000 V to 3.3 V

‑388‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
When PT100 analog voltage correction is carried out on AI3, a correction curve is
formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and a
displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the PTC voltage before correction (U0‑47).

AC-21 PT100 displayed voltage 1

Address: 0xAC15
Min.: 0 Unit: V
Max.: 3.3 Data type: Int16
Default: 0.44 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000 V to 3.3 V
Description
When PT100 analog voltage correction is carried out on AI3, a correction curve is
formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and a
displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the PTC voltage before correction (U0‑47).

AC-22 PT100 measured voltage 2

Address: 0xAC16
Min.: 0 Unit: V
Max.: 3.3 Data type: Int16
Default: 2.16 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000 V to 3.3 V
Description
When PT100 analog voltage correction is carried out on AI3, a correction curve is
formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and a
displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the PTC voltage before correction (U0‑47).

AC-23 PT100 displayed voltage 2

Address: 0xAC17
Min.: 0 Unit: V
Max.: 3.3 Data type: Int16
Default: 2.16 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000 V to 3.3 V

‑389‑
Parameter Groups

Description
When PT100 analog voltage correction is carried out on AI3, a correction curve is
formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and a
displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the PTC voltage before correction (U0‑47).

AC-24 PT1000 measured voltage 1

Address: 0xAC18
Min.: 0 Unit: V
Max.: 3.3 Data type: Int16
Default: 0.44 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000 V to 3.3 V
Description
When PT1000 analog voltage correction is carried out on AI3, a correction curve is
formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and a
displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the PTC voltage before correction (U0‑47).

AC-25 Voltage 1 display on the PT1000

Address: 0xAC19
Min.: 0 Unit: V
Max.: 3.3 Data type: Int16
Default: 0.44 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000 V to 3.3 V
Description
When PT1000 analog voltage correction is carried out on AI3, a correction curve is
formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and a
displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the PTC voltage before correction (U0‑47).

AC-26 PT1000 measured voltage 2

Address: 0xAC1A
Min.: 0 Unit: V
Max.: 3.3 Data type: Int16
Default: 2.16 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000 V to 3.3 V

‑390‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
When PT1000 analog voltage correction is carried out on AI3, a correction curve is
formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and a
displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the PTC voltage before correction (U0‑47).

AC-27 PT1000 displayed voltage 2

Address: 0xAC1B
Min.: 0 Unit: V
Max.: 3.3 Data type: Int16
Default: 2.16 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000 V to 3.3 V
Description
When PT1000 analog voltage correction is carried out on AI3, a correction curve is
formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a measured voltage and a
displayed voltage. The measured voltage is the voltage measured using a meter,
and the displayed voltage is the PTC voltage before correction (U0‑47).

AC-28 AO1 measured current 1

Address: 0xAC1C
Min.: 0 Unit: mA
Max.: 20 Data type: UInt16
Default: 4 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000 mA to 20.000 mA
Description
When analog current correction is carried out on the AO1, a correction curve is
formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a target voltage and a
measured current. The target current is the expected output current, and the
measured voltage is the output current actually measured.

AC-29 AO1 target current 1

Address: 0xAC1D
Min.: 0 Unit: mA
Max.: 20 Data type: UInt16
Default: 4 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000 mA to 20.000 mA

‑391‑
Parameter Groups

Description
When analog current correction is carried out on the AO1, a correction curve is
formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a target voltage and a
measured current. The target current is the expected output current, and the
measured voltage is the output current actually measured.

AC-30 AO1 measured current 2

Address: 0xAC1E
Min.: 0 Unit: mA
Max.: 20 Data type: UInt16
Default: 16 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000 mA to 20.000 mA
Description
When analog current correction is carried out on the AO1, a correction curve is
formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a target voltage and a
measured current. The target current is the expected output current, and the
measured voltage is the output current actually measured.

AC-31 AO1 target current 2

Address: 0xAC1F
Min.: 0 Unit: mA
Max.: 20 Data type: UInt16
Default: 16 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.000 mA to 20.000 mA
Description
When analog current correction is carried out on the AO1, a correction curve is
formed through two points. Each point corresponds to a target voltage and a
measured current. The target current is the expected output current, and the
measured voltage is the output current actually measured.

2.23 AF Process Data Address Mapping Parameters

AF-00 RPDO1-SubIndex0-H
Address: 0xAF00
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑392‑
 Parameter Groups

0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-01 RPDO1-SubIndex0-L
Address: 0xAF01
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-02 RPDO1-SubIndex1-H
Address: 0xAF02
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-03 RPDO1-SubIndex1-L
Address: 0xAF03
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-04 RPDO1-SubIndex2-H
Address: 0xAF04
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF

‑393‑
Parameter Groups

Description

AF-05 RPDO1-SubIndex2-L
Address: 0xAF05
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-06 RPDO1-SubIndex3-H
Address: 0xAF06
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-07 RPDO1-SubIndex3-L
Address: 0xAF07
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-08 RPDO2-SubIndex0-H
Address: 0xAF08
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

‑394‑
 Parameter Groups

AF-09 RPDO2-SubIndex0-L
Address: 0xAF09
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-10 RPDO2-SubIndex1-H
Address: 0xAF0A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-11 RPDO2-SubIndex1-L
Address: 0xAF0B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-12 RPDO2-SubIndex2-H
Address: 0xAF0C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-13 RPDO2-SubIndex2-L
Address: 0xAF0D

‑395‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-14 RPDO2-SubIndex3-H
Address: 0xAF0E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-15 RPDO2-SubIndex3-L
Address: 0xAF0F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-16 RPDO3-SubIndex0-H
Address: 0xAF10
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-17 RPDO3-SubIndex0-L
Address: 0xAF11
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16

‑396‑
 Parameter Groups

Default: 0 Change: In real time

Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-18 RPDO3-SubIndex1-H
Address: 0xAF12
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-19 RPDO3-SubIndex1-L
Address: 0xAF13
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-20 RPDO3-SubIndex2-H
Address: 0xAF14
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-21 RPDO3-SubIndex2-L
Address: 0xAF15
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑397‑
Parameter Groups

0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-22 RPDO3-SubIndex3-H
Address: 0xAF16
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-23 RPDO3-SubIndex3-L
Address: 0xAF17
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-24 RPDO4-SubIndex0-H
Address: 0xAF18
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-25 RPDO4-SubIndex0-L
Address: 0xAF19
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF

‑398‑
 Parameter Groups

Description

AF-26 RPDO4-SubIndex1-H
Address: 0xAF1A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-27 RPDO4-SubIndex1-L
Address: 0xAF1B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-28 RPDO4-SubIndex2-H
Address: 0xAF1C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-29 RPDO4-SubIndex2-L
Address: 0xAF1D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

‑399‑
Parameter Groups

AF-30 RPDO4-SubIndex3-H
Address: 0xAF1E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-31 RPDO4-SubIndex3-L
Address: 0xAF1F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-32 TPDO1-SubIndexO-H
Address: 0xAF20
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-33 TPDO1-SubIndexO-L
Address: 0xAF21
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-34 TPDO1-SubIndex1-H
Address: 0xAF22

‑400‑
 Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-35 TPDO1-SubIndex1-L
Address: 0xAF23
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-36 TPDO1-SubIndex2-H
Address: 0xAF24
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-37 TPDO1-SubIndex2-L
Address: 0xAF25
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-38 TPDO1-SubIndex3-H
Address: 0xAF26
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16

‑401‑
Parameter Groups

Default: 0 Change: In real time

Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-39 TPDO1-SubIndex3-L
Address: 0xAF27
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-40 TPDO2-SubIndex0-H
Address: 0xAF28
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-41 TPDO2-SubIndex0-L
Address: 0xAF29
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-42 TPDO2-SubIndex1-H
Address: 0xAF2A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑402‑
 Parameter Groups

0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-43 TPDO2-SubIndex1-L
Address: 0xAF2B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-44 TPDO2-SubIndex2-H
Address: 0xAF2C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-45 TPDO2-SubIndex2-L
Address: 0xAF2D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-46 TPDO2-SubIndex3-H
Address: 0xAF2E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF

‑403‑
Parameter Groups

Description

AF-47 TPDO2-SubIndex3-L
Address: 0xAF2F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-48 TPDO3-SubIndex0-H
Address: 0xAF30
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-49 TPDO3-SubIndex0-L
Address: 0xAF31
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-50 TPDO3-SubIndex1-H
Address: 0xAF32
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

‑404‑
 Parameter Groups

AF-51 TPDO3-SubIndex1-L
Address: 0xAF33
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-52 TPDO3-SubIndex2-H
Address: 0xAF34
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-53 TPDO3-SubIndex2-L
Address: 0xAF35
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-54 TPDO3-SubIndex3-H
Address: 0xAF36
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-55 TPDO3-SubIndex3-L
Address: 0xAF37

‑405‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-56 TPDO4-SubIndex0-H
Address: 0xAF38
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-57 TPDO4-SubIndex0-L
Address: 0xAF39
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-58 TPDO4-SubIndex1-H
Address: 0xAF3A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-59 TPDO4-SubIndex1-L
Address: 0xAF3B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16

‑406‑
 Parameter Groups

Default: 0 Change: In real time

Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-60 TPDO4-SubIndex2-H
Address: 0xAF3C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-61 TPDO4-SubIndex2-L
Address: 0xAF3D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-62 TPDO4-SubIndex3-H
Address: 0xAF3E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-63 TPDO4-SubIndex3-L
Address: 0xAF3F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑407‑
Parameter Groups

0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-66 Number of valid RPDOs

Address: 0xAF42
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

AF-67 Number of valid TPDOs

Address: 0xAF43
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description

2.24 B0 Control Mode, Linear Speed, and Roll Diameter

Parameters

B0-00 Tension control mode

Address: 0xB000
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 4 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Open loop torque control
2: Closed loop speed control
3: Closed loop torque control
4: Constant linear speed control
Description
Used to select the tension control mode.

‑408‑
 Parameter Groups

0: Disabled
Used for direction judgment and parameter auto-tuning.
1: Open-loop torque control
Tension/position detection and feedback are not required in the torque mode.
The AC drive controls the output torque and tension on the material. The FVC
mode is recommended to achieve better control effect.
2: Closed-loop speed control
Tension/position detection and feedback are required in the speed mode. Based
on the given main frequency calculated from linear speed and winding diameter,
the AC drive adjusts the output frequency by superposing the PID closed-loop
operation to achieve stable tension or position. The SVC, V/f control, or FVC mode
can be used.
3: Closed-loop torque control
Tension/position detection and feedback are required in the torque mode. Based
on the given torque in the open-loop torque control mode, the AC drive controls
the output torque to obtain the required tension by superposing the PID closed-
loop operation. Use FVC to achieve optimal control effect.
4: Constant linear speed control
In the speed mode, the AC drive adjusts its own operating frequency according to
the change of winding diameter to ensure that the system runs at a constant
linear speed. The SVC, V/f control, or FVC mode can be used.

B0-01 Winding mode

Address: 0xB001
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Winding
1: Unwinding
Description
Used with the DI function 58 (winding/unwinding switchover terminal) to
determine the winding mode. When the terminal assigned with function 58 is
inactive, the winding mode is consistent with that set by this parameter. When the
terminal assigned with function 58 is active, the winding mode is reverse to that
set by this parameter.

B0-02 Unwinding reverse tightening selection

Address: 0xB002
Min.: 0 Unit: m/min
Max.: 500 Data type: UInt16

‑409‑
Parameter Groups

Default: 0 Change: In real time

Value Range:
0.0 m/min to 500.0 m/min
Description
When B0-02 is set to 0, at zero material speed, the unwinding reel has no output
and the material is not tightened. When B0-02 is set to a value between 0.1 m/min
to 500.0 m/min, under no-load conditions or if the material is in loose state, the
unwinding reel runs at the set linear speed in the reverse direction; at zero
material speed, the unwinding real maintains output and the material is
tightened.

B0-03 Mechanical transmission ratio

Address: 0xB003
Min.: 0.01 Unit: -
Max.: 300 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.01 to 300.00
Description
This parameter specifies the ratio of motor speed to reel speed. Set B0-03 based
on the mechanical transmission structure. When the roll diameter is calculated
based on linear speed (B0-07 is set to 0), a larger value of B0-03 means a larger
roll diameter, and vice versa. According to this rule, the parameter can be
corrected according to the deviation between the calculated roll diameter and the
actual value.

B0-04 Linear speed input source

Address: 0xB004
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 6 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: No input
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse input (DI5)
5: Communication setting (1000H)
6: Communication setting (731AH)

‑410‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
1: No input
1–6: When the linear speed is input through the preceding channels, the
maximum linear speed (B0-05) must be set according to the per unit relationship.
The 1000H address is set according to the percentage. The 731AH address is
directly set by digit, and the digital setting range is from 0 to B0-05.

B0-05 Maximum linear speed

Address: 0xB005
Min.: 0 Unit: m/min
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1000 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0 m/min to 6500.0 m/min
Description
Used to set the maximum linear speed.
It corresponds to the actual linear speed when 100.0% is input for channel 1 to 5
of B0-04. (It differs from the maximum linear speed required by production. Verify
them during settings.) When the linear speed is used to calculate the winding
diameter (B0-07 = 0), the larger the parameter is, the larger the calculated winding
diameter is, and vice versa. According to this rule, the parameter can be corrected
according to the deviation between the calculated roll diameter and the actual
value.

B0-06 Minimum linear speed for winding diameter calculation

Address: 0xB006
Min.: 0 Unit: m/min
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0 m/min to 6500.0 m/min
Description
This parameter takes effect only when B0-07 is set to 0.
When the linear speed is lower than the value of B0-06, the current roll diameter is
maintained. When the linear speed is higher than the value of B0-06, the roll
diameter is calculated. This parameter can be used to address inaccurate roll
diameter calculation for low-frequency operation and acceleration.

B0-07 Winding diameter calculation method

Address: 0xB007
Min.: 0 Unit: -

‑411‑
Parameter Groups

Max.: 7 Data type: UInt16

Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Calculated based on linear speed
1:Calculated based on accumulative thickness
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse input (DI5)
6: Communication
7: Specified by B0-14
Description
0: Calculated based on linear speed
This mode is irrelevant with the material thickness. The winding diameter is
calculated in real time based on the linear speed and running frequency and the
error is not accumulated.
1: Calculated based on the accumulative thickness
The linear speed is not required in this mode. The winding diameter is calculated
based on the material thickness and revolution count signal accumulation. The
calculation result is stable, but the error is accumulated.
2–6: The winding diameter can be obtained through channels 2 to 6 to meet the
situation that the winding diameter is directly measured by sensors or the
winding diameter operation is performed outside the AC drive. When the
preceding calculation methods are used, the maximum roll diameter (B0-08) must
be set correctly based on the per-unit relationship. When AI1 is enabled (B0-07 is
set to 2 ), 100.0% AI1 input must correspond to the maximum roll diameter (B0-
08).
7: Set by B0-14
When the winding diameter channel is set to 7, the winding diameter is set
directly by B0-14, which can be used as an additional communication address or
used when the winding diameter is manually set during commissioning.

B0-08 Maximum roll diameter

Address: 0xB008
Min.: 0.1 Unit: mm
Max.: 6000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 500 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1 mm to 6000.0 mm
Description
Actual full roll diameter

‑412‑
 Parameter Groups

B0-09 Reel diameter

Address: 0xB009
Min.: 0.1 Unit: mm
Max.: 6000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1 mm to 6000.0 mm
Description
Actual reel diameter

B0-10 Initial roll diameter source

Address: 0xB00A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 4 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: B0-11 to B0-13 setting
1: AI1 setting
2: AI2 setting
3: AI3 setting
4: Communication setting (1000H)
Description
This parameter is used to select the input channel of the initial roll diameter. The
source of initial roll diameter is dependent on functions 55 and 56 (initial roll
diameter selection terminal) of the DI and related to the winding mode.
0: B0-11 to B0-13
By default, the initial roll diameter source is determined to be B0-08 or B0-09
based on the winding mode.
1 to 4: The initial roll diameter can be obtained through channels 1 to 4. When
using the preceding channels, the maximum roll diameter (B0-08) must be set
correctly according to the per unit relationship.

B0-11 Initial roll diameter 1

Address: 0xB00B
Min.: 0.1 Unit: mm
Max.: 6000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1 mm to 6000.0 mm
Description
For details about initial roll diameters 1 to 3, see B0-10.

‑413‑
Parameter Groups

B0-12 Initial roll diameter 2

Address: 0xB00C
Min.: 0.1 Unit: mm
Max.: 6000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1 mm to 6000.0 mm
Description
For details about initial roll diameters 1 to 3, see B0-10.

B0-13 Initial roll diameter 3

Address: 0xB00D
Min.: 0.1 Unit: mm
Max.: 6000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1 mm to 6000.0 mm
Description
For details about initial roll diameters 1 to 3, see B0-10.

B0-14 Current roll diameter

Address: 0xB00E
Min.: 0.1 Unit: mm
Max.: 6000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.1 mm to 6000.0 mm
Description
This parameter shows the current roll diameter in real time. Modifying this
parameter can modify the current roll diameter, and the result of roll diameter
calculation will override this parameter (except B0-07 = 7). It can also be used as a
way to reset the roll diameter.

B0-15 Roll diameter filter time

Address: 0xB00F
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00s to 10.00s
Description

‑414‑
 Parameter Groups

This parameter takes effect only when B0-07 is set to 0.

You can set B0-15 to filter roll diameter calculation results and suppress roll
diameter jitter. A larger value of B0-15 means smoother calculated roll diameter
and longer delay in roll diameter changes. Rule: When the roll diameter changes
linearly, the time that the calculated roll diameter lags behind the actual roll
diameter is basically equal to this parameter value.

B0-16 Winding diameter change rate

Address: 0xB010
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0–1000.0
Description
This parameter takes effect only when B0-07 is set to 0.
You can set B0-16 to a non-zero value to limit the change of roll diameter per unit
of time and prevent abnormal fast change. An excessively low roll diameter
change rate may result in large delay in roll diameter calculation. Set the change
rate properly based on the actual conditions, for example, based on the
maximum change rate corresponding to the linear speed of 100.0 m/min.

B0-17 Roll diameter change direction limit

Address: 0xB011
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Decrease disabled during winding, and increase disabled during unwinding
Description
This parameter takes effect only when B0-07 is set to 0.
Set this parameter to limit the direction change of the roll diameter. Use it under
the condition of setting B0-16 reasonably. Otherwise, if there is abnormal
fluctuation of roll diameter, excessive deviation of winding diameter calculation
result will be caused.

B0-18 Roll diameter reset during running

Address: 0xB012
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16

‑415‑
Parameter Groups

Default: 0 Change: In real time

Value Range:
0–1
Description
This parameter can be used to enable roll diameter reset during operation.

B0-19 Pre-drive speed gain

Address: 0xB013
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-100.0% to +200.0%
Description
For pre-drive, the running frequency is automatically calculated based on the
linear speed and roll diameter to ensure matching with the linear speed of the
material. For small deviation of linear speed, set B0-19 to increase or decrease the
running frequency during pre-drive, ensuring accurate linear speed matching.

B0-20 Pre-drive torque limit source

Address: 0xB014
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Set by F2-09
1: Set based on tension control torque
Description
In the torque control tension mode, the target torque is automatically generated
to meet the material tension demand. In the normal operation mode, the target
torque can also be set according to the channel selected by F2-09. This parameter
provides the preceding options for the source of the target torque in the pre-drive
mode. You can set it as required. 0: The target torque is set by the channel
selected by F2-09. 1: The target torque is set according to the tension control
open-loop torque (for mode 1 and mode 3 only).

B0-21 Pre-drive torque correction

Address: 0xB015
Min.: -100 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time

‑416‑
 Parameter Groups

Value Range:
-100.0% to +100.0%
Description
The parameter takes effect when B0-20 is set to 1 and is used to correct the
tension control torque in pre-drive mode. To avoid too slow pre-drive
acceleration due to low torque limit when B0-20 is set to 1, the minimum torque
limit in pre-drive mode can be limited.

B0-23 Pre-drive acceleration time

Address: 0xB017
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6000.0s
Description
B0-23, B0-24, and B0-40 are used to set the time as a group. B0-23 and B0-40
correspond to the acceleration and deceleration time when the winding diameter
is the minimum winding diameter. With the increase of winding diameter, the
acceleration and deceleration time increase in proportion to avoid the impact
caused by excessive acceleration and deceleration in large winding.

B0-24 Pre-drive deceleration time

Address: 0xB018
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 20 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6000.0s
Description
B0-23, B0-24, and B0-40 are used to set the time as a group. B0-23 and B0-24
correspond to the acceleration and deceleration time when the winding diameter
is the minimum winding diameter. With the increase of winding diameter, the
acceleration and deceleration time increase in proportion to avoid the impact
caused by excessive acceleration and deceleration in large winding.

B0-25 Pre-drive winding diameter calculation function

Address: 0xB019
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time

‑417‑
Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
This parameter takes effect only when B0-07 is set to 1.
When the winding diameter is calculated by thickness accumulation, the winding
diameter increases/decreases with the number of revolutions of the reel. At this
time, this parameter can be set to 1 to avoid the cumulative error caused by the
failure of winding diameter calculation during pre-driving. You can set this
parameter according to the actual operations.

B0-26 Tension frequency limit

Address: 0xB01A
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
Limit percentage (a percentage of the linear speed synchronous frequency)

B0-27 Tension frequency limit offset

Address: 0xB01B
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 5 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to 100.00 Hz
Description
Limit offset (fixed frequency)

B0-28 Tension frequency limit

Address: 0xB01C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
B0-00=2: B0-28 is used to enable the speed closed-loop PID adjustment limit.

‑418‑
 Parameter Groups

B0-00=0: Limit the tension frequency according to B0-26 and B0-27 (limited by
upper limit frequency)
B0-00=1: Limit the tension frequency to the fixed frequency set by B0-27.
In speed mode, when open-loop reference and closed-loop adjustment are used,
closed-loop adjustment must be limited to avoid system shock and ensure system
stability. For this reason, in the speed closed-loop adjustment, based on the
synchronization frequency (the running frequency that the rewinder matches the
current linear speed) and the speed closed-loop limiter offset, the closed-loop
adjustment frequency upper limit can be obtained according to the following
formula by default (B0-28=0).
Closed-loop adjustment frequency upper limit = synchronous frequency x B0-26 +
B0-27
When B0-28 is set to 1, the upper limit of the closed-loop adjustment frequency is
the fixed frequency B0-27.
B0-00≠2: B0-28 is used to limit the speed limit (effective for winding).
0: No limit (limited by the upper limit frequency)
1: Limit the frequency according to B0-26 and B0-27.
In the torque mode, by default (B0-28=0), the upper limit of the winding frequency
is not limited. To prevent material breaking and runaway, the above parameters
can be set to limit the upper limit of the winding frequency. When B0-28 is set to
1, the upper limit of the winding frequency is obtained according to the following
formula based on the synchronization frequency (the running frequency that the
rewinder matches the current linear speed) and the frequency limit offset.
Winding frequency upper limit = Synchronous frequency x (1 + B0-26) + B0-27

B0-29 Pulses per revolution

Address: 0xB01D
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 60000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
1 to 60000
Description
This parameter specifies the number of pulses per revolution of the reel.

B0-30 Revolutions per layer

Address: 0xB01E
Min.: 1 Unit: -
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑419‑
Parameter Groups

1 to 10000
Description
This parameter specifies the number of revolutions for each layer of winded
materials, generally used for wire rods. For wire rods, set B0-30 to 1.

B0-31 Material thickness reference source

Address: 0xB01F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Description
You can set B0-31 to select an input channel of material thickness.
0: Digital setting
The material thickness is affected by the DI functions 62 and 63 (material
thickness selection terminal).
1 to 3: The initial roll diameter can be obtained through channels 1 to 3. When the
preceding channels are used, the maximum material thickness (B0-36) must be
set correctly based on the per-unit relationship.

B0-32 Material thickness 0

Address: 0xB020
Min.: 0.01 Unit: mm
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.01 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.01 mm to 100.00 mm
Description
For details about the material thickness 0 to 3, see B0-31.

B0-33 Material thickness 1

Address: 0xB021
Min.: 0.01 Unit: mm
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.01 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.01 mm to 100.00 mm

‑420‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
For details about the material thickness 0 to 3, see B0-31.

B0-34 Material thickness 2

Address: 0xB022
Min.: 0.01 Unit: mm
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.01 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.01 mm to 100.00 mm
Description
For details about the material thickness 0 to 3, see B0-31.

B0-35 Material thickness 3

Address: 0xB023
Min.: 0.01 Unit: mm
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.01 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.01 mm to 100.00 mm
Description
For details about the material thickness 0 to 3, see B0-31.

B0-36 Maximum thickness

Address: 0xB024
Min.: 0.01 Unit: mm
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.01 mm to 100.00 mm
Description
For details about the material thickness, see B0-31.

B0-37 Winding diameter not reset upon stop

Address: 0xB025
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

‑421‑
Parameter Groups

Description
When this parameter is set to 1, the roll diameter is automatically reset to the
initial roll diameter upon stop, which is similar to the function 54 of the DI.

B0-38 Closed-loop tension torque mode selection

Address: 0xB026
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Torque calculated only through PID
1: Torque calculated through main + PID
Description
The main torque is the torque calculated when B0-00 is set to 1.
In pure PID mode, the set friction and inertia compensation are still valid, but the
tension torque is invalid.
When the main + PID mode is used, accurately configure the tension
corresponding to 100.0% of PID feedback value, and set parameter B1-02.

B0-40 Minimum pre-drive torque limit

Address: 0xB028
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
B0-23, B0-24, and B0-40 are used to set the time as a group. B0-23 and B0-24
correspond to the acceleration and deceleration time when the winding diameter
is the minimum winding diameter. With the increase of winding diameter, the
acceleration and deceleration time increase in proportion to avoid the impact
caused by excessive acceleration and deceleration in large winding.

B0-41 Constant linear speed source selection

Address: 0xB029
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑422‑
 Parameter Groups

0: AI1
1: AI2
2: AI3
3: Pulse setting (DI5)
Communication setting (1000H)
5: Communication setting (731AH)
Description
0 to 2: AI channel
3: Pulse
4: Communication address (1000H); set by percentage
5: Communication address (731AH); set by digital with the range from 0 to B0-05

2.25 B1 Tension Settings

B1-00 Tension reference source

Address: 0xB100
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 5 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: B0-01 setting
1: AI1 setting
2: AI2 setting
AI3 setting
4: Pulse setting (DI5)
5: Communication setting (1000H)
Description
0: Set by B1-01
1–5: These channel inputs indicate the percentage of the target tension relative to
the maximum tension, and the maximum tension (B1-02) must be set correctly
according to the per unit relationship.

B1-01 Tension digital setting

Address: 0xB101
Min.: 0 Unit: N
Max.: 65000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 N to 65000 N

‑423‑
Parameter Groups

Description
See channel 0 of B1-00.

B1-02 Maximum tension

Address: 0xB102
Min.: 0 Unit: N
Max.: 65000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 500 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 N to 65000 N
Description
Used to set the maximum tension, corresponding to the tension value when
100.0% is input for channels 1 to 5 of B1-00. When the actual tension does not
meet requirements, corrections can be performed by editing this parameter
without changing AI, pulse input signals, or curves.

B1-03 Zero-speed threshold

Address: 0xB103
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 20 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 20.0%
Description
If the running frequency is lower than the value of this parameter, startup friction
tension compensation will be carried out according to B1-04. If the running
frequency is higher than the value of this parameter, startup friction tension
compensation will not be carried out.

B1-04 Zero-speed tension rise

Address: 0xB104
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
This parameter corresponds to the percentage of tension reference and must be
set properly according to the range of allowable material tension. Set this
parameter to a possible minimal value on the premise of ensuring normal startup.

‑424‑
 Parameter Groups

B1-05 Frequency acceleration time in torque control mode

Address: 0xB105
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description
Set B1-05 and B1-06 to change the slope of the frequency upper limit with time.
In tension mode, the frequency upper limit affects the motor output. Generally, it
does not need to be set. In special cases, B1-05 and B1-06 can be set according to
output requirements.

B1-06 Frequency deceleration time in torque control mode

Address: 0xB106
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 6500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 6500.0s
Description
Set B1-05 and B1-06 to change the slope of the frequency upper limit with time.
In tension mode, the frequency upper limit affects the motor output. Generally, it
does not need to be set. In special cases, B1-05 and B1-06 can be set according to
output requirements.

B1-07 Friction force compensation

Address: 0xB107
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 50.0%
Description
In tension control mode, the AC drive automatically sets the target torque
according to the tension reference and roll diameter. The target torque is
increased (winding)/decreased (unwinding) according to B1-07 to offset the effect
of friction on material tension. This parameter corresponds to the percentage of
rated torque of the AC drive.

B1-08 Mechanical inertia compensation coefficient

Address: 0xB108

‑425‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: N•m2

Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 N m2 to 65535 N m2
Description
Set B1-08 based on the actual mechanical flywheel inertia. For general cylindrical
mechanical reels, the theoretical value of mechanical flywheel inertia can be
obtained according to the following formula: GD_m^2=πg/(8i^2) γb (D^4-D_0^4),
where g is gravity acceleration 9.8 m/ M4, γ is mechanical material density, b is
mechanical shaft length, D is mechanical shaft outer diameter, D0 is mechanical
shaft inner diameter (0 for solid shaft), I is transmission ratio, and the unit refers
to international system of units. The setting value can be adjusted according to
the actual change of material tension during acceleration or deceleration.

B1-09 Correction coefficient of acceleration inertia compensation

Address: 0xB109
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 200.0%
Description
An inevitable deviation exists between the theoretical inertia and the actual
inertia, so the inertia compensation effect may not be ideal even after the inertia
parameters are set. To address this, set B1-09 and B1-10 for fine tuning to
optimize the control effect. Taking the winding acceleration as an example, if the
material tension is small, B1-09 can be increased to strengthen the compensation
effect, otherwise, the parameter can be reduced. It works the same for
deceleration. This set of parameters facilitates commissioning.

B1-10 Correction coefficient of deceleration inertia compensation

Address: 0xB10A
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to +200.0%

‑426‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
An inevitable deviation exists between the theoretical inertia and the actual
inertia, so the inertia compensation effect may not be ideal even after the inertia
parameters are set. To address this, set B1-09 and B1-10 for fine tuning to
optimize the control effect. Take the winding acceleration as an example. If the
material tension is small, B1-09 can be increased to strengthen the compensation
effect, otherwise, the parameter can be reduced. It works the same for
deceleration. This set of parameters facilitates commissioning.

B1-11 Material density

Address: 0xB10B
Min.: 0 Unit: kg/m3
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 kg/m3 to 65535 kg/m3
Description
Set this set of parameters with reference to the actual material properties, and set
the exact mechanical transmission ratio (B0-03) at the same time. The AC drive
automatically calculates the flywheel inertia according to the material density,
material width, reel diameter, and material roll diameter.

B1-12 Material width

Address: 0xB10C
Min.: 0 Unit: mm
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 mm to 65535 mm
Description
Set this set of parameters with reference to the actual material properties, and set
the exact mechanical transmission ratio (B0-03) at the same time. The AC drive
automatically calculates the flywheel inertia according to the material density,
material width, reel diameter, and material roll diameter.

B1-13 Inertia compensation exit delay

Address: 0xB10D
Min.: 0 Unit: ms
Max.: 1000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑427‑
Parameter Groups

0 ms to 1000 ms
Description
Used to set the inertia compensation exit delay.

B1-14 Transition frequency for zero speed compensation

Address: 0xB10E
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: 20 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to 20.00Hz
Description
This parameter supports smooth switchover of zero-speed tension rise at the
threshold.

B1-15 Open-loop torque reverse

Address: 0xB10F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
This parameter takes effect only when B0-00 is set to 1 or 3.
When friction compensation and inertia compensation are added, the calculated
torque value is likely to be negative. You can set B1-15 to select the solution for
reverse torque. Torque direction is controlled by default. You can set B1-15 to 1 to
enable reverse torque.

B1-16 Tension closed-loop torque control limit

Address: 0xB110
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 200 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 200.0%
Description
Used to limit the ratio (in percentage) of the closed-loop torque control value to
the open-loop control torque reference in the closed-loop torque control mode
(B0-00 is set to 3).

‑428‑
 Parameter Groups

B1-17 Friction force compensation correction coefficient

Address: 0xB111
Min.: -50 Unit: -
Max.: 50 Data type: Int16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
-50.0 to 50.0
Description
In most scenarios, friction may vary with running frequency. Using B1-07 may not
achieve ideal friction compensation effect, so it can be used with this parameter.
See B1-18 for details. This parameter corresponds to the percentage of rated
torque of the AC drive.

B1-18 Friction force compensation curve

Address: 0xB112
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 3 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Frequency
1: Linear speed
2: Multi-friction compensation curve 1
3: Multi-friction compensation curve 2
Description
Five friction compensation modes are available to meet the complex friction
change rule.
0: Compensation is performed according to the running frequency. In some cases,
the friction force will change with the running frequency of the system. When this
mode is set, the friction force compensation value is determined by the following
formula: Friction compensation torque = B1-07 x (1 + Linear speed conversion
frequency/Maximum frequency x B1-17).
1: Compensation is performed according to the linear speed, which is similar to
Mode 0. The compensation correction is based on the linear speed, and the value
of friction compensation is determined by the following formula: Friction
compensation torque = B1-07 x (1 + Linear speed/Maximum linear speed x B1-17).
2. Multi-friction force compensation curve 1. In some cases, the friction force does
not change linearly with frequency. At this time, the frequency can be converted
based on the linear speed in the multi-section curve to obtain dynamic friction
force compensation. For details, see B1-19 to B1-24.
3. Multi-friction compensation curve 2. Compared with the compensation curve 1,
the compensation curve 2 is more flexible, but more parameters need to be set.
For details, see B1-19 to B1-30.

‑429‑
Parameter Groups

B1-19 Multi-friction force compensation torque 1

Address: 0xB113
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0–50.0
Description
Used for multi-section friction force compensation curves 1 and 2.
When B1-18 is set to 2, parameters B1-19 to B1-24 take effect. When B1-18 is set to
3, B1-19 to B1-30 take effect.

B1-20 Multi-friction force compensation torque 2

Address: 0xB114
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0–50.0
Description
Used for multi-section friction force compensation curves 1 and 2.
When B1-18 is set to 2, parameters B1-19 to B1-24 take effect. When B1-18 is set to
3, B1-19 to B1-30 take effect.

B1-21 Multi-friction force compensation torque 3

Address: 0xB115
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0–50.0
Description
Used for multi-section friction force compensation curves 1 and 2.
When B1-18 is set to 2, parameters B1-19 to B1-24 take effect. When B1-18 is set to
3, B1-19 to B1-30 take effect.

B1-22 Multi-friction force compensation torque 4

Address: 0xB116
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time

‑430‑
 Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0.0–50.0
Description
Used for multi-section friction force compensation curves 1 and 2.
When B1-18 is set to 2, parameters B1-19 to B1-24 take effect. When B1-18 is set to
3, B1-19 to B1-30 take effect.

B1-23 Multi-friction force compensation torque 5

Address: 0xB117
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0–50.0
Description
Used for multi-section friction force compensation curves 1 and 2.
When B1-18 is set to 2, parameters B1-19 to B1-24 take effect. When B1-18 is set to
3, B1-19 to B1-30 take effect.

B1-24 Multi-friction force compensation torque 6

Address: 0xB118
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0–50.0
Description
Used for multi-section friction force compensation curves 1 and 2.
When B1-18 is set to 2, parameters B1-19 to B1-24 take effect. When B1-18 is set to
3, B1-19 to B1-30 take effect.

B1-25 Multi-friction force compensation inflection point 1

Address: 0xB119
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
Used for multi-section friction force compensation curves 1 and 2.
When B1-18 is set to 2, parameters B1-19 to B1-24 take effect. When B1-18 is set to
3, B1-19 to B1-30 take effect.

‑431‑
Parameter Groups

B1-26 Multi-friction force compensation inflection point 2

Address: 0xB11A
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
Used for multi-section friction force compensation curves 1 and 2.
When B1-18 is set to 2, parameters B1-19 to B1-24 take effect. When B1-18 is set to
3, B1-19 to B1-30 take effect.

B1-27 Multi-friction force compensation inflection point 3

Address: 0xB11B
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
Used for multi-section friction force compensation curves 1 and 2.
When B1-18 is set to 2, parameters B1-19 to B1-24 take effect. When B1-18 is set to
3, B1-19 to B1-30 take effect.

B1-28 Multi-friction force compensation inflection point 4

Address: 0xB11C
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
Used for multi-section friction force compensation curves 1 and 2.
When B1-18 is set to 2, parameters B1-19 to B1-24 take effect. When B1-18 is set to
3, B1-19 to B1-30 take effect.

B1-29 Multi-friction force compensation inflection point 5

Address: 0xB11D
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time

‑432‑
 Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
Used for multi-section friction force compensation curves 1 and 2.
When B1-18 is set to 2, parameters B1-19 to B1-24 take effect. When B1-18 is set to
3, B1-19 to B1-30 take effect.

B1-30 Multi-friction force compensation inflection point 6

Address: 0xB11E
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
Used for multi-section friction force compensation curves 1 and 2.
When B1-18 is set to 2, parameters B1-19 to b1-24 take effect. When B1-18 is set to
3, B1-19 to B1-30 take effect.

B1-31 Tension establishment

Address: 0xB11F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
In closed-loop control mode, when B1-31 is set to 0, the pre-speed tensioning
function is disabled. When B1-31 is set to 1, the pre-speed tensioning function is
enabled.

B1-32 Tension establishment dead zone

Address: 0xB120
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 2 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
The PID operation stops when the pre-speed tensioning function is enabled and
the PID feedback is lower than the value of B1-32.

‑433‑
Parameter Groups

B1-33 Tension establishment frequency

Address: 0xB121
Min.: 0 Unit: Hz
Max.: F0-10 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.1 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00 Hz to value of F0-10
Description
Used to set the running frequency in scenarios where the tension setup at pre-
speed function is enabled but the system is not in the tension setup dead zone.

B1-34 Terminal torque boost proportion

Address: 0xB122
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 500 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 500.0%
Description
When the DI terminal (assigned with function 61) is activated, the tension torque
is boosted by certain ratio. After the DI terminal is deactivated, the boost part is
canceled gradually.

B1-35 Terminal torque boost cancel time

Address: 0xB123
Min.: 0 Unit: s
Max.: 50 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0s to 50.0s
Description
When the DI terminal (assigned with function 61) is activated, the tension torque
is boosted by certain ratio. After the DI terminal is deactivated, the boost part is
canceled gradually.

B1-37 Initial roll diameter auto-tuning selection

Address: 0xB125
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:

‑434‑
 Parameter Groups

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Description
When the tension setup at pre-speed function is enabled, you can also enable the
initial roll diameter auto-tuning function for the AC drive to automatically tune
the initial roll diameter. This function is applicable to rod control only. This
function is enabled when B1-37 is set to 1, and disabled when B1-37 is set to 0.

B1-38 Rod length

Address: 0xB126
Min.: 1 Unit: mm
Max.: 65535 Data type: UInt16
Default: 300 Change: At stop
Value Range:
1mm to 65535mm
Description
Rod length after the initial roll diameter is auto-tuned.

B1-39 Rod angle

Address: 0xB127
Min.: 0.1 Unit: °
Max.: 360 Data type: UInt16
Default: 40 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0.1° to 360.0°
Description
Rod angle after the initial roll diameter is auto-tuned.

2.26 B2 Taper

B2-00 Taper curve

Address: 0xB200
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 1 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: Curve taper
1: Multi-liner taper
Description
Used to select the taper curve generation mode.

‑435‑
Parameter Groups

0: The taper curve is generated based on the taper setting and the correction
coefficient of taper compensation (B2-03). For details, see B2-03.
1: For details of the multi-linear taper, see descriptions of B2-08 to B2-19.

B2-01 Tension taper source selection

Address: 0xB201
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 4 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: B2-02 setting
1: AI1 setting
2: AI2 setting
3: AI3 setting
4: Communication setting (1000H)
Description
0: Set by B2-02
1–3: Set by analog channels 1 to 3
4: Communication setting (1000H)

B2-02 Digital setting of taper

Address: 0xB202
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
Used to set the taper through digital setting. For details, see value 0 of B2-01.

B2-03 Correction coefficient of taper compensation

Address: 0xB203
Min.: 0 Unit: mm
Max.: 10000 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0mm to 10000mm
Description

‑436‑
 Parameter Groups

Used to set the correction coefficient of taper compensation. This parameter and
the taper setting can be used to set the curve taper. The taper value can be
determined by using the following formula (multiple modes are available and the
following gives a typical example): F=F_0*{1-K*[1-(D_0+D_1)/(D+D_1)]}.
Where, F is the tension after taper is set; F_0 is the tension before taper is set,
determined by B1-00; K is the taper value, determined by B2-01; D_0 is the reel
diameter set by B0-09; D is the current roll diameter set by B0-14; D1 is the
correction coefficient of taper compensation.

B2-05 Setting channel of external taper AO

Address: 0xB205
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 4 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: At stop
Value Range:
0: B2-06 setting
1: AI1 setting
2: AI2 setting
AI3 setting
4: Communication setting (1000H)
Description
In some scenarios, material tension is determined by external actuators. The
external taper output function can be use to control the external actuators to
achieve proper tension taper. The maximum external taper value determines the
maximum taper output value when the external taper output (DO function 19) is
selected for FMP or AO (F5-06 to F5-08), that is, the corresponding output value
when the roll is empty. Its value setting channel is determined by this parameter.
0: Set by b2-06
1–3: Set by analog channels 1 to 3
4: Communication setting (1000H)

B2-06 External taper setting

Address: 0xB206
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
Used to set the maximum external taper (digital setting). For details, see value 0
of B2-05.

‑437‑
Parameter Groups

B2-08 Minimum winding diameter taper

Address: 0xB208
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
Taper corresponding to the minimum winding diameter

B2-09 Linear taper switchover point 1

Address: 0xB209
Min.: B0-09 Unit: mm
Max.: B0-08 Data type: UInt16
Default: 150 Change: In real time
Value Range:
B0-09 to B0-08
Description
Winding diameter 1 set by multi-point linear taper curve

B2-10 Taper of switchover point 1

Address: 0xB20A
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 100 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
Taper 1 set by multi-point linear taper curve

B2-11 Linear taper switchover point 2

Address: 0xB20B
Min.: B2-09 Unit: mm
Max.: B0-08 Data type: UInt16
Default: 200 Change: In real time
Value Range:
B2-09 to B0-08
Description
Winding diameter 2 set by multi-point linear taper curve

B2-12 Taper of switchover point 2

Address: 0xB20C

‑438‑
 Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 90 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
Taper 2 set by multi-point linear taper curve

B2-13 Linear taper switchover point 3

Address: 0xB20D
Min.: B2-11 Unit: mm
Max.: B0-08 Data type: UInt16
Default: 250 Change: In real time
Value Range:
B2-11 to B0-08
Description
Winding diameter 3 set by multi-point linear taper curve

B2-14 Taper of switchover point 3

Address: 0xB20E
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 80 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
Taper 3 set by multi-point linear taper curve

B2-15 Linear taper switchover point 4

Address: 0xB20F
Min.: B2-13 Unit: mm
Max.: B0-08 Data type: UInt16
Default: 300 Change: In real time
Value Range:
B2-13 to B0-08
Description
Winding diameter 4 set by multi-point linear taper curve

B2-16 Taper of switchover point 4

Address: 0xB210
Min.: 0 Unit: %

‑439‑
Parameter Groups

Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16

Default: 70 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
Taper 4 set by multi-point linear taper curve

B2-17 Linear taper switchover point 5

Address: 0xB211
Min.: B2-15 Unit: mm
Max.: B0-08 Data type: UInt16
Default: 400 Change: In real time
Value Range:
B2-15 to B0-08
Description
Winding diameter 5 set by multi-point linear taper curve

B2-18 Taper of switchover point 5

Address: 0xB212
Min.: 0 Unit: %
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 50 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0% to 100.0%
Description
Taper 5 set by multi-point linear taper curve

B2-19 Taper at maximum roll diameter

Address: 0xB213
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 30 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.0–100.0
Description
Taper corresponding to the maximum roll diameter.

‑440‑
 Parameter Groups

2.27 B6 Communication Free Mapping Configuration Parameters

B6-00 Source address 1

Address: 0xB600
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0xE012 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 1.

B6-01 Mapping address 1

Address: 0xB601
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0x500E Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 1.

B6-02 Write gain 1

Address: 0xB602
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 10 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 1 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-03 Read gain 1

Address: 0xB603
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0.1 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑441‑
Parameter Groups

0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 1 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times the original read coefficient.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced to 10% of
the original read coefficient.

B6-04 Source address 2

Address: 0xB604
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 2.

B6-05 Mapping address 2

Address: 0xB605
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 2.

B6-06 Write gain 2

Address: 0xB606
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 2 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

‑442‑
 Parameter Groups

B6-07 Read gain 2

Address: 0xB607
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 2 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-08 Source address 3

Address: 0xB608
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 3.

B6-09 Mapping address 3

Address: 0xB609
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 3.

B6-10 Write gain 3

Address: 0xB60A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 3 for communication free mapping.

‑443‑
Parameter Groups

When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-11 Read gain 3

Address: 0xB60B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 3 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-12 Source address 4

Address: 0xB60C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 4.

B6-13 Mapping address 4

Address: 0xB60D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 4.

B6-14 Write gain 4

Address: 0xB60E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16

‑444‑
 Parameter Groups

Default: 0 Change: In real time

Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 4 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-15 Read gain 4

Address: 0xB60F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 4 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-16 Source address 5

Address: 0xB610
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 5.

B6-17 Mapping address 5

Address: 0xB611
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 5.

‑445‑
Parameter Groups

B6-18 Write gain 5

Address: 0xB612
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 5 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-19 Read gain 5

Address: 0xB613
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 5 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-20 Source address 6

Address: 0xB614
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 6.

B6-21 Mapping address 6

Address: 0xB615
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑446‑
 Parameter Groups

0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 6.

B6-22 Write gain 6

Address: 0xB616
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 6 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-23 Read gain 6

Address: 0xB617
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 6 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-24 Source address 7

Address: 0xB618
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 7.

B6-25 Mapping address 7

Address: 0xB619

‑447‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 7.

B6-26 Write gain 7

Address: 0xB61A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 7 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-27 Read gain 7

Address: 0xB61B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 7 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-28 Source address 8

Address: 0xB61C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF

‑448‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 8.

B6-29 Mapping address 8

Address: 0xB61D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 8.

B6-30 Write gain 8

Address: 0xB61E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 8 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-31 Read gain 8

Address: 0xB61F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 8 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-32 Source address 9

Address: 0xB620

‑449‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 9.

B6-33 Mapping address 9

Address: 0xB621
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 9.

B6-34 Write gain 9

Address: 0xB622
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 9 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-35 Read gain 9

Address: 0xB623
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 9 for communication free mapping.

‑450‑
 Parameter Groups

When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-36 Source address 10

Address: 0xB624
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 10.

B6-37 Mapping address 10

Address: 0xB625
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 10.

B6-38 Write gain 10

Address: 0xB626
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 10 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-39 Read gain 10

Address: 0xB627
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16

‑451‑
Parameter Groups

Default: 0 Change: In real time

Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 10 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-40 Source address 11

Address: 0xB628
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 11.

B6-41 Mapping address 11

Address: 0xB629
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 11.

B6-42 Write gain 11

Address: 0xB62A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 11 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

‑452‑
 Parameter Groups

B6-43 Read gain 11

Address: 0xB62B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 11 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-44 Source address 12

Address: 0xB62C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 12.

B6-45 Mapping address 12

Address: 0xB62D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 12.

B6-46 Write gain 12

Address: 0xB62E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 12 for communication free mapping.

‑453‑
Parameter Groups

When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-47 Read gain 12

Address: 0xB62F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 12 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-48 Source address 13

Address: 0xB630
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 13.

B6-49 Mapping address 13

Address: 0xB631
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 13.

B6-50 Write gain 13

Address: 0xB632
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16

‑454‑
 Parameter Groups

Default: 0 Change: In real time

Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 13 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-51 Read gain 13

Address: 0xB633
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 13 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-52 Source address 14

Address: 0xB634
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 14.

B6-53 Mapping address 14

Address: 0xB635
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 14.

‑455‑
Parameter Groups

B6-54 Write gain 14

Address: 0xB636
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 14 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-55 Read gain 14

Address: 0xB637
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 14 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-56 Source address 15

Address: 0xB638
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 15.

B6-57 Mapping address 15

Address: 0xB639
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑456‑
 Parameter Groups

0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 15.

B6-58 Write gain 15

Address: 0xB63A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 15 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-59 Read gain 15

Address: 0xB63B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 15 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-60 Source address 16

Address: 0xB63C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 16.

B6-61 Mapping address 16

Address: 0xB63D

‑457‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 16.

B6-62 Write gain 16

Address: 0xB63E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 16 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-63 Read gain 16

Address: 0xB63F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 16 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-64 Source address 17

Address: 0xB640
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF

‑458‑
 Parameter Groups

Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 17.

B6-65 Mapping address 17

Address: 0xB641
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 17.

B6-66 Write gain 17

Address: 0xB642
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 17 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-67 Read gain 17

Address: 0xB643
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 17 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-68 Source address 18

Address: 0xB644

‑459‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 18.

B6-69 Mapping address 18

Address: 0xB645
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 18.

B6-70 Write gain 18

Address: 0xB646
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 18 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-71 Read gain 18

Address: 0xB647
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 18 for communication free mapping.

‑460‑
 Parameter Groups

When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-72 Source address 19

Address: 0xB648
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 19.

B6-73 Mapping address 19

Address: 0xB649
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 19.

B6-74 Write gain 19

Address: 0xB64A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 19 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-75 Read gain 19

Address: 0xB64B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16

‑461‑
Parameter Groups

Default: 0 Change: In real time

Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 19 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-76 Source address 20

Address: 0xB64C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 20.

B6-77 Mapping address 20

Address: 0xB64D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 20.

B6-78 Write gain 20

Address: 0xB64E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 20 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

‑462‑
 Parameter Groups

B6-79 Read gain 20

Address: 0xB64F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 20 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-80 Source address 21

Address: 0xB650
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 21.

B6-81 Mapping address 21

Address: 0xB651
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 21.

B6-82 Write gain 21

Address: 0xB652
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 21 for communication free mapping.

‑463‑
Parameter Groups

When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-83 Read gain 21

Address: 0xB653
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 21 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-84 Source address 22

Address: 0xB654
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 22.

B6-85 Mapping address 22

Address: 0xB655
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 22.

B6-86 Write gain 22

Address: 0xB656
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16

‑464‑
 Parameter Groups

Default: 0 Change: In real time

Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 22 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-87 Read gain 22

Address: 0xB657
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 22 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-88 Source address 23

Address: 0xB658
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 23.

B6-89 Mapping address 23

Address: 0xB659
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 23.

‑465‑
Parameter Groups

B6-90 Write gain 23

Address: 0xB65A
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 23 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-91 Read gain 23

Address: 0xB65B
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 23 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-92 Source address 24

Address: 0xB65C
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 24.

B6-93 Mapping address 24

Address: 0xB65D
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:

‑466‑
 Parameter Groups

0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 24.

B6-94 Write gain 24

Address: 0xB65E
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 24 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-95 Read gain 24

Address: 0xB65F
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 24 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-96 Source address 25

Address: 0xB660
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping source address 25.

B6-97 Mapping address 25

Address: 0xB661

‑467‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0xFFFF Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0 to value of 0xFFFF
Description
Indicates the communication free mapping target address 25.

B6-98 Write gain 25

Address: 0xB662
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the write coefficient 25 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the write coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the write coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

B6-99 Read gain 25

Address: 0xB663
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 100 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: In real time
Value Range:
0.00–100.00
Description
Indicates the read coefficient 25 for communication free mapping.
When this parameter is set to 10.00, the read coefficient will be magnified 10
times.
When this parameter is set to 0.10, the read coefficient will be reduced by 10%.

2.28 U0 Basic Monitoring Parameters

U0-00 Running frequency

Address: 0x7000
Min.: - Unit: Hz
Max.: - Data type: UInt16

‑468‑
 Parameter Groups

Default: - Change: Unchangeable

Value Range:
-
Description
This parameter shows the running frequency (Hz) of the AC drive.

U0-01 Frequency reference

Address: 0x7001
Min.: - Unit: Hz
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description
This parameter shows the frequency reference (Hz) of the AC drive.

U0-02 Bus voltage

Address: 0x7002
Min.: - Unit: V
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description
This parameter defines the bus voltage (V) of the AC drive.

U0-03 Output voltage

Address: 0x7003
Min.: - Unit: V
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description
This parameter shows the output voltage (V) of the AC drive.

U0-04 Output current

Address: 0x7004
Min.: - Unit: A
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable

‑469‑
Parameter Groups

Value Range:
-
Description
This parameter shows the output current (A) of the AC drive.

U0-05 Output power

Address: 0x7005
Min.: - Unit: kW
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description
This parameter shows the output power (kW) of the AC drive.

U0-06 Output torque

Address: 0x7006
Min.: - Unit: %
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description
This parameter shows the output torque (%) of the AC drive.

U0-07 DI state
Address: 0x7007
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-08 DO state
Address: 0x7008
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:

‑470‑
 Parameter Groups

-
Description

U0-09 AI1 voltage

Address: 0x7009
Min.: - Unit: V
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-10 AI2 voltage

Address: 0x700A
Min.: - Unit: V
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-11 AI3 voltage

Address: 0x700B
Min.: - Unit: V
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-12 Count value

Address: 0x700C
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-

‑471‑
Parameter Groups

Description

U0-13 Length value

Address: 0x700D
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-14 Load speed display

Address: 0x700E
Min.: - Unit: Hz
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-15 PID reference

Address: 0x700F
Min.: - Unit: %
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-16 PID feedback

Address: 0x7010
Min.: - Unit: %
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

‑472‑
 Parameter Groups

U0-17 PLC stage

Address: 0x7011
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-18 Pulse input frequency

Address: 0x7012
Min.: - Unit: kHz
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-19 Feedback speed

Address: 0x7013
Min.: - Unit: Hz
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-20 Remaining running time

Address: 0x7014
Min.: - Unit: min
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-21 AI1 voltage before correction

Address: 0x7015

‑473‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: - Unit: V
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-22 AI2 voltage before correction

Address: 0x7016
Min.: - Unit: V
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-23 AI3 voltage before correction

Address: 0x7017
Min.: - Unit: V
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-24 Linear speed

Address: 0x7018
Min.: - Unit: m/min
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-25 Current power-on time

Address: 0x7019
Min.: - Unit: min

‑474‑
 Parameter Groups

Max.: - Data type: UInt16

Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-26 Current running time

Address: 0x701A
Min.: - Unit: min
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-27 Pulse input frequency

Address: 0x701B
Min.: - Unit: Hz
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-28 Reference value set through communication

Address: 0x701C
Min.: - Unit: %
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-29 Encoder feedback speed

Address: 0x701D
Min.: - Unit: Hz
Max.: - Data type: Int16

‑475‑
Parameter Groups

Default: - Change: Unchangeable

Value Range:
-
Description

U0-30 Display of main frequency X

Address: 0x701E
Min.: - Unit: Hz
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-31 Display of auxiliary frequency Y

Address: 0x701F
Min.: - Unit: Hz
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-32 Check of any memory address

Address: 0x7020
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-33 Synchronous motor rotor position

Address: 0x7021
Min.: - Unit: °
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable

‑476‑
 Parameter Groups

Value Range:
-
Description

U0-34 Motor temperature

Address: 0x7022
Min.: - Unit: °C
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-35 Target torque

Address: 0x7023
Min.: - Unit: %
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-36 Resolver position

Address: 0x7024
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-37 Power factor angle

Address: 0x7025
Min.: - Unit: °
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:

‑477‑
Parameter Groups

-
Description

U0-38 ABZ position

Address: 0x7026
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-39 Target voltage upon V/f separation

Address: 0x7027
Min.: - Unit: V
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-40 Output voltage upon V/f separation

Address: 0x7028
Min.: - Unit: V
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-41 DI state display

Address: 0x7029
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-

‑478‑
 Parameter Groups

Description

U0-42 DO state display

Address: 0x702A
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-43 DI state display

Address: 0x702B
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-44 DO function state display

Address: 0x702C
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-45 Fault subcode

Address: 0x702D
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

‑479‑
Parameter Groups

U0-46 Inverter unit temperature

Address: 0x702E
Min.: - Unit: °C
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-47 PTC channel voltage before correction

Address: 0x702F
Min.: - Unit: V
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-48 PTC channel voltage after correction

Address: 0x7030
Min.: - Unit: V
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-49 Number of offset pulses of position lock

Address: 0x7031
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-50 Roll diameter

Address: 0x7032

‑480‑
 Parameter Groups

Min.: - Unit: mm
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-51 Tension (after taper setting)

Address: 0x7033
Min.: - Unit: N
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-58 Z signal counting

Address: 0x703A
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-59 Frequency reference (%)

Address: 0x703B
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-60 Running frequency (%)

Address: 0x703C
Min.: - Unit: -

‑481‑
Parameter Groups

Max.: - Data type: UInt16

Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-61 AC drive state

Address: 0x703D
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-62 Current fault code

Address: 0x703E
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-63 Running frequency (after droop)

Address: 0x703F
Min.: - Unit: Hz
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-64 Back EMF

Address: 0x7040
Min.: - Unit: V
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable

‑482‑
 Parameter Groups

Value Range:
-
Description

U0-65 Stator resistance auto-tuning upon startup

Address: 0x7041
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-66 Communication expansion card model

Address: 0x7042
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-67 Communication expansion card version

Address: 0x7043
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-68 AC drive state

Address: 0x7044
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-

‑483‑
Parameter Groups

Description

U0-69 Motor running frequency/0.01 Hz

Address: 0x7045
Min.: - Unit: Hz
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-70 Motor speed/RPM

Address: 0x7046
Min.: - Unit: RPM
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-71 Current display for communication card

Address: 0x7047
Min.: - Unit: A
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-72 Communication card error state

Address: 0x7048
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

‑484‑
 Parameter Groups

U0-73 Target torque before filter

Address: 0x7049
Min.: - Unit: %
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-74 Target torque after filter

Address: 0x704A
Min.: - Unit: %
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-75 Torque reference after acceleration/deceleration

Address: 0x704B
Min.: - Unit: %
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-76 Torque upper limit in the motoring state

Address: 0x704C
Min.: - Unit: %
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-77 Torque upper limit in the generating state

Address: 0x704D

‑485‑
Parameter Groups

Min.: - Unit: %
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-80 EtherCAT slave name

Address: 0x7050
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-81 EtherCAT slave alias

Address: 0x7051
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-82 EtherCAT ESM transmission fault code

Address: 0x7052
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-83 EtherCAT XML file version

Address: 0x7053
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16

‑486‑
 Parameter Groups

Default: - Change: Unchangeable

Value Range:
-
Description

U0-84 Times of EtherCAT synchronization loss

Address: 0x7054
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-85 Maximum error value and invalid frames of EtherCAT port 0 per unit time
Address: 0x7055
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-86 Maximum error value and invalid frames of EtherCAT port 1 per unit time
Address: 0x7056
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-87 Maximum forwarding error of EtherCAT port per unit time

Address: 0x7057
Min.: 0 Unit: -
Max.: 0 Data type: UInt16
Default: 0 Change: Unchangeable

‑487‑
Parameter Groups

Value Range:
0 to 0
Description

U0-88 Maximum EtherCAT data frame processing unit error per unit time
Address: 0x7058
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-89 Maximum link loss of EtherCAT port per unit time

Address: 0x7059
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-96 No-load current of asynchronous motor vector online observation

Address: 0x7060
Min.: - Unit: A
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U0-97 Mutual inductance of asynchronous motor vector online observation

Address: 0x7061
Min.: - Unit: mH
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:

‑488‑
 Parameter Groups

-
Description

2.29 U1 Tension Control Monitoring Parameters

U1-00 Linear speed

Address: 0x7100
Min.: - Unit: m/min
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U1-01 Current roll diameter

Address: 0x7101
Min.: - Unit: mm
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U1-02 Linear speed synchronous frequency

Address: 0x7102
Min.: - Unit: Hz
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U1-03 PID output frequency

Address: 0x7103
Min.: - Unit: Hz
Max.: - Data type: Int16

‑489‑
Parameter Groups

Default: - Change: Unchangeable

Value Range:
-
Description

U1-04 Current tension reference

Address: 0x7104
Min.: - Unit: N
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U1-05 Tension reference after taper setting

Address: 0x7105
Min.: - Unit: N
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U1-06 Torque reference in tension control

Address: 0x7106
Min.: - Unit: %
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U1-07 PID output torque

Address: 0x7107
Min.: - Unit: %
Max.: - Data type: Int16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:

‑490‑
 Parameter Groups

-
Description

U1-08 Tension control mode

Address: 0x7108
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U1-09 Tension PID setting

Address: 0x7109
Min.: - Unit: %
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U1-10 Tension PID feedback

Address: 0x710A
Min.: - Unit: %
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U1-11 Tension PID proportional gain

Address: 0x710B
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-

‑491‑
Parameter Groups

Description

U1-12 Tension PID integral time Ti

Address: 0x710C
Min.: - Unit: s
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U1-13 Tension PID differential time Td

Address: 0x710D
Min.: - Unit: s
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U1-14 Tension time

Address: 0x710E
Min.: - Unit: s
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

U1-15 Winding mode

Address: 0x710F
Min.: - Unit: -
Max.: - Data type: UInt16
Default: - Change: Unchangeable
Value Range:
-
Description

‑492‑
 Function Application

3 Function Application

3.1 Drive Configuration

3.1.1 Command Sources

3.1.1.1 Setting Command Sources

Commands are used to control operations of the AC drive, such as start, stop, forward
run, reverse run, and jogging. Command sources include the operating panel,
terminals, and communication. You can select the command source through F0-02.

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
Defines the source of control commands, including start/
stop, forward run, reverse run, and jog.
0: Operating panel
Control commands are input using the RUN, STOP/RES,
and MF.K keys on the operating panel. This mode is
suitable for initial commissioning.
Command 0: Operating panel 1: Terminal
F0-02 source 0 1: Terminal Control commands are input through DI terminals of the
selection 2: Communication AC drive. This mode is suitable for most applications.
2: Communication
Control commands are input through remote
communication. The AC drive must be equipped with a
communication card to communicate with the host
controller. This mode is suitable for remote control and
centralized control on multiple devices or systems.

3.1.1.2 Setting Commands Through the Operating Panel

Set F0-02 to 0 and use the and keys on the operating panel to
control the AC drive.

● Press to start the AC drive (the RUN indicator is on).

● When the AC drive is running, press to stop the AC drive (the RUN
indicator is off).

‑493‑
Function Application

3.1.1.3 Setting Commands Through Communication

You can set F0-02 to 2 to select communication as the command source for
controlling start/stop of the AC drive.
The AC drive can communicate with the host controller through six protocols:
Modbus, PROFIBUS-DP, CANopen, CANlink, PROFINET, and EtherCAT. Only one
communication protocol is supported at a time. To enable communication as the
command source, you must install a communication card. The AC drive supports six
optional communication cards. If Modbus, PROFIBUS-DP, CANopen, PROFINET, or
EtherCAT is used, set F0-28 (communication protocol selection) to select an
applicable serial communication protocol. The CANlink protocol is valid all the time.
When the AC drive is controlled through serial communication, the host controller
must send a write command to the AC drive. The following description takes the
Modbus protocol as an example to illustrate the process of giving commands through
communication.

Figure 3-1 Setting commands through communication

To make the AC drive run in reverse direction, the host controller sends the write
command 01 06 20 00 00 02 03 CB. The following table shows the meaning of each
byte in the command. The command is in hexadecimal format. For other
communication addresses and control commands, see "Appendix B: Communication
Data Address Definition and Modbus Protocol".

Command Meaning
01H (editable) AC drive address
06H Write command
2000H Control command communication address
02H (reverse run) Control command
03CBH CRC check

The following table shows the relationship between master commands and slave
responses:

‑494‑
 Function Application

Master Command Slave Response

ADDR 01H ADDR 01H
CMD 06H CMD 06H
Parameter address 20H Parameter address 20H
high-order bits high-order bits
Parameter address 00H Parameter address 00H
low-order bits low bits
Data content high- 00H Data content high 00H
order bits bits
Data content low- 02H Data content low 02H
order bits bits
CRC high-order bits 03H CRC high-order bits 03H
CRC low-order bits CBH CRC low-order bits CBH

3.1.1.4 Setting Commands Through Terminals

Set F0-02 to 1 to use terminals to start and stop the AC drive.
Set F4-11 to select a terminal control mode. The AC drive supports four terminal
control modes: two-wire mode 1, two-wire mode 2, three-wire mode 1, and three-wire
mode 2.

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

F4-11 Terminal control 0 0: Two-wire Four modes to
mode mode 1 control the AC
1: Two-wire drive operation
mode 2 by using
2: Three-wire external
mode 1 terminals
3: Three-wire
mode 2

You can use any one of multi-functional input terminals DI1 to DI10 as external input
terminals. That is, set parameters F4-00 to F4-09 to select functions for input
terminals DI1 to DI10. For details about function definitions, see "F4-00 (DI1) to F4-09
(DI10) Terminal Function" in "1.1 List of Function Parameters" on page 7.

Two-wire mode 1
Set F4-11 to 0. This is the most commonly used two-wire mode.
For example, DI1 is assigned with the forward run function, and DI2 is assigned with
the reverse run function. Connect the forward run switch to DI1 and the reverse run
switch to DI2.

‑495‑
Function Application

Para. Name Value Description

F4-11 Terminal control 0 Two-wire mode 1
mode
F4-00 DI1 function 1 Forward run (FWD)
selection
F4-01 DI2 function 2 Reverse run (REV)
selection

In this mode, When SW1 is closed and SW2 is open, the motor runs in the forward
direction. When SW1 is open and SW2 is closed, the motor runs in the reverse
direction. When SW1 and SW2 are both open or closed, the motor stops, as shown in
the following figure.

Figure 3-2 Wiring and parameter settings for two-wire mode 1

Figure 3-3 Timing diagram of two-wire mode 1 (normal condition)

‑496‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-4 Timing diagram of two-wire mode 1 (abnormal condition)

Two-wire mode 2
For example, DI1 is assigned with the command function, and DI2 is assigned with the
forward/reverse run switchover function. Use and set the parameters according to the
following table.

Para. Name Value Description

F4-11 Terminal control 1 Two-wire mode 2
mode
F4-00 DI1 function 1 Command
selection
F4-01 DI2 function 2 Forward/Reverse run
selection

In this mode, when SW1 is closed, the motor runs. When SW2 is open, the motor runs
in the forward direction. When SW2 is closed, the motor runs in the reverse direction.
When SW1 is open, the motor stops no matter whether SW2 is open. as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 3-5 Wiring and parameter settings for two-wire mode 2

‑497‑
Function Application

Figure 3-6 Timing diagram of two-wire mode 2

Three-Wire Mode 1
For example, DI3 is assigned with the three-wire operation control function, DI1 is
assigned with the forward run function, and DI2 is assigned with the reverse run
function. In this control mode, start and stop of the AC drive must be controlled by
using keys on the AC drive. Connect the start/stop key to DI3, the forward run key to
DI1, and the reverse run key to DI2. The parameters are set as below.
Para. Name Value Description
F4-11 Terminal control 2 Three-wire mode 1
mode
F4-00 DI1 function 1 Forward run (FWD)
selection
F4-01 DI2 function 2 Reverse run (REV)
selection
F4-02 DI3 function 3 Three-wire operation
selection control

SW3 is a normally-closed key and SW1 and SW2 are normally-open keys. When SW3 is
closed, the motor rotates in the forward direction if SW1 is pressed, and in the reverse
direction if SW2 is pressed. The motor stops immediately after SW3 is open. SW3 must
remain closed when the AC drive starts or is running. Commands from SW1 or SW2
take effect immediately after SW1 or SW2 is closed.

‑498‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-7 Wiring and parameter settings for three-wire mode 1

Figure 3-8 Timing diagram of three-wire mode 1

Three-Wire Mode 2
For example, DI3 is assigned with the three-wire operation control function, DI1 is
assigned with the command function, and DI2 is assigned with the forward/reverse
run switchover function. Connect the start/stop key to DI3, the run key to DI1, and the
forward/reverse run key to DI2. The parameters are set as below:
Para. Name Value Description
F4-11 Terminal control 3 Three-wire mode 2
mode
F4-00 DI1 function 1 Command
selection

‑499‑
Function Application

Para. Name Value Description

F4-01 DI2 function 2 Forward/Reverse run
selection
F4-02 DI3 function 3 Three-wire operation
selection control

When SW3 is closed and SW1 is pressed, the AC drive runs. If SW2 is open, the AC drive
runs in the forward direction. If SW2 is closed, the AC drive runs in the reverse
direction. The motor stops immediately after SW3 is open. SW3 must remain closed
when the AC drive starts or is running. Commands from SW1 take effect immediately
after SW1 is closed.

Figure 3-9 Wiring and parameter settings for three-wire mode 2

Figure 3-10 Timing diagram of three-wire mode 2

‑500‑
 Function Application

3.1.2 Frequency Sources

3.1.2.1 Frequency Reference Input Mode

The AC drive supports three frequency reference input modes: main frequency
reference, auxiliary frequency reference, and superposition of main and auxiliary
frequencies.

3.1.2.2 Selecting a Main Frequency Source

The AC drive supports ten sources of main frequency reference: digital setting (non-
retentive at power failure), digital setting (retentive at power failure), AI1, AI2, AI3,
pulse input, multi-reference, simple PLC, PID, and communication. You can set F0-03
to a value from 0 to 9 to select a source.

Figure 3-11 Selecting a main frequency source

‑501‑
Function Application

Para. Parameter Name Value Range Default

F0-03 Main frequency source X 0: Digital setting (preset frequency 0
selection (F0-08) that can be changed by
pressing UP/DOWN; non-retentive
upon power failure)
1: Digital setting (preset frequency
(F0-08) that can be changed by
pressing UP/DOWN; retentive at
power failure)
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse reference (DI5)
6: Multi-reference
7: Simple PLC
8: PID
9: Communication
10: Reserved

3.1.2.3 Setting the Main Frequency Through the Operating Panel

The main frequency can be set through the operating panel in two modes:
● F0-23 = 0 (non-retentive at power failure): When the AC drive is powered on again
after stop or power failure, the frequency value reverts to the preset value (F0-08).

F0-08 (preset frequency) can be changed by pressing the or key on

the operating panel or by using the UP/DOWN terminals. However, in this mode,
changes made to the frequency value will be cleared after the AC drive stops.
● F0-23 = 1 (retentive at power failure): When the AC drive is powered on again after
power failure, the frequency reverts to the value set before power failure. F0-08

(preset frequency) can be changed by pressing the or key on the

operating panel or by using the UP/DOWN terminals. In this mode, changes made
to the frequency value will be retained after the AC drive stops.
For example, assume that F0-08 is set to 40 Hz and then increased to 45 Hz by

using the key on the operating panel. If F0-23 is set to 0 (non-retentive), the
target frequency reverts to 40 Hz (value of F0-08) after the AC drive stops. If F0-23
is set to 1 (retentive), the target frequency is still 45 Hz after the AC drive stops.

‑502‑
 Function Application

Note
Distinguish this parameter from F0-23 (Retentive memory of digital setting frequency upon
stop). F0-23 determines whether the frequency setting is retained or cleared after the AC
drive stops. F0-23 is related only to the stop state of the AC drive, rather than power failure.

Related parameters:

Para. No. Function Default Value Range

0.00 Hz to max. frequency (F0-

F0-08 Preset frequency 50.00 Hz
10)

F0-10 Max. frequency 50.00 Hz 50.00 Hz to 600.00 Hz

Para. No. Function Default Value Range

Retentive memory of digital 0: Non-retentive

F0-23 0
setting frequency upon stop 1: Retentive

3.1.2.4 Setting the Main Frequency Through AIs

The main frequency can be set by using three analog input (AI) terminals: AI1, AI2, and
AI3. If F0-03 is set to 2, AI1 is used to set the main frequency. If F0-03 is set to 3, AI2 is
used to set the main frequency. If F0-03 is set to 4, AI3 is used to set the main
frequency.
As a frequency source, each AI terminal supports five types of AI curves. The AI curve
is used to define the relationship between the analog input voltage (or current) and
the corresponding settings.

‑503‑
Function Application

Procedure Para. Description

(Step 1) Set AI curves. F4-13 to F4-16 Curve 1 settings
Set the relationship between F4-18 to F4-21 Curve 2 settings
voltage/current input over
F4-23 to F4-27 Curve 3 settings
the AI and the preset values.
A6-00 to A6-07 Curve 4 settings
A6-08 to A6-15 Curve 5 settings
F4-34 Setting for the AI lower than the
minimum input (When an AI is used
as the main frequency source,
100.0% of the voltage/current input
corresponds to the maximum
frequency F0-10.)
(Step 2) Select AI curves for F4-33 AI curve selection. You can select
the AIs. any AI curve for an AI. Generally, use
Select AI curves and set the the default value (F4-33 is set to
filter time. 321), indicating curve 1 for AI1,
curve 2 for AI2, and curve 3 for AI3.
F4-17, F4-22, F4-27 Filter time of AI1 to AI3
(Step 3) Select an AI as the F0-03 (main Set F0-03 to 2.
frequency source. frequency source AI1 is used as the source.
Select an AI as the source of selection) Set F0-03 to 3.
the frequency reference AI2 is used as the source. In this
based on terminal case, voltage input or current input
characteristics. can be selected by using the jumper
cap J7 on the control board.
Set F0-03 to 4.
AI3 is used as the source. In this
case, voltage input or current input
can be selected by using the jumper
cap J5 on the control board.

Setting AI Curves
Five types of AI curves are available, among which curve 1, curve 2, and curve 3 are
two-point curves that are set through parameters F4-13 to F4-27. Curve 4 and curve 5
are four-point curves that are set through parameters of group A6.
In the following example, AI curve 1 is selected and set through F4-13 to F4-16.

‑504‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-12 Settings of AI curve 1

When an AI is used as the main frequency source, the voltage/current input value of
100% indicates the percentage of the maximum frequency (F0-10). When analog input
current is used as frequency reference, 1 mA current corresponds to 0.5 V voltage, and
0 mA to 20 mA current corresponds to 0 V to 10 V.
Curve 2 and curve 3 are set in the same way as curve 1. Parameters F4-18 to F4-21 are
used to set curve 2, and parameters F4-23 to F4-26 are used to set curve 3.

Figure 3-13 Settings of AI curve 2

Curve 4 and curve 5 provide functions similar to those of curves 1 to 3, except that
curves 1 to 3 are straight lines, whereas curve 4 and curve 5 are four-point curves
allowing more flexible relationship. The x axis of AI curves 4 and 5 represents the
analog input voltage (or current), and the y axis represents the set value

‑505‑
Function Application

corresponding to the analog input, that is, the percentage of the maximum frequency
(F0-10). Curve 4 or 5 includes four points: the minimum input point, inflexion point 1,
inflexion point 2, and the maximum input point. A6-00 corresponds to the x axis of the
minimum input, that is, the minimum analog input voltage or current.
When setting curve 4 and curve 5, ensure that the minimum input voltage, inflexion
point 1 voltage, inflexion point 2 voltage, and maximum input voltage are set in
ascending order. Parameters A6-00 to A6-07 are used to set curve 4, and parameters
A6-08 to A6-15 are used to set curve 5.

Figure 3-14 Settings of curve 4 and curve 5

Selecting AI curves for AI terminals

The curves of AI1 and AI2 are determined by the ones and tens positions of F4-33
respectively. The two Ais can use any of the five curves.
A longer AI filter time enhances the anti-interference capability but slows down
response to frequency adjustment. A shorter filter time enables faster response to
frequency adjustment but weakens the anti-interference capability. When analog
input is subject to interference, increase the filter time to stabilize the analog value
detected. However, a long filter time slows down the response to analog input
detection. Therefore, set the filter time appropriately based on the actual application
environment.

‑506‑
 Function Application

Setting an AI as the main frequency source

The control board provides three AI terminals: AI1 to AI3. AI1 provides voltage input of
–10 V to +10 V. AI2 and AI3 provide voltage input of –10 V to +10 V or current input of 0
mA to 20 mA. Jumpers J7 and J5 on the control board can be used to switch between
voltage input and current input for AI2 and AI3, respectively. For details, see chapter 3
Installation and Wiring. The following describes how to set each AI as the main
frequency source.
For example, assume that curve 1 is selected for AI1 (the ones position of F4-33 is set
to 1), AI1 voltage input is selected as the main frequency source, and the input
voltage range of 2 V to 10 V must correspond to frequency range of 10 Hz to 40 Hz. In
this case, set the parameters according to the following figure.

Figure 3-15 Parameter settings for AI1 voltage input as the main frequency source

AI2 can provide analog voltage input (–10 V to 10 V) or analog current input (0 mA to
20 mA).
When AI2 provides analog current input of 0 mA to 20 mA, the corresponding input
voltage ranges from 0V to 10 V. If the input current ranges from 4 mA to 20 mA,
current of 4 mA corresponds to voltage of 2 V, and current of 20 mA corresponds to
voltage of 10 V.
For example, assume that curve 2 is selected for AI2 (the tens position of F4-33 is set
to 2), AI2 current input is selected as the main frequency source, and the input current
range of 4 mA to 20 mA must correspond to frequency range of 0 Hz to 50 Hz. In this
case, set the parameters according to the following figure.

Figure 3-16 Parameter settings for AI2 current input as the main frequency source

‑507‑
Function Application

3.1.2.5 Setting the Main Frequency Through Multi-Reference

When F0-03 is set to 6, multi-reference is selected as the main frequency source. This
mode is applicable to scenarios where only several running frequencies are needed
instead of continuous frequency adjustment.
The AC drive supports up to 16 running frequencies, which can be set through
combinations of input signals from the four DIs. You can also use fewer than four DI
terminals as the multi-reference source. In this case, missing digits are populated with
0s.
The relationship between the reference quantity and DI quantity is as follows:
● Two references: one DI terminal K1
● Three to four references: two DI terminals K1 and K2
● Five to eight references: three DI terminals K1, K2, and K3
● Nine to sixteen references: four DI terminals K1, K2, K3, and K4
The required frequency references are set by using parameters of the FC group, as
listed in the following table.

‑508‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

FC-00 Multi-reference 0 0.00% -100.0% to A reference is a relative
+100.0% value expressed in
FC-01 Multi-reference 1 0.00% -100.0% to percentage related to the
+100.0% maximum frequency.
FC-02 Multi-reference 2 0.00% -100.0% to The positive and negative
+100.0% values determine the
FC-03 0.00% -100.0% to running direction of the
Multi-reference 3
+100.0% AC drive. A negative value
indicates reverse running.
FC-04 Multi-reference 4 0.00% -100.0% to
The default acceleration
+100.0%
time and deceleration
FC-05 Multi-reference 5 0.00% -100.0% to time are the values of F0-
+100.0% 17 and F0-18,
FC-06 Multi-reference 6 0.00% -100.0% to respectively.
+100.0%
FC-07 Multi-reference 7 0.00% -100.0% to
+100.0%
FC-08 Multi-reference 8 0.00% -100.0% to 100.0%
FC-09 Multi-reference 9 0.00% -100.0% to
+100.0%
FC-10 Multi-reference 0.00% -100.0% to
10 +100.0%
FC-11 Multi-reference 0.00% -100.0% to
11 +100.0%
FC-12 Multi-reference 0.00% -100.0% to
12 +100.0%
FC-13 Multi-reference 0.00% -100.0% to
13 +100.0%
FC-14 Multi-reference 0.00% -100.0% to
14 +100.0%
FC-15 Multi-reference 0.00% -100.0% to
15 +100.0%
FC-51 Multi-reference 0 0 0 to 6 0: FC-00
setting mode 1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI5)
5: PID
6: Set through preset
frequency (F0-08),
modified through
terminal UP/DOWN

When using multi-reference as the main frequency source, set the DI function to
values of 12 to 15 to select the input terminals.

‑509‑
Function Application

Para. Parameter Name Value Description

F4-01 DI2 function 12 Multi-reference
selection terminal 1
F4-03 DI4 function 13 Multi-reference
selection terminal 2
F4-06 DI7 function 14 Multi-reference
selection terminal 3
F4-07 DI8 function 15 Multi-reference
selection terminal 4

Example
In the following figure, terminals DI2, DI4, DI7, and DI8 are used as multi-reference
input terminals. They each contribute one bit to a 4-bit binary value, and different
combinations of the bits represent different frequencies. When values of (DI2, DI4,
DI7, DI8) are (0, 0, 1, 0), they constitute a value of 2. In this case, the frequency value
set through FC-02 is selected. (See Table 6-1 for details about frequency selection.)
Then, the target running frequency is calculated automatically by using the formula
(FC-02) x (F0-10). The following figure shows the frequency setting.

Figure 3-17 Frequency setting in multi-speed mode

The four multi-reference terminals can make up 16 state combinations,

corresponding to 16 frequency reference values, as listed in the following table.

Table 3–1 Multi-reference function description

K4 K3 K2 K1 Reference Corresponding
Parameter
OFF OFF OFF OFF Multi-reference FC-00 (FC-51 = 0)
0
OFF OFF OFF ON Multi-reference FC-01
1

‑510‑
 Function Application

K4 K3 K2 K1 Reference Corresponding
Parameter
OFF OFF ON OFF Multi-reference FC-02
2
OFF OFF ON ON Multi-reference FC-03
3
OFF ON OFF OFF Multi-reference FC-04
4
OFF ON OFF ON Multi-reference FC-05
5
OFF ON ON OFF Multi-reference FC-06
6
OFF ON ON ON Multi-reference FC-07
7
ON OFF OFF OFF Multi-reference FC-08
8
ON OFF OFF ON Multi-reference FC-09
9
ON OFF ON OFF Multi-reference FC-10
10
ON OFF ON ON Multi-reference FC-11
11
ON ON OFF OFF Multi-reference FC-12
12
ON ON OFF ON Multi-reference FC-13
13
ON ON ON OFF Multi-reference FC-14
14
ON ON ON ON Multi-reference FC-15
15

3.1.2.6 Setting the Main Frequency Through Simple PLC

Step 1: Set F0-03 to 7 to select simple PLC as the main frequency reference.
Step 2: Set parameters FC-00...FC-15 and FC-18...FC-49 to define the running time and
acceleration/deceleration time for each reference.

‑511‑
Function Application

Figure 3-18 Simple PLC as the main frequency source

Step 3: Set FC-16 to select the simple PLC operation mode.

Step 4: Set FC-17 to determine whether to retain the PLC operation stage and
operating frequency upon power failure or stop.

3.1.2.7 Setting the Main Frequency Through PID

PID control is a common process control method, which calculates the proportion,
integral, and derivative of the difference between feedback signals and target signals
of the controlled variable, and adjusts the output frequency of the AC drive
accordingly to create a closed-loop system to stabilize the controlled variable at the
target value. Generally, PID output can be used as the running frequency for on-site
closed-loop process control applications, such as closed-loop pressure control and
closed-loop tension control.
● Proportional gain Kp: When there is a deviation between the PID input and output,
the PID regulator adjusts the output to reduce the deviation of the controlled
variable. The deviation reduction speed depends on the proportionality coefficient
Kp. A greater Kp value means faster deviation reduction. However, a large Kp value
often causes oscillation, especially in the case of long hysteresis. A smaller Kp
value means lower probability of oscillation. However, a small Kp value leads to
slow adjustment. (Proportional gain of 100.0 means that the PID regulator adjusts
the output frequency reference at an amplitude of the maximum frequency when
the deviation between the PID feedback value and preset value is 100.0%.)
● Integral time Ti: Ti determines the intensity of integral adjustment by the PID
regulator. A shorter integral time means stronger integral adjustment by the PID

‑512‑
 Function Application

regulator. (The integral time refers to the amount of time that the integral
regulator spends on continuous adjustment at an amplitude of the maximum
frequency when the deviation between the PID feedback value and preset value is
100.0%.)
● Derivative time Td: Td determines the intensity of deviation change rate
adjustment by the PID regulator. A longer derivative time means stronger
deviation change rate adjustment by the PID regulator. (The derivative time refers
to the period during which the feedback value changes by 100.0%, and the
differential regulator adjusts the output frequency reference at an amplitude of
the maximum frequency.)

Example
Step 1: Set both F0-03 and F0-04 to 8 to use PID as the main and auxiliary frequency
input sources.
Step 2: Set FA-00 to select the source of PID target reference. When FA-00 is set to 0,
you need to set FA-01 (PID digital setting). The value 100% of this parameter
corresponds to the maximum PID feedback.

Figure 3-19 Block diagram of process PID control

Step 3: Set FA-02 to select the PID feedback source.

Step 4: Set FA-03 to select the PID action direction.
The following figure shows the logic of the PID control parameter setting.

‑513‑
Function Application

Figure 3-20 Block diagram of process PID control parameter settings

The upper limit, lower limit, and range of the output frequency are as follows when
PID is used as the main frequency reference (for example, PID alone or main and PID
together used as the frequency source).
When the reverse cut-off frequency is 0 or reverse running is inhibited (that is, in one
of the following three conditions):
(1) FA-08 = 0, F8-13 = 0; (2) FA-08 = 0, F8-13 = 1; (3) FA-08 ≠ 0, F8-13 = 1
Output upper limit = Frequency upper limit
Output lower limit = Frequency lower limit
Output range = Frequency lower limit to frequency upper limit (F0-14 to F0-12)
When the reverse cut-off frequency is not 0 and reverse running is allowed (FA-08 ≠ 0,
F8-13 = 0):
Output upper limit = Frequency upper limit Output lower limit = Frequency lower
limit: -Reverse cut-off frequency
Output range = -Reverse cut-off frequency to +frequency upper limit (-FA-08 to +F0-12)

‑514‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-21 PID parameter switchover

Figure 3-22 PID initial value function

3.1.2.8 Setting the Main Frequency Through Communication

The AC drive supports seven communication protocols, including Modbus, PROFIBUS
DP, CANopen, CANlink, PROFINET, EtherCAT, and EtherNet/IP.
● When PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET, EtherCAT, EtherNet/IP, or CANopen (CANopen
extension card) is selected, set FD-00 to 9 and set FD-01 to 3.
● When a CANlink card is used for CANopen communication, set FD-10 to 1. Use FD-
12 to set the CAN communication baud rate and FD-13 to set the CAN station
number.
● When a CANlink card is used for CANlink communication, set FD-10 to 2. Use FD-12
to set the CAN communication baud rate and FD-13 to set the CAN station
number.
● When Modbus is used for communication, set FD-00 (baud rate), FD-01 (data
format), and FD-02 (station number).

Example
Step 1: Set F0-03 to 9 to select communication as the main frequency source.

‑515‑
Function Application

Step 2: Use the host controller to send a write command to the AC drive.
The following description takes Modbus as an example to illustrate how to set the
main frequency through communication. For example, to set the frequency reference
to 10000 through communication, send the write command 01 06 10 00 27 10 97 36.
The following table shows the meaning of each byte in the command.

Byte Meaning
01H (editable) AC drive address
06H Write command
1000H Frequency reference address
2710H (10000 in decimal) Target frequency
9736H CRC check

Similarly, to set the frequency reference to –10000 through communication, send the
write command 01 06 10 00 D8 F0 D7 4E. In this command, D8F0 is the lowest four bits
of the hexadecimal number converted from –10000.

Figure 3-23 Parameter settings when the main frequency is set through communication

Table 3–2 Relationship between master commands and slave responses

Master Command Slave Response

ADDR 01H ADDR 01H
CMD 06H CMD 06H
Parameter address 10H Parameter address 10H
high bits high bits
Parameter address 00H Parameter address 00H
low bits low bits
Data content high 27H Data content high 27H
bits bits
Data content low 10H Data content low 10H
bits bits
CRC high bits 97H CRC high bits 97H
CRC low bits 36H CRC low bits 36H

‑516‑
 Function Application

The frequency reference range set through communication is –10000 to +10000 (in
decimal), corresponding to –100.00% (negative max. frequency) to +100.00% (positive
max. frequency). Suppose that F0-10 (maximum frequency) is set to 50 Hz. In this
case, if the frequency reference in write command is 2710H, which is 10000 in
decimal, the frequency reference that is written is 50 x 100% = 50 Hz.

3.1.2.9 Selecting an Auxiliary Frequency Source

The AC drive supports ten sources for the auxiliary frequency reference, including
digital setting (non-retentive upon power failure), digital setting (retentive at power
failure), AI1, AI2, AI3, pulse input, multi-reference, simple PLC, PID, and
communication. You can set F0-04 to a value ranging from 0 to 9 to select a source.
When the auxiliary frequency reference is used independently for frequency setting, it
is set in the same way as the main frequency reference. The following figure shows
the logic block diagram. When the auxiliary frequency reference is used together with
the main frequency reference for frequency setting, see "Setting the Frequency Based
on Main and Auxiliary Frequency References".

‑517‑
Function Application

Figure 3-24 Selecting an auxiliary frequency source

Para. Parameter Name Value Range Default

F0-04 Auxiliary frequency 0: Digital setting (preset frequency 0
source Y (F0-08) that can be changed by
pressing UP/DOWN; non-retentive
upon power failure)
1: Digital setting (preset frequency
(F0-08) that can be changed by
pressing UP/DOWN; retentive at
power failure)
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse reference (DI5)
6: Multi-reference
7: Simple PLC
8: PID
9: Communication
10: Reserved

‑518‑
 Function Application

3.1.2.10 Selecting Frequency Superposition Input Mode

The main and auxiliary frequency references can be used together for frequency
setting. You can use F0-07 to set the relationship between the target frequency and
the main and auxiliary frequency references. The following four kinds of relationship
are available.

Table 3–3 Relationship between the target frequency and the main and auxiliary frequency
references
No. Relationship Between the Target Frequency and the Main and Auxiliary Frequency References

1 Main frequency reference The main frequency reference is used as the target frequency reference.

The auxiliary frequency reference is used as the target frequency

2 Auxiliary frequency reference
reference.
Four calculation methods are supported: Main frequency + Auxiliary
Calculation of main and auxiliary
3 frequency, Main frequency - Auxiliary frequency, Max. (main frequency,
frequencies
auxiliary frequency), and Min. (main frequency, auxiliary frequency).

The final frequency reference is selected from or switched among the

4 Frequency switchover preceding three references through DI terminal. In this mode, assign DI
function 18 (Frequency source switchover) to the DI terminal.

‑519‑
Function Application

Figure 3-25 Superposition of main and auxiliary frequency references

‑520‑
 Function Application

Table 3–4 Superposition of main and auxiliary frequency references

Calculation Main Frequency Auxiliary Frequency

Description
Method Source Selection Source Selection
AI, pulse reference,
multi-reference, 1. UP/DOWN adjustment is invalid.
Digital setting
simple PLC, or 2. Output range: F0-08 + Auxiliary frequency reference
communication
AI, pulse reference,
multi-reference, 1. UP/DOWN adjustment is valid.
Digital setting
simple PLC, or 2. Output range: Main frequency reference + UP/DOWN
communication
1. UP/DOWN adjustment is invalid.
Digital setting PID 2. Digital setting is 0.
3. Output range: Auxiliary frequency reference
+
1. UP/DOWN adjustment is invalid.
PID Digital setting 2. Digital setting is 0.
Output range: Main frequency reference

1. UP/DOWN adjustment is invalid.

AI, multi-reference,
2. The frequency lower limit is invalid.
simple PLC, or PID
3. Output range: Main frequency reference + Auxiliary
communication
frequency reference

AI, pulse reference,

multi-reference, 1. UP/DOWN adjustment is invalid.
PID
simple PLC, or 2. Output: Auxiliary frequency reference
communication
1. UP/DOWN adjustment is valid.
2. Output range: Main frequency reference + UP/DOWN
-/x/Max/Min Digital setting Digital setting
adjustment, same as digital setting in single frequency
source mode

‑521‑
Function Application

Calculation Main Frequency Auxiliary Frequency

Description
Method Source Selection Source Selection
1. When digital setting is used, UP/DOWN adjustment is
invalid, and the initial frequency value is F0-08.
2. PID is invalid if used.
3. Simple PLC is invalid if used.
Any Any
4. When digital setting is used for both main and
auxiliary frequency references, the main frequency
reference is valid, the auxiliary reference is invalid, and
UP/DOWN adjustment is valid.

1. UP/DOWN adjustment is valid.

2. Output: Main frequency value + UP/DOWN
Single adjustment
frequency 3. UP/DOWN adjustment range: (Frequency upper limit
Digital setting -
source - Main frequency) to (Frequency lower limit - Main
frequency)
4. UP/DOWN adjustment cannot reverse the frequency
direction.
1. The frequency lower limit is invalid.
2. PID output range: PID output lower limit to
frequency upper limit
PID -
3. When reverse running is inhibited and the PID output
lower limit is set to a negative value, 0 is the PID output
lower limit.
Other sources None

Para. No. Function Default Value Range

0: Relative to max. frequency

Range selection of auxiliary frequency
F0-05 0 1: Relative to main frequency
source Y upon superposition
reference
Range value of auxiliary frequency reference
F0-06 100% 0% to 150%
Y upon superposition

These two parameters are used to limit the range of the auxiliary frequency and
active only when “Main frequency + Auxiliary frequency” applies.

Para. No. Function Default Value Range

F0-27 Main frequency coefficient 10.00% 0.00% to 100.00%

Auxiliary frequency
F0-28 10.00% 0.00% to 100.00%
coefficient

These two parameters are used only in calculation of Main frequency x Auxiliary
frequency. Assume that the main frequency is Frq1, and the auxiliary frequency is
Frq2, the target frequency is calculated as follows:
Frq = (Frq1 x F0-27) x (Frq2 x F0-28)

‑522‑
 Function Application

3.1.2.11 Setting the Frequency Reference Limits

Frequency upper limit is used to control the maximum frequency if the motor is not
allowed to run at a frequency above a specific value.
Frequency lower limit is used to control the minimum frequency if the motor is not
allowed to run at a frequency below a specific value.
Maximum frequency is used to control the Max. output frequency.
Source of frequency reference upper limit is used to select the source of the
frequency upper limit.
Frequency upper limit offset is used to set the offset of the frequency upper limit. This
parameter takes effect only when the source of the frequency upper limit is AI.

Para. No. Function Default Value Range

F0-10 Max. frequency 50.00 Hz 50.00 Hz to 600.00 Hz

0: F0-12 (Frequency upper limit)
1: AI1
2: AI2
Source of frequency
F0-11 0 3: AI3
upper limit
4: Pulse reference (DI5)
5: Communication
6: Multi-reference
Frequency lower limit (F0-14) to max. frequency
F0-12 Frequency upper limit 50.00 Hz
(F0-10)

Frequency upper limit

F0-13 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz to max. frequency (F0-10)
offset
F0-14 Frequency lower limit 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz to frequency upper limit (F0-12)

3.1.2.12 SOperation at Frequencies lower Than the Lower Limit

Frequency lower limit indicates the minimum frequency at which the motor is
allowed to run.
If the frequency of the AC drive is set to a value below the frequency lower limit (F0-
14), set F8-14 to select the action of the AC drive. Four actions are supported: run at
frequency lower limit, stop, run at zero speed, and coast to stop.
● 0: Frequency lower limit
If the running frequency is below the frequency lower limit, the AC drive runs at
the frequency lower limit.

● 1: Stop
If the running frequency is below the frequency lower limit, the AC drive stops.

● 2: Run at zero speed

If the running frequency is below the frequency lower limit, the AC drive runs at
zero speed.

‑523‑
Function Application

● 3: Coast to stop
If the running frequency is below the frequency lower limit, the AC drive coasts to
stop.

Para. No. Function Default Value Range Description

0: Run at frequency lower limit

Action when frequency 1: Stop
F8-14 0 -
is below the lower limit 2: Run at zero speed
3: Coast to stop

3.1.2.13 Setting the Main Frequency Through Pulse Reference

When F0-03 is set to 5, pulse reference is selected as the main frequency source.
When the main frequency source is set to pulse reference (DI5), the pulse reference
must be obtained from multi-functional input terminal DI5. The pulse reference signal
specifications are: voltage of 9 V to 30 V and frequency of 0 Hz to 100 KHz.
Procedure:
Step 1: Set F0-03 to 5 to select "pulse reference" as the main frequency source. In this
mode, the pulse reference must be obtained from multi-functional input terminal DI5.
Step 2: Set F4-04 to 30 to assign DI5 with the "pulse frequency input" function.
Step 3: Set F0-07 to 00 to select "main frequency reference" as the frequency
reference superposition.
Step 4: Set the pulse reference curve. Set F4-28 to F4-31 to determine the curve
relationship between the pulse frequency input from DI5 and the corresponding
percentage. The relationship is shown as a two-point straight line.

Figure 3-26 Parameter settings for pulse input as the main frequency source

Step 5: Set F4-32 to select the filter time of pulse frequency.

Set this parameter to balance the response speed and the anti-interference
capability. If quick response is required, reduce the parameter value. If the onsite
interference is high, increase the parameter value.

‑524‑
 Function Application

A large value of this parameter enhances the anti-interference capability, but slows
down the response to adjustments. A small value of this parameter speeds up the
response to adjustments, but weakens the anti-interference capability. When onsite
pulse signal is subject to interference, increase the filter time to stabilize the detected
pulse signals. However, long filter time slows down the response to pulse signal
detection. Therefore, set the filter time based on the actual application environment.

3.1.3 Start/Stop Mode

3.1.3.1 Startup Modes

The AC drive supports three start modes: direct start, flying start, and pre-excitation
start. Set F6-00 to select a start mode for the AC drive.

Direct Start
When F6-00 is set to 0, the AC drive uses the direct start mode. This mode is
applicable to most loads.

Figure 3-27 Timing diagram of direct start

Start with the startup frequency is applicable to lifting loads, such as elevators and
cranes.

Figure 3-28 Timing diagram of start with the startup frequency

‑525‑
Function Application

Start with DC braking is applicable to scenarios where the motor may rotate upon
start of the AC drive.
If the DC braking time is set to 0, the AC drive starts running at the startup frequency.
If the DC braking start time is not 0, the AC drive performs DC braking first and then
starts to run at the startup frequency. This mode is applicable to most low-inertia
loads and scenarios where the motor may rotate upon start of the AC drive.

Figure 3-29 Timing diagram of start with DC braking

Start after DC braking is suitable for driving loads such as elevators and lifting
machines. Start after reaching startup frequency hold time is suitable for driving
equipment that requires a starting torque, for example, cement mixers. The following
figure shows the frequency curve during startup.

‑526‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-30 Direct start

Flying start
When F6-00 is set to 1, the AC drive uses the flying start mode. In this mode, the AC
drive first determines the motor rotation speed and direction, and then starts at the
detected frequency of the motor. This mode is applicable to high-inertia mechanical
loads.
If the motor is still rotating due to inertia upon restart of the AC drive, this start mode
can prevent overcurrent upon startup. The following figure shows the frequency curve
during startup.

‑527‑
Function Application

Figure 3-31 Flying start

Pre-excitation start
When F6-00 is set to 2, the AC drive uses the pre-excitation start mode. This mode is
applicable only to the SVC and FVC control modes of asynchronous motors. In this
mode, the motor is pre-excited before AC drive startup, which speeds up response of
the motor and reduces the startup current. The timing diagram of this mode is the
same as that of start after DC braking. It is recommended that the pre-excitation
current be set to 1.5 times the no-load current (F1-10), but in no case exceeds the
rated motor current. If the pre-excitation current equals the no-load current (F1-10),
the optimal pre-excitation time is 3 times the rotor time constant. The rotor time
constant is calculated using the following formula: Mutual inductance (F1-09) +
Leakage inductance (F1-08)/Rotor resistance (F1-07). The unit of mutual inductance
and leakage inductance is L, and the unit of resistance is Ω. If the pre-excitation
current is greater than the no-load current, the pre-excitation time can be reduced
proportionally. If the pre-excitation current is less than the no-load current, the pre-
excitation time can be increased proportionally.

3.1.3.2 Stop Modes

The AC drive supports two stop modes: decelerate to stop and coast to stop. You can
set F6-10 to select a stop mode as needed.

‑528‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

F6-10 Stop mode 0 0: Decelerate 0: Decelerate to stop
to stop After the stop command takes
1: Coast to effect, the AC drive decreases the
stop output frequency to 0 based on
the deceleration time and stops.
1: Coast to stop
After the stop command takes
effect, the AC drive immediately
stops output. Then, the motor
coasts to stop following
mechanical inertia.
F6-11 Start frequency 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz to F0- In a decelerate-to-stop process,
of DC braking at 10 (Maximum the AC drive starts DC braking
stop frequency) when the running frequency drops
to this frequency.
F6-12 Waiting time of 0.0s 0.0s to 100.0s When the running frequency
DC braking at decreases to the start frequency of
stop DC braking at stop, the AC drive
stops output for a period of time
and then starts DC braking. Such
delay is intended to prevent faults
such as overcurrent from occurring
when DC braking starts at a high
speed.
F6-13 DC braking 0% 0% to 150% A greater DC braking current at
current at stop stop indicates a greater braking
force. 100% corresponds to the
rated motor current. The upper
limit of the DC braking current is
80% the rated current of the AC
drive by default.
The maximum upper limit can be
set to 135% of the rated current of
the AC drive by F6-35.
F6-14 DC braking time 0.0s 0.0s to 100.0s This parameter specifies the hold
at stop time of DC braking. If this
parameter is set to 0, DC braking is
disabled.

‑529‑
Function Application

Figure 3-32 Timing diagram of DC braking at stop

Decelerate to stop
When F6-10 is set to 0, the AC drive decelerates to stop. After the stop command takes
effect, the AC drive decreases the output frequency to 0 based on the deceleration
time and stops.

Figure 3-33 Timing diagram of decelerating to stop

Coast to stop

Figure 3-34 Timing diagram of coasting to stop

‑530‑
 Function Application

3.1.3.3 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Setting

Acceleration time is the time that an AC drive needs to accelerate from zero frequency
to the acceleration/deceleration time base frequency (F0-25). Deceleration time is the
time that an AC drive needs to decelerate from the acceleration/deceleration time
base frequency (F0-25) to zero frequency.

Figure 3-35 Acceleration/deceleration time

The AC drive provides four groups of acceleration/deceleration time, which can be

selected by using DI terminal functions 16 and 17. The four groups of time is set
through the following parameters:
Group 1: F0-17 and F0-18
Group 2: F8-03 and F8-04
Group 3: F8-05 and F8-06
Group 4: F8-07 and F8-08

Example
In the following example, DI7 and DI8 are used to switch among different groups of
acceleration/deceleration time.
1. Set F4-06 and F4-07 to use DI7 and DI8 for switchover.
Para. No. Name Value Description

Acceleration/Deceleration time selection terminal

F4-06 DI7 function 16
1
Acceleration/Deceleration time selection terminal
F4-07 DI8 function 17
2

2. Set four groups of acceleration/deceleration time parameters to set the

acceleration/deceleration time.

‑531‑
Function Application

DI8 State DI7 State Acceleration/Deceleration Time Selection

Group 1: F0-17 and F0-18

OFF OFF
(Acceleration time 1)

Group 2: F8-03 and F8-04

OFF ON
(Acceleration time 2. For details, see F0-17 and F0-18.)

Group 3: F8-05, F8-06

ON OFF
(Acceleration time 3. For details, see F0-17 and F0-18.)

Group 4: F8-07 and F8-08

ON ON
(Acceleration time 4. For details, see F0-17 and F0-18.)

3. Set F0-19 to select the acceleration/deceleration time unit. When the value of F0–19
changes, the decimal places in the four groups of acceleration/deceleration time
change, and the corresponding acceleration/deceleration time also changes.
4. Set F6-07 (Acceleration/Deceleration mode). F6–07is used to set the frequency
change mode during start/stop of the AC drive.
● 0: The output frequency increases or decreases linearly.
● 1: The output frequency increases or decreases following the S-curve in real
time when the target frequency changes. Details must be set through F6-08 and
F6-09. This mode is applicable to scenarios requiring supreme riding comfort
and real-time response.
5. Set F6-08 and F6-09 to select the time proportion of S-curve at start and time
proportion of S-curve at end. The values of F6-08 and F6-09 must meet the
following condition: F6-08 + F6-09 ≤ 100.0%

3.2 Motor Configuration

3.2.1 Asynchronous Motor Auto-Tuning

Motor auto-tuning is an operation that the AC drive obtains motor parameters.
Motor auto-tuning includes static auto-tuning on partial parameters of the
asynchronous motor, dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters of the asynchronous
motor, and with-load auto-tuning on all parameters of the asynchronous motor.

‑532‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

F1-37 Auto-tuning 0 0: No auto-tuning Auto-tuning is not performed.

selection 1: Static auto-tuning on partial This method is applicable to scenarios where the
parameters of the asynchronous motor cannot be disconnected from the load and
motor (Rs, Rr, and L0) dynamic auto-tuning is not allowed.
Auto-tuning is performed on partial motor
parameters including F1‑06 (Asynchronous motor
stator resistance), F1‑07 (Asynchronous motor
rotor resistance), and F1‑08 (Asynchronous motor
leakage inductance). For other parameters, use
their default values.
2: Dynamic auto-tuning of the This method is applicable to scenarios with high-
asynchronous motor (auto-tuning speed revolution. Auto-tuning with no load, light
with load is supported) load (below 50% load), or pure inertia load is
supported.
Auto-tuning is performed on all the motor
parameters, including F1‑06 (Asynchronous motor
stator resistance), F1‑07 (Asynchronous motor
rotor resistance), F1‑08 (Asynchronous motor
leakage inductance), F1‑09 (Asynchronous motor
mutual inductance), F1‑10 (Asynchronous motor
no-load current), and F1‑30 (Encoder phase
sequence).

Contin Continued Contin 3: Static auto-tuning on all This method is applicable to scenarios where the
ued ued parameters of the asynchronous motor cannot be disconnected from the load and
motor (Rs, Rr, L0, Lm, and IO) dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters is not
allowed.
Auto-tuning is performed on all the motor
parameters, including F1‑06 (Asynchronous motor
stator resistance), F1‑07 (Asynchronous motor
rotor resistance), F1‑08 (Asynchronous motor
leakage inductance), F1‑09 (Asynchronous motor
mutual inductance), and F1‑10 (Asynchronous
motor no-load current).

Contin Continued Contin 4: Dynamic auto-tuning 2 of the This method is applicable to scenarios with high-
ued ued asynchronous motor (inertia auto- speed revolution. Auto-tuning with no load, light
tuning only in FVC) load (below 80% load), or pure inertia load is
supported.
Auto-tuning is performed on all the motor
parameters, including F1‑06 (Asynchronous motor
stator resistance), F1‑07 (Asynchronous motor
rotor resistance), F1‑08 (Asynchronous motor
leakage inductance), F1‑09 (Asynchronous motor
mutual inductance), F1‑10 (Asynchronous motor
no-load current), F1‑30 (Encoder phase
sequence), and F2-35 (System inertia).

‑533‑
Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

Contin Continued Contin 5: Dynamic auto-tuning 3 of the This method is applicable to scenarios with high-
ued ued asynchronous motor (Auto-tuning speed revolution. Auto-tuning with no load, light
on mutual inductance curve load (below 10% load), or pure inertia load is
requires no load, light load, or pure supported.
inertia load; V/f, SVC, and FVC Auto-tuning is performed on all the motor
modes are supported) parameters, including F1‑06 (Asynchronous motor
stator resistance), F1‑07 (Asynchronous motor
rotor resistance), F1‑08 (Asynchronous motor
leakage inductance), F1‑09 (Asynchronous motor
mutual inductance), F1‑10 (Asynchronous motor
no-load current), and F1‑30 (Encoder phase
sequence).

Contin Continued Contin 11: Static auto-tuning on partial It is applicable to auto-tuning of the synchronous
ued ued parameters of the synchronous motor with load and to scenarios where the
motor (excluding back EMF) motor cannot be disconnected from the load.
Auto-tuning is performed on the following motor
parameters in the FVC mode: F1‑06 (Motor stator
resistance), F1-17 (Synchronous motor d-axis
inductance), F1-18 (Synchronous motor q-axis
inductance), F1-20 (Filter time constant), F1-21
(Oscillation suppression gain), F1-30 (Encoder
phase sequence), and F1-31 (Encoder zero
position angle). Auto-tuning is performed on the
following motor parameters in other modes:
F1‑06 (Motor stator resistance), F1-17
(Synchronous motor d-axis inductance), F1-18
(Synchronous motor q-axis inductance), F1-20
(Filter time constant), and F1-21 (Oscillation
suppression gain).

‑534‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

Contin Continued Contin 12: No-load dynamic auto-tuning It is applicable to scenarios where the motor can
ued ued on all parameters of the be disconnected from the load.
synchronous motor Auto-tuning is performed on the following motor
parameters in the FVC mode: F1‑06 (Motor stator
resistance), F1-17 (Synchronous motor d-axis
inductance), F1-18 (Synchronous motor q-axis
inductance), F1-19 (Synchronous motor back
EMF), F1-20 (Filter time constant), F1-21
(Oscillation suppression gain), F1-30 (Encoder
phase sequence), and F1-31 (Encoder zero
position angle). Auto-tuning is performed on the
following motor parameters in other modes:
F1‑06 (Motor stator resistance), F1-17
(Synchronous motor d-axis inductance), F1-18
(Synchronous motor q-axis inductance), F1-19
(Synchronous motor back EMF), F1-20 (Filter time
constant), and F1-21 (Oscillation suppression
gain).

13: Static auto-tuning on all This method is applicable to scenarios where the
parameters of the synchronous motor cannot be disconnected from the load and
motor (excluding the encoder dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters is not
installation angle) allowed.
Auto-tuning is performed on the motor
parameters including F1‑06 (Motor stator
resistance), F1-17 (Synchronous motor d-axis
inductance), F1-18 (Synchronous motor q-axis
inductance), F1-20 (Filter time constant), and F1-
21 (Oscillation suppression gain).

14: Synchronous motor inertia This method is applicable to scenarios that

auto-tuning (only in FVC) requires fast dynamic response and that the load
must be connected during auto-tuning.
Auto-tuning is performed on the motor
parameters including F2-35 (System inertia) and
F2-36 (Motor and load inertia).

The following table compares the effects of these motor auto-tuning methods.

Table 3–5 Motor auto-tuning methods

Auto-tuning Method Applicable Scenario Effect

Static auto-tuning on partial The motor cannot be disconnected from the load and Good
parameters of the asynchronous motor dynamic auto-tuning is not allowed.
(Rs, Rr, and L0)

Dynamic auto-tuning of the The system requires high-speed revolution. Best

asynchronous motor (auto-tuning with
load is supported)

‑535‑
Function Application

Auto-tuning Method Applicable Scenario Effect

Static auto-tuning on all parameters of The motor cannot be disconnected from the load and Better
the asynchronous motor (Rs, Rr, L0, dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters is not allowed.
Lm, and IO)

Dynamic auto-tuning 2 of the The motor and the system require high-speed -
asynchronous motor (inertia auto- revolution. Auto-tuning with no load, light load (below
tuning only in FVC) 80% load), or pure inertia load is supported.

Dynamic auto-tuning 3 of the The motor and the system require high-speed -
asynchronous motor (Auto-tuning on revolution. Auto-tuning with no load, light load (below
mutual inductance curve requires no 10% load), or pure inertia load is supported.
load, light load, or pure inertia load; V/
f, SVC, and FVC modes are supported)

Static auto-tuning on partial It is applicable to auto-tuning of the synchronous -

parameters of the synchronous motor motor with load and to scenarios where the motor
(excluding back EMF) cannot be disconnected from the load.

No-load dynamic auto-tuning on all The motor can be disconnected from the load. -
parameters of synchronous motor

Static auto-tuning on all parameters of The motor cannot be disconnected from the load and -
the synchronous motor (excluding the dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters is not allowed.
encoder installation angle)

Synchronous motor inertia auto-tuning This method is applicable to scenarios that requires -
(only in FVC) fast dynamic response and that the load must be
connected during auto-tuning.

In addition to the above 10 auto-tuning methods, you can also manually enter motor
parameters.
You can perform motor auto-tuning either through commands from the operating
panel or communication commands. You can set F0-02 to select commands.
For the Modbus, PROFIBUS, and CANopen protocols, the PKW parameters support
auto-tuning but the PZD parameters do not. To use communication control for motor
auto-tuning, set F1-37 or A2-37 to select an auto-tuning mode, and then enter the
command.

Example
In the following example, parameters of motor 1 (F0-24 is set to 0, indicating that
motor parameter group 1 is selected) are used to illustrate motor auto-tuning
methods. For auto-tuning on motor 2, set F0-24 to 1 (motor parameter group 2) and
follow the steps of auto-tuning on motor 1. For parameter settings, see settings of the
A2 group parameters.
● Procedure of static auto-tuning on partial parameters of the asynchronous motor

‑536‑
 Function Application

Table 3–6 Procedure of static auto-tuning on partial parameters of the asynchronous motor

Step Description
1 Power on the AC drive, and then set F0-02 to 0 to select the operating
panel as the command source.
2 Enter motor parameters (F1-00 to F1-05) according to its nameplate.
3 Set F1-37 to 1 (static auto-tuning on partial parameters of the
asynchronous motor) and press ENTER on the operating panel. The
display on the panel is as follows.

4 Press the RUN key on the operating panel for more than three
seconds to start motor auto-tuning. The RUN indicator is steady on.
The TUNE/TC indicator blinks. The motor does not rotate but the AC
drive energizes the motor.
When the preceding display disappears and the operating panel
displays parameters, auto-tuning is completed.
Parameters F1-06 to F1-08 are obtained.
● Procedure of dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters of the asynchronous motor
When the AC drive is connected to a motor with constant output or used in a
scenario requiring high precision, use dynamic complete auto-tuning after
disconnecting the motor from the load. This can achieve the best auto-tuning
effect.
Table 3–7 Procedure of dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters of the asynchronous motor

Step Description
1 Power on the AC drive, and then set F0-02 to 0 to select the operating
panel as the command source.
2 Enter motor parameters (F1-00 to F1-05) according to its nameplate.
3 If F0-01 is set to 1 (feedback vector control, FVC), enter encoder
parameters (F1-27, F1-28, and F1-30).
4 Set F1-37 to 2 (dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters of the
asynchronous motor) and press ENTER on the operating panel. The
display on the panel is as follows.

5 Press the RUN key on the operating panel for more than three
seconds to start motor auto-tuning. The RUN indicator is steady on.
The TUNE/TC indicator blinks. The AC drive drives the motor to
accelerate/decelerate and run in the forward/reverse direction, and
performs auto-tuning.
When the preceding display disappears and the operating panel
displays parameters, auto-tuning is completed.
Parameters F1-06 to F1-10 and F1-30 are obtained.
● With-load auto-tuning on all parameters of the asynchronous motor

‑537‑
Function Application

Use with-load auto-tuning on all parameters of the asynchronous motor when the
motor cannot be disconnected from the load.
Table 3–8 Procedure of static auto-tuning on all parameters of the asynchronous motor

Step Description
1 Power on the AC drive, and then set F0-02 to 0 to select the operating
panel as the command source.
2 Enter motor parameters (F1-00 to F1-05) according to its nameplate.
3 Set F1-37 to 3 (static auto-tuning on all parameters of the
asynchronous motor) and press ENTER on the operating panel. The
display on the panel is as follows.

4 Press the RUN key on the operating panel for more than three
seconds to start motor auto-tuning. The RUN indicator is steady on.
The TUNE/TC indicator blinks. The motor does not rotate but the AC
drive energizes the motor.
When the preceding display disappears and the operating panel
displays parameters, auto-tuning is completed.
Parameters F1-06 to F1-10 are obtained.

3.2.2 Synchronous Motor Auto-Tuning

Motor auto-tuning is used to obtain motor parameters.
Synchronous motor auto-tuning includes static auto-tuning on partial parameters of
synchronous motor (back EMF is not auto-tuned), no-load dynamic auto-tuning on all
parameters of synchronous motor, and static auto-tuning on all parameters of
synchronous motor.

‑538‑
 Function Application

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
0: No auto-tuning Motor auto-tuning is disabled.

SVC and PMVVC: Auto-tuning is performed on partial motor

parameters, including stator resistance and DQ shaft
inductance. The motor does not rotate during auto-tuning.
11: Static auto-tuning on
FVC: Auto-tuning is performed on partial motor
partial parameters of
parameters, including stator resistance, DQ shaft
synchronous motor (back
inductance, and encoder zero position angle. If a resolver
EMF is not auto-tuned)
or 23-bit encoder is used, the motor does not rotate during
auto-tuning. If an ABZ encoder is used, the motor rotates
for a short period of time during auto-tuning.

The motor must be disconnected from load during auto-

Auto-tuning tuning.
F1-37 0
selection SVC and PMVVC: Auto-tuning is performed on all motor
parameters, including stator resistance, DQ shaft
12: No-load dynamic auto-
inductance, and back EMF. The motor rotates during auto-
tuning on all parameters
tuning.
of synchronous motor
FVC: Auto-tuning is performed on all motor parameters,
including stator resistance, DQ shaft inductance, back
EMF, encoder zero position angle, and encoder phase
sequence. The motor rotates during auto-tuning.

SVC, PMVVC and FVC: Auto-tuning is performed on partial

13: Static auto-tuning on
motor parameters, including stator resistance and DQ
all parameters of
shaft inductance. The motor does not rotate during auto-
synchronous motor
tuning.

The following table compares the effects of these motor auto-tuning methods.

Table 3–9 Motor auto-tuning methods

Auto-tuning Method Applicable Scenario Effect

The motor cannot be disconnected from load and dynamic
Static auto-tuning on partial auto-tuning is not allowed.
Better
parameters of synchronous motor After auto-tuning, manually set the back EMF (SVC and
PMVVC) and encoder phase sequence.

No-load dynamic auto-tuning on all This method is applicable to scenarios where the motor can
Best
parameters of synchronous motor be easily disconnected from the application system.

The motor cannot be disconnected from load and motor

rotation is not allowed.
Static auto-tuning on all parameters of
After auto-tuning, manually set the back EMF (SVC and Good
synchronous motor
PMVVC), encoder zero position angle (FVC), and encoder
phase sequence (FVC).

In addition to the preceding three auto-tuning methods, you can also input motor
parameters manually.
In addition to using the LED panel as the command source for motor auto-tuning, you
can also use an external LCD panel (set F0-02 to 0), DI terminals (set F0-02 to 1) or

‑539‑
Function Application

communication control (set F0-02 to 2) as the command source for motor auto-
tuning.
For the Modbus, PROFIBUS, and CANopen protocols, the PKW parameters support
auto-tuning but the PZD parameters do not. To use communication control for motor
auto-tuning, set F1-37 to select an auto-tuning mode, and then enter the command.

Example
● Procedure of static auto-tuning on partial parameters of synchronous motor
Table 3–10 Procedure of static auto-tuning on partial parameters of synchronous motor

Step Description

1 Power on the AC drive, and then set F0-02 to 0 to select the operating panel as command source.

2 Enter motor parameters (F1-00 to F1-05) according to its nameplate.

Set F1-37 to 11 (static auto-tuning on partial parameters of synchronous motor) and press "ENTER" on the
operating panel. The display on the panel is:
3

Press and hold the RUN key for longer than 3s. The motor auto-tuning starts. The RUN indicator is steady
on, the TUNE/TC indicator blinks, and the AC drive energizes the motor.
When the preceding display disappears and the operating panel returns to normal parameter display
4
state, auto-tuning is completed.
Parameters F1-06, F1-17, F1-18, and F1-31 (FVC) are obtained.
Manually set F1-19 (SVC and PMVVC) and F1-30 (FVC).

● Procedure of no-load dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters of synchronous

motor
When the AC drive is connected to a motor with constant output or used in a
scenario requiring high precision, use dynamic complete auto-tuning after
separating the motor from the load, to achieve the best auto-tuning effect.
Table 3–11 Procedure of dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters of synchronous motor

Step Description

1 Power on the AC drive, and then set F0-02 to 0 to select the operating panel as command source.

2 Enter motor parameters (F1-00 to F1-05) according to its nameplate.

3 If F0-01 is set to 1 (feedback vector control, FVC), enter encoder parameters (F1-27 and F1-28).

Set F1-37 to 12 (no-load dynamic auto-tuning on all parameters of synchronous motor) and press
"ENTER" on the operating panel. The display on the panel is:
4

Press and hold the RUN key for longer than 3s. The motor auto-tuning starts. The RUN indicator is steady
on, the TUNE/TC indicator blinks, and the AC drive energizes the motor.
5 When the preceding display disappears and the operating panel returns to normal parameter display
state, auto-tuning is completed.
Parameters F1-06, F1-17, F1-18, F1-19, F1-30 (FVC), and F1-31 (FVC) are obtained.

● Procedure of static auto-tuning on all parameters of synchronous motor

‑540‑
 Function Application

Use this auto-tuning method when the motor is not allowed to rotate during auto-
tuning.
Table 3–12 Procedure of static auto-tuning on all parameters of synchronous motor

Step Description

1 Power on the AC drive, and then set F0-02 to 0 to select the operating panel as command source.

2 Enter motor parameters (F1-00 to F1-05) according to its nameplate.

Set F1-37 to 13 (static auto-tuning on all parameters of synchronous motor) and press "ENTER" on the
operating panel. The display on the panel is:
3

Press and hold the RUN key for longer than 3s. The motor auto-tuning starts. The RUN indicator is steady
on, the TUNE/TC indicator blinks, and the AC drive energizes the motor.
When the preceding display disappears and the operating panel returns to normal parameter display
4
state, auto-tuning is completed.
Parameters F1-06, F1-17, and F1-18 are obtained.
Manually set F1-19 (SVC and PMVVC), F1-31 (FVC), and F1-30 (FVC).

3.3 Control Terminal

3.3.1 DI Functions
The AC drive supports a number of multi-functional DIs (DI5 can be used as the pulse
input terminal). You can select any DI function for each DI.

‑541‑
Function Application

Table 3–13 Parameters

Para. Function Default Value Range Description
F4-00 DI1 function 1 0–93 See "Table 3–14
selection DI functions" on
F4-01 DI2 function 4 page 543.
selection
F4-02 DI3 function 9
selection
F4-03 DI4 function 12
selection
F4-04 DI5 function 13
selection
F4-05 DI6 function 0
selection
F4-06 DI7 function 0
selection
F4-07 DI8 function 0
selection
F4-08 DI9 function 0
selection
F4-09 DI10 function 0
selection
F4-10 DI filter time 0.010s 0.000s to 1.000s Set the delay
time of the AC
drive when the
status of the DI
changes.
Only DI1 and DI2
support delay
time setting.

‑542‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

F4-38 DI valid mode 00000 Ones: DI1 active The active mode
selection 1 mode for terminals DI1
F4-39 DI valid mode 00000 0: Active high to DI5 is set
selection 2 1: Active low through the
Tens: DI2 active ones, tens,
mode (0 or 1, hundreds,
the options are thousands, and
the same as ten thousands
those of DI1). positions of this
Hundreds: DI3 parameter,
active mode (0 respectively.
or 1, the options 0: Active high.
are the same as The DI (DI1 to
those of DI1). DI5) is active
Thousands: DI4 when connected
active mode (0 to the COM
or 1, the options terminal and
are the same as inactive when
those of DI1). disconnected
Ten thousands: from the COM
DI5 active mode terminal.
(0 or 1, the 1: Active low.
options are the The DI (DI1 to
same as those DI5) is inactive
of DI1). when connected
to the COM
terminal and
active when
disconnected
from the COM
terminal.

Table 3–14 DI functions

Value Function Detailed Description
0 No function Set 0 to disable the terminal to avoid malfunction.
1 Forward run The AC drive runs in the forward direction. FWD
indicates forward run. In two-wire mode 1 (F4-11 set to
0), activating the terminal sets the AC drive to
forwardly run. In two-wire mode 2 (F4-11 set to 1),
activating the terminal gives a running command.
2 Reverse run The AC drive runs in the reverse direction. REV
indicates reverse run. In three-wire mode 1 (F4-11 set
to 2), activating the terminal sets the AC drive to
reversely run. In three-wire mode 2 (F4-11 set to 3),
activating the terminal sets the forward/reverse run
direction.

‑543‑
Function Application

Value Function Detailed Description

3 Three-wire operation The AC drive runs in three-wire control mode. To set
control the running command through the terminal, set F4-11
(terminal control mode) to 2 (three-wire mode 1) or 3
(three-wire mode 2), and set this parameter to 3. The
three-wire control modes include three-wire mode 1
and three-wire mode 2.
4 Forward jog (FJOG) The terminal is used to set the AC drive to FJOG mode.
In jog mode, the AC drive runs at low speed for a short
time, which is typically used for maintenance and
commissioning of field equipment.
5 Reverse jog (RJOG) The terminal is used to set the AC drive to RJOG mode.
6 Terminal UP The terminal is used to increase the frequency when
the frequency is set through the terminal. If the
terminal is active, the effect is equivalent to holding

down the key. If the terminal is inactive, the

effect is equivalent to releasing the key.

7 Terminal DOWN The terminal is used to decrease the frequency when
the frequency is set through the terminal. If the
terminal is active, the effect is equivalent to holding

down the key. If the terminal is inactive, the

effect is equivalent to releasing the key.

8 Coast to stop Once the AC drive receives a stop command, it
immediately stops output and the load then coasts to
stop based on the mechanical inertia. When the AC
drive stops output, the motor is powered off, and the
system enters free braking. Since the stop time is
determined by the inertia of the system, this is also
called inertia stop.
9 Fault reset (RESET) The terminal is used to reset a faulty AC drive. The
terminal has the same function as that of the STOP/
RES key on the operating panel. This function can
remotely reset the AC drive upon a fault.
10 RUN pause When the terminal is active with this function, the AC
drive decelerates to stop, and the settings of all the
running parameters, such as the PLC, wobble, and PID
parameters, are saved. When the terminal is inactive,
the AC drive resumes its running state as recorded.
11 Normally open (NO) When the terminal is active, the AC drive reports the
input of external Err15 alarm upon receiving an external signal.
fault

‑544‑
 Function Application

Value Function Detailed Description

12 Multi-reference Multi-reference is selected as the main frequency
terminal 1 source. You can set the 16 states of the four terminals
13 Multi-reference to 16 speeds or 16 references. This function is
terminal 2 applicable to scenarios where continuous adjustment
14 Multi-reference of the AC drive running frequency is not required and
terminal 3 only several frequency values are required.
15 Multi-reference
terminal 4
16 Terminal 1 for Four groups of acceleration/deceleration time can be
acceleration/ selected through combinations of four states of these
deceleration time two terminals.
selection The acceleration time is the time required by the AC
17 Terminal 2 for drive to accelerate from zero frequency to the
acceleration/ acceleration/deceleration base frequency (F0-25). The
deceleration time deceleration time is the time required by the AC drive
selection to decelerate from the acceleration/deceleration base
frequency (F0-25) to zero frequency.
18 Frequency source The terminal is used to switch between input methods
switchover of the frequency reference. The frequency reference is
set through F0-07 (final frequency reference setting
selection).
19 UP and DOWN When the operating panel is used as the main
setting clear frequency source, this terminal function can be used to

clear the frequency change made through the

or key on the operating panel or the terminal

UP or DOWN functions (6 or 7) and resume the main
frequency to the value specified by the F0-08
parameter.
20 Running command When the running command is set through the
switchover terminal terminal (F0-02=1) and this terminal is active, the
1 control mode can be switched between the terminal
and the operating panel.
When the running command is set through
communication (F0-02 = 2) and this terminal is active,
the control mode can be switched between the
communication and the operating panel.
21 Acceleration/ The terminal is used to keep the AC drive at the current
Deceleration running frequency regardless of the changes of the
disabled external input frequency unless a stop command is
received.
22 PID pause The terminal is used to suspend PID control
temporarily, so that the AC drive keeps the current
output frequency with no more PID tuning on the
frequency source.

‑545‑
Function Application

Value Function Detailed Description

23 PLC state reset The terminal is used to reset the AC drive to the initial
state of simple PLC.
24 Wobble pause In the wobble process, the terminal being active
suspends the wobble function, so that the AC drive
outputs at the central frequency.
25 Counter input In the counting process, the terminal being active
inputs the pulses counted by the counter.
26 Counter reset In a counting process, the terminal being active resets
the counter.
27 Length count input In a fixed length process, the terminal being active
inputs the length count.
28 Length reset In a fixed length process, the terminal being active
resets the length.
29 Torque control When the terminal is active, the AC drive is switched
inhibited from the torque control mode to the speed control
mode. When the terminal is inactive, the AC drive
resumes the torque control mode.
30 Pulse input This function must be selected when DI5 is used for
pulse input.
32 Immediate DC The terminal is used to set the AC drive to the
braking immediate DC braking state. DC braking means that
the AC drive outputs DC to the stator winding of the
asynchronous motor to form a static magnetic field to
enable the motor to brake with energy consumption. In
this state, the rotor cuts the static magnetic field to
generate braking torque, which stops the motor
quickly.
33 Normally closed (NC) When the terminal is active, the AC drive reports the
input of external Err15 alarm upon receiving an external signal.
fault
34 Frequency When the terminal is active, the frequency can be
modification modified. When the terminal is inactive, the frequency
cannot be modified.
35 PID action direction The PID action direction is opposite to the direction set
reversal by FA-03 (PID action direction).
36 External stop If the command source is set to operating panel
terminal 1 control (F0-02 is set to 0), the terminal is used to stop
the AC drive. This function is the same as that of the
STOP/RES key on the operating panel.

‑546‑
 Function Application

Value Function Detailed Description

37 Control command The terminal is used to switch the AC drive between
switchover terminal terminal control and communication control.
2 If the running command source is set to terminal
control, the system switches to communication control
when this terminal is active.
If the running command source is set to
communication control, the system switches to
terminal control when this terminal is active.
38 PID integral pause The PID integral adjustment function is paused.
However, the PID proportion adjustment and
differential adjustment functions are still available.
39 Switchover between This parameter is used to switch from the main
main frequency and frequency to the preset frequency (F0-08).
preset frequency
40 Switchover between This parameter is used to switch from the auxiliary
auxiliary frequency frequency to the preset frequency (F0-08).
and preset frequency
41 Motor selection The terminal is used for motor selection. When the
terminal is active, motor 2 is selected. When the
terminal is inactive, motor 1 is selected.
42 Position lock When the terminal is active, the AC drive decelerates to
0 Hz and then enters the position lock state.
43 PID parameter With the PID parameter switchover condition set to
switchover "switchover by DI" (FA-18 = 1), when the terminal is
inactive, the PID parameters are FA-05 to FA-07
(proportional gain Kp1, integral time Ti1, and
derivative time Td1). When terminal is active, the PID
parameters are FA-15 to FA-17 (proportional gain Kp2,
integral time Ti2, and derivative time Td2).
44 User-defined fault 1 The AC drive reports the E27.00 alarm and proceeds
according to the value of F9-49 (fault protection action
selection).
45 User-defined fault 2 The AC drive reports the E28.0 alarm and proceeds
according to the value of F9-49 (fault protection action
selection).
46 Speed control/ The AC drive is switched between the speed control
torque control mode and the torque control mode.
switchover If A0-00 (speed/torque control mode) is set to 0, the
torque control mode is used when the terminal is
active, and the speed control mode is used when the
terminal is inactive.
If A0-00 (speed/torque control mode) is set to 1, the
speed control mode is used when the terminal is
active, and the torque control mode is used when the
terminal is inactive.

‑547‑
Function Application

Value Function Detailed Description

47 Emergency stop Upon an emergency, the AC drive decelerates to stop
within the deceleration time for emergency stop
specified by F8-55. In V/f control mode, if the
deceleration time for emergency stop is 0s, the AC
drive decelerates to stop within the minimum unit
time. The terminal does not need to be kept in the
closed state. Even if it stays closed only for a short
moment, the AC drive will come to an emergency stop.
Different from general deceleration, if the emergency
stop input terminal is opened after the deceleration
time for emergency stop expires and the running signal
is still active on the AC drive terminal, the AC drive will
not restart. To restart the AC drive in this case,
disconnect the running terminal and input the running
command.
48 External stop The AC drive decelerates to stop regardless of the
terminal 2 command source (operation panel, terminal, or
communication). In this mode, the deceleration time is
fixed to deceleration time 4 (F8-08).
49 Deceleration DC The AC drive decelerates to the DC braking start
braking frequency upon stop (F6-11) before starting DC
braking.
50 Clear the current The terminal is used to clear the current running time
running time of the AC drive. If the current running time is less than
the set value (greater than 0) of F8-53 (Current running
time reached), and the terminal is active, the current
running timing is cleared. If the current running time is
greater than the set value (greater than 0) of F8-53, and
the terminal is active, the current running time is not
cleared.
51 Two-wire/three-wire The terminal is used to switch the AC drive between
control switchover the two-wire control mode and three-wire control
mode.
When F4-11 is set to 0 (Two-wire mode 1) and the
terminal is active, the AC drive switches to three-wire
mode 1. When the terminal is inactive, two-wire mode
1 is used.
When F4-11 is set to 1 (Two-wire mode 2) and the
terminal is active, the AC drive switches to three-wire
mode 2.
When F4-11 is set to 2 (Three-wire mode 1) and the
terminal is active, the AC drive switches to two-wire
mode 1.
When F4-11 is set to 3 (Three-wire mode 2) and the
terminal is active, the AC drive switches to two-wire
mode 2.
52 Electromagnetic When the terminal is active, the AC drive enters the
shorting electromagnetic shorting state.

‑548‑
 Function Application

Value Function Detailed Description

53 Thickness When the roll diameter is calculated based on
accumulation accumulative thickness, the terminal is used to record
the number of revolutions.
54 Roll diameter reset When the terminal is active, the initial roll diameter is
reset. The initial roll diameter is reset upon reel
replacement when the tension mode is used.
55 Initial roll diameter 1 In the tension mode, you can combine terminals to
56 Initial roll diameter 2 select the initial roll diameter B0-11/12/13.
When terminals of both initial roll diameter 1 and initial
roll diameter 2 are inactive, the minimum roll diameter
B0-09 is used as the initial roll diameter.
When only the terminal of initial roll diameter 1 is
active, B0-11 is used as the initial roll diameter.
When only the terminal of initial roll diameter 2 is
active, B0-12 is used as the initial roll diameter.
When terminals of both initial roll diameter 1 and initial
roll diameter 2 are active, B0-13 is used as the initial
roll diameter.
57 Pre-drive When the terminal is active, the AC drive switches to
the pre-drive speed control mode. This function is used
to synchronize the linear speed for the axis that
requires automatic reel replacement when the tension
mode is used. When the terminal is inactive after reel
replacement, the tension control can function properly.
58 Winding/unwinding This function is used to switch between winding and
switchover unwinding when the tension mode is used.
59 Roll diameter When the terminal is activated, the roll diameter
calculation disabled calculation is disabled. This function is used to disable
roll diameter calculation to prevent automatic reel
replacement and pre-drive from affecting roll diameter
calculation when the tension mode is used.
60 Exiting tension mode This function is used to exit the tension control mode.
61 Terminal tension rise When the terminal is activated, the tension torque is
increased by certain ratio. After the DI terminal is
deactivated, the boost part will be canceled gradually
based on time.

‑549‑
Function Application

Value Function Detailed Description

62 Thickness selection 1 In tension mode, you can combine terminals to select
63 Thickness selection 2 the thickness B0-32/33/34/35.
When terminals of both thickness selection 1 and
thickness selection 2 are inactive, B0-32 is selected as
the thickness.
When only the terminal of thickness selection 1 is
active, B0-33 is selected as the thickness.
When only the terminal of thickness selection 2 is
active, B0-34 is selected as the thickness.
When terminals of both thickness selection 1 and
thickness selection 2 are active, B0-35 is selected as the
thickness.
90 Water cooling When the water cooling system of T13 models has a
system fault fault, the terminal receives the signal and the AC drive
reports the E64 alarm.
91 Low liquid level fault When the liquid in the water tank of T13 models is too
low, the terminal receives the signal and the AC drive
reports the A63 alarm.
92 Revolution number The number of revolutions counted will be cleared
reset after this terminal is activated.

‑550‑
 Function Application

3.3.2 DO Functions

Table 3–15 Parameters

Para. Function Default Value Range Description
F5-01 Extension 0 0 to 42 See "Table 3–16 DO functions" on
card relay page 552.
output
function
selection
F5-02 Control board 2
relay function
selection (T/
A1-T/B1-TC1)
F5-03 Control board 0
relay function
selection (T/
A2-TC2)
F5-04 DO1 function 0
selection
F5-05 Extension 4
card DO2
output
selection
F5-17 Extension 0.0s 0.0s to Indicates the output delay of relay on
card relay 3600.0s the extension card. F5‑01 outputs the
output delay active signal only after the set delay
time expires.
F5-18 Relay 1 output 0.0s 0.0s to Indicates the delay of relay 1 on the
delay 3600.0s control board. F5-02 outputs the
active signal only after the set delay
time expires.
F5-19 Relay 2 output 0.0 0.0 to 3600.0 Indicates the delay of relay 2 on the
delay control board. F5-03 outputs the
active signal only after the set delay
time expires.
F5-20 DO1 output 0.0s 0.0s to Indicates the delay of DO1 output. F5-
delay 3600.0s 04 outputs the active signal only after
the set delay time expires.
F5-21 Extension 0.0s 0.0s to Indicates the delay of DO2 output on
card DO2 3600.0s the extension card. F5-05 outputs the
output delay active signal only after the set delay
time expires.

‑551‑
Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

F5-22 DO active 0 Ones: The active mode for DOs is set
mode Extension through the ones, tens, hundreds,
selection card relay thousands, and ten thousands
0: Positive positions of F5-01 to F5-05.
logic 0: Positive logic (equivalent to a
1: Negative normally open contact)
logic Active: The DO and the COM/CME
Tens: Control terminal are connected inside the AC
board relay 1 drive.
0: Positive Inactive: The DO and the COM/CME
logic terminal are disconnected.
1: Negative 1: Negative logic (equivalent to a
logic normally closed contact)
Active: The DO and the COM/CME
terminal are disconnected.
Inactive: The DO and the COM/CME
terminal are connected inside the AC
drive.
Contin Continued Contin Hundreds: Continued
ued ued Control board
relay 2
0: Positive
logic
1: Negative
logic
Thousands:
Control board
DO1
0: Positive
logic
1: Negative
logic
Ten
thousands:
Control board
DO2
0: Positive
logic
1: Negative
logic

Table 3–16 DO functions

Value Function Description
0 No output The DO has no function.
1 AC drive running The DO outputs the active signal when the AC drive is in the
running state with an output frequency, which can be zero.

‑552‑
 Function Application

Value Function Description

2 Fault output The DO outputs the active signal when the AC drive stops due
(coast-to-stop to a fault.
fault)
3 Frequency level The DO outputs the active signal when the running frequency
detection 1 exceeds the frequency detection value. The DO stops
outputting the active signal when the running frequency is
lower than the result of the detection value minus the
frequency detection hysteresis (FDT, which equals the result
of F8-19 multiplied by F8-20).
4 Frequency reach The DO outputs the active signal when the running frequency
of the AC drive is within a particular range (Target
frequency±Result of the value of F8-21 multiplied by the
maximum frequency).
5 Zero-speed The DO outputs the active signal when the AC drive is running
running (no with the output frequency being 0. The DO outputs the
output at stop) inactive signal when the AC drive is stopped.
6 Motor overload Before performing the protection action, the AC drive
pre-warning determines whether the motor load exceeds the overload pre-
warning threshold according to the overload pre-warning
coefficient (F9-02). When the AC drive determines that the
overload pre-warning threshold is exceeded, he terminal
outputs an active signal.
7 AC drive overload The DO outputs the active signal 10 seconds before AC drive
pre-warning overload protection is performed.
8 Set count value In a counting process, the DO outputs the active signal when
reach the count reaches the value of FB-08.
9 Designated count In a counting process, the DO outputs the active signal when
value reach the count reaches the value of FB-09.
10 Length reach The DO outputs the active signal when the detected length
exceeds the value of FB-05 in the fixed length function.
11 Simple PLC cycle The DO outputs a pulse signal with the width of 250 ms when
completed simple PLC completes one cycle.
12 Accumulative The DO outputs the active signal when the accumulative
running time running time of the AC drive exceeds the value of F8-17
reach (accumulative running time threshold).
13 Frequency The DO outputs the active signal when the frequency
limited reference exceeds the upper limit or lower limit and the
output frequency of the AC drive reaches the upper limit or
lower limit.
14 Torque limited The DO outputs the active signal when the output torque
reaches the torque limit in speed control mode.
15 Ready to run The DO outputs the active signal if no exception occurs after
the AC drive is powered on.
16 AI1 > AI2 The DO outputs the active signal when the value of AI1 is
greater than that of AI2.

‑553‑
Function Application

Value Function Description

17 Frequency upper The DO outputs the active signal when the running frequency
limit reach reaches the upper limit (F0-12).
18 Frequency lower The DO outputs the inactive signal regardless of whether the
limit reach (no running frequency has reached the lower limit when F8-14 is
output at stop) set to 1 (stop). F8-14 specifies the running mode when the
frequency reference is lower than the lower limit.
When F8-14 is set to 0 (run at the lower limit frequency) or 2
(run at zero speed) and the running frequency reaches the
lower limit, the DO outputs the active signal.
19 Undervoltage The DO outputs the active signal when the AC drive is in
state undervoltage state.
20 Communication The DO state is controlled through the communication
address 0x2001.
21 Positioning The DO outputs the active signal when positioning is
completed completed.
22 Proximity The DO outputs the active signal upon proximity.
23 Zero-speed The DO outputs the active signal when the AC drive is running
running 2 (having with the output frequency being 0. The DO outputs the active
output at stop) signal when the AC drive is stopped.
24 Accumulative The DO outputs the active signal when the accumulative
power-on time power-on time (F7-13) of the AC drive exceeds the
reach accumulative power-on time threshold (F8-16).
25 Frequency level The DO outputs the active signal when the running frequency
detection 2 exceeds the frequency detection value. The DO stops
outputting the active signal when the running frequency is
lower than the result of the threshold minus the frequency
detection hysteresis, which equals the result of the value of
F8-28 multiplied by the value of F8-29.
26 Frequency 1 The DO outputs the active signal when the running frequency
reach of the AC drive is within the frequency detection range of F8-
30 (detection value for frequency reach 1).
Frequency detection range: F8-30 – F8-31 x F0-10 (maximum
frequency) to F8-30 + F8-31 x F0-10
27 Frequency 2 The DO outputs the active signal when the running frequency
reach of the AC drive is within the frequency detection range of F8-
32 (detection value for frequency reach 2).
Frequency detection range: F8-32 – F8-33 x F0-10 (maximum
frequency) to F8-32 + F8-33 x F0-10
28 Current 1 reach The DO outputs the active signal when the output current of
the AC drive is within the current detection range of F8-38
(detection level of current 1).
Current detection range: F8-38 – F8-39 x F1-03 (rated motor
current) to F8-38 + F8-39 x F1-03

‑554‑
 Function Application

Value Function Description

29 Current 2 reach The DO outputs the active signal when the output current of
the AC drive is within the current detection range of F8-40
(detection level of current 2).
Current detection range: F8-40 – F8-41 x F1-03 (rated motor
current) to F8-40 + F8-41 x F1-03
30 Timing reach With the timing function (F8-42) enabled, the DO outputs
the active signal when the current running time of the AC
drive reaches the set time. The timing duration is set
through F8-43 and F8-44.
31 AI1 input limit The DO outputs the active signal when the value of AI1 is
exceeded above F8-46 (AI1 input voltage upper limit) or below F8-45
(AI1 input voltage lower limit).
32 Load lost The DO outputs the active signal when the AC drive is in load
lost state.
33 Reverse running The DO outputs the active signal when the AC drive is in
reverse running state.
34 Zero current The DO outputs the active signal when the output current of
state the AC drive remains in the zero current range for a period
longer than the value of F8-35 (zero current detection delay).
Zero current detection range: 0 to F8-34 x F1-03
35 IGBT temperature The DO outputs the active signal when the IGBT module
reach temperature (F7-07) reaches the temperature threshold (F8-
47).
36 Output current The DO outputs the active signal when the output current of
limit violation the AC drive remains higher than the value of F8-36 (output
overcurrent threshold) for a period longer than the value of
F8-37 (output overcurrent detection delay).
37 Frequency lower The DO outputs the active signal when the running frequency
limit reach reaches the lower limit (F0-14). The DO also outputs the active
(having output at signal when the AC drive is stopped.
stop)
38 Alarm (all faults) The DO outputs the active signal when the AC drive is faulty,
and the fault protection action is "continue to run".
For details about fault protection actions, see the description
of parameters F9-47 to F9-50.
39 Motor The DO outputs the active signal when the motor temperature
overtemperature reaches the value of F9-58 (motor overtemperature pre-
warning threshold). You can check the motor temperature
using U0-34.
40 Current running The DO outputs the active signal when the current running
time reach time of the AC drive exceeds the value of F8-53 (current
running time threshold).

‑555‑
Function Application

Value Function Description

41 Fault output 2 The DO outputs the active signal when an AC drive fault
(except the undervoltage fault) occurs.
42 Fault output 3 The DO outputs the active signal when an AC drive fault
occurs.

3.3.3 VDI Terminal

The virtual digital input (VDI) terminals, having the same functions as DIs on the
control board, can be used as multi-functional digital input terminals.
There are three VDI terminal sources.
● A1-06: Set A1-06 to make the DI take effect. The DI is used in communication
scenarios, where physical DIs are not used. The relationship between the digits of
A1-06 and the VDIs are as follows: the ones position of A1-06 corresponds to VDI1...
the ten thousands position of A1-06 corresponds to VDI5.
● DO state: There are two DOs, namely, DO1 and DO2. DO1 corresponds to VDI1, and
DO2 corresponds to VDI2.
● DI state: The relationship between the DIs and the VDIs are as follows: DI1 - VDI1,
DI2 - VDI2, DO1 - VDI4, and DO2 - VDI5.

Example
The following examples show how to use VDIs:
● Example 1: Assume that A1-05 (VDI active state source) is set to 00001 (DO state is
the source). To enable the AC drive to generate an alarm and stop when the AI1
input exceeds the upper limit or lower limit, do as follows:

Step Parameter Setting

1 Set the VDI1 function to "user-defined fault 1" (set A1-00 to 44).
2 Set the DO1 function to "AI input limit exceeded" (set F5-04 to 31).
3 Set the VDI1 state source to DO state (set A1-05 to 00001).

After the preceding steps, DO1 output is in ON state, and the VDI1 input terminal is
active when AI1 input exceeds the upper limit or lower limit. After VDI1 of the AC
drive receives user-defined fault 1, the AC drive generates the alarm E27.00 and
stops.

● Example 2: In a communication scenario, implement emergency stop through the

VDI without using physical DI.

‑556‑
 Function Application

Step Parameter Setting

1 Set the VDI1 function to "emergency stop" (set A1-00 to 47).
2 Set the VDI1 active state source to parameters (set A1-05 to
00000).
3 Modify the ones position of A1-06 through communication.

After the preceding steps, emergency stop can be implemented by setting the
ones position of A1-06 to 1.
Parameters
Para. Function Default Value Range Description
A1-00 VDI1 function 0 0–93 Same as F4-00
A1-01 VDI2 function 0
A1-02 VDI3 function 0
A1-03 VDI4 function 0
A1-04 VDI5 function 0
A1-05 VDI state source 00000 Ones: The VDIx (x ranges from 1 to
0: Parameter 5) state is set through the
setting (A1-06) ones to ten thousands
1: DO state positions of this parameter.
2: DI state 0: Decided by the state of
Tens: VDOx.
0: Parameter The state of VDI depends on
setting (A1-06) the state of VDO. VDI1 is
1: DO state bound to VDO1, VDI2 is
2: DI state bound to VDO2, and VDOx is
bound to VDOx (x ranges
from 1 to 5).
1: Decided by A1-06.
The state of VDIx (x ranges
from 1 to 5) is set through
the binary bits of A1-06.

‑557‑
Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

Continued Continued Contin Hundreds: Continued
ued 0: Parameter
setting (A1-06)
1: DO state
2: DI state
Thousands
0: Parameter
setting (A1-06)
1: DO state
2: DI state
Ten thousands
0: Parameter
setting (A1-06)
1: DO state
2: DI state
A1-06 VDI state 00000 Ones: The VDIx (x ranges from 1 to
0: Disabled 5) state is set through the
1: Enabled ones to ten thousands
Tens: positions of this parameter.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Hundreds:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Thousands
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Ten thousands
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

3.3.4 AI
The AC drive is equipped with three multi-functional analog input (AI) terminals by
default. To use AIs as DIs, the following parameters need to be set. When AI input
voltage is higher than 7 V, AI is in high level state. When AI input voltage is lower than
3 V, AI is in low level state. AI is in hysteresis state when AI input voltage is between 3
V and 7 V. The following figure shows the relationship between AI input voltage and DI
state.

‑558‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-36 Relationship between AI input voltage and DI state

Table 3–17 Related parameters

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
Function selection for AI1
A1-07 0
used as DI
Function selection for AI2
A1-08 0 0 to 93 Same as F4-00
used as DI
Function selection for AI3
A1-09 0
used as DI
Ones: AI1
0: Active high
When the AI terminal level is high, the AI
1: Active low
terminal is active if the corresponding digit
Tens: AI2 (0 or 1, the
of A1-10 is set to 0, and inactive if the
options are the same as
Active state selection for corresponding digit of A1-10 is set to 1.
A1-10 00 that of the ones
AI used as DI When the AI terminal level is low, the AI
position)
terminal is active if the corresponding digit
Hundreds: AI3 (0 or 1,
of A1-10 is set to 0, and inactive if the
the options are the
corresponding digit of A1-10 is set to 1.
same as that of the ones
position)

3.3.5 AO
The AC drive is equipped with two analog output (AO) terminals by default. The
following parameters are used to rectify the zero drift of analog output and the
deviation of output amplitude. They can also be used to customize AO output curves.

‑559‑
Function Application

Table 3–18 Parameters

Para. Function Default Value Range Description
F5-07 AO1 0 0: Running For details, see "Table 3–19
function frequency Relationship between pulse output/
selection 1: Set frequency analog output functions and ranges"
F5-08 AO2 1 2: Output on page 562.
function current
selection 3: Output torque
4: Output power
5: Output
voltage
6: Pulse input
(100.0%
corresponds to
100.0 kHz)
7: AI1
8: AI2
9: AI3
Con Continued Contin 10: Length Continued
tinu ued 11: Count value
ed 12:
Communication
setting
13: Motor speed
14: Output
current (100.0%
corresponds to
1000.0 A)
15: Output
voltage (100.0%
corresponds to
1000.0 V)
16: Output
torque
(directional)
19: Taper output
20: Roll
diameter output
21: Tension
output
22: Encoder
feedback
frequency

‑560‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

F5-10 AO1 zero 0.0% -100.0% to On the AO curve, if b indicates zero
offset +100.0% offset, k indicates gain, and X
coefficient indicates standard output, the actual
F5-11 AO1 gain 1.00 –10.00 to +10.00 output Y is as follows: Y = kX + b.
The zero offset coefficient 100% of
AO1 and AO2 corresponds to 10 V (or
20 mA). The standard output refers to
the value corresponding to the analog
output of 0 V to 10 V (or 0 mA to 20
mA) with no zero offset or gain
adjustment.
Zero offset = Zero offset coefficient x
10 V (or 20 mA)
The AC drive supports two AOs,
namely, AO1 and AO2. AO1 and AO2
can be used to indicate the internal
running parameters in the analog
mode. The indicated parameters are
defined by F5-07 and F5‑-08.
F5-12 AO2 zero 0.0% -100.0% to On the AO curve, if b indicates zero
offset +100.0% offset, k indicates gain, and X
coefficient indicates standard output, the actual
output Y is as follows: Y = kX + b.
The zero offset coefficient 100% of
AO1 and AO2 corresponds to 10 V (or
20 mA). The standard output refers to
the value corresponding to the analog
output of 0 V to 10 V (or 0 mA to 20
mA) with no zero offset or gain
adjustment.
Zero offset = Zero offset coefficient x
10 V (or 20 mA)
The AC drive supports two AOs,
namely, AO1 and AO2. AO1 and AO2
can be used to indicate the internal
running parameters in the analog
mode. The indicated parameters are
defined by F5-07 and F5‑-08.

‑561‑
Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

F5-13 AO2 gain 1.00 –10.00 to +10.00 On the AO curve, if b indicates zero
offset, k indicates gain, and X
indicates standard output, the actual
output Y is as follows: Y = kX + b.
The zero offset coefficient 100% of
AO1 and AO2 corresponds to 10 V (or
20 mA). The standard output refers to
the value corresponding to the analog
output of 0 V to 10 V (or 0 mA to 20
mA) with no zero offset or gain
adjustment.
Zero offset = Zero offset coefficient x
10 V (or 20 mA)
The AC drive supports two AOs,
namely, AO1 and AO2. AO1 and AO2
can be used to indicate the internal
running parameters in the analog
mode. The indicated parameters are
defined by F5-07 and F5‑-08.

The AO ranges from 0 V to 10 V (0% to 100%). When the AO output function is set to 1
(frequency setting), and the AC drive frequency is set to 50% of the maximum
frequency, the output voltage of the AO is 5 V (50% x 10 V).

Table 3–19 Relationship between pulse output/analog output functions and ranges

Value Function Value Range

0 Running frequency 0% to 100.0% (maximum output
frequency set by F0-10)
1 Frequency reference 0 to maximum output frequency
2 Output current 0% to 100% (twice the rated motor
current)
3 Motor output torque 0% to 100% (twice the rated motor torque;
absolute value, a percentage of the rated
motor torque)
4 Output power 0% to 100% (twice the rated motor power)
5 Output voltage 0% to 100% (1.2 times the rated motor
voltage)
6 Pulse input 0.01 kHz to 100.00 kHz. 100% corresponds
to 100.00 kHz.
7 AI1 –10 V to +10 V. 100% corresponds to +10 V.
8 AI2 –10 V to +10 V (or 0 mA to 20 mA). 100%
corresponds to +10 V.
9 AI3 0 V to +10 V (or 0 mA to 20 mA). 100%
corresponds to +10 V.

‑562‑
 Function Application

Value Function Value Range

10 Length 0% to 100.0% (maximum length set by FB-
05)
11 Count value 0% to 100.0% (maximum count value set
by FB-08)
12 Communication 0.0% to 100.0% (AO communication)
13 Motor speed 0.0% to 100.0% (maximum output
frequency F0-10)
14 Output current 0.0 A to 1000.0 A. 100.0% corresponds to
1000.0 A.
15 Output voltage 0.0 V to 1000.0 V. 100% corresponds to
1000.0 V.
16 Output torque of the motor 0% (twice the rated motor torque in
(actual value, a percentage reverse direction) to 100% (twice the rated
of the rated motor torque) motor torque in forward direction). 50%
corresponds to 0.
19 Taper output -
20 Roll diameter output 100.0% corresponds to B0-08 which
specifies the maximum roll diameter.
21 Tension output 100.0% corresponds to B1-02 which
specifies the maximum tension.
22 Encoder feedback frequency 100.0% corresponds to the value of F0‑10
which specifies the maximum frequency.

The following is an example of how to calculate the AO zero offset coefficient (F5-10)
and AO gain (F5-11):
Assume that the AO outputs the running frequency, and the rectified output needs to
be 8 V (Y1) when frequency is 0 Hz (X1) and 4 V (Y2) when frequency is 40 Hz (X2).
Gain formula:

Zero offset coefficient formula:

Xmax (Max. output frequency) is 50 Hz (assuming that the maximum frequency F0-10
is 50 Hz), and Ymax (voltage) is 10 V.
In this case, AO gain (F5-11) is –0.5 and AO zero offset coefficient (F5-10) is 80%.

‑563‑
Function Application

Table 3–20 Relationship between AO signal types and maximum values (Ymax)

Output Signal Corresponding Max. Output (Ymax)

Voltage 10 V
Current 20 mA

Table 3–21 Relationship between AO contents and maximum values (Xmax)

AO Content Corresponding Max. Output (Xmax)

Running frequency Max. output frequency
Frequency reference Max. output frequency
Output current Twice the rated motor current
Output torque (absolute value) Twice the rated motor torque
Output power Twice the rated power
Output voltage 1.2 times the rated AC drive voltage
Pulse input 100.00 kHz
AI1 10 V
AI2 10 V or 20 mA
AI3 10 V or 20 mA
Length Maximum set length
Count value Maximum count value
Communication 100.0%
Motor speed Rotation speed corresponding to the
maximum output frequency
Output current 1000.0 A
Output voltage 1000.0 V
Output torque (actual value) Twice the rated motor torque

‑564‑
 Function Application

3.4 Control Performance

3.4.1 Setting the V/f Curve

Table 3–22 Setting parameters of linear, multi-point, and square V/f curves

Para. Function De Value Range Description

fault
F3-00 V/f curve 0 0: Linear V/f 0: Linear V/f curve
setting curve Below the rated frequency, the
1: Multi-point V/f relationship between the output voltage
curve and output frequency of the AC drive
2: Square V/f changes linearly. This curve is applicable
curve to common mechanical drive scenarios
3: 1.2-power V/f such as large inertia fan acceleration,
curve punch presses, centrifuges, and water
4: 1.4-power V/f pumps.
curve 1: Multi-point V/f curve
6: 1.6-power V/f The frequency points range from 0.00 Hz
curve to the rated motor frequency. The voltage
8: 1.8-power V/f points range from 0.0% to 100.0%,
curve corresponding to the voltage range from 0
10: V/f complete V to the rated motor voltage. Generally,
separation the multi-point V/f curve is set based on
mode load characteristics of the motor. Ensure
11: V/f half the following conditions are met: F3-03 ≤
separation F3-05 ≤ F3-07.
mode

‑565‑
Function Application

Para. Function De Value Range Description

fault
Contin Contin Con Continued 2: Square V/f curve
ued ued tinu Below the rated frequency, the
ed relationship between the output voltage
and the output frequency of the AC drive
changes according to the square curve.
This curve is applicable to scenarios with
light loads that seldom change, such as
fans and water pumps.
3: 1.2-power V/f curve
Below the rated motor frequency, the
relationship between the output voltage
and the output frequency of the AC drive
changes according to the 1.2-power
curve.
4: 1.4-power V/f curve
Below the rated motor frequency, the
relationship between the output voltage
and the output frequency of the AC drive
changes according to the 1.4-power
curve.
6: 1.6-power V/f curve
Below the rated motor frequency, the
relationship between the output voltage
and the output frequency of the AC drive
changes according to the 1.6-power
curve.

‑566‑
 Function Application

Para. Function De Value Range Description

fault
Contin Contin Con Continued 8: 1.8-power V/f curve
ued ued tinu Below the rated motor frequency, the
ed relationship between the output voltage
and the output frequency of the AC drive
changes according to the 1.8-power
curve.
10: V/f complete separation mode
The output frequency of the AC drive is
independent from its output voltage. The
output frequency is determined by the
frequency source, and the output voltage
is determined by the voltage source for V/
f separation. This mode is typically
applicable to scenarios such as motor
torque control.
11: V/f half separation mode
In this mode, the voltage is proportional
to the frequency. The proportional
relationship can be set through the
voltage source, and the relationship
between the voltage and the frequency is
also related to the rated motor voltage
and the rated motor frequency in group 1.
If the voltage source input is X (0 to
-100%), the relationship between the
voltage and the frequency is as follows: V/
f = 2 x X x (Rated motor voltage)/(Rated
motor frequency)
F3-01 Torque Model 0.0 to 30.0 The torque boost function is generally
boost de 0.0%: Automatic applicable to the AC drive at low
pend torque boost frequency. In V/f control mode, the output
ent torque of the AC drive is proportional to
the frequency. Under the condition of low
frequency, the torque of the motor is very
low when the motor runs at low speed.
The output voltage of the AC drive can be
increased through this parameter, thereby
increasing the current and output torque.
Set this parameter to a moderate level to
avoid triggering the overload protection.
F3-02 Cutoff 50.00 0.00 Hz to the When the running frequency reaches the
frequency Hz maximum cutoff frequency of torque boost, the
of torque frequency torque boost function is disabled.
boost

‑567‑
Function Application

Para. Function De Value Range Description

fault
F3-03 Multi- 0.00 0.00 Hz to F3-05 -
point V/f Hz
frequency
1
F3-04 Multi- 0.0% 0.0% to 100.0%
point V/f
voltage 1
F3-05 Multi- 0.00 F3-03 to F3-07
point V/f Hz
frequency
2
F3-06 Multi- 0.0% 0.0% to 100.0%
point V/f
voltage 2
F3-07 Multi- 0.00 F3-05 to rated
point V/f Hz motor frequency
frequency (F1-04)
3
F3-08 Multi- 0.0% 0.0% to 100.0%
point V/f
voltage 3

Linear V/f curve

The following figure shows a general constant-torque linear V/f curve.

Figure 3-37 General constant-torque linear V/f curve

When the frequency is below the rated level, the output voltage changes linearly with
the output frequency. This curve is applicable to general mechanical drive scenarios
such as large-inertia fan acceleration, punch presses, centrifuges, and pumps.

Multi-point V/f Curve

The following figure shows a user-defined multi-point V/f curve.

‑568‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-38 User-defined multi-point V/f curve

Parameters F3-03 to F3-08 are used to define a multi-point V/f curve. In this case,
frequency points range from 0.00 Hz to the rated motor frequency. The voltage points
range from 0.0% to 100%, corresponding to the voltage range from 0 V to the rated
motor voltage. Generally, the multi-point V/f curve is set based on load characteristics
of the motor. Ensure the following conditions are met: F3-03 ≤ F3-05 ≤ F3-07. To
ensure correct setting, the AC drive restricts the relationship of F3-03, F3-05, and F3-
07. Set F3-07 first, then F3-05, and finally F3-03.

Square V/f curve

The following figure shows a variable torque square V/f curve.

Figure 3-39 Variable torque square V/f curve

Below the rated frequency, the relationship between the output voltage and the
output frequency of the AC drive changes according to the 2-power curve. This curve
is applicable to scenarios with light loads that seldom change, such as fans and water
pumps.

‑569‑
Function Application

Table 3–23 Parameters of V/f separation curve

Para. Function De Value Range Description

fault
F3-13 Voltage 0 0: Digital This parameter is used to set the target
source for setting (F3-14) voltage in the voltage and frequency
V/f 1: AI1 separation mode.
separation 2: AI2 0: Digital setting (F3-14)
3: AI3 F3-14 (voltage digital setting for V/f
4: Pulse separation) can be used to set the V/f
reference (DI5) separation voltage.
5: Multi- 1: AI1
reference The V/f separation voltage is input through
6: Simple PLC AI1 by current or voltage signal. The
7: PID frequency is calculated according to the set
8: AI curve.
Communica 2: AI2
tion The V/f separation voltage is input through
Note: The AI2 by current or voltage signal. The
value of frequency is calculated according to the set
100.0% AI curve.
corresponds 3: AI3
to the rated The V/f separation voltage is input through
motor voltage. AI3 by current or voltage signal. The
frequency is calculated according to the set
AI curve.
Contin Continued Con Continued 4: Pulse reference (DI5)
ued tinu The V/f separation voltage is set through
ed DI5. The frequency is calculated based on
the curve of relationship between the pulse
frequency and running frequency.
5: Multi-reference
When multi-reference is configured as the
source for V/f separation voltage, setpoints
can be configured by grouping different DI
states. The four multi-reference terminals
can provide 16 state combinations,
corresponding to 16 reference values
(percentage x maximum frequency) of
parameters in group FC.

‑570‑
 Function Application

Para. Function De Value Range Description

fault
Contin Continued Con Continued 6: Simple PLC
ued tinu The V/f separation voltage is set by simple
ed PLC. For details, see the function
description of simple PLC.
7: PID
The V/f separation voltage is set through
PID. For details, see descriptions of the PID
function.
9: Communication
The main frequency value is set through
communication. The running frequency is
input through remote communication. The
AC drive must be equipped with a
communication card to communicate with
the host controller. This mode is suitable for
remote control or centralized control on
multiple devices or systems.
F3-14 Voltage 0V 0 V to rated The reference value is from 0 V to the rated
digital motor voltage voltage.
setting for (F1-02)
V/f
separation
F3-15 Voltage 0.0s 0.0s to 1000.0s This parameter indicates the time required
rise time of Note: This for the voltage to change from 0 V to the
V/f parameter rated motor voltage.
separation indicates the
time required
for the voltage
to change
from 0 V to the
rated motor
voltage.

‑571‑
Function Application

Para. Function De Value Range Description

fault
F3-16 Voltage 0.0s 0.0s to 1000.0s This parameter indicates the time required
decline Note: This for the output voltage to decline from the
time of V/f parameter set V/f separation voltage to 0.
separation indicates the
time required
for the voltage
to change
from 0 V to the
rated motor
voltage.
F3-17 Stop mode 0 0: Frequency 0: Frequency and voltage decline to 0
selection and voltage independently.
for V/f decline to 0 1: Frequency declines after voltage declines
separation independent to 0.
ly.
1: Frequency
declines after
voltage
declines to 0.

The voltage rise time of V/f separation is the time required for the output voltage to
increase from 0 to the rated motor voltage. It is t1 in the following figure.
The voltage decline time of V/f separation is the time required for the output voltage
to decline from the rated motor voltage to 0. It is t2 in the following figure.

Figure 3-40 V/f separation curve

3.4.2 Output Current (Torque) Limit

During acceleration, operation at constant speed, or deceleration, if the current
exceeds the overcurrent stall action current (default: 150%, indicating 1.5 times the
rated AC drive current), the current limit mechanism is activated. In this case, the
output frequency decreases until the current drops below the overcurrent stall action

‑572‑
 Function Application

current. Then, the output frequency increases toward the target frequency. Therefore,
the acceleration is prolonged. If the actual acceleration time cannot meet your
requirement, increase the value of overcurrent stall action current (F3-18)
accordingly.

Figure 3-41 Overcurrent stall action

Table 3–24 Related parameters

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
When the motor current reaches this value, the AC drive
V/f overcurrent stall starts the overcurrent stall function. The default value is
F3-18 150% 50% to 200%
action current 150%, corresponding to 1.5 times the rated current of
the AC drive.
V/f overcurrent stall 0: Disabled
F3-19 1 Used to enable/disable the V/f overcurrent stall function.
selection 1: Enabled
When the current exceeds the overcurrent stall action
current, the overcurrent stall function is enabled and the
output frequency decreases. After the current falls below
V/f overcurrent stall
F3-20 20 0 to 100 the overcurrent stall action current, the output
suppression gain
frequency increases to the target frequency, which
prolongs the actual acceleration automatically. A greater
value of this parameter means better suppression effect.

Compensation
This parameter is used to reduce the overcurrent stall
coefficient of V/f
action current during high-speed operation. It is invalid
F3-21 speed multiplying 50% 50% to 200%
when set to 50%. The recommended value for F3-18 in
overcurrent stall
the field-weakening range is 100%.
action current

When the frequency is high, motor drive current is small, and overcurrent stall action
current can result in greater motor speed dip compared with situations when the

‑573‑
Function Application

frequency is below the rated level. To improve motor running performance, lower the
overcurrent stall action current for situations when the frequency is above the rated
level. This helps to improve acceleration performance and prevent motor stall in high-
frequency applications with large load inertia multiple field weakening requirements,
such as centrifuges.
When the frequency is above the rated level, overcurrent stall action current = (fn/fs) x
k x LimitCur
In the formula, fs is the running frequency, fn is the rated motor frequency, k is the
value of F3-21 (compensation coefficient of speed multiplying overcurrent stall action
current), and LimitCur is the value of F3-18 (overcurrent stall action current).

Figure 3-42 Speed multiplying overcurrent stall action current

Note
For high-power motors with carrier frequency below 2 kHz, lower the overcurrent stall ac-
tion current. Otherwise, the pulse-by-pulse current limit function is enabled before the
overcurrent stall prevention function as ripple current increases, resulting in insufficient tor-
que output.

3.4.3 Overvoltage Stall Suppression

When the bus voltage exceeds the overvoltage stall suppression action voltage (F3-
22), the motor becomes regenerative (motor speed > output frequency). In this case,
overvoltage stall suppression is triggered to prevent overvoltage trips by adjusting the
output frequency to extend the deceleration time. If the actual deceleration time
cannot satisfy the requirement, increase the overexcitation gain as appropriate.

‑574‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-43 Overvoltage stall suppression action

Para. No. Name Default Value Range Description

V/f overvoltage
200.0 V to The function of F3-22 is similar
F3-22 stall suppression 770.0 V
2000.0 V to that of F9-04.
action voltage
V/f overvoltage 0: Disabled 0: Disabled
F3-23 1
stall suppression 1: Enabled 1: Enabled (default)
Increasing F3-24 will improve
Frequency gain the bus voltage control effect,
for V/f but the output frequency will
F3-24 30 0 to 100
overvoltage stall fluctuate. If the output
suppression frequency fluctuates greatly,
reduce F3-24 as appropriate.
This parameter is used to
Voltage gain for V/ suppress the bus voltage.
F3-25 f overvoltage stall 30 0 to 100 Increasing the parameter
suppression value reduces the overshoot
of the bus voltage.
The running frequency may
Frequency rise
increase when overvoltage
threshold during
F3-26 5 Hz 0 Hz to 50 Hz stall suppression is enabled.
overvoltage stall
This parameter limits the rise
suppression
of the running frequency.
A larger overexcitation gain
indicates better suppression
effect. When a braking
V/f overexcitation resistor, braking unit, or
F3-10 64 0 to 200
gain energy feedback unit is used,
set this parameter to 0.
Otherwise, overcurrent may
occur during operation.
Model A larger oscillation gain
V/f oscillation
F3-11 depend 0 to 100 indicates better suppression
suppression gain
ent effect.

‑575‑
Function Application

Note
Observe the following requirements when using the braking resistor or energy feedback
unit.

● Set F3–10 (Overexcitation gain) to 0. Failure to comply may lead to overcurrent

during operation.
● Set F3–23 (Overvoltage stall selection) to 0. Failure to comply may prolong the
deceleration time.

3.4.4 Speed Loop

The speed loop PI parameters are divided into two groups: low speed and high speed.
When the running frequency is lower than F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1), the speed
loop PI parameters are adjusted by F2-00 and F2-01. When the running frequency is
higher than F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2), the speed loop PI parameters are
adjusted by F2-03 and F2-04. If the running frequency is between switchover
frequency 1 and switchover frequency 2, the speed loop PI parameters switch linearly
between the two groups of PI parameters.

Figure 3-44 Switchover of speed loop PI parameters

You can adjust the dynamic speed response characteristic of vector control by setting
the proportional factor and integral time of the speed regulator.
Increasing the proportional gain or shortening the integral time can speed up
dynamic response of the speed loop. However, excessively large proportional gain or
excessively short integral time may cause system oscillation.
If the factory settings cannot meet your requirements, increase the proportional gain
first to ensure that the system does not oscillate, and then reduce the integral time to
ensure quick system response and small overshoot.

‑576‑
 Function Application

Note
Improper PI parameter settings may lead to a high overshoot. Even worse, overvoltage may
occur when overshoot drops.

Increasing the value of F2-07 can improve motor stability, but slows down dynamic
response. Reducing the value of F2-07 can speed up dynamic response, but may
cause motor oscillation. The default settings are applicable in most cases.

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

F2-00 Low- 30 1 to 200 This is the PID control parameter Kp for
speed the speed loop, which affects the
speed response speed of the motor speed. A
loop Kp larger Kp value indicates higher sensitivity
and more intensive tuning. A smaller Kp
value indicates lower sensitivity and less
intensive tuning. The low-speed speed
loop Kp is effective at low speed.
F2-01 Low- 0.500s 0.001s to The reciprocal of the speed loop integral
speed 10.000s time constant is the integral gain. The
speed speed loop integral time constant affects
loop Ti the steady-state speed error of the motor
and the stability of the speed loop system.
If the speed loop integral time constant
increases, the speed loop response slows
down. For quicker response, a larger
speed loop proportional gain is required.
The low-speed speed loop Ti is effective at
low speed.
F2-02 Switch 5.00 Hz 0.00 to F2-05 Speed loop PI parameters are divided into
over low-speed and high-speed groups. If the
frequency running frequency is lower than
1 switchover frequency 1 (F2-02), the speed
loop PI parameters are adjusted by F2-00
and F2-01. If the running frequency is
higher than switchover frequency 2 (F2-
05), the speed loop PI parameters are
adjusted by F2-03 and F3-04. If the
running frequency is between switchover
frequency 1 and switchover frequency 2,
the speed loop PI parameters switch
linearly between the two groups of PI
parameters. This parameter must be set
to a value lower than switchover
frequency 2 (F2-05).

‑577‑
Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

F2-03 High- 20 1 to 200 This is the PID control parameter Kp for
speed the speed loop, which affects the
speed response speed of the motor speed. A
loop Kp larger Kp value indicates higher sensitivity
and more intensive tuning. A smaller Kp
value indicates lower sensitivity and less
intensive tuning. The high-speed speed
loop Kp is effective at high speed.
F2-04 High- 1.00s 0.01s to 10.00s The reciprocal of the speed loop integral
speed time constant is the integral gain. The
speed speed loop integral time constant affects
loop Ti the steady-state speed error of the motor
and the stability of the speed loop system.
If the speed loop integral time constant
increases, the speed loop response slows
down. For quicker response, a larger
speed loop proportional gain is required.
The high-speed speed loop Ti is effective
at high speed.
F2-05 Switch 10.00 F2-02 to F0-10 Speed loop PI parameters are divided into
over Hz low-speed and high-speed groups. If the
frequency running frequency is lower than
2 switchover frequency 1 (F2-02), the speed
loop PI parameters are adjusted by F2-00
and F2-01. If the running frequency is
higher than switchover frequency 2 (F2-
05), the speed loop PI parameters are
adjusted by F2-03 and F3-04. If the
running frequency is between switchover
frequency 1 and switchover frequency 2,
the speed loop PI parameters switch
linearly between the two groups of PI
parameters. This parameter must be set
to a value lower than switchover
frequency 2 (F2-05).
F2-07 Speed 0.004s 0.000s to In FVC mode (F0-01 set to 1), the speed
feedback 0.100s loop feedback filter time is effective.
filter time Adjusting the parameter can improve the
motor stability. A larger value indicates
better motor stability but slower dynamic
response, and a smaller value indicates
faster dynamic response. An excessively
small parameter value may lead to motor
oscillation. Generally, the motor stability
can meet requirements, and you do not
need to modify this parameter.

‑578‑
 Function Application

3.4.5 Slip Adjustment in Vector Control Mode

In vector control mode (F0-01 is set to 0 or 1), this parameter can be used to adjust
the speed stability accuracy. For example, increase this parameter when the running
frequency of the motor is lower than the output frequency of the AC drive.
In FVC (F0-01 is set to 1) mode, this parameter can be used to adjust output current of
the AC drive. For example, decrease this parameter gradually when a high-rate AC
drive is used to control a motor with low load capacity. Note: The default settings is
applicable in most cases.

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
In SVC mode, this parameter can be used to adjust the speed
stability accuracy. For example, increase this parameter
when the running frequency of the motor is lower than the
VC slip output frequency of the AC drive. In FVC mode, this
F2-06 compensation 100% 50% to 200% parameter can be used to adjust output current of the AC
gain drive. For example, decrease this parameter gradually when
a high-rate AC drive is used to control a motor with low load
capacity. You do not need to change the value of this
parameter in most cases.

3.4.6 Over-Excitation in Vector Control Mode

For high-inertia loads, vector control over-excitation can speed up the motor
deceleration. A larger over-excitation gain means better improvement. However,
vector control over-excitation increases the output current of the AC drive.

Para. No. Function Default Value Range Description

VC deceleration over-
F2-08 64 0 to 200 -
excitation gain

3.4.7 Torque Upper Limit

The following table describes the torque upper limit settings for vector control (FVC or
SVC).

‑579‑
Function Application

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
0: Digital setting (F2-10)
The torque upper limit in speed control is input through digital
terminals and the value is determined by F2-10 (digital setting
of torque upper limit in speed control).
1: AI1
The torque upper limit in speed control is input through AI1.
The frequency is calculated based on the current or voltage
signal input through AI1 according to the set AI curve.
2: AI2
The torque upper limit in speed control is input through AI2.
The frequency is calculated based on the current or voltage
signal input through AI2 according to the set AI curve.
3: AI3
0: Digital setting (F2-10) The torque upper limit in speed control is input through AI3.
Torque 1: AI1 The frequency is calculated based on the current or voltage
upper limit 2: AI2 signal input through AI3 according to the set AI curve.
source in 3: AI3 4: Pulse reference (DI5)
F2-09 0
speed 4: Pulse reference (DI5) The torque upper limit in speed control is input through DI5
control 5: Communication (pulse frequency). The frequency is calculated based on the
(motoring) 6: Min. (AI1, AI2) curve of relationship between the pulse frequency and running
7: Max. (AI1, AI2) frequency.
5: Communication
The main frequency value is set through communication. The
running frequency is input through remote communication.
The AC drive must be equipped with a communication card to
communicate with the host controller. This channel is
applicable to remote control and centralized control of
multiple devices or systems.
6: Min. (AI1, AI2)
The torque upper limit is the minimum input through AI1 and
AI2.
7: Max. (AI1, AI2)
The torque upper limit is the maximum input through AI1 and
AI2.
Digital
setting of
torque
The torque upper limit under the motoring state takes the
F2-10 upper limit 150.0% 0.0% to 200.0%
rated current of AC drive as the base value.
in speed
control
(motoring)

‑580‑
 Function Application

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
0: Digital setting (F2-10)
The torque upper limit in speed control is input through digital
terminals and the value is determined by F2-10 (digital setting
of torque upper limit in speed control).
1: AI1
The torque upper limit in speed control is input through AI1.
The frequency is calculated based on the current or voltage
signal input through AI1 according to the set AI curve.
2: AI2
The torque upper limit in speed control is input through AI2.
The frequency is calculated based on the current or voltage
signal input through AI2 according to the set AI curve.
3: AI3
The torque upper limit in speed control is input through AI3.
0: Digital setting (F2-10) The frequency is calculated based on the current or voltage
1: AI1 signal input through AI3 according to the set AI curve.
Torque
2: AI2 4: Pulse reference (DI5)
upper limit
3: AI3 The torque upper limit in speed control is input through DI5
source in
F2-11 0 4: Pulse reference (DI5) (pulse frequency). The frequency is calculated based on the
speed
5: Communication curve of relationship between the pulse frequency and running
control
6: Min. (AI1, AI2) frequency.
(generating)
7: Max. (AI1, AI2) 5: Communication
8: Digital setting (F2-12) The main frequency value is set through communication. The
running frequency is input through remote communication.
The AC drive must be equipped with a communication card to
communicate with the host controller. This channel is
applicable to remote control and centralized control of
multiple devices or systems.
6: Min. (AI1, AI2)
The torque upper limit is the minimum input through AI1 and
AI2.
7: Max. (AI1, AI2)
The torque upper limit is the maximum input through AI1 and
AI2.
8: Digital setting (F2-12)
When F2-12 is set to 8, the torque upper limit in speed control
is input through digital terminals.

Torque
upper limit
settings in The torque upper limit under the generating state takes the
F2-12 150.0% 0.0% to 200.0%
speed rated current of AC drive as the base value.
control
(generating)

Eight torque upper limit sources are available in speed control mode. In motoring
state, the torque upper limit source is selected through F2-09; in generating state, the
torque upper limit source is selected through F2-11.

‑581‑
Function Application

In speed control mode, if F2-11 is set to 1 to 8, the torque upper limit is distinguished
between the motoring state and generating state. In motoring state, the full range of
torque upper limit is set through F2-10. In generating state, the full range of torque
upper limit is set through F2-12.

Figure 3-45 Torque upper limit in speed control mode

Para. No. Function Default Value Range Description

Power limit selection during 0: Disabled

F2-53 0 -
generating 1: Enabled

F2-54 Power upper limit during generating Model dependent 0.0% to 200.0% -

In applications such as cam, quick acceleration/deceleration and sudden unloading

without using a braking resistor, enable the power limit during generating to reduce
bus voltage overshoot during motor braking so as to prevent overvoltage. F2-54
(power upper limit during generating) is a percentage to the rated motor power. If
overvoltage still occurs after power limit during generating is enabled, decrease F2-
54.

3.4.8 Torque Control

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

A0-00 Speed/Torque 0 0: Speed control In FVC or SVC mode, speed
control mode 1: Torque control control and torque control
modes are available.
A0-01 Torque reference 0 0: Digital setting This parameter is used to
source (A0-03) set the torque setting
1: AI1 command source. Eight
2: AI2 torque setting channels are
3: AI3 available.
4: Pulse reference
5:
Communication
(1000H)
6: Min. (AI1, AI2)
7: Max. (AI1, AI2)

‑582‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

A0-03 Torque digital 100.0% -200.0% to Digital setting in the torque
setting +200.0% control mode The torque
reference is a relative value.
The value 100.0%
corresponds to the rated
motor torque. Check U0-06
to obtain the motor output
torque. The torque value
range is –200.0% to
+200.0%, which means that
the maximum torque of the
AC drive is twice the rated
motor torque.
When the parameter value
is positive, the AC drive runs
in the forward direction.
When the parameter value
is negative, the AC drive
runs in the reverse
direction.
A0-04 Torque filter time 0.000s 0s to 5.000s Torque filter time
A0-05 Speed limit digital 0.0% -120.0% to -
setting +120.0%
A0-07 Torque 1.00s 0.00s to 650.00s -
acceleration time
A0-08 Torque 1.00s 0.00s to 650.00s -
deceleration time
A0-09 Speed limit 0 0: Set through A0- -
reference source 05
1: Frequency
source setting
A0-10 Speed limit offset 5.00 0 to max. -
frequency (F0-10)
A0-11 Effective mode of 1 0: Bidirectional -
speed limit offset offset effective
1: Unidirectional
offset effective
2: Window mode
A0-12 Frequency 1.0s 0.0s to 6500.0s -
acceleration time

‑583‑
Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

A0-13 Frequency 1.0s 0.0s to 6500.0s -
deceleration time
A0-14 Torque mode 1 0: No switchover -
switchover 1: Switchover to
speed control at
stop
2: Target torque
at stop being 0

Figure 3-46 Torque control system

1. Selecting speed/torque control mode (A0-00)
Parameter A0-00 determines whether the AC drive is in speed control or torque
control mode.

Multi-functional DIs provide two torque control functions: torque control disabling
(function 29) and speed/torque control switchover (function 46). The two terminals
must be used together with parameter A0-00 for switchover between speed control
and torque control.

When the speed control/torque control terminal (function 46 ) is disabled, the

control mode is determined by A0-00. When the terminal is enabled, the control
mode is reverse to that set by A0-00.

When the torque control disabling terminal is enabled, the AC drive works in speed
control mode.

2. Setting the torque reference in torque control (A0-01, A0-03)

A0-01 is used to select a torque reference source from eight supported sources.

The torque reference is a relative value. The value 100.0% corresponds to the rated
motor torque. Check U0-06 to obtain the motor output torque. The torque value
range is –200.0% to +200.0%, which means that the maximum torque of the AC
drive is twice the rated motor torque.

‑584‑
 Function Application

3. Setting the frequency upper limit in torque control (A0-05, A0-09, A0-10, and A0-11)
In torque control mode, the frequency upper limit can be set through A0-05 or the
frequency source, depending on the value of A0-09.

4. Setting the frequency upper limit acceleration time (A0-12) and deceleration time
(A0-13)
In torque control mode, if the load torque is lower than the motor output torque,
the motor speed keeps increasing. To prevent runaway or other incidents of the
mechanical system, limit the maximum motor speed in torque control mode. That
is, set the frequency upper limit in torque control.

5. Setting the torque acceleration/deceleration time (A0-07, A0-08)

In torque control, the difference between the motor output torque and the load
torque determines the speed change rate of the motor and load. Therefore, the
motor rotational speed may change sharply, resulting in noise or excessive
mechanical stress. Setting an appropriate torque acceleration/deceleration time
can ensure stable change of the motor rotational speed. The torque acceleration
time is the time required for the output torque to increase from 0 to A0-03, and the
torque deceleration time is the time required for the output torque to decrease
from A0-03 to 0.

For torque control with low startup torque, do not set the torque acceleration/
deceleration time. In a scenario requiring fast torque change, set the torque
acceleration/deceleration time to 0.00s.

For example, assume that one load is driven by two motors. To balance the load of
the two motors, set one drive as the master in speed control and set the other one
as the slave in torque control. The slave will follow the output torque of the master
as its torque reference, which requires quick response to the master output torque.
In this case, set acceleration/deceleration time of the slave in torque control to
0.00s.

Table 3–25 Speed limit/Speed limit offset

Item Operating Condition

Command Forward Forward Forward Forward
Torque + - - +
reference
direction
Speed limit + - + -
direction
Normal Forward Reverse Forward Reverse
operation
direction

‑585‑
Function Application

Item Operating Condition

Unidirectional
speed limit
offset
(A0-11 is set to
1)

Bidirectional
speed limit
offset
(A0-11 is set to
0)

Example

3.4.9 Current Loop

Current loop PI parameters for vector control are divided into low-speed and high-
speed groups. These parameters can be automatically obtained through auto-tuning
on all parameters of asynchronous motor and generally do not need to be modified.
The dimension of the current loop integral regulator is integral gain rather than
integral time. A large current loop PI gain may result in oscillation of the entire control
loop. In the case of severe current oscillation or torque fluctuation, manually reduce
the PI proportional gain or integral gain.

Para. No. Function Default Value Range Description

F2-13 Low-speed current loop Kp adjustment 1.0 0.1 to 10.0

The value is obtained
F2-14 Low-speed current loop Ki adjustment 1.0 0.1 to 10.0
automatically through motor
F2-15 High-speed current loop Kp adjustment 1.0 0.1 to 10.0
auto-tuning.
F2-16 High-speed current loop Ki adjustment 1.0 0.1 to 10.0

‑586‑
 Function Application

3.4.10Improving Performance of Field-Weakening Range

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
Indicates the boost capacity on the basis of maximum
voltage of the AC drive.
Increasing F2-21 improves the maximum loading
capacity in motor field-weakening range, but increases
Maximum output voltage 100% to
F2-21 105% motor current ripple and motor temperature.
coefficient 110%
Decreasing F2-21 weakens the maximum loading
capacity in motor field-weakening range, but reduces
motor current ripple and motor temperature.
Generally, this parameter needs no adjustment.

3.4.11FVC Running and Performance Improvement

Table 3–26 Brief procedure for setting the speed control mode in FVC mode

Procedure Para. Description

Check the AC drive wiring. - If the AC drive reports E19.00 during
Set motor parameters. F1-01, F1-02, F1-03, motor auto-tuning, check whether the
F1-04, F1-05 AC drive wiring and motor parameter
settings are correct.
Set the encoder type and F1-27, F1-28 If the AC drive reports E20.00, check
pulses per revolution. whether the encoder and PG card are
working properly.
Select a control mode. F0-01 -
Perform the motor auto- F1-37 Dynamic auto-tuning on all
tuning. parameters of the asynchronous
motor takes some time. Wait until this
process is completed before
proceeding to the next step. Dynamic
auto-tuning on all parameters of the
asynchronous motor is recommended
(set F1-37 to 2). Before performing
auto-tuning, remove the load from the
motor so that the motor can reach a
high speed. If the load cannot be
removed from the motor (for example,
motor of a crane), use static auto-
tuning on all motor parameters (set
F1-37 to 3).
Set the command source F0-02, F0-03 -
and frequency reference
source.
Perform a trial run. A0-00 = 0 -

‑587‑
Function Application

Table 3–27 Brief procedure of setting the torque control mode in FVC mode

Procedure Para. Description

Check the AC drive wiring. - If the AC drive reports E19.00 during
Set motor parameters. F1-01, F1-02, F1-03, motor auto-tuning, check whether the
F1-04, F1-05 AC drive wiring and motor parameter
settings are correct.
Set the encoder type and F1-27, F1-28 If the AC drive reports E20.00, check
pulses per revolution. whether the encoder and PG card are
working properly.
Select a control mode. F0-01 -
Perform the motor auto- F1-37 Dynamic auto-tuning on all
tuning. parameters of the asynchronous
motor takes some time. Wait until this
process is completed before
proceeding to the next step. Dynamic
auto-tuning on all parameters of the
asynchronous motor is recommended
(set F1-37 to 2). Before performing
auto-tuning, remove the load from
the motor so that the motor can reach
a high speed. If the load cannot be
removed from the motor (for
example, motor of a crane), use static
auto-tuning on all motor parameters
(set F1-37 to 3).
Set the command source. F0-02 -
Set the torque control A0-00, A0-01, A0- -
parameters. 03, A0-05
Perform a trial run. - -

Speed loop settings

If the motor oscillates or generates abnormal noise when running below the rated
frequency, the speed loop gains are set too high. In this case, reduce the speed loop
gains by reducing the values of F2-00 and F2-03 and increasing the values of F2-01
and F2-04.
If the system speed overshoot is high during rapid acceleration, increase the speed
loop proportional gain Kp by increasing the values of F2-00 and F2-03 and reduce the
speed loop integral gain Ki by increasing the values of F2-01 and F2-04.
In a winding/unwinding scenario, the roll diameter changes in inverse proportion to
the motor speed. Therefore, when the roll diameter is large, increase the speed loop
gain (by increasing the value of F2-00 and reducing the value of F2-01) at low speed to
ensure dynamic response of the system.

‑588‑
 Function Application

For a load running at an extremely low speed (for example, a milling machine running
at 0.01 Hz), ensure smooth running by increasing the speed loop gains, especially the
integral gain (by increasing the value of F2-00 and reducing the value of F2-01).

Note
In scenarios with poor encoder feedback signals, the speed loop gains cannot be too high.
Otherwise, the dynamic response speed of the system is affected. In this case, first take
measures to improve the quality of encoder feedback signals (for example, separate power
cables of the motor from signal cables of the encoder, and ensure good grounding of the
system). Otherwise, directly reducing the speed loop gains will slow down dynamic re-
sponse of the system, degrading the system operation performance.

Current loop settings

Current loop parameters can be automatically obtained after auto-tuning on all
parameters of the asynchronous motor and generally do not need to be modified.
However, you can fine tune these parameters in the following conditions:
When a motor running in FVC mode oscillates or generates abnormal noise, and this
problem persists after values of the speed loop parameters are reduced, moderately
reduce values of the current loop parameters (F2-13, F2-14, F2-15, and F2-16).
If the system requires a low overshoot, values of the speed loop parameters cannot
be too small. In this case, if the motor oscillates or generates abnormal noise when
running in FVC mode, moderately reduce values of the current loop parameters (F2-
13, F2-14, F2-15, and F2-16).

Solutions to exceptions during high-speed running in FVC

FVC oscillation or running exceptions may occur when a motor runs at a high
frequency (for example, above 200 Hz). In this case, use the V/f control mode at the
same frequency and check whether the feedback frequency (U0-29) is the same as the
frequency reference. If there is a large difference (greater than 4 Hz) between the two
frequencies, the cause may be encoder signal distortion (non-orthogonal or abnormal
duty cycle) or signal filtering on the PG card. Take the following measures:
Replace the encoder. Check whether the original encoder is damaged or installed
incorrectly, and whether the encoder model supports the current pulse frequency.
If measures have been taken to prevent encoder signal distortion during high-speed
operation, high filter capacitance of the PG card may cause a failure in receiving
signals. In this case, set F1-29 properly for PG signal filtering.

Changing acceleration/deceleration time in FVC control mode

During rapid acceleration/deceleration, the actual acceleration/deceleration time is
longer than the preset value. To shorten the acceleration/deceleration time, take the
following measures:

‑589‑
Function Application

To shorten the motor acceleration time, increase the torque upper limit in FVC
control (moderately increase the value of F2-10, but in no case greater than 180%).
Although increasing the torque upper limit can shorten the motor acceleration time,
this operation leads to an increase of the motor current, which is more likely to cause
faults such as overload.
Use appropriate braking resistors to shorten the deceleration time.

Limiting bus voltage to prevent overvoltage in FVC control mode

In high inertia or rapid deceleration scenarios, overvoltage often occurs during
deceleration. The optimization measures are the same as those used in V/f control
mode. The same parameters are used in the two modes.

‑590‑
 Function Application

3.4.12Auxiliary Control

Para. No. Function Default Value Range Description

The AC drive supports two PWM modes:

CPWM and DPWM. When the running
frequency is higher than A5‑00 (switchover
frequency), the DPWM mode is used. When
DPWM switchover the running frequency is lower than A5‑00
0 to max. frequency (F0-
A5-00 frequency upper 12.00 Hz (switchover frequency), the CPWM mode is
10)
limit used. The DPWM mode can improve the AC
drive efficiency, whereas the CPWM mode
can reduce motor noise.
Increasing parameter A5-00 to max.
frequency will reduce motor noise.

When the result of the carrier frequency

divided by the running frequency is less than
10, output current oscillation or large
current harmonic may occur. To reduce the
current harmonic, set this parameter to 1
(synchronous modulation).
0: Asynchronous modulation
This mode is used when the carrier
frequency is not synchronized with the
0: Asynchronous signal wave frequency. Usually, the carrier
modulation frequency is kept unchanged, and the
1: Synchronous carrier ratio changes with the signal wave
PWM modulation modulation frequency.
A5-01 0
mode 2: Synchronous 1: Synchronous modulation
modulation mode 2 This mode is used when the carrier
3: Synchronous frequency is synchronized with the signal
modulation mode 3 wave frequency.
Usually, the carrier frequency and signal
frequency change simultaneously, and
therefore the carrier ratio remains
unchanged. In this case, a set number of
transverse SPWM pulses are generated in a
given period, leading to good symmetry of
the equivalent sine wave.
2: Synchronous modulation mode 2
3: Synchronous modulation mode 3

To reduce motor noise, set A5‑03 to a value

other than 0. A large value means better
effect of noise reduction. However, an
0: Random PWM invalid
Random PWM excessively-large value may affect motor
A5-03 0 1 to 10: Random PWM
depth control. Therefore, set this parameter to 1
depth
first during commissioning and then
increase it by 1 each time based on the field
application.

‑591‑
Function Application

3.4.13Encoder Signal Processing

The PG card of the AC drive supports programmable filtering of encoder signals.

Para. No. Function Default Value Range Description

F1-29 PG signal filter 1 0 to 3 This parameter is used to set the filter mode.

● 0: Non-adaptive filter
The filter coefficient of the PG card is fixed and small. This filter mode is applicable
to scenarios with low or no interference, or high-speed applications.

● 1: Adaptive filter
The filter coefficient of the PG card can be adjusted automatically. This filter mode
has a strong interference-resistant capability, especially when the encoder
feedback frequency is lower than 100 kHz. This mode is suitable for scenarios with
high interference. This mode is enabled by default.

● 2: Fixed interlock
This mode adds the capability to eliminate encoder feedback signal edge jitter on
the basis of adaptive filter. It is applicable to scenarios where encoder feedback
signals have jitter at the edge.

● 3: Automatic interlock
The PG card automatically switches between adaptive filter and fixed interlock to
adapt to zero-speed running and non-zero-speed running. This mode prevents the
fixed interlock function from mistakenly recognizing and eliminating valid signals
as edge jitter during zero-speed running.

Table 3–28 Encoder disconnection detection

Para. No. Function Default Value Range Description

0: Disabled
F1-36 PG open circuit detection 0 -
1: Enabled

The PG card of the MD500-PLUS series AC drive supports encoder disconnection

detection. This function is valid only for encoders with differential interfaces, and can
be used to detect signals of phase A, phase B, and phase Z. If the PG card is
connected only to phase A and phase B, the AC drive reports E20.00. In this case,
disable encoder disconnection detection. Otherwise, the AC drive keeps reporting this
error.

‑592‑
 Function Application

3.4.14Synchronous Motor in PMVVC Mode

Param Name Value Range Default Description

eter
F0-01 Motor 1 control 0: Sensorless 0 This is open-loop vector
mode vector control control applied to high-
(SVC) performance control
scenarios. One AC drive can
drive only one motor. It is
used for loads such as
machine tools, centrifuges,
wire drawing machines,
and injection molding
machines.
1: Feedback vector This is closed-loop vector
control (FVC) control. An encoder must
be installed at the motor
end, and the AC drive must
be equipped with a PG card
of the same type as the
encoder. It is applicable to
scenarios requiring high-
precision speed control or
torque control. One AC
drive can drive only one
motor. It is used for loads
such as high-speed paper
machines, cranes, and
elevators.
2: Voltage/ This is open-loop speed
frequency (V/f) control applicable to
control scenarios with low
requirements on load
control performance, such
as fans and pumps. If one
AC drive controls multiple
motors, only the V/f control
mode can be used.
5: Open-loop It is suitable for loads with
speed control of low precision
synchronous requirements, such as fans
motors (PMVVC) and pumps.
F1-20 Filter time 0.003 V to 65.535 V 0.100 V This parameter specifies
constant (for VVC) the filter time constant in
VVC mode.
F1-21 Oscillation 0 to 65535 100 This parameter specifies
suppression gain oscillation suppression
(for VVC) gain in VVC mode.

‑593‑
Function Application

Param Name Value Range Default Description

eter
F1-24 Number of motor 0 to 65535 2 -
pole pairs
F3-01 Torque boost 0.0%: Automatic Model The torque boost function
torque boost depend is generally applicable to
0.1% to 30.0% ent the AC drive at low
frequency. The output
torque of the AC drive in V/f
control mode is
proportional to the
frequency. Under the
condition of low frequency,
the torque of the motor is
very low when the motor
runs at low speed. The
output voltage of the AC
drive can be increased
through this parameter,
thereby increasing the
current and output torque.
Set this parameter to a
moderate level to avoid
triggering the overload
protection.
A9-40 Low-speed closed- 0: Disabled 0 -
loop current 1: Enabled
selection (for VVC)
A9-41 Low-speed closed- 30% to 200% 50% -
loop current (for (rated motor
VVC) current as the
base value)
A9-42 Oscillation 0 to 500 100% -
suppression
damping
coefficient (for
VVC)
A9-43 Initial position 0 to 5 0 -
compensation
angle (for VVC)

3.4.15Synchronous Motor Electromagnetic Shorting

Electromagnetic Shorting at Start/Stop

The time sequence of start and stop signals for the "decelerate to stop" or "coast to
stop" mode is shown in the following figure.

‑594‑
 Function Application

● Set the "electromagnetic shorting time at stop" to a non-zero value to enable the
electromagnetic shorting function. In this case, electromagnetic shorting is
performed with the maximum current limit (relative to the rated peak current of
the motor) defined by F6-26 after the motor decelerates to the frequency defined
by F6-11. The electromagnetic shorting function is also limited by the rated peak
current of the AC drive.
● DC braking is not available. Only electromagnetic shorting is available for braking
of synchronous motors.

Figure 3-47 Timing diagram of start/stop function

DI terminal electromagnetic shorting

The time sequence of the electromagnetic shorting signals of DI terminals for the
"decelerate to stop" or "coast to stop” mode is shown in the following figure.

Note
When electromagnetic shorting is selected for the DI, avoid electromagnetic shorting upon
start/stop.
The priority of electromagnetic shorting/DC braking state is lower than that of the start
signal.

‑595‑
Function Application

Figure 3-48 Timing diagram of DI terminal electromagnetic shorting

Electromagnetic shorting triggered by faults

Actions upon occurrence of the following faults can be set to "stop at electromagnetic
shorting" (for synchronous motor only).
● E11 external fault
● E19 auto-tuning fault
● E20 encoder disk fault
● E27 and E28 user-defined faults
● E42 excessive speed deviation fault
● E43 overspeed fault
Method: Take the external fault as an example. Set the ten thousands position of F9-
48 to 3 to enable electromagnetic shorting E11 fault.
This function is applicable to scenarios where a synchronous motor, such as a wire
drawing machine, requires fast stop protection.

‑596‑
 Function Application

Parameters
Para. Name Value Range Default
F6-26 Electromagnetic 0% to 200% 100%
shorting current
F6-27 Electromagnetic 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s
shorting time upon
startup
F6-28 Electromagnetic 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s
shorting time upon
stop
F6-11 Start frequency of 0.00 Hz to F0-10 0.00 Hz
DC braking at stop (Maximum
frequency)

3.4.16Wobble Control Function

The wobble function means the output frequency wobbles up and down around the
frequency reference (set through F0-07). This function is applicable to textile industry
and chemical fiber industry, as well as scenarios where horizontal movement and
winding are required.

Figure 3-49 Wobble application

‑597‑
Function Application

Figure 3-50 Working principle of wobble

Table 3–29 Related parameters

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
0: Relative to central frequency (F0-07: final
frequency reference setting selection): It is a variable
0: Relative to central
wobble system and the wobble changes with the
frequency
Fb-00 Wobble setting mode 0 central frequency (frequency reference).
1: Relative to max.
1: Relative to max. frequency (F0-10: max. frequency):
frequency
It is a fixed wobble system and the wobble is
calculated based on the maximum frequency.

When Fb-01 is set to 0, the wobble function is

Fb-01 Wobble amplitude 0.0% 0.0% to 100.0%
disabled.
Used to determine the wobble amplitude and jump
Jump frequency frequency.
Fb-02 0.0% 0.0% to 50.0%
amplitude The wobble running frequency is limited by the
frequency upper limit and frequency lower limit.

Fb-03 Wobble cycle 10.0s 0.1s to 3000.0s Time of a complete wobble cycle.

Triangular wave rise Ratio (in percentage) of triangular wave rise time to
Fb-04 50.0% 0.1% to 100.0%
time coefficient wobble cycle (Fb-03)

1. Wobble amplitude calculation

When Fb-00 is set to 0 (relative to central frequency), wobble amplitude AW is
calculated according to the following formula: AW = Frequency reference source
(F0-07) x Wobble amplitude (Fb-01).

‑598‑
 Function Application

When Fb-00 is set to 1 (relative to max. frequency), wobble amplitude AW is

calculated according to the following formula: AW = Max. frequency (F0-10) x
Wobble amplitude (Fb-01).

2. Jump frequency calculation

In the wobble mode, the jump frequency is a value relative to AW, namely, Jump
frequency = AW x Jump frequency amplitude (Fb-02).

When Fb-00 is set to 0 (relative to central frequency), the jump frequency is a

variable value.

When Fb-00 is set to 1 (relative to max. frequency), the jump frequency is a fixed
value.

3. Triangular wave rise/fall time calculation

Triangular wave rise time = Fb-03 (Wobble cycle) x Fb-04 (Triangular wave rise time
coefficient, unit: s)

Triangular wave fall time = Fb-03 (Wobble cycle) x (1 - Fb-04 (Triangular wave rise
time coefficient, unit: s))

(Wobble cycle = Triangular wave rise time + Triangular wave fall time)

3.4.17Fixed Length Control Function

The AC drive supports fixed length control in which the length pulses can be collected
by DI5 only, which requires DI5 to be assigned with function 27 (length count input).

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
Used to set the length value to be controlled in the fixed
Fb-05 Set length 1000 m 0 m to 65535 m
length control mode.

The actual length is a monitored value. Actual length (Fb-

Fb-06 Actual length 0m 0 m to 65535 m 06) = Number of pulses sampled by DI/Number of pulses
per meter (Fb-07)

The number of pulses output per meter. The length pulses

Number of
Fb-07 100.0 0.1 to 6553.5 can be sampled by DI5 if DI5 is assigned with function 27
pulses per meter
(length count input) (set F4-04 to 27).

In the following figure, actual length is a monitored value. Actual length (Fb-06) =
Number of pulses sampled by DI/Number of pulses per meter (Fb-07). When actual
length (Fb-06) exceeds the set length (Fb-05), the relay or DO terminal assigned with
function 10 outputs a "length reach" active signal. Length reset can be implemented
through the multi-functional DI terminal assigned with function 28 (length reset). The
following figure shows how to set the parameters for this function.

‑599‑
Function Application

Figure 3-51 Fixed length

Para. No. Name Value Description

F4-04 DI5 function selection 27 Length count input

F4-00 to F4-09 (any one) DI1 to DI10 function selection (any one) 28 Length reset

Terminal output function selection (any

F5-01 to F5-05 (any one) 10 Length reach
one)

In the fixed length control mode, direction cannot be obtained, and only length can
be calculated according the number of pulses. An automatic stop system can be
implemented by feeding the output length reach T/A-T/B signal from relay to the stop
input terminal of the AC drive.

3.4.18Count Function
A DI terminal is needed to collect the count value (a DI5 terminal must be used in case
of high pulse frequency). Assign the DI terminal with function 25 (counter input).

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
When the count value reaches Fb-08, the multi-
Fb-08 Set count value 1000 1 to 65535 functional DO terminal outputs a "set count value
reach" active signal.

When the count value reaches Fb-09, the multi-

Designated count functional DO terminal outputs a "designated count
Fb-09 1000 1 to 65535
value value reach" active signal. Fb-09 must be lower than
or equal to Fb-08 (set count value).

As shown in the following figure, a DI terminal is needed to collect the count value.
Assign the DI terminal with function 25 (counter input). When the count value reaches

‑600‑
 Function Application

Fb-08 (set count value), the multi-functional DO terminal outputs a "set count value
reach" active signal. When the count value reaches Fb-09, the multi-functional DO
outputs a "designated count value reach" active signal.

Figure 3-52 Count function

Para. No. Name Value Description

F4-00 to F4-09 (any DI1 to DI10 function selection (any

25 Counter input
one) one)

F4-00 to F4-09 (any DI1 to DI10 function selection (any

26 Counting reset
one) one)

F5-01 to F5-04 (any Terminal output function selection

8 Set count value reach
one) (any one)

F5-01 to F5-04 (any Terminal output function selection

9 Designated count value reach
one) (any one)

● A DI5 terminal must be used in the case of high pulse frequency.

● One DO terminal can be assigned with either the "set count value reach" function
or the "designated count value reach" function.
● When the AC drive is in RUN/STOP state, the counter keeps counting till reaching
the "set count value".
● The count value is retentive at power failure.
● An automatic stop system can be implemented by feeding the output count value
reach signal from DO to the stop input terminal of the AC drive.

3.4.19PID Adjustment Methods

This section describes general rules for PID parameter adjustment, which can be used
as reference for adjusting closed-loop control PID parameters (FA-05 to FA-07, and FA-
15 to FA-17) and speed loop PI parameters (F2-00, F2-01, F2-03, and F2-04).

‑601‑
Function Application

1. In case of slow response, increase Kp.

Figure 3-53 Response-time trend after increasing Kp

2. In case of frequent oscillation, reduce Kp.

Figure 3-54 Response-time trend after decreasing Kp

3. In case of large overshoot and slow fluctuation, increase Ti.

‑602‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-55 Response-time trend after increasing Ti

4. In case of large static difference and slow response at load fluctuation, increase Kp
or decrease Ti.

Figure 3-56 Response-time trend after increasing Kp at load fluctuation

Figure 3-57 Response-time trend after decreasing Ti at load fluctuation

‑603‑
Function Application

5. The system stability can be improved by incorporating derivative time Td properly

(excessive proportion may cause interference and oscillation).

Figure 3-58 Response-time trend after incorporating Td

3.5 Application Control

3.5.1 Jog Running

In some scenarios, the AC drive needs to run in jog mode for device testing. In jog
running mode, the startup mode is direct startup (F6-00 is set to 0), and the stop
mode is decelerate to stop (F6-10 is set 0). The following figure shows the relationship
between output frequency and acceleration/deceleration time in jog running mode.

Figure 3-59 Jog running

‑604‑
 Function Application

Parameters
Para. Function Default Value Range Description
F0-02 Command source 0 0: Operating panel control -
selection 1: Terminal I/O control
2: Communication control
F0-25 Acceleration/ 1 0: Max. frequency (F0-10) -
Deceleration time 1: Target frequency
base frequency 2: 100 Hz
F7-01 MF.K key function 0 0: MF.K key disabled -
selection 1: Switchover between
operating panel control and
remote control (terminal I/O
control or communication
control)
2: Switchover between forward
and reverse run
3: Forward jog
4: Reverse jog
F8-00 Jog frequency 2.00 Hz 0 to the maximum frequency -
(F0-10)
F8-01 Jog acceleration 20.0s 0.0s to 6500.0s -
time
F8-02 Jog deceleration 20.0s 0.0s to 6500.0s -
time
F8-13 Reverse run 0 0: Reverse running allowed -
control 1: Reverse running inhibited
F8-27 Set highest 0 0: Disabled -
priority to jog 1: Enabled
function

Example
In the following example, the operating panel is used as the jog command source to
illustrate how to set the parameters for jog running.

Table 3–30 Parameter settings for jog running through the LED operation panel

Step Forward jog Reverse jog

1 Set F7-01 to 3 to assign the MF.K Set F7-01 to 4 to assign the MF.K
key with forward jog. key with reverse jog.
Set F8-13 (reverse run control) to 0
to allow reverse run.
2 Set F0-02 (command source Set F0-02 (command source
selection) to 0 to select the selection) to 0 to select the
operating panel as the command operating panel as the command
source. source.

‑605‑
Function Application

Step Forward jog Reverse jog

3 Set F8-00 (jog frequency), F8-01 (jog Set F8-00 (jog frequency), F8-01 (jog
acceleration time), and F8-02 (jog acceleration time), and F8-02 (jog
deceleration time) properly. deceleration time) properly.
4 In stop status, when the MF.K key is In stop status, when the MF.K key is
pressed down, the AC drive starts to pressed down, the AC drive starts to
jog in the forward direction. When jog in the forward direction. When
the MF.K key is released, the AC the MF.K key is released, the AC
drive decelerates to stop. drive decelerates to stop.

3.5.2 Frequency Detection

3.5.2.1 Multi-Speed Reference

In multi-reference mode, combinations of different DI terminal states correspond to
different frequency references.

Table 3–31 Procedure of configuring multi-speed as frequency reference

Procedure Para. Description

Step 1: Select multi-speed as the

F0-03 Set F0-03 to 6.
frequency reference.

A maximum of 16 references are supported, requiring four DI

terminals. The relationship between the reference quantity and DI
terminal quantity is as follows:
Step 2: Set the quantity of
None. Two references: one DI terminal K1
references.
Three to four references: two DI terminals K1 and K2
Five to eight references: three DI terminals K1, K2, and K3
Nine to sixteen references: four DI terminals K1, K2, K3, and K4

Multi-reference terminal K1: Set to 12

Step 3: Set the multi-speed function Multi-reference terminal K2: Set to 13
F4-00 to F4-09
for DI terminals. Multi-reference terminal K3: Set to 14
Multi-reference terminal K4: Set to 15
Set the frequency for each reference, in percentage. 100%
FC-00 to FC-15
Step 4: Set the frequency for each corresponds to max. frequency F0-10.
reference[Note] When frequency reference is set to multi-speed, 100% of the
F0-10
parameters FC-00 to FC-15 corresponds to max. frequency F0-10.

[Note] The four multi-reference terminals can make up 16 state combinations,

corresponding to 16 frequency reference values, as listed in the following table.

Table 3–32 Combinations of multi-speed terminals

K4 K3 K2 K1 Reference Max. Frequency (%)

OFF OFF OFF OFF Multi-reference 0 FC-00

OFF OFF OFF ON Multi-reference 1 FC-01

‑606‑
 Function Application

K4 K3 K2 K1 Reference Max. Frequency (%)

OFF OFF ON OFF Multi-reference 2 FC-02

OFF OFF ON ON Multi-reference 3 FC-03
OFF ON OFF OFF Multi-reference 4 FC-04
OFF ON OFF ON Multi-reference 5 FC-05
OFF ON ON OFF Multi-reference 6 FC-06
OFF ON ON ON Multi-reference 7 FC-07
ON OFF OFF OFF Multi-reference 8 FC-08
ON OFF OFF ON Multi-reference 9 FC-09
ON OFF ON OFF Multi-reference 10 FC-10
ON OFF ON ON Multi-reference 11 FC-11
ON ON OFF OFF Multi-reference 12 FC-12
ON ON OFF ON Multi-reference 13 FC-13
ON ON ON OFF Multi-reference 14 FC-14
ON ON ON ON Multi-reference 15 FC-15

3.5.2.2 Frequency Detection (FDT)

This function is used to set detection thresholds of output frequency and sets
hysteresis for the frequency detection function. The hysteresis is effective only in
deceleration. Detection hysteresis is not supported in acceleration. The following
figure shows the FDT function.

Figure 3-60 FDT

‑607‑
Function Application

Table 3–33 FDT

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
When the running frequency is above the frequency
detection value (FDT1), the DO terminal outputs the
active signal. When the running frequency is below the
Frequency detection 0 to max.
F8-19 50.00 Hz result of the frequency detection value (FDT1) minus
value (FDT1) frequency (F0-10)
the frequency detection hysteresis (FDT1), the DO
terminal outputs the inactive signal. The valid range is
0.00 Hz to F0-10 (max. frequency).

Frequency detection hysteresis (FDT1) = F8-19 x F8-20

When the running frequency is above F8-19, the DO
Frequency detection
F8-20 5.0% 0.0% to 100.0% terminal outputs the active signal. When the running
hysteresis (FDT1)
frequency is below a specific value (F8-19 - F8-19 x F8-
20), the DO terminal outputs the inactive signal.

When the running frequency is above the frequency

detection value (FDT2), the DO terminal outputs the
active signal. When the running frequency is below the
Frequency detection 0 to max.
F8-28 50.00 Hz result of the frequency detection value(FDT2) minus the
value (FDT2) frequency (F0-10)
frequency detection hysteresis (FDT2), the DO terminal
outputs the inactive signal. The valid range is 0.00 Hz to
F0-10 (max. frequency).

Frequency detection hysteresis (FDT2) = F8-28 x F8-29

When the running frequency is above F8-28, the DO
Frequency detection
F8-29 5.0% 0.0% to 100.0% terminal outputs the active signal. When the running
hysteresis (FDT2)
frequency is below a specific value (F8-28 - F8-28 x F8-
29), the DO terminal outputs the inactive signal.

3.5.2.3 Jump Frequency

You can set the jump frequency to enable the AC drive to avoid mechanical resonance
point of load. The AC drive supports two jump frequencies. If both of them are set to
0, the jump frequency function is disabled.

‑608‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-61 Jump frequency

In the preceding figure, when the running frequency approaches the jump frequency
during acceleration, the AC drive runs for a period at the current running frequency
and then jumps over the jump frequency. The jump range is twice F8-11 (jump
frequency amplitude).
When the running frequency approaches the jump frequency during deceleration, the
AC drive runs for a period at the current running frequency and then jumps over the
jump frequency. The jump range is twice F8-11 (jump frequency amplitude).

Related parameters
Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
You can set the jump frequency to enable the AC drive to
Jump frequency 0.00 to max. avoid mechanical resonance point of load. This
F8-09 0.00 Hz
1 frequency (F0-10) parameter specifies the first jump frequency. If it is set
to 0, the first frequency jump function is disabled.

You can set the jump frequency to enable the AC drive to

Jump frequency 0.00 to max. avoid mechanical resonance point of load. This
F8-10 0.00 Hz
2 frequency (F0-10) parameter specifies the second jump frequency. If it is
set to 0, the second frequency jump function is disabled.

‑609‑
Function Application

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
When the running frequency approaches the jump
frequency during acceleration, the AC drive runs for a
period at the current running frequency and then jumps
over the jump frequency. The jump range is twice F8-11
Jump frequency (jump frequency amplitude).
F8-11 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz to 5.00 Hz
amplitude When the running frequency approaches the jump
frequency during deceleration, the AC drive runs for a
period at the current running frequency and then jumps
over the jump frequency. The jump range is twice F8-11
(jump frequency amplitude).

Used to enable or disable the jump frequency function

during acceleration/deceleration.
If this parameter is set to 0, when the running frequency
Enabling/
approaches the jump frequency during acceleration/
Disabling the
deceleration, the AC drive continues running at the
jump frequency 0: Disabled
F8-22 0 current frequency.
during 1: Enabled
If this parameter is set to 1, when the running frequency
acceleration and
approaches the jump frequency during acceleration/
deceleration
deceleration, the AC drive jumps over the jump
frequency. The jump range is twice F8-11 (jump
frequency amplitude).

3.5.2.4 Reverse Frequency Inhibition

You can set F8-13 to disable reverse frequency. The following figure shows the
diagram of disabling reverse frequency.
The motor rotation direction is set through F0-09. By editing F0-09, you can change
the motor rotation direction without changing motor wiring. Editing this parameter is
equivalent to exchanging any two of the motor U, V, W cables.

Note
After the parameter is initialized, the original rotation direction of the motor is resumed. Ex-
ercise cautions when using this function if motor rotation direction change is prohibited
after system commissioning is complete.

‑610‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-62 Reverse frequency inhibition

Related parameters
Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
When F8‑13 is set to 0, enter a reverse
0: Reverse running allowed
F8-13 Reverse run enable 0 command to the AC drive and the motor will
1: Reverse running inhibited
run at zero frequency.

You can change the rotation direction of the

0: Default direction motor by editing this parameter without
Running direction
F0-09 0 1: Opposite to the default changing the motor wiring. Editing this
selection
direction parameter is equivalent to changing any two of
the motor’s U, V, W wires.

3.5.2.5 Detection Width for Frequency Reach

You can use F8-21 to set the detection width for frequency reach. The following figure
shows the timing diagram of this function.

‑611‑
Function Application

Figure 3-63 Sequence of detection width for frequency reach

Related parameter
Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
Numeric value of detection width for frequency reach =
F8-21 (detection width for frequency reach) x F0-10
Detection Width for 0.00% to 100.00% (max. frequency). The DO terminal outputs the active
F8-21 0.00%
Frequency Reach (max. frequency) signal when the running frequency of the AC drive is in
the specific range (Frequency reference±F0-10 x F8-
21).

3.5.2.6 Switchover Frequency of Acceleration/Deceleration Time

This function is used to switch the acceleration/deceleration time based on the
running frequency range when the AC drive is running.
The following figure shows acceleration/deceleration time switchover. During
acceleration, acceleration time 2 is selected if the running frequency is below F8-25,
and acceleration time 1 is selected if the running frequency is above F8-25. During
deceleration, deceleration time 1 is selected if the running frequency is above F8-26,
and deceleration time 2 is selected if the running frequency is below F8-26.

‑612‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-64 Switchover of acceleration/deceleration time

This function is active when the DI is not allocated with function 16 (acceleration/
deceleration time selection terminal 1) or 17 (acceleration/deceleration time
selection terminal 2).

Parameters
Para. Parameter Name Default Value Range Description
F8-25 Switchover 0.00Hz 0 to the This function is used to switch
frequency of maximum the acceleration/deceleration
acceleration frequency time based on the running
time 1 and (F0-10) frequency range when the AC
acceleration drive is running. This function is
time 2 active when the DI is not
F8-26 Switchover 0.00Hz 0 to the allocated with function 16
frequency of maximum (acceleration/deceleration time
deceleration frequency selection terminal 1) or 17
time 1 and (F0-10) (acceleration/deceleration time
deceleration selection terminal 2).
time 2 The valid range is from 0.00 Hz to
the maximum frequency (F0-10).

3.5.2.7 Detection Value for Frequency Reach

The DO terminal outputs the active signal when the running frequency of the AC drive
is within the range of the detection value for frequency reach plus or minus the
detection width for frequency reach.

‑613‑
Function Application

Figure 3-65 Detection of frequency reach

Related parameters
Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
When the running frequency is in the
Detection value for frequency 0 to max. frequency detection range, the DO terminal
F8-30 50.00 Hz
reach 1 frequency (F0-10) outputs the active signal. The valid range is
0.00 Hz to F0-10 (max. frequency).

Numeric value of detection width for

frequency reach 1 = F0-10 (max. frequency) x
Detection width for frequency F8-31 Frequency detection range = F8-30
F8-31 0.0% 0.0% to 100.0%
reach 1 (detection value for frequency reach 1)±F8-
31 (detection width for frequency reach 1) x
F0-10 (max. frequency)

When the running frequency is in the

Detection value for frequency 0 to max. frequency detection range, the DO terminal
F8-32 50.00 Hz
reach 2 frequency (F0-10) outputs the active signal. The valid range is
0.00 Hz to F0-10 (max. frequency).

Numeric value of detection width for

frequency reach 2 = F0-10 (max. frequency) x
Detection width for frequency F8-33 Frequency detection range = F8-32
F8-33 0.0% 0.0% to 100.0%
reach 2 (detection value for frequency reach 2)±F8-
33 (detection width for frequency reach 2) x
F0-10 (max. frequency)

‑614‑
 Function Application

3.5.3 Current Detection

3.5.3.1 Zero Current Detection

The DO outputs the active signal when the output current of the AC drive remains at
or below F8-34 (zero current detection level) for a period greater than the value of F8-
35 (zero current detection delay).

Figure 3-66 Zero current detection

Related parameters
Para. No. Function Default Value Range Description

Zero current detection 0.0% to 300.0% (rated The DO outputs the active
F8-34 5.0%
level motor current) signal when the output current
of the AC drive remains at or
below F8-34 (zero current
Zero current detection
F8-35 0.10s 0.00s to 600.00s detection level) for a period
delay
greater than the value of F8-35
(zero current detection delay).

3.5.3.2 Output Current Limit Violation

The DO terminal outputs the active signal when the output current of the AC drive
remains above F8-36 (output limit violation threshold) for a period greater than the
value of F8-37 (output overcurrent detection delay).

‑615‑
Function Application

Figure 3-67 Detection of output current limit violation

Related parameters
Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
0.0% (no detection) The DO terminal outputs the active signal when the
Output overcurrent
F8-36 200.0% 0.1% to 300.0% (rated output current of the AC drive remains above F8-36
threshold
motor current) (output current threshold) for a period greater than
Output overcurrent the value of F8-37 (output overcurrent detection
F8-37 0.00s 0.00s to 600.00s
detection delay delay).

3.5.3.3 Detection Level of Current

The DO terminal outputs the active signal when the output current of the AC drive is
within the range of "Detection level of current 1±Detection width of current 1 x Rated
motor current".
The AC drive supports two sets of current detection levels and current detection
widths. The following figure shows the function.

‑616‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-68 Timing diagram of detection level of current

Related parameters
Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
The DO terminal outputs the active signal when the
output current of the AC drive is in the range of F8-
Detection level of 0.0% to 300.0% (rated
F8-38 100.0% 38±F8-39 x F1-03, where F8-38 is detection level of
current 1 motor current)
current 1, F8-39 is detection width of current 1, and F1-
03 is rated motor current.
Numeric value of detection width of current 1 = F8-39
Detection width of 0.0% to 300.0% (rated
F8-39 0.0% (detection width of current 1) x F1-03 (rated motor
current 1 motor current)
current)

The DO terminal outputs the active signal when the

output current of the AC drive is in the range of (F8-
Detection level of 0.0% to 300.0% (rated
F8-40 100.0% 40±F8-39) x F1-03, where F8-40 is detection level of
current 2 motor current)
current 2, F8-39 is detection width of current 1, and F1-
03 is rated motor current.
Numeric value of detection width of current 2 = F8-41
Detection width of 0.0% to 300.0% (rated
F8-41 0.0% (detection width of current 2) x F1-03 (rated motor
current 2 motor current)
current)

3.5.4 Forward/Reverse Run Switchover Dead Zone Time

This function is used to specify the transition period when the output is 0 Hz during
forward/reverse run switchover of the AC drive. The transition period is called
forward/reverse run switchover dead zone time, which can be set through F8-12.

‑617‑
Function Application

Figure 3-69 Forward/reverse run switchover dead zone time

Related parameter
Para. No. Function Default Value Range Description

Used to set the transition period

Forward/Reverse run when the output is 0 Hz during
F8-12 0.0s 0.0s to 3000.0s
switchover dead zone time forward/reverse run switchover of
the AC drive.

3.5.5 Timing Function

The timer starts from 0 upon startup of the AC drive. When the timing duration (F8-44)
expires, the AC drive automatically stops, and the DO outputs the active signal. You
can use U0-20 to view the remaining running time.
● The DO outputs the active signal when the accumulative power-on time (F7-13) of
the AC drive exceeds the accumulative power-on time threshold (F8-16).
● The DO outputs the active signal when the accumulative running time (F7-09) of
the AC drive exceeds the accumulative running time threshold (F8-17).

‑618‑
 Function Application

Parameters
Para. Function Default Value Range Description
F8-42 Timing 0 0: Disabled When F8-42 (timing function) is set to
function 1: Enabled 1 and the running time of the AC drive
reaches the specified timing duration,
the DO outputs the active signal. The
timing duration is set through F8-43
and F8-44.
F8-43 Scheduled 0 0: F8-44 If this parameter is set to 0, the timing
running time 1: AI1 duration is determined by F8-44.
selection 2: AI2 If this parameter is set to 1, the timing
duration can be calculated through
the following formula: Timing
duration = (AI1 voltage/10 V) x F8-44.
100% of the analog input range
corresponds to the value of F8-44.
If this parameter is set to 2, the timing
duration can be calculated through
the following formula: Timing
duration = (AI2 voltage/10 V) x F8-44.
100% of the analog input range
corresponds to the value of F8-44.
F8-44 Scheduled 0.0 min 0.0 min to The timing duration is set through F8-
running time 6500.0 min 43 and F8-44.

Table 3–34 Power-on time threshold

Para. Function Default Value Range Description
F8-16 Accumulative 0 h 0 h to 65000 h This parameter is used to set the
power-on accumulative power-on time
time threshold of the AC drive. When F7-13
threshold (accumulative power-on time) exceeds
F8-16 (accumulative power-on time
threshold), the DO outputs the active
signal.

Table 3–35 Running time reach

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

F8-17 Accumula 0h 0 h to 65000 h This parameter is used to set the
tive running accumulative running time threshold
time of the AC drive. When F7-09
threshold (accumulative running time) exceeds
F8-17 (accumulative running time
threshold), the DO outputs the active
signal.

‑619‑
Function Application

3.5.6 Upper and Lower Limits of AI1 Voltage Protection

Para. No. Function Default Value Range Description

AI1 input voltage lower

F8-45 3.10 V 0.00 V to F8-46 If AI1 input is above F8-46 or below F8-45,
limit
the DO terminal of the AC drive outputs the
AI1 input voltage upper
F8-46 6.80 V F8-45 to 10.00 V active signal of "AI1 input limit exceeded".
limit

3.5.7 IGBT Temperature

Para. No. Function Default Value Range Description

The DO terminal outputs the active signal

F8-47 IGBT temperature threshold 75°C 0°C to 100°C when the heatsink temperature of the IGBT
reaches F8-47.
Heatsink temperature of Used to indicate the heatsink temperature of
F7-07 - 0.0°C to 99.9°C
IGBT the IGBT.

3.5.8 Cooling Fan Working Mode

Para. No. Function Default Value Range Description

When this parameter is set to 0, the fan works

during operation of the AC drive. When the AC
0: Working during drive
drive stops, the fan works if heatsink
Cooling fan working operation
F8-48 0 temperature is above 40°C and stops if
mode
heatsink temperature is below 40°C.

When this parameter is set to 1, the fan keeps

1: Working continuously
working after power-on.

3.6 Tension Control

3.6.1 Selecting a Control Mode

Select a proper tension control mode and winding mode based on actual situations.
Settings of a correct running direction can ensure proper tension control.

‑620‑
 Function Application

Para. Name De Value Range Description

fault
B0-00 Tension control 0 0: Disabled Similar to general functions of
mode the AC drive. Basic operations
such as parameter auto-tuning
and direction judgment must be
performed in this mode.
1: Open-loop Tension/position detection and
torque control feedback are not required. In
torque control mode, the AC
drive calculates the target torque
to control the tension on
materials. Use FVC to achieve
optimal control effect.
2: Closed-loop Tension/position detection and
speed control feedback are required. In speed
control mode, the AC drive
calculates the synchronous
frequency of the linear speed
based on the linear speed and
roll diameter and superposes PID
closed-loop operation frequency.
In this way, the target frequency
is updated in real time to realize
stable tension or position. SVC,
V/f, or FVC can be selected.
3: Closed-loop Tension detection and feedback
torque control are required. In torque control
mode, the target torque can be
calculated based on PID
adjustment or main + PID
adjustment to implement
tension control. Use FVC to
achieve optimal control effect.
4: Constant In speed control mode, the AC
linear speed drive adjusts its running
control frequency according to the
change in roll diameter to ensure
constant linear speed of the
system. SVC, V/f, or FVC can be
selected.

When the DI allocated with function 60 (exit tension control) is activated, settings of
the preceding modes become invalid and the AC drive exits the tension control mode.

‑621‑
Function Application

Para. Name De Value Range Description

fault
B0-01 Winding mode 0 0: Winding This parameter is used together
1: Unwinding with function 58 of the DI
(winding/unwinding switchover
terminal) to determine the
winding mode. When the winding/
unwinding switchover terminal is
disabled, the winding mode is the
same as that set by this
parameter. When the winding/
unwinding switchover terminal is
enabled, the winding mode is
opposite to that set by this
parameter.

Para. Name De Value Range Description

fault
F0-09 Running direction 0 0: Default Set this parameter properly to
selection direction ensure normal winding/
1: Reverse of unwinding. Determine the
the default direction as follows.
direction

Judging the running direction

When B0-00 is set to 1 (tension control mode disabled), the AC drive runs in speed
control mode and its running direction should be the same as the target winding
direction (opposite to the target unwinding direction). Otherwise, change the
parameter to correct the direction. Check the running direction according to the
following figure.

‑622‑
 Function Application

Winding With-load Running Direction No-load Running Direction (Speed

Mode Control Mode)
Winding

Unwinding

Note
For the first run, determine the running direction and set the parameter properly. When the
switchover between winding and unwinding is required, modify B0-01 directly, or change
the state of the winding/unwinding switching terminal without modifying B0-01 (otherwise,
misfunction may occur).

3.6.2 Open-Loop Torque Control

In this mode, no swing rod (floating roller) or tension sensor is required, no closed
tension loop is formed, but the tension accuracy is slightly poor. This control mode is
applicable to scenarios where tension accuracy is not critical.

‑623‑
Function Application

Figure 3-70 Application of open-loop torque control

In the preceding figure, the winding machine runs in open-loop torque control mode.
The roll diameter is calculated based on the linear speed and the target torque is
updated based on the set material tension and current roll diameter. You can set the
friction compensation torque and dynamic inertia compensation torque as needed to
improve the tension control effect.

3.6.3 Closed-Loop Torque Control

In this mode, a tension sensor is used to upload the material tension and the target
frequency is regulated in closed-loop mode to ensure constant tension.
The main + PID mode or pure PID mode can be configured as needed. The main + PID
mode incorporates the operation torque in tension open-loop torque mode based on
the closed-loop regulation, whereas the pure PID mode achieves constant tension
control through torque adjustment by pure PID. To optimize dynamic response,
enable friction and inertia compensation. This mode is applicable to materials with
regular elasticity or scenarios with small speed adjustment margin.

Figure 3-71 Application of closed-loop torque control

In the preceding figure, when the winding machine works in closed-loop torque
control mode, two AI signal channels receive tension sensor signals and running

‑624‑
 Function Application

frequency signals of the main traction motor, respectively. When the open-loop
tension reference and tension sensor closed-loop regulation mode is used, the torque
of friction and inertia compensation can be set as needed.
When a tension sensor is used to control tension of elastic materials, the closed-loop
tension control mode can also be used.

3.6.4 Closed-loop Speed Control

In this mode, a swing rod (floating roller) or tension sensor is used to upload material
tension. The output frequency of the AC drive is regulated in the closed-loop mode to
ensure stable swing rod position or constant tension. The tension is controlled by
linear speed synchronous frequency and PID closed-loop frequency. This mode is
applicable to scenarios where the speed can be adjusted, such as the scenario where
the system has an swing rod for pre-charge or the material can be pulled and
stretched.

Figure 3-72 Application of closed-loop speed control

As shown in the preceding figure, when the winding machine works in closed-loop
speed control mode, two AI signal channels receive potentiometer signals of the
swing rod position and running frequency signals of the main traction motor,
respectively. The roll diameter is calculated based on linear speed mode. The target
frequency is updated according to the following: the linear speed synchronous
frequency calculated based on the linear speed and the roll diameter, and the
frequency regulated based on the feedback closed loop of swing rod position.
The general-purpose AC drive supports main frequency + PID as the frequency source.
In tension control mode, the roll diameter is calculated in real time to facilitate
matching between the main frequency and linear speed. Therefore, the tension
control stability and speed are improved.

‑625‑
Function Application

3.6.5 Roll Diameter Calculation

Roll diameter is a required parameter in any tension control mode. Select a proper
calculation method and set the related parameters correctly to ensure accuracy of
the roll diameter. Otherwise, the tension control function may fail.

Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.
This calculation method is independent of material
thickness. The roll diameter is calculated based on linear
speed and running frequency in real time, so the error is
not accumulated.
Note: This calculation method is applicable to central
0: Calculated based
winding/unwinding instead of surface winding/
on linear speed
unwinding. "Figure 3–73 Surface winding/unwinding" on
page 627 is a diagram of typical surface winding/
unwinding, where the AC drive shaft is not coaxial with
the winding/winding shaft, so the roll diameter cannot
be calculated based on linear speed.

This calculation method does not require linear speed.

The roll diameter is calculated based on the
accumulative material thickness and revolution
calculation signals. The calculation result is stable, but
the error is accumulated.
1: Calculated based
Roll diameter Set the following parameters for this application:
on accumulative
B0-07 calculation 0 ● Material thickness: B0-31 to B0-36
thickness
method ● Revolution calculation signal source: Function 61 of the
DI terminal (revolution count signal)
● Operation relationship: B0-29 (number of pulses per
revolution) and B0-30 (revolutions per layer, for wire
rods)

2: AI1 The roll diameter can be obtained through one of

3: AI2 methods 2 to 6. These methods can be used in scenarios
4: AI3 where the roll diameter is directly measured by using a

5: Pulse input (DI5) sensor or calculated outside the AC drive.

When the preceding calculation methods are used, the
maximum roll diameter (B0-08) must be set correctly
6: Communication based on the per-unit relationship. When AI1 is enabled
(1000H) (B0-07 is set to 2 ), 100.0% AI1 input must correspond to
the maximum roll diameter (B0-08).

When calculation method 7 is used, the roll diameter is

7: Digital setting
directly set through B0-14 and used for additional
(B0-14)
communication address or manual roll diameter setting.

‑626‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-73 Surface winding/unwinding

Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.

The actual full roll diameter.

In the tension control mode, this parameter provides the
following functions:
Maximum roll 0.1 mm to 6000.0 1. Setting the upper limit for roll diameter calculation;
B0-08 500.0 mm
diameter mm 2. Calibrating values related to roll diameter(see B0-07
and B0-10);
3. Resetting the optional unwinding roll diameter (see
B0-10).

Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.

The actual reel diameter.

In the tension control mode, this parameter provides the

0.1 mm to 6000.0 following functions:

B0-09 Reel diameter 100.0 mm
mm 1. Setting the lower limit for roll diameter calculation;
2. Resetting the optional winding roll diameter (see B0-
10).

‑627‑
Function Application

Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.
Parameter B0-10 is used to select an input channel of
the initial roll diameter. When B0-10 is set to 0, the
source of initial roll diameter is dependent on functions
55 and 56 (initial roll diameter selection terminal) of the
DI terminal and related to the winding mode.
0: B0-11 to B0-13
By default, the source of initial roll diameter is set to B0-
08 or B0-09, depending on the winding mode. For the
relationship between the initial winding sources and
Initial roll
B0-10 0 settings, see "Table 3–36 Relationship between the
diameter source
initial winding sources and settings" on page 628.

1: AI1
The initial roll diameter can be obtained through
2: AI2
calculation methods 1 to 4. When the preceding
3: AI3
calculation methods are used, the maximum roll
4:
diameter (B0-08) must be set correctly based on the
Communication
per-unit relationship.
(1000H)

Table 3–36 Relationship between the initial winding sources and settings

DI2 DI1 Initial roll diameter source

0 0 B0-09 (winding) or B0-08 (unwinding)

0 1 B0-11
1 0 B0-12
1 1 B0-13

Note
When the system is shut down due to reel replacement, running faults, or other reasons,
the roll diameter often changes. To ensure accurate roll diameter during startup of the sys-
tem, roll diameter reset must be performed by enabling the function 54 of the DI terminal
(roll diameter reset).

‑628‑
 Function Application

Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.
100.0 0.1 mm to 6000.0
B0-11 Initial roll diameter 1
mm mm
100.0 0.1 mm to 6000.0
B0-12 Initial roll diameter 2 Initial roll diameters 1 to 3. See B0-10.
mm mm
100.0 0.1 mm to 6000.0
B0-13 Initial roll diameter 3
mm mm
This parameter shows the current roll diameter
in real time.
The current roll diameter can be modified by
100.0 0.1 mm to 6000.0
B0-14 Current roll diameter editing this parameter, and the roll diameter
mm mm
calculation result will overwrite this parameter
(unless B0-07 is set to 7). This method can also
be used to reset the roll diameter.
Roll diameter reset 0: Disabled This parameter can be used to enable roll
B0-18 0
during running 1: Enabled diameter reset during operation.

Table 3–37 Parameters for roll diameter calculation based on linear speed (they affect roll diameter
calculation only when B0-07 is set to 0)

Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.
This parameter specifies the ratio of motor
speed to reel speed. Set B0-03 based on the
mechanical transmission structure.
When the roll diameter is calculated based on
Mechanical linear speed (B0-07 is set to 0), a larger value
B0-03 1.00 0.01 to 300.00
transmission ratio of B0-03 means a larger roll diameter, and vice
versa. According to this rule, the parameter
can be corrected according to the deviation
between the calculated roll diameter and the
actual value.
This parameter is enabled only when B0-07 is
set to 0.
When the linear speed is lower than the value
of B0-06, the current roll diameter is
Minimum linear
0.1 m/min to 6500.0 maintained. When the linear speed is higher
B0-06 speed for roll 20.0 m/min
m/min than the value of B0-06, the roll diameter is re-
diameter calculation
calculated.
This parameter can be used to address
inaccurate roll diameter calculation for low-
frequency operation and acceleration.

‑629‑
Function Application

Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.
This parameter is enabled only when B0-07 is
set to 0.
You can set B0-15 to filter roll diameter
calculation results and suppress roll diameter
jitter.
Roll diameter filter A larger value of B0-15 means smoother
B0-15 5.00s 0.00s to 10.00s
time calculated roll diameter and longer delay in
roll diameter changes.
Rule: When the roll diameter changes linearly,
the time that the calculated roll diameter lags
behind the actual roll diameter is basically
equal to this parameter value.

This parameter is enabled only when B0-07 is

set to 0.
You can set B0-16 to a non-zero value to limit
the change of roll diameter per unit of time
and prevent abnormally fast change. An
0: Disabled
Roll diameter excessively low roll diameter change rate may
B0-16 0 0.1 mm/s to 1000.0
change rate result in large delay in roll diameter
mm/s
calculation. Set the change rate properly
based on the actual conditions, for example,
based on the maximum change rate
corresponding to the linear speed of 100.0 m/
min.
This parameter is enabled only when B0-07 is
set to 0.
0: Disabled
You can set B0-17 to limit the roll diameter
Roll diameter 1: Decrease inhibited
change direction. Use this function only when
B0-17 change direction 0 during winding, and
B0-16 is set properly; otherwise, abnormal roll
limit increase inhibited
diameter fluctuation may occur and result in a
during unwinding
large deviation of the roll diameter calculation
result.

Table 3–38 Parameters for roll diameter calculation based on accumulative thickness (they affect
roll diameter calculation only when B0-07 is set to 1)

Para. Name Default Value Range Description

Number of pulses per This parameter specifies the number of

B0-29 1 1 to 60000
revolution pulses per revolution of the reel.

This parameter specifies the number of

revolutions for each layer of winded
B0-30 Revolutions per layer 1 1 to 10000
materials, generally used for wire rods. For
wire rods, set B0-30 to 1.

‑630‑
 Function Application

Para. Name Default Value Range Description

You can set B0-31 to select a source of

material thickness.
0: Digital setting
When B0-31 is set to 0, the material
thickness is affected by DI terminal
functions 62 and 63 (the material thickness
selection terminals).
0: Digital setting Example: When B0-31 is set to 0, set DI1 to
Material thickness 1: AI1 DI terminal function 62 and DI2 to DI
B0-31 0
reference source 2: AI2 terminal function 63. For material
3: AI3 thickness, see "Table 3–39 Material
thickness" on page 631.
The initial roll diameter can be obtained
through calculation methods 1 to 3. When
the preceding calculation methods are
used, the maximum material thickness (B0-
36) must be set correctly based on the per-
unit relationship.

0.00 mm to 100.00
B0-32 Material thickness 0 0.01 mm
mm
0.00 mm to 100.00
B0-33 Material thickness 1 0.01 mm
mm
Material thickness 0 to 3. See B0-31.
0.00 mm to 100.00
B0-34 Material thickness 2 0.01 mm
mm
0.00 mm to 100.00
B0-35 Material thickness 3 0.01 mm
mm
Maximum material 0.00 mm to 100.00
B0-36 1.00 mm Maximum material thickness. See B0-31.
thickness mm

Table 3–39 Material thickness

DI2 DI1 Initial Roll Diameter Source
0 0 Depending on B0-32

0 1 Depending on B0-33

1 0 Depending on B0-34

1 1 Depending on B0-35

3.6.6 Linear Speed

In closed-loop speed control mode, the linear speed can be used to calculate the
winding synchronous frequency reference and the roll diameter. In addition, the
linear speed can also be used for pre-drive, inertia compensation, friction
compensation, and other functions. Therefore, linear speed is an important part of
tension control.

‑631‑
Function Application

Para. Name De Value Range Description

fault
B0-04 Linear speed 0 0: No input 0: No input
input source 1: AI1 1–6: When the linear speed is
2: AI2 input through the preceding
3: AI3 channels, the maximum linear
4: Pulse input speed (B0-05) must be set
(DI5) according to the per unit
5: relationship. The 1000H address is
Communica set according to the percentage.
tion (1000H) The 731AH address is directly set
6: by digit, and the digital setting
Communica range is from 0 to B0-05.
tion (731AH)
B0-05 Maximum linear 1000. 0.0 m/min to This parameter is used to set the
speed 0 m/ 6500.0 m/min maximum linear speed.
min It corresponds to the actual linear
speed when 100.0% is input for
channels 1 to 5 of B0-04. This
value may differ from the
maximum linear speed required
by production. Verify them during
settings.
When the linear speed is used to
calculate the winding diameter
(B0-07 = 0), the larger the
parameter is, the larger the
calculated winding diameter is,
and vice versa. According to this
rule, the parameter can be
corrected according to the
deviation between the calculated
roll diameter and the actual value.
B0-41 Source of 0 0: AI1 0 to 2: AI channel
constant linear 1: AI2 3: Pulse input
speed 2: AI3 4: Communication address
3: Pulse (1000H); set by percentage
reference (DI5) 5: Communication address
4: (731AH); set by digital with the
Communica range from 0 to B0-05
tion (1000H)
5:
Communica
tion (731AH)

‑632‑
 Function Application

3.6.7 Constant Linear Speed Control

Different from preceding modes, this mode is applicable to scenarios where no
specific traction is used to directly control the material tension; instead, the winding
or unwinding machine runs at a constant linear speed and serves as the traction
motor, and the material tension is controlled by the winding/unwinding operation.

Figure 3-74 Application of constant linear speed control

In the preceding figure, the winding machine serves as the traction motor. To make
the system run at a constant linear speed, the roll diameter must be calculated in
either of the following two modes:
1. Assign the DI terminal with the revolution count signal function to calculate the roll
diameter in thickness overlying mode based on revolution count signals.
2. Install a speed measuring device to measure the material linear speed and
calculate the roll diameter based on the measured linear speed. Update the target
frequency based on the target linear speed and current roll diameter to make the
system run at a constant linear speed.
Note: the preceding typical applications are only given to describe the applicable
scenarios of the four tension control modes. Other modes may be selected based on
the actual conditions if the basic conditions are met.

3.6.8 Application Restrictions

Table 3–40 Required conditions for tension control modes

Function/Restriction Roll DiameterNote 1 Linear Speed Control Feedback

1. Tension open-loop torque
Required Not requiredNote 2 Not required
control
2. Tension closed-loop speed
Required Required Required
control

‑633‑
Function Application

Function/Restriction Roll DiameterNote 1 Linear Speed Control Feedback

3. Tension closed-loop
Required Not required Required
torque control

4. Constant linear speed

Required Not required Not required
control

Note 1: If the roll diameter is calculated based on linear speed control (B0-07 is set to
0), the linear speed is required.
Note 2: Inertia and friction compensation is associated with linear speed, so the linear
speed is required in such applications.

3.6.9 Tension Setting

In either open-loop torque control mode (B0-00 is set to 1) or closed-loop torque
control mode (B0-00 is set to 3), tension control is implemented by controlling the
output torque. Therefore, a target tension must be set based on material
characteristics and production requirements.

Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.
0: B1-01
1: AI1
0: B1-01 (digital setting)
2: AI2
1 to 5: Indicates the ratio (in percentage) of the
Tension setting 3: AI3
B1-00 0 target tension to the maximum tension. The
source 4: Pulse reference
maximum tension (B1-02) must be set properly
(DI5)
based on the per-unit relationship.
5: Communication
(1000H)

Digital setting of Used to set the tension through digital setting. For
B1-01 50 N 0 N to 65000 N
tension details, see mode 0 of B1-00.

Used to select the maximum tension. B1-02

corresponds to the tension when B1-00 is set to 1, 2,
3, 4 or 5 (100.0% input). When the actual tension
B1-02 Maximum tension 200 N 0 N to 65000 N
does not meet requirements, corrections can be
performed by editing this parameter without
changing AI, pulse input signals or curves.

3.6.10PID Closed-Loop Adjustment

In closed-loop speed control mode (B0-00 is set to 2) and closed-loop torque control
mode (B0-00 is set to 3), PID closed-loop control based on the open-loop reference is
important to ensure control accuracy. Therefore, the parameters for PID closed-loop
control must be set properly.
When B0-00 is set to 2 or 3, Group FA parameters required for closed-loop control,
such as PID reference source, PID feedback source, PID direction, and PID

‑634‑
 Function Application

proportional and integral parameters, need to be set properly based on actual

conditions.
Only some particular PID parameters are introduced here. For details of standard
parameters, see descriptions of Group FA parameters.
The roll diameter based PID parameter switchover function is added for the tension
control mode.

‑635‑
Function Application

Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.
Used for switchover between two groups of PID
parameters.
0: No switchover
Switchover is disabled.
1: Switchover by DI
Assign the DI terminal with function 43 (PID parameter
switchover). When this terminal is disabled, parameter
group 1 (FA-05 to FA-07) is used. When this terminal is
enabled, parameter group 2 (FA-15 to FA-17) is used.
2: Automatic switchover based on deviation
When the absolute value of the deviation between the
reference and feedback values is less than FA-19 (PID
parameter switchover deviation 1), parameter group 1
is used for PID control. When the absolute value of the
0: No switchover deviation between the reference and feedback values
1: Switchover by DI is greater than FA-20 (PID parameter switchover
2: Automatic deviation 2), parameter group 2 is used for PID
switchover based on control. When the absolute value of the deviation
deviation between the reference and feedback values is
PID parameter 3: Switchover based on between FA-19 and FA-20, the linear interpolated
FA-18 switchover 0 running frequency values of the two groups of PID parameters are used.
condition 6: Automatic 3: Switchover based on running frequency
adjustment based on Auto switchover is implemented based on the running
roll diameter frequency of the AC drive.
7: Adjustment based on 6: Automatic adjustment based on roll diameter
percentage of max. roll In this automatic switchover mode, when the current
diameter roll diameter changes between the maximum roll
diameter (B0-08) and minimum roll diameter (B0-09),
the linear interpolated values of the two groups of PID
parameters are used. The minimum roll diameter
corresponds to the first group of parameters (FA-05 to
FA-07), and the maximum roll diameter corresponds
to the second group of parameters (FA-15 to FA-17).
7: Adjustment based on percentage of max. roll
diameter
In this automatic switchover mode, when the current
roll diameter changes between the result of the
maximum roll diameter (B0-08) multiplied by FA-20
and the result of the maximum roll diameter (B0-08)
multiplied by FA-19, the linear interpolated values of
the two groups of PID parameters are used.

‑636‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-75 Automatic adjustment based on roll diameter

3.6.11Winding Speed Limit and Unwinding Reverse Tightening

These parameters are valid only in torque mode (B0-00 is set to 1 or 3).

‑637‑
Function Application

No. Scenario Description

1 Winding scenarios where the B0-28 = 0
winding speed is not limited The winding speed is subject to the frequency
(subject to the frequency upper limit.
upper limit) B0-00 = 2: B0-28 is used to enable the PID
adjustment limit function in speed closed-loop
mode. When B0-28 is set to 0, the speed is
limited by B0-26 and B0-27 (limited by upper
limit frequency). When B0-28 is set to 1, the
speed is fixed to the value set by B0-27. When
open-loop reference and closed-loop adjustment
are used, closed-loop adjustment must be
limited to avoid system shock and ensure system
stability.
For this reason, in the speed closed-loop
adjustment, based on the synchronization
frequency (the running frequency that the
rewinder matches the current linear speed) and
the speed closed-loop limiter offset, the upper
limit of the closed-loop adjustment frequency
can be obtained according to the following
formula by default (B0-28=0).
Upper limit of the closed-loop adjustment
frequency = synchronous frequency x B0-26 + B0-
27
2 Winding scenarios where the B0-28 = 1
winding speed is limited When B0-28 is set to 1, the upper limit of the
closed-loop adjustment frequency is the fixed
frequency B0-27.
B0-00 ≠ 2: B0-28 is used to enable the speed
limit function. When B0-28 is set to 0, the speed
is not limited (limited by the upper limit
frequency). When B0-28 is set to 1, the speed is
limited according to B0-26 and B0-27. In the
torque mode, by default (B0-28=0), the upper
limit of the winding frequency is not limited. To
prevent material breaking and runaway, the
above parameters can be set to limit the upper
limit of the winding frequency.
Based on the synchronization frequency (the
running frequency that the rewinder matches
the current linear speed) and the frequency limit
offset, the upper limit of the winding frequency
is obtained according to the following formula:
Winding frequency upper limit = Synchronous
frequency x (1 + B0-26) + B0-27
See "Table 3–41 Parameters" on page 639.

‑638‑
 Function Application

No. Scenario Description

3 Unwinding scenarios where B0-02 = 0
reverse tightening is
disabled
4 Unwinding scenarios where Reverse tightening at fixed linear speed can be
reverse tightening is enabled enabled through B0-02. See "Table 3–41
Parameters" on page 639.

Table 3–41 Parameters

Para. Name De Value Range Description
fault
B0-26 Tension frequency 50.0% 0.0% to Limit percentage (corresponding
limit 100.0% to the linear speed synchronous
frequency)
B0-27 Tension frequency 5.00 0.00 Hz to Limit offset (fixed frequency)
limit offset Hz 100.00 Hz
B0-02 Unwinding 0 0: Disabled When B0-02 is set to 0, at zero
reverse tightening 0.1 to 500.0 material speed, the unwinding
m/min reel has no output and the
material is not tightened.
When B0-02 is set to a value
between 0.1 m/min to 500.0 m/
min, under no-load conditions or
if the material is in loose state, the
unwinding reel runs at the set
linear speed in the reverse
direction. At zero material speed,
the unwinding real maintains
output and the material is
tightened.

3.6.12PID Adjustment Limit

This function is valid only in closed-loop mode (B0-00 is set to 2 or 3).

‑639‑
Function Application

No. Scenario Description

1 The closed-loop speed B0-28 = 0
control mode is used and Closed-loop adjustment limit = Linear speed
the closed-loop limit is synchronous frequency x B0-26 + B0-27
associated with the
synchronous frequency.
2 The closed-loop speed B0-28 = 1
control mode is used and Closed-loop adjustment limit = B0-27
the closed-loop limit is set See "Table 3–42 Parameters" on page 640.
to a fixed frequency.
3 The closed-loop torque The limit is set through B1-16 and the value is a
control mode is used and percentage of the motor rated torque. See
the closed-loop limit is set "Table 3–42 Parameters" on page 640.
to a fixed torque.

Table 3–42 Parameters

Para. Name De Value Range Description
fault
B0-26 Winding 50.0% 0.0% to Limit percentage (a percentage of
frequency limit 100.0% the linear speed synchronous
frequency)
B0-27 Winding 5.00 0.00 Hz to Limit offset (fixed frequency)
frequency limit Hz 100.00 Hz
offset
B1-16 Tension closed- 100.0 0.0% to Used to limit the ratio (in
loop torque % 200.0% percentage) of the closed-loop
control limit torque control value to the open-
loop control torque reference in
the closed-loop torque control
mode (B0-00 is set to 3).

3.6.13Tension Torque Compensation

This function is only applicable to the torque control mode. Setting parameters
related to this function properly can optimize the tension control effect, improve the
tension stability, and optimize the system response speed.
It is recommended that you set the parameters for the open-loop torque control
mode (B0-00 = 1). Generally, for the closed-loop torque control mode (B0-00 = 3), do
not set the parameters.

‑640‑
 Function Application

Running friction compensation parameters

When the motor runs stably, the output torque is used for material tension and
consumed by rotation friction. If the rotation friction consumes large output torque,
compensation for the output torque is required.
Para. Name De Value Range Description
fault
B1-07 Friction force 0.0% 0.0% to 50.0% In tension control mode, the AC
compensation drive automatically sets the target
coefficient torque according to the tension
reference and roll diameter. The
target torque is increased
(winding)/decreased (unwinding)
according to B1-07 to offset the
effect of friction on material
tension.
This parameter corresponds to the
percentage of the rated torque of
the AC drive.
B1-17 Friction force 0.0% -50.0% to In most scenarios, friction may vary
compensation +50.0% with running frequency. Using B1-
correction 07 may not achieve ideal friction
coefficient compensation effect. To achieve
better effect, use B1-07 together
with B1-18. See B1-18 for details.
This parameter corresponds to the
percentage of the rated torque of
the AC drive.

‑641‑
Function Application

Para. Name De Value Range Description

fault
B1-18 Friction force 0 0: Running Five friction compensation modes
compensation frequency are available to meet the
curve 1: Linear speed requirements of complex friction
2: Multi-friction changes.
compensation 0: Running frequency
curve 1 In some scenarios, the friction
3: Multi-friction changes with the system running
compensation frequency. When B1-18 is set to 0,
curve 2 the friction compensation value is
determined using the following
formula:
Friction compensation torque = B1-
07 x (1 + Frequency converted
based on the linear speed/
Maximum frequency x B1-17)
Contin Continued Contin Continued 1: Linear speed
ued ued This mode is similar to mode 0. The
friction compensation is based on
the linear speed and the friction
compensation value is determined
using the following formula:
Friction compensation torque = B1-
07 x (1 + Linear speed/Maximum
linear speed x B1-17)
2: Multi-friction compensation
curve 1
In some scenarios, the friction does
not change linearly with the
running frequency. Based on the
frequency converted from the
linear speed, the dynamic friction
compensation value can be
obtained through the multi-friction
compensation curve mode. For
details, see B1-19 to B1-24.
3: Multi-friction compensation
curve 2
Compared with compensation
curve 1, compensation curve 2 is
more flexible but requires more
parameters to be set. For details,
see B1-19 to B1-30 in "Figure 3–79
DI torque boost function" on page
649.

‑642‑
 Function Application

Para. Name De Value Range Description

fault
B1-19 Multi-friction 0.0% 0.0% to 50.0% -
compensation
torque 1
B1-20 Multi-friction 0.0% 0.0% to 50.0% -
compensation
torque 2
B1-21 Multi-friction 0.0% 0.0% to 50.0% -
compensation
torque 3
B1-22 Multi-friction 0.0% 0.0% to 50.0% -
compensation
torque 4
B1-23 Multi-friction 0.0% 0.0% to 50.0% -
compensation
torque 5
B1-24 Multi-friction 0.0% 0.0% to 50.0% -
compensation
torque 6
B1-25 Multi-friction 0.00 0.00 Hz to the -
compensation Hz maximum
inflexion point 1 frequency
B1-26 Multi-friction 0.00 0.00 Hz to the -
compensation Hz maximum
inflexion point 2 frequency
B1-27 Multi-friction 0.00 0.00 Hz to the -
compensation Hz maximum
inflexion point 3 frequency
B1-28 Multi-friction 0.00H 0.00 Hz to the -
compensation z maximum
inflexion point 4 frequency
B1-29 Multi-friction 0.00H 0.00 Hz to the -
compensation z maximum
inflexion point 5 frequency
B1-30 Multi-friction 0.00H 0.00 Hz to the -
compensation z maximum
inflexion point 6 frequency

The preceding parameters are used for multi-friction compensation curves 1 and 2.
When B1-18 is set to 2, parameters B1-19 to b1-24 take effect. When B1-18 is set to 3,
B1-19 to B1-30 take effect.
The change curves of friction compensation values are shown in the following two
figures. You can set B1-18 based on actual conditions.

‑643‑
Function Application

When B1-18 is set to 2, friction compensation curve 1 is as follows.

Figure 3-76 Friction compensation curve 1

When B1-18 is set to 3, friction compensation curve 2 is as follows.

Figure 3-77 Friction compensation curve 2

Startup friction compensation parameters

In some scenarios, the reel is subject to large startup friction, which makes system
startup difficult. In this case, torque compensation can be provided during startup
and canceled once the system runs properly to ensure constant tension.

‑644‑
 Function Application

Para. Name De Value Range Description

fault
B1-03 Zero-speed 0.0% 0.0% to 20.0% If the running frequency is lower
threshold than the value of this parameter,
startup friction tension
compensation will be carried out
according to B1-04. If the running
frequency is higher than the value
of this parameter, startup friction
tension compensation will not be
carried out.
B1-04 Zero-speed 0.0% 0.0% to This parameter corresponds to
tension rise 100.0% the percentage of the tension
reference and must be set
properly according to the range of
allowable material tension. Set
this parameter to a value as small
as possible on the premise of
ensuring normal startup.
B1-14 Transition 2.00 0.00–200.00 This parameter supports smooth
frequency for zero Hz Hz switchover of zero speed tension
speed rise at the threshold.
compensation

The preceding three parameters can be used together for static compensation, as
shown below.

Figure 3-78 Static friction compensation

‑645‑
Function Application

Inertia compensation parameters

In the open-loop torque control mode, the output torque is used for material tension
and consumed by rotation inertia of the system during acceleration or deceleration.
In any of the following cases, inertia compensation is required:
1. Small material tension during acceleration of winding
2. Large material tension during deceleration of winding
3. Large material tension during acceleration of unwinding
4. Small material tension during deceleration of unwinding
The inertia of a winding/unwinding system consists of mechanical inertia and
material inertia. The parameter can be set according to the mapping between
mechanical inertia and material inertia. If the material is heavy and the reel is light,
the parameters related only to material inertia need to be set, and the vice versa.

Note
Accurate linear speed is required for inertia compensation.

‑646‑
 Function Application

Para. Name De Value Range Description

fault
B1-08 Mechanical 0 NM2 0 NM2 to Set B1-08 based on the actual
flywheel inertia 65535 NM2 mechanical flywheel inertia.
For general cylindrical mechanical
reels, the theoretical value of
mechanical flywheel inertia can
be obtained using the following
formula:
2 πg γb 4 − 4
GDm = 2 D D0
8i

g is the gravitational acceleration

(9.8 m/s2), γ is the density of
machine materials, b is the length
of the mechanical reel, D and D 0
are the outer diameter and inner
diameter (0 for a solid reel) of the
mechanical reel respectively, and i
is the transmission ratio. The
international units are applied.
The setting value can be adjusted
according to the actual change of
material tension during
acceleration or deceleration.
B1-11 Material density 0 kg/ 0 kg/m3 to Set this group of parameters with
m3 65535 kg/m3 reference to the actual material
B1-12 Material width 0 mm 0 mm to properties, and set the
65535 mm mechanical transmission ratio
(B0-03) accurately at the same
time.
The AC drive automatically
calculates the flywheel inertia
according to the material density,
material width, reel diameter, and
material roll diameter.

‑647‑
Function Application

Para. Name De Value Range Description

fault
B1-09 Acceleration 100.0 0.0% to An inevitable deviation exists
inertia % 200.0% between the theoretical inertia
compensation and the actual inertia, so the
gain inertia compensation effect may
B1-10 Deceleration 100.0 0.0% to not be ideal even after the inertia
inertia % 200.0% parameters are set.
compensation To address this, set B1-09 and B1-
gain 10 for fine tuning to optimize the
control effect. Take the winding
acceleration as an example. If the
material tension is small, increase
B1-09 to strengthen the
compensation effect; otherwise,
decrease this parameter to
weaken the effect. This process
works the same for deceleration.
This set of parameters facilitates
commissioning.

Terminal tension rise

In some scenarios, customized torque boost is required.
When the DI (assigned with function 61) is activated, the tension torque is boosted.
After the DI terminal is deactivated, the boost part is canceled gradually.

Para. Name De Value Range Description

fault
B1-34 Terminal tension 50.0% 0.0% to -
rise ratio 500.0%
B1-35 Rise cancellation 0.0s 0.0s to 50.0s -
transition time

‑648‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-79 DI torque boost function

Torque direction control parameters

Para. Name De Value Range Description
fault
B1-15 Open-loop torque 0 0: Disabled This parameter takes effect only
reverse 1: Enabled when B0-00 is set to 1 or 3.
When friction compensation and
inertia compensation are added,
the calculated torque value is
likely to be negative. You can set
B1-15 to select the solution for
reverse torque. Reverse torque is
disabled by default. You can set
B1-15 to 1 to enable reverse
torque.

3.6.14Taper
In some scenarios, the tension should be reduced with the increase of the roll
diameter to ensure smooth winding. For this purpose, set taper parameters properly.
This group of parameters is valid only in the winding mode (B0-01 is set to 0).

‑649‑
Function Application

Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.
Used to select the taper curve generation mode.
0: Curve
The taper curve is generated based on the taper
0: Curve
B2-00 Taper curve selection 0 setting and the correction coefficient of taper
1: Multi-taper
compensation (B2-03). For details, see B2-03.
1: Multi taper
For details, see B2-08 to B2-19.

0: B2-02
1: AI1
0: B2-02 (digital setting)
2: AI2
B2-01 Tension taper source 0 1 to 3: Set based on AI1 to AI3.
3: AI3
4: Set through the communication address 1000H.
4: Communication
(1000H)

Digital setting of Used to set the taper through digital setting. For
B2-02 0.0% 0.0% to 100.0%
taper details, see mode 0 of B2-01.

Used to set the correction coefficient of taper

compensation. You can set the preceding parameters
to set the curve taper based on the taper setting. The
taper value can be determined by using the following
formula (multiple modes are available and the
Correction following gives a typical example):
0 mm to 10000
B2-03 coefficient of taper 0 mm F = F_0 x {1 - K x [1 - (D_0 + D_1)/(D + D_1)]}
mm
compensation Where, F is the tension after taper is set; F 0 is the
tension before taper is set, determined by B1-00; K is
the taper value, determined by B2-01; D 0 is the reel
diameter set through B0-09; D is the current roll
diameter set through B0-14; D 1 is the correction
coefficient of taper compensation.

In some scenarios, material tension is determined by

external actuators. The external taper output function
can be use to control the external actuators to achieve
0: B2-06 proper the tension taper. The maximum external taper
1: AI1 determines FMP or AO (F5-06 to F5-08). For the external
Maximum external
B2-05 0 2: AI2 taper output (function 19), the maximum taper output
taper source
3: AI3 is the value obtained under no-load conditions. The
4: Communication source of external taper is set through this parameter.
0: B2-06 (digital setting)
1 to 3: Set based on AI1 to AI3.
4: Set through the communication address 1000H.

Maximum external Used to set the maximum external taper (digital

B2-06 100.0% 0.0% to 100.0%
taper setting setting). For details, see mode 0 of B2-05.

Taper at minimum
B2-08 100.0% 0.0% to 100.0% -
roll diameter
Linear taper
B2-09 150.0 mm B0-09 to B0-08 -
switchover point 1

Taper of switchover
B2-10 100.0% 0.0% to 100.0% -
point 1

‑650‑
 Function Application

Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.
Linear taper
B2-11 200.0 mm B2-09 to B0-08 -
switchover point 2

Taper of switchover
B2-12 90.0% 0.0% to 100.0% -
point 2

Linear taper
B2-13 250.0 mm B2-11 to B0-08 -
switchover point 3

Taper of switchover
B2-14 80.0% 0.0% to 100.0% -
point 3

Linear taper
B2-15 300.0 mm B2-13 to B0-08 -
switchover point 4

Taper of switchover
B2-16 70.0% 0.0% to 100.0% -
point 4

Linear taper
B2-17 400.0 mm B0-15 to B0-08 -
switchover point 5

Taper of switchover
B2-18 50.0% 0.0% to 100.0% -
point 5

Taper at maximum
B2-19 30.0% 0.0% to 100.0% -
roll diameter

The following figure shows a multi-point linear taper curve, where the ordinate
represents the ratio of tension after taper is set to original tension, and the abscissa
represents the roll diameter. You can set the preceding parameters to obtain a multi-
liner taper curve.

Figure 3-80 Multi-point linear taper curve

‑651‑
Function Application

3.6.15Pre-drive
The pre-drive function is applied to automatic reel replacement scenarios. To achieve
a shockless roll change, ensure that the linear speed of the new roll matches that of
the material when replacing a full roll with a new roll. For this purpose, enable
function 57 (Pre-drive terminal) of the DI terminal and set the pre-drive parameters
properly.
Accurate linear speed and roll diameter are required for this function.

Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.
For pre-drive, the running frequency is
automatically calculated based on the linear
speed and roll diameter to ensure matching with
Pre-drive frequency the linear speed of the material.
B0-19 0.0% –100.0% to +100.0%
gain For small deviation of linear speed, set B0-19 to
increase or decrease the running frequency during
pre-drive, ensuring accurate linear speed
matching.

In torque control mode, the system automatically

calculates the target torque to meet the
requirements on material tension. In regular
mode, set the target torque through F2-09. This
0: F2-09 parameter provides the preceding sources of
Pre-drive torque limit
B0-20 0 1: Based on tension target torque in the pre-drive mode. You can
source
control torque select one according to your needs.
0: Set the target torque based on F2-09.
1: Set the target torque based on the open-loop
torque control mode (for mode 1 and mode 3
only).

This function is activated when B0-20 is set to 1,

and is used to correct the tension control torque
Pre-drive torque in the pre-drive mode.
B0-21 0.0% –100.0% to +100.0%
correction To prevent slow pre-drive acceleration due to a
small torque limit when B0-20 is set to 1, set a
lower torque limit in pre-drive mode.

Minimum torque limit Settings of these functions correspond to the

B0-40 0.0% 0.0% to 100.0%
in pre-drive mode acceleration/deceleration time at minimum roll

Pre-drive acceleration diameter. When the roll diameter increases,

B0-23 0.0% 0.0s to 6500.0s increase the acceleration/deceleration time
time
proportionally to avoid impact caused by
Pre-drive deceleration excessively quick acceleration/deceleration at a
B0-24 1.0s 0.0s to 6500.0s
time large roll diameter.

‑652‑
 Function Application

Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.
This parameter is valid only when B0-07 is set to 1.
When the roll diameter is calculated based on
accumulative thickness, the roll diameter
increases/decreases with the number of
Pre-drive roll diameter 0: Disabled
B0-25 0 revolutions. Set B0-25 to 1 to avoid accumulative
calculation function 1: Enabled
error caused by invalid roll diameter calculation in
the pre-drive mode.
You can set this parameter according to the actual
operations.

3.6.16Constant Linear Speed Mode

In this mode, the running frequency for winding and unwinding is automatically
calculated based on the set target linear speed.

Para. Name De Value Range Description

fault
B0-41 Constant linear 0 0: AI1 0 to 2: AI channel
speed input 1: AI2 3: Pulse reference
source 2: AI3 4: Communication address
3: Pulse (1000H); set by percentage
reference (DI5) 5: Communication address
4: (731AH); set by digital with the
Communica range from 0 to B0-05
tion (1000H)
5:
Communica
tion (731AH)
B0-19 Pre-drive 0.0% –100.0% to For pre-drive, the running
frequency gain +100.0% frequency is automatically
calculated based on the linear
speed and roll diameter to ensure
matching with the linear speed of
the material. For small deviation
of linear speed, set B0-19 to
increase or decrease the running
frequency during pre-drive,
ensuring accurate linear speed
matching.

‑653‑
Function Application

3.6.17Optimization Parameters for Control Mode

Parameters for tension setup at zero speed in closed-Loop control mode

Generally, the AC drive can run without the need for additional configuration of
closed-loop control.
Configure the following parameters in scenarios demanding accurate tension setup at
zero speed or roll diameter auto-tuning during tension setup at zero speed.
Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.
In closed-loop control mode, if B1-31 is set to 0, the
Tension setup at pre- 0: Disabled tension setup at pre-speed function is disabled. If
B1-31 0
speed 1: Enabled B1-31 is set to 1, the tension setup at pre-speed
function is enabled.
When the tension setup at pre-speed function is
B1-32 Tension setup dead zone 2.0% 0.0% to 100.0% enabled and PID feedback is below B1-32, PID
calculation stops.

Used to set the running frequency in scenarios

Pre-speed of tension where the tension setup at pre-speed function is
B1-33 0.10 Hz 0.00 Hz to F0‑10
setup enabled but the system is not in the tension setup
dead zone.

For details about tension setup at zero speed, see "Figure 3–81 Diagram of tension
setup at zero speed" on page 655. You can set B1-31 to 1 to enable the tension setup
at pre-speed function and set B1-32 to define the tension setup dead zone.
When PID feedback is below the tension setup dead zone, PID calculation stops and
the reel runs at a fixed frequency to slowly wind the material.

‑654‑
 Function Application

Figure 3-81 Diagram of tension setup at zero speed

Parameters for initial roll diameter auto-tuning

When the tension setup at pre-speed function is enabled, you can also enable the
initial roll diameter auto-tuning function. During tension setup, the AC drive auto-
tunes the initial roll diameter to remove the need for roll diameter reset or initial roll
diameter input (for tension setup at zero speed in FVC mode only).
Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.
When the tension setup at pre-speed function is
enabled, you can also enable the initial roll
diameter auto-tuning function for the AC drive to
Initial roll diameter auto- 0: Disabled
B1-37 0 auto-tune the initial roll diameter. This function is
tuning selection 1: Enabled
applicable to rod control only. This function is
enabled when B1-37 is set to 1, and disabled
when B1-37 is set to 0.
1 mm to 65535 The rod length after the initial roll diameter is
B1-38 Rod length 300 mm
mm auto-tuned.
The rod angle after the initial roll diameter is
B1-39 Rod angle 40° 0.1° to 360.0°
auto-tuned.

‑655‑
Function Application

Parameters for tension closed-loop torque control mode

You can set the tenson in closed-loop torque control mode by using PID alone or
main torque + PID.
Para.
Name Default Value Range Description
No.
The main torque is the torque calculated when
B0-00 is set to 1.
In pure PID mode, the set friction and inertia
0: Torque calculated
compensation are still valid, but the tension
Closed-loop speed through pure PID
B0-38 0 torque is invalid.
control limit selection 1: Torque calculated
In main + PID mode, set the tension
through main + PID
corresponding to the condition that the PID
feedback value indicates 100.0% and input B1-
02.

3.6.18Related I/O Functions

Functions of DI terminals
You can select DI functions by using parameters F4-00 to F4-09 or virtual DI terminals.
1. DI function 53: Revolution count signal
When roll diameter is calculated based on accumulative thickness, set this function
for the DI terminal to input revolution count signals from the terminal.

2. DI function 54: Roll diameter reset

Roll diameter reset during reel replacement is necessary for tension control. It
ensures accurate roll diameter at the moment when the system is started after reel
replacement, and also ensures normal system startup and proper material tension.

3. DI functions 55 and 56: Initial roll diameter selection terminals 1 and 2

These functions provide initial roll diameter switchover modes to meet different
requirements for different reels or materials. For details of use, see B0-10.

4. DI function 57: Pre-charge input terminal

When the terminal is activated, the AC drive is switched to the pre-charge speed
control mode. When the terminal is deactivated after reel replacement, the tension
control can function properly.

5. DI function 58: Winding/unwinding switchover

Winding/unwinding switchover is performed without modifying the parameter,
greatly facilitating the operation. For details of use, see B0-01.

6. DI function 59: Roll diameter calculation disabled

When the terminal is activated, the roll diameter calculation is disabled.

7. DI function 60: Tension control mode disabled

‑656‑
 Function Application

When the terminal is activated, the system exits the tension control mode and the
AC drive restores general AC drive functions (the frequency source and torque
source are enabled based on the general AC drive functions).

8. DI function 61: Terminal tension rise

When the terminal is activated, the tension torque is increased by a certain ratio.
After the DI terminal is deactivated, the boost part will be canceled gradually based
on time.

9. DI functions 62 and 63: Thickness selection terminals 1 and 2

These functions provide material thickness switchover modes to meet different
requirements for materials with different thickness. For details of use, see B0-31.

AO/Pulse output functions

In addition to the AC drive, PLC or actuators also affect the tension control function.
The AC drive supports output of variables related to tension control, enriching means
to realize the tension control function.
You can select AO/pulse output functions by setting F5-06 to F5-08.
1. Output function 19: External taper output
When the tension taper control is required and the material tension is determined
by the external actuator, you can enable this function to output taper.

2. Output function 20: Roll diameter output

When the roll diameter is calculated in the AC drive and the calculation result
needs to be output, you can enable this function to output the result.

3. Output function 21: Tension output

You can enable this function to output the tension reference of the AC drive. The
actual valid tension after taper calculation is calibrated based on the maximum
tension (B1-02).

3.6.19Monitoring
You can set F7-04 and F7-05 to enable the display of the roll diameter or tension at
stop or during operation.

‑657‑
Function Application

Para. Name Value Range Description

F7-03 LED BIT00: Running frequency If a parameter needs to be
running (Hz) displayed during running, set its
display BIT01: Frequency reference corresponding bit to 1. After
parame (Hz) converting this binary number to a
ter 1 BIT02: Bus voltage (V) hexadecimal number, set it in F7-
BIT03: Output voltage (V) 03.
BIT04: Output Current (A)
BIT05: Output power (kW)
BIT06: Output torque (%)
Continued Contin BIT07: DI state Continued
ued BIT08: DO state
BIT09: AI1 voltage (V)
BIT10: AI2 voltage (V)
BIT11: AI3 voltage (V)
BIT12: Count value
BIT13: Length value
BIT14: Load speed display
BIT15: PID setting
F7-04 LED BIT00: PID feedback If a parameter needs to be
running BIT01: PLC stage displayed during running, set its
display BIT02: Pulse setting corresponding bit to 1. After
parame frequency (kHz) converting this binary number to a
ter 2 BIT03: Running frequency 2 hexadecimal number, set it in F7-
(Hz) 04.
BIT04: Remaining running
time
BIT05: AI1 voltage before
correction (V)
Continued Contin BIT06: AI2 voltage before Continued
ued correction (V)
BIT07: AI2 voltage before
correction (V)
BIT08: Linear speed
BIT09: Current power-on
time (hour)
BIT10: Current running
time (min)
BIT11: Pulse input
frequency (Hz)
BIT12: Communication
setting value
BIT13: Encoder feedback
speed (Hz)
BIT14: Roll diameter (mm)
BIT15: Tension reference
after taper setting (N)

‑658‑
 Function Application

Para. Name Value Range Description

F7-05 LED stop BIT00: Frequency reference If a parameter needs to be
display (Hz) displayed when the AC drive stops,
parame BIT01: Bus voltage (V) set its corresponding bit to 1. After
ter BIT02: DI state converting this binary number to a
BIT03: DO state hexadecimal number, set it in F7-
BIT04: AI1 voltage (V) 05.
BIT05: AI2 voltage (V)
Continued Contin BIT06: AI3 voltage (V) Continued
ued BIT07: Count value
BIT08: Length value
BIT09: PLC stage
BIT10: Load speed display
BIT11: PID setting
BIT12: Pulse input
frequency (kHz)
BIT14: Roll diameter (mm)
BIT15: Tension reference
after taper setting (N)

The following table lists monitoring parameters, which can be monitored on the
operating panel or in the background in real time.

Table 3–43 Monitoring parameters

Para. Name Minimum Unit Description

U1-00 Linear speed 0.1m/min
U1-01 Current roll diameter 0.1 mm
U1-02 Linear speed 0.01 Hz
synchronous
frequency
U1-03 PID output 0.01 Hz
frequency
U1-04 Current tension 1N
reference
U1-05 Tension reference 1N
after taper
U1-06 Open-loop torque 0.1%
U1-07 PID output torque 0.1%

‑659‑
Function Application

Para. Name Minimum Unit Description

U1-08 Tension control 1 Tens position of U1-
mode 08: Used to specify
the tension control
mode of the system.
0: Non-tension
control mode
1: Tension open-loop
torque control
2: Tension closed-
loop speed control
3: Tension closed-
loop torque control
4: Constant linear
speed control
5: Pre-charge
U1-09 PID reference 0.1%
U1-10 PID feedback 0.1%
U1-11 Kp output 1
U1-12 Ki output 1s
U1-13 Kd output 1s
U1-14 Tension time 1s
U1-15 Winding/Unwinding 1 Used to specify the
mode tension control
mode of the system.
0: Winding
1: Unwinding

Note
For better control effect, conduct commissioning based on the measurements obtained us-
ing a speed measuring device or tape and comparison between such measurements with
related monitoring parameters.

3.7 Fault and Protection

3.7.1 Startup Protection

When F8-18 is set to 1, startup protection is enabled to prevent the motor from
responding to a command upon power-on or fault reset of the AC drive.
The startup protection works in the following two scenarios:

‑660‑
 Function Application

● If a command is issued upon power-on of the AC drive (for example, the terminals
used as the command source are ON before power-on), the AC drive does not
respond to the command. Instead, the AC drive responds only after the command
is canceled and re-issued.
● If a command is issued upon fault reset of the AC drive, the AC drive does not
respond to the command. Instead, the AC drive responds only after the command
is canceled and re-issued.

Related parameter
Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
The AC drive comes with startup protection. This
Startup protection 0: Disabled
F8-18 0 helps to avoid unexpected motor running at
selection 1: Enabled
power-on or fault reset.

3.7.2 Undervoltage and Overvoltage Thresholds and Fast Current Limit

Protection
When the bus voltage falls below A5-06 or exceeds A5-09, the AC drive generates an
alarm.

Related parameters
Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
When the bus voltage falls below A5-06, the AC
Undervoltage
A5-06 350.0 V 150.0 V to 700.0 V drive generates an alarm (E05.00 to E07.00, or
threshold
E09.00).

Overvoltage When the bus voltage exceeds F9-04, the AC drive

F9-04 820 V 350.0 V to 820.0 V
threshold generates an alarm (E05.00 to E07.00).

This function is used to minimize the overcurrent

0: Disabled faults, ensuring normal operation of the AC drive.
A5-04 Fast current limit 1
1: Enabled Disable this function in hoist applications such as
cranes.

‑661‑
Function Application

3.7.3 Phase Loss Protection

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

F9-06 Output phase loss 0 0: Disabled It takes about several
detection before 1: Enabled seconds to detect output
startup phase loss during running.
For low-frequency running
applications or applications
where risks exist in start with
phase loss, this function
enables quick detection of
output phase loss during
startup. However, it does not
apply to applications that
have strict requirements on
startup time.
F9-48 Fault protection 10050 Ones: E11 The fault protection actions
action selection 1 0: Coast to are set through the ones,
stop tens, hundreds, thousands,
1: Decelerate and ten thousands positions
to stop of this parameter.
2: Fault reset 0: Coast to stop
4: Warning The AC drive coasts to stop.
5: Canceled 1: Decelerate to stop
Tens: E12 The AC drive decelerates to
0: Coast to stop.
stop 2: Fault reset
1: Decelerate The AC drive will be restarted
to stop upon a fault.
2: Fault reset 3: Electromagnetic shorting
4: Warning The AC drive enters the
5: Canceled electromagnetic shorting
state.
4: Warning
The AC drive continues to
run.
5: Canceled
The fault is ignored.

‑662‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

Contin Continued Contin Hundreds: E13 Continued
ued ued 0: Coast to
stop
1: Decelerate
to stop
2: Fault reset
4: Warning
5: Canceled
Thousands:
E14
0: Coast to
stop
Ten
thousands:
E15
0: Coast to
stop
1: Decelerate
to stop
3:
Electromagnet
ic shorting
4: Warning
5: Canceled

3.7.4 Overtemperature Protection

Related parameters
Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
Used to set the motor overtemperature protection
threshold. When the motor temperature exceeds
Motor
the value of F9-57 (motor overtemperature
overtemperature
F9-57 110°C 0°C to 200°C protection threshold), the AC drive generates the
protection
motor overtemperature alarm (E45.00) and
threshold
responds based on the fault protection action
selection 2 (F9-48).

Used to set the motor overtemperature pre-

Motor warning threshold. When the motor temperature
overtemperature exceeds the value of F9-58 (motor overtemperature
F9-58 90°C 0°C to 200°C
pre-warning pre-waring threshold), the DO terminal assigned
threshold with function 39 (motor overtemperature) outputs
the active signal.

‑663‑
Function Application

3.7.5 Overload Protection

To provide effective protection for motors with different loads, set the motor overload
protection gain properly based on the overload capacity of a motor. The motor
overload protection curve is an inverse time lag curve, as shown in the following
figure.

Figure 3-82 Inverse time lag curve of motor overload protection

When the motor running current reaches 175% of the rated motor current and lasts
for 2 minutes, E11.00 (motor overload) is reported. When the motor running current
reaches 115% of the rated motor current and lasts for 80 minutes, E11.00 is reported.
1. Example 1
● Assume that the rated motor current is 100 A. If F9-01 is set to 1.00, according to
the preceding figure, the AC drive reports a motor overload alarm (E11.00) after
the motor runs at 125% of 100 A (125 A) continuously for 40 minutes.
● If F9-01 is set to 1.20, according to the preceding figure, the AC drive reports a
motor overload alarm (E11.00) after the motor runs at 125% of 100 A (125 A)
continuously for 48 minutes (40 x 1.2).

Note
The maximum overload time is 80 minutes and the minimum overload time is 10 seconds.

2. Example 2
Assume that the application requires an overload alarm when the motor runs at
150% of rated motor current for 2 minutes. According to the motor overload
protection curve, 150% (I) of the rated motor current is between 145% (I1) and
155% (I2) of the rated motor current. As the overload time is 6 minutes (T1) at the

‑664‑
 Function Application

145% point and 4 minutes (T2) at the 155% point, the overload time at 150% of the
rated motor current is 5 minutes under the default settings. The overload time is
calculated using the following formula:

T = T1 + (T2 - T1) x (I - I1)/(I2 - I1) = 4 + (6 - 4) x (150% - 145%)/(155% - 145%) = 5

minutes

Therefore, to have an overload alarm reported when the motor runs at 150% of
rated motor current for 2 minutes, set the motor overload protection gain (F9-01)
to 0.4 (2/5 = 0.4).

Set F9–01 properly based on the actual overload capacity of the motor. Note that setting
F9–01 to an excessively high value may easily result in motor damage caused by overtem-
perature without warning.

Motor overload pre-warning coefficient: When the motor overload detection level
reaches the value of this parameter, the corresponding multi-functional output
terminal (DO) or fault relay outputs a motor overload pre-warning signal. The value
of this parameter is a percentage of the time during which the motor runs
continuously at an overload point without triggering an overload alarm.

On the condition that F9-01 (motor overload protection gain) is set to 1.00 and F9-
02 (motor overload pre-warning coefficient) is set to 80%, when the motor running
current reaches 145% of the rated motor current and the motor runs at this level
for 4.8 minutes (80% x 6), the multi-functional DO terminal or fault relay outputs a
motor overload pre-warning signal.

The motor overload pre-warning function enables the control system to receive a
pre-warning signal from a DO terminal before motor overload protection is
triggered. The pre-warning coefficient determines how long in advance the AC drive
triggers a pre-warning ahead of motor overload protection. A larger coefficient
means later transmission of the pre-warning signal. When the accumulative output
current of the AC drive exceeds the product of overload time (value Y on the inverse
time lag curve of motor overload protection) multiplied by the motor overload pre-
warning coefficient (F9-02), the multi-functional DO terminal of the AC drive
outputs a motor overload pre-warning signal. When F9-02 is set to 100%, the motor
overload pre-warning signal is transmitted the same time when overload
protection is triggered.

‑665‑
Function Application

Related parameters
Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
Used to enable or disable the motor overload
protection function. The AC drive judges whether the
motor is overloaded based on the inverse time-lag
curve. When motor overload is detected, the AC drive
reports an overload fault.
AC drive overload 0: Disabled
F9-00 0 0: Disabled
protection 1: Enabled
Motor overload protection is disabled. When this
parameter is set to 0, install a thermal relay upstream
the motor for protection.
1: Enabled
Motor overload protection is enabled.

The value of motor overload protection gain is

calculated according to the percentage of time during
which the motor runs continuously at a certain overload
Motor overload
F9-01 1.00 0.20 to 10.00 point without reporting an overload fault.
protection gain
This parameter is used to adjust the actual overload
fault report time of the AC drive when motor overload
occurs.
The value of motor overload pre-warning coefficient is
calculated according to the percentage of time during
which the motor runs continuously at a certain overload
point without reporting overload pre-warning. This
function is used to send a pre-warning signal to the
control system through a DO terminal before the motor
overload protection is triggered.
This signal is used to determine how long in advance to
Motor overload pre- send the pre-warning signal before the motor overload
F9-02 80% 50% to 100%
warning coefficient protection is triggered. A larger coefficient means later
transmission of the pre-warning signal.
When the accumulative output current of the AC drive
exceeds the product of overload time (value Y on the
inverse time lag curve of motor overload protection)
multiplied by the motor overload pre-warning
coefficient (F9-02), the multi-functional DO terminal of
the AC drive outputs a motor overload pre-warning
signal.

3.7.6 Load Loss Protection

You can set the ten thousands position of F9-51 to enable load loss detection. The AC
drive takes the load loss protection action after running at an output current below
the load loss detection level (F9-64) continuously for a period of the load loss
detection time (F9-65). Once the load recovers during protection, the AC drive
accelerates to the frequency reference.

‑666‑
 Function Application

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
F9-51 Fault protection action 4 51111 -
F9-64 Load loss detection level 10.0% 0.0% to 100.0% -
F9-65 Load loss detection time 1.0s 0.1s to 60.0s

3.7.7 Overspeed Protection

The overspeed protection is valid only when the FVC mode is selected for the AC drive
(F0-01 is set to 1).
When this protection is enabled, if detected motor speed exceeds the maximum
frequency (F0-10) and the excess is greater than the value of F9-67 (overspeed
threshold) for a period longer than the time set in F9-68 (overspeed detection time),
the AC drive reports an alarm (E43.00) and acts according to F9-50 (overspeed
protection action).
When F9-68 (overspeed detection time) is set to 0.0s, the overspeed detection
function is disabled.

Related parameters
Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
0.0% to 50.0% (max.
F9-67 Overspeed threshold 20.0%
frequency) -
F9-68 Overspeed detection time 1.0s 0.0s to 60.0s

3.7.8 Excessive Speed Deviation Protection

The excessive speed deviation protection function is valid only when the FVC mode is
selected for the AC drive (F0-01 is set to 1).
When this protection is enabled, if the AC drive detects that the deviation between
the actual motor running frequency and the frequency reference stays above the
excessive speed deviation threshold (F9-69) for a period longer than the detection
time of excessive speed deviation (F9-70), the AC drive generates an alarm of E42.00
(excessive speed deviation) and takes an action based on the setting of fault
protection action selection (F9-50).
If F9-70 (detection time of excessive speed deviation) is set to 0.0s, the excessive
speed deviation detection function is disabled.

‑667‑
Function Application

Related parameters
Para. Function Default Value Range Description

Excessive speed 0.0% to 50.0% (max.

F9-69 20.0%
deviation threshold frequency)

Detection time of -
F9-70 excessive speed 5.0s 0.0s to 60.0s
deviation

3.7.9 Power Dip Ride-Through

The power dip ride-through function ensures continuous system running upon
instantaneous power failure. When the system encounters a power failure, the AC
drive makes the motor work in the generating state to keep the bus voltage around
the "threshold for enabling power dip ride-through". This function prevents the AC
drive from stopping due to input undervoltage, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-83 Power dip ride-through

In the "bus voltage constant control" mode, when the grid resumes power supply, the
AC drive restores the target output frequency based on the acceleration time. In the
"decelerate to stop mode", when the grid resumes power supply, the AC drive
decelerates to 0 Hz and stops, and will restart only after receiving a start command.

‑668‑
 Function Application

Parameters
Para. Function Default Value Description
Range
F9-59 Power dip ride- 0 0: The function enables the AC drive
through function Disabled to keep running at occurrence of
selection 1: Bus instantaneous power failure. When
voltage the system encounters a power
constant failure, the AC drive makes the
control motor work in the generating state
2: to keep the bus voltage around the
Decelerate "threshold for enabling power dip
to stop ride-through". This function
3: Voltage prevents the AC drive from
dip stopping due to input
depres undervoltage.
sion 0: Disabled
Power dip ride-through is
disabled.
1: Bus voltage constant control
When the system encounters a
power failure, the AC drive keeps
the bus voltage around the
"threshold for enabling power dip
ride-through". In this mode, when
the grid voltage recovers, the AC
drive restores the target output
frequency based on the
acceleration time.
Contin Continued Continued Continued 2: Decelerate to stop
ued When the system encounters a
power failure, the AC drive
decelerates to stop. In this mode,
when the power grid resumes
power supply, the AC drive
continues decelerating to 0 Hz and
stops, and will restart only after
receiving a start command.
3: Voltage dip depression
This function prevents AC drive
stop caused by undervoltage when
instantaneous power failure
occurs due to voltage dip. You can
use F9-66 to set the voltage dip
suppression time.

‑669‑
Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Description

Range
F9-60 Threshold for 85% 80% to This parameter is used to set the
recovering from 100% threshold for recovering from
power dip ride- power dip ride-through for the AC
through drive. 100% corresponds to 540 V.
This value is slightly lower than
the bus voltage before power
failure.
Upon grid power failure, the bus
voltage is maintained around
F9‑62 (threshold for enabling
power dip ride-through). When the
power supply recovers, the bus
voltage rises from F9‑62 (threshold
for enabling power dip ride-
through) to F9‑60 (threshold for
recovering from power dip ride-
through). During this period, the
output frequency of the AC drive
keeps decreasing until the bus
voltage reaches F9‑60 (threshold
for recovering from power dip
ride-through).
F9-61 Duration for 0.5s 0.0s to This parameter is used to set the
judging voltage 100.0s time required for the bus voltage
recovery from to rise from F9‑60 (threshold for
instantaneous recovering from power dip ride-
power failure through) to the voltage before
power failure.
F9-62 Threshold for 80% 60% to This parameter is used to set the
enabling power 100% voltage level at which the bus
dip ride-through voltage is maintained upon power
failure. Upon power failure, the
bus voltage is maintained around
F9-62 (threshold for enabling
power dip ride-through).
F9-71 Power dip ride- 0 to 100 40 This parameter is valid only in the
through gain "bus voltage constant control" (F9-
F9-72 Power dip ride- 0 to 100 30 59 is set to 1) mode.
through integral If undervoltage is likely to occur
coefficient during power dip ride-through,
increase the power dip ride-
through gain and the power dip
ride-through integral coefficient.

‑670‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Description

Range
F9-73 Deceleration time 0.0s to 20.0s This parameter is valid only in the
of power dip ride- 300.0s "decelerate to stop" (F9-59 is set
through to 2) mode.
When the bus voltage is below
F9‑62, the AC drive decelerates to
stop. The deceleration time is
determined by this parameter
instead of F0‑18.

3.7.10Fault Reset
In the case of an undervoltage fault (E09.00), the AC drive resets automatically when
the bus voltage restores to the normal range. This reset is not counted in the number
of fault auto reset times. In the case of a short circuit to ground (E23.00), the AC drive
AC does not support automatic or manual reset, and you need to reset the AC drive by
powering it off and then powering it on again. Fault protection action selection is
required when the number of fault auto reset times is reached.

Related parameters
Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
This parameter is used to set the number of automatic
resets for the AC drive if the fault protection action is set
F9-09 Fault auto rehset times 0 0 to 20 to automatic reset. If the fault persists after the
specified number of automatic resets, the AC drive
retains the fault state.
If the AC drive is enabled to reset automatically upon
DO action during auto 0: Not act
F9-10 1 faults, F9-10 can be used to determine whether the DO
fault reset 1: Act
terminal (function 2) acts during an automatic reset.

Auto fault reset This parameter is used to set the delay of auto reset
F9-11 1.0s 0.1s to 100.0s
interval after the AC drive detects a fault.

3.7.11Fault Protection Action Selection

Four fault protection actions are defined for the AC drive: coast to stop, decelerate to
stop, warning, and canceled, listed in descending order of fault severity.
When the fault protection action is set to "warning", the operating panel displays Axx.

xx upon fault occurrence, for example, .

When the fault protection action is set to "canceled", the operating panel does not
display any message upon fault occurrence. Exercise caution when setting this action.

‑671‑
Function Application

Parameters
Para. Function Default Value Range Description
F9-48 Fault 10050 Ones position: E11 The fault protection actions
protection 0: Coast to stop are set through the ones, tens,
action 1: Decelerate to hundreds, thousands, and ten
selection 1 stop thousands positions of this
2: Fault reset parameter.
4: Alarm 0: Coast to stop
5: Canceled The AC drive coasts to stop.
Tens position: E12 1: Decelerate to stop
(same as the ones) The AC drive decelerates to
Hundreds position: stop.
E13 (same as the 2: Fault reset
ones) The AC drive will be restarted
Thousands position: upon a fault.
E14 3: Electromagnetic shorting
0: Coast to stop The AC drive enters the
Ten thousands electromagnetic shorting
position: E15 state.
0: Coast to stop 4: Alarm
1: Decelerate to The AC drive continues to run.
stop 5: Canceled
3: Electromagnetic The fault is ignored.
shorting
4: Alarm
5: Canceled
F9-49 Fault 00050 Ones position: E16 Same as F9-48
protection 0: Coast to stop
action 1: Decelerate to
selection 2 stop
4: Alarm
5: Canceled
Tens position: E17
(same as the ones)
Hundreds position:
E18
0: Coast to stop
Thousands position:
E19
0: Coast to stop
3: Electromagnetic
shorting
4: Alarm
5: Canceled
Ten thousands: E20
(same as the
thousands)

‑672‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

F9-50 Fault 25000 Ones position: Same as F9-48
protection Reserved
action 0: Coast to stop
selection 3 Tens position: E63
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to
stop
4: Alarm
5: Canceled
Hundreds position:
E23
0: Coast to stop
5: Canceled
Thousands position:
E24
0: Coast to stop
5: Canceled
Ten thousands
position: E25
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to
stop
4: Alarm
5: Canceled
F9-51 Fault 51111 Ones position: E26 Same as F9-48
protection 0: Coast to stop
action 1: Decelerate to
selection 4 stop
4: Alarm
5: Canceled
Tens position: E27
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to
stop
3: Electromagnetic
shorting
4: Alarm
5: Canceled
Hundreds position:
E28 (same as the
tens)
Thousands position:
E29 (same as the
ones)
Ten thousands
position: E30 (same
as the ones)

‑673‑
Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

F9-52 Fault 00101 Ones position: E31 Same as F9-48
protection 0: Coast to stop
action 1: Decelerate to
selection 5 stop
4: Alarm
5: Canceled
Tens position: E40
0: Coast to stop
2: Fault reset
Hundreds position:
E41 (same as the
ones)
Thousands position:
E42
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to
stop
2: Fault reset
3: Electromagnetic
shorting
4: Alarm
5: Canceled
Ten thousands
position: E43
0: Coast to stop
1: Decelerate to
stop
3: Electromagnetic
shorting
4: Alarm
5: Canceled
F9-53 Fault 05500 Ones position: E45 Same as F9-48
protection 0: Coast to stop
action 1: Decelerate to
selection 6 stop
4: Alarm
5: Canceled
Tens position: E60
(same as the ones)
Hundreds position:
E61 (same as the
ones)
Thousands position:
E62
0: Coast to stop
5: Canceled
Ten thousands:
Reserved
5: Canceled

‑674‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

F9-54 Frequency for 0 0: Current running This parameter is used to
continuing to frequency select the frequency when the
run upon fault 1: Frequency AC drive is faulty. If a fault
reference occurs during the operation of
2: Frequency upper the AC drive and the fault
limit protection action is set to
3: Frequency lower "continue to run", the AC drive
limit displays A** and continues to
4: Backup frequency run at the frequency set
upon abnormality through F9-54.
F9-55 Backup 100.0% 0.0% to 100.0% This parameter is used to set
frequency (maximum the backup frequency of the
upon frequency F0-10) AC drive upon fault. If a fault
abnormality occurs during the operation of
the AC drive and the fault
protection action is set to "run
at the backup frequency" (F9-
54 is set to 4), the AC drive
displays A** and continues to
run at the backup frequency.

3.7.12Detection of Short-Circuit to Ground

Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
0: No detection
1: Detection upon power-on
Detection of short-circuit to
F9-07 1 2: Detection before running -
ground
3: Detection upon power-on and
before running

3.8 Monitoring
The monitoring function enables you to view the AC drive state in the LED display
area on the operating panel. You can monitor the AC drive state in the following two
ways:
1. In the stop or running state, multiple state parameters can be displayed by pressing
on the operating panel to switch over every byte of F7-03, F7-04 and F7-05.
In the running state, 32 running state parameters are available. Select whether to
show a parameter corresponding to every bit according to binary F7-03 (Running
display parameter 1) and F7-04 (Running display parameter 2). In the stop sate, 13
stop state parameters are available. Select whether to show a parameter

‑675‑
Function Application

corresponding to every bit according to binary F7-05 (Stop state display

parameter).

For example, to view a running state parameter (such as running frequency, bus
voltage, output voltage, output current, output power, and PID reference) on the
panel, do the following:

Set the byte of F7-03 (LED display of parameters during operation 1) corresponding
to that parameter to 1. Convert the binary number to the hexadecimal equivalent,
and set F7-03 to the hexadecimal number. For details about the conversion
method, see "Table 3–45 Binary-to-hexadecimal conversion" on page 679. Press the
key on the operating panel to switch between bytes of F7-03 to view parameter
settings.

You can view other monitoring parameters in the same way. Relationship between
monitoring parameters and bytes of F7-03, F7-04, and F7-05 is summarized in the
following table.

‑676‑
 Function Application

Table 3–44 Relationship between monitoring parameters and bytes of F7-03, F7-04, and F7-
05
Parame Function Default Value Range Description
ter
F7-03 LED 0x1F 0000 to the If a parameter needs to be displayed
running value of during running, set its corresponding
display 0xFFFF bit to 1. After converting this binary
parameter number to a hexadecimal number, set
1 F7-03 to this hexadecimal number.

Note: Shaded parameters are

displayed by default.
F7-04 LED 0 0000 to If a parameter needs to be displayed
running value of during running, set its corresponding
display 0xFFFF bit to 1. After converting this binary
parameter number to a hexadecimal number, set
2 F7-04 to this hexadecimal number.

‑677‑
Function Application

Parame Function Default Value Range Description

ter
F7-05 LED stop 0x33 0000 to the If a parameter needs to be displayed
display value of when the AC drive stops, set its
parameter 0xFFFF corresponding bit to 1. After converting
this binary number to a hexadecimal
number, set F7-05 to this hexadecimal
number.

Note: Shaded parameters are

displayed by default.

Note
When the AC drive is powered on again after power-off, the parameters selected before
power-off are displayed.

The monitoring parameters corresponding to each bit in F7-03, F7-04, and F7-05 do not
completely correspond to all the monitoring parameters in group U0. If parameters to be
monitored cannot be found in F7-03, F7-04 and F7-05, view them in group U0.

Convert a binary number to a hexadecimal number in the following way:

From right to left, every four binary digits corresponds to one hexadecimal digit. If
the highest bit is not the fourth bit, fill up it with 0. Then, convert the every divided
group of four binary digits into the decimal equivalent. 0000 to 1111 correspond to
0 to 15 in decimal and 0 to F in hexadecimal. Convert each decimal number to a
hexadecimal one according to the following decimal-to-hexadecimal conversion
table.

For example, the binary number 011 1101 1111 1001 is turned into 0011 1101 1111
1001 by adding a leading zero, and then converted to 3DF9 according to the
following table.

‑678‑
 Function Application

Table 3–45 Binary-to-hexadecimal conversion

Bi 111 111 110 110 101 101 100 100 011 011 010 010 001 001 000 000
nar 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
y
Dec 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
im
al
Hex F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ade
ci
ma
l
2. Select group U0 directly on the operating panel to view related monitoring
parameters. Monitoring parameters in "Table 3–46 Monitoring parameters in group
U0" on page 679 are read only.
Table 3–46 Monitoring parameters in group U0

Para. Function Basic Unit Description

U0-00 Running 0.01 Hz This parameter indicates the absolute value of
frequency (Hz) the running frequency of the AC drive.
U0-01 Frequency 0.01 Hz This parameter indicates the absolute value of
reference (Hz) the frequency reference of the AC drive.
U0-02 Bus voltage (V) 0.1 V This parameter indicates the bus voltage of
the AC drive.
U0-03 Output voltage 1V This parameter indicates the output voltage of
(V) the AC drive during operation.
U0-04 Output current 0.01 A This parameter indicates the output current of
(A) the AC drive during operation.
U0-05 Output power 0.1 kW This parameter indicates the output power of
(kW) the AC drive during operation.
U0-06 Output torque 0.10% This parameter indicates the output torque of
(%) the AC drive during operation. The value is a
percentage of the rated motor torque.

‑679‑
Function Application

Para. Function Basic Unit Description

U0-07 DI state 1 This parameter indicates the current state of
the DI. Each bit of the binary number
converted from this value corresponds to one
DI signal. The value 1 indicates that the input
is high level. The value 0 indicates that the
input is low level. Each bit corresponds to an
input terminal in the following pattern.

U0-08 DO state 1 This parameter indicates the current state of

the DO. Each bit of the binary number
converted from this value corresponds to one
DO signal. The value 1 indicates that the
output is high level. The value 0 indicates that
the output is low level. Each bit corresponds
to an output terminal in the following pattern.

U0-09 AI1 voltage (V) 0.01 V -

U0-10 AI2 voltage (V) 0.01 V/0.01 -
mA

‑680‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Basic Unit Description

U0-11 AI3 voltage (V) 0.01 V -
U0-12 Count value 1 This parameter indicates the count value in
the counting function.
U0-13 Length value 1 This parameter indicates the length in the
fixed-length function.
U0-14 Load speed This This parameter indicates the load speed.
display parameter
is
determined
by the ones
position of
F7-12.
U0-15 PID reference 1 PID reference value = PID reference
(percentage) x FA-04 (PID reference feedback
range)
U0-16 PID feedback 1 PID feedback = PID feedback (percentage) x
FA-04 (PID reference feedback range)
U0-17 PLC stage 1 There are a total of 16 stages.
U0-18 Pulse input 0.01 kHz This parameter indicates the high-speed pulse
reference (kHz) sampling frequency of DI5.
U0-19 Feedback speed 0.01 Hz When the tens position of F7-12 (number of
(Hz) decimal places for load speed display) is set to
1, U0-19 has one decimal place and the
displayed value range is –500.0 Hz to +500.0
Hz.
When the tens position of F7-12 is set to 2, U0-
19 has two decimal places and the displayed
value range is -320.00 Hz to +320.00 Hz.
U0-20 Remaining 0.1 min This parameter indicates remaining running
running time time during operation.
U0-21 AI1 voltage 0.001 V This parameter indicates the actual AI
before sampling voltage/current value.
correction Linear correction is performed to reduce the
U0-22 AI2 voltage (V)/ 0.001 V/ deviation between the sampling voltage/
current (mA) 0.01 mA current and the actual voltage/current. For
before voltage/current after correction, see U0-09
correction and U0-10.
U0-23 AI3 voltage 0.001 V
before
correction
U0-24 Linear speed 1 m/min
U0-25 Current power- 1 min -
on time
U0-26 Current running 0.1 min -
time

‑681‑
Function Application

Para. Function Basic Unit Description

U0-27 Pulse input 1 Hz This parameter indicates the DI5 high-speed
reference (Hz) pulse sampling frequency. It is the same as
U0-18, except for difference in units.
U0-28 Communication 0.01% This parameter indicates the data written by
the communication address 0x1000. The base
value of the percentage is determined by the
value of communication address 0x1000.
U0-29 Encoder 0.01 Hz This parameter indicates the motor running
feedback speed frequency measured by the encoder.
(Hz)
U0-30 Display of main 0.01 Hz This parameter indicates the main frequency
frequency X reference.
U0-31 Display of 0.01 Hz This parameter indicates the auxiliary
auxiliary frequency reference.
frequency Y
U0-32 Any memory 1 -
address
U0-33 Synchronous 0.1 -
motor rotor
position
U0-34 Motor 1℃ This parameter indicates the motor
temperature temperature sampled through AI3.
For details about motor temperature
measurement, see the description of F9-56
(type of motor temperature sensor).
U0-35 Target torque 0.10% This parameter indicates the current torque
(%) upper limit reference, which is a percentage of
the rated motor torque.
U0-36 Resolver 1 -
position
U0-37 Power factor 0.1º This parameter indicates the current power
angle factor angle.

‑682‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Basic Unit Description

U0-38 ABZ position 1 This parameter indicates the number of
phase-A and phase-B pulses of the ABZ
encoder.
This value is four times the number of pulses
that the encoder runs. For example, if the
display is 4000, the actual number of pulses
that the encoder runs is 4000/4 = 1000.
The value increases when encoder rotates in
forward direction and decreases when
encoder rotates in reverse direction. After
increasing to 65535, the value will be counted
and increased from 0 again. After decreasing
to 0, the value be counted and decreased
from 65535 again.
You can check whether the encoder is
correctly installed by viewing this parameter.
U0-39 Target voltage 1V This parameter indicates the target output
upon V/f voltage when the AC drive runs in the VF/f
separation separation state.
U0-40 Output voltage 1V This parameter indicates the actual output
upon V/f voltage when the AC drive runs in the V/f
separation separation state.
U0-41 DI state display 1 DI state display: ON indicates high level; OFF
indicates low level.
AI2 VDI5 VDI3 VDI1 DI9 DI7 DI5 DI3 DI1

AI3 AI1 VDI4 VDI2 DI10 DI8 DI6 DI4 DI2

U0-42 DO state display 1 DO state display: ON indicates high level; OFF

indicates low level.
relay2

DO1 relay1

‑683‑
Function Application

Para. Function Basic Unit Description

U0-43 DI function 1 This parameter indicates whether terminal
state display 1 functions 1 to 40 are valid. There are five LEDs
(function 01-40) on the operating panel, representing the
following functions from right to left:
functions 1 to 8, 9 to 16, 17 to 24, 25 to 32, and
33 to 40. Each LED corresponds to eight
functions, as shown in the following figure.
The LEDs indicate states of DI functions. ON
indicates high level, and OFF indicates low
level.
1

6 2
7

5 3

8
4

U0-44 DI function 1 This parameter indicates whether terminal

state display 2 functions 41 to 59 are valid. There are five
(functions 41 to LEDs on the operating panel, representing the
80) following functions from right to left:
functions 41 to 48, 49 to 56, and 57 to 59. Each
LED corresponds to eight functions, as shown
in the following figure.
The LEDs indicate states of DI functions. ON
indicates high level, and OFF indicates low
level.
41

46 42
47

45 43

48
44

U0-45 Fault subcode 1 This parameter indicates fault subcodes.

U0-46 Inverter unit 1℃ This parameter indicates the inverter heatsink
temperature temperature.
U0-47 PTC channel 0.001 -
voltage before
correction
U0-48 PTC channel 0.001 -
voltage after
correction
U0-49 Number of 1 Pulse difference between the initial position of
offset pulses of position lock and the current position
position lock
U0-50 Roll diameter 1 mm Current roll diameter

‑684‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Basic Unit Description

U0-51 Tension (after 1N Tension reference after taper setting
taper setting)
U0-58 Z signal 1 This parameter indicates the phase-Z
counting counting of the current ABZ or UVW encoder.
The value increases or decreases by 1 every
time the encoder rotates one revolution
forwardly or reversely. You can check whether
the encoder is correctly installed by viewing
this parameter.
U0-59 Frequency 0.01% This parameter indicates the current
reference frequency reference. The value is a percentage
of the maximum frequency (F0-10) of the AC
drive.
U0-60 Running 0.01% This parameter indicates the current running
frequency (%) frequency reference. The value is a percentage
of the maximum frequency (F0-10) of the AC
drive.
U0-61 AC drive state 1 0: Stop; 1: Forward; 2: Reverse
0: Constant; 1: Accelerate; 2: Decelerate
0: Bus voltage normal; 1: Undervoltage
U0-62 Current fault 1 -
code
U0-63 Running 0.01 Hz -
frequency (after
droop)
U0-64 Back EMF 0.1 V Back EMF of the motor
U0-65 Stator 1 -
resistance auto-
tuning upon
startup
U0-66 Communication 1 -
extension card
model
U0-67 Software 1 -
version of the
communication
extension card

‑685‑
Function Application

Para. Function Basic Unit Description

U0-68 AC drive state 1 0: Stop; 1: Run
on the 0: Forward run; 1: Reverse run
communication
This parameter indicates whether any fault
extension card
occurs to the AC drive.
0: No fault
1: Fault
This parameter indicates whether the running
frequency reaches the frequency reference.
0: The running frequency does not reach the
frequency reference.
1: The running frequency has reached the
frequency reference.
This parameter indicates whether DP
communication is normal.
0: Normal
1: Abnormal
Communication control as the reference
source for the AC drive
Communication control as the command
source for the AC drive
Speed control/torque control
Fault code (main code). See specific fault
description.
U0-69 Frequency 1 -
transmitted to
the
communication
extension card/
0.01 Hz
U0-70 Speed 1 -
transmitted to
the
communication
extension card/
RPM
U0-71 Current specific 1 -
to the
communication
extension card
(A)
U0-72 Communication 1 -
card error state
U0-73 Target torque 0.1 Target torque not filtered in torque control
before filter mode
U0-74 Target torque 0.1% Target torque filtered in torque control mode
after filter

‑686‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Basic Unit Description

U0-75 Torque 0.1% Torque reference after acceleration/
reference after deceleration in torque control mode
acceleration/
deceleration
U0-76 Torque upper 0.1% The torque upper limit under the motoring
limit in the state takes the rated current of the AC drive as
motoring state the base value.
U0-77 Torque upper 0.01% The torque upper limit under the generating
limit in the state takes the rated current of the AC drive as
generating state the base value.

3.9 User Settings

3.9.1 User-Defined Parameters

Group FE consisting of parameters FE-00 to FE-29) is used to define frequently-used
parameters to facilitate operations such as viewing and modification. Up to 30 user-
defined parameters can be set.
● If the displayed value is F0-00, no parameter is defined. In the user-defined
parameter mode, you can use FE-00 to FE-31 in sequence to define which
parameters to display and skip any parameter by setting the value to F0-00.
● Displayed values U3-17 and U3-16 indicate PZD1 (AC drive command word) in
communication control and PZD2 (AC drive target frequency) in communication
control, respectively.

‑687‑
Function Application

Parameters

‑688‑
 Function Application

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

FP-03 Display of user- 11 Ones: Display of user-defined -
defined parameter parameter groups
groups 0: Not displayed
1: Display
Tens: Display of user-
modified parameter groups
0: Not displayed
1: Display
FE-00 User parameter 0 U3-17 F0-00 to FP-xx -
FE-01 User parameter 1 U3-16 A0-00 to Ax-xx -
U0-xx to U0-xx
FE-02 User parameter 2 F0-00 -
U3-00 to U3-xx
FE-03 User parameter 3 F0-00 -
FE-04 User parameter 4 F0-00 -
FE-05 User parameter 5 F0-00 -
FE-06 User parameter 6 F0-00 -
FE-07 User parameter 7 F0-00 -
FE-08 User parameter 8 F0-00 -
FE-09 User parameter 9 F0-00 -
FE-10 User parameter 10 F0-00 -
FE-11 User parameter 11 F0-00 -
FE-12 User parameter 12 F0-00 -
FE-13 User parameter 13 F0-00 -
FE-14 User parameter 14 F0-00 -
FE-15 User parameter 15 F0-00 -
FE-16 User parameter 16 F0-00 -
FE-17 User parameter 17 F0-00 -
FE-18 User parameter 18 F0-00 -
FE-19 User parameter 19 F0-00 -
FE-20 User parameter 20 U0-68 -
FE-21 User parameter 21 U0-69 -
FE-22 User parameter 22 F0-00 -
FE-23 User parameter 23 F0-00 -
FE-24 User parameter 24 F0-00 -
FE-25 User parameter 25 F0-00 -
FE-26 User parameter 26 F0-00 -
FE-27 User parameter 27 F0-00 -
FE-28 User parameter 28 F0-00 -
FE-29 User parameter 29 F0-00 -
FE-30 User parameter 30 F0-00 -
FE-31 User parameter 31 F0-00 -

‑689‑
Function Application

3.9.2 Sleep and Wakeup

Sleep is also known as hibernation. Any time period within 24 hours can be set as a
sleep period, during which the AC drive stops running and sleeps.
Wakeup is a process that the AC drive wakes up from the sleep state and starts to run.
To use the sleep and wakeup functions, set the wakeup frequency, sleep frequency,
and sleep duration. Generally, set the wakeup frequency (F8-49) equal to or greater
than the sleep frequency (F8-51). If the wakeup frequency and the sleep frequency are
both 0.00 Hz, the sleep and wakeup functions are disabled.

Figure 3-84 Sleep and wakeup function setting

Note
When sleep is enabled during PID operation, you can set FA-28 (selection of PID operation
at stop) to 1 to continue the PID operation or to 0 to stop PID operation.

‑690‑
 Function Application

Related parameters
Para.
Function Default Value Range Description
No.
Sleep frequency (F8-51) to If the AC drive is in the sleep state
F8-49 Wakeup frequency 0.00 Hz
max. frequency (F0-10) and can respond to a command,
when the frequency reference is
equal to or higher than F8-49
F8-50 Wakeup delay 0.0s 0.0s to 6500.0s (wakeup frequency), the AC drive
wakes up after a period defined by
F8-50 (wakeup delay).

0.00 Hz to wakeup frequency During AC drive running, when the

F8-51 Sleep frequency 0.00 Hz
(F8-49) frequency reference is equal to or
lower than F8-51 (sleep frequency),
the AC drive enters the sleep state
F8-52 Sleep delay 0.0s 0.0s to 6500.0s and decelerates to stop after a
period defined by F8-52 (sleep
delay).

3.9.3 Current Running Time Threshold

Para. Function Default Value Range Description

The DO terminal outputs
the active signal when the
current running time
reaches the value of F8-53.
Current running 0.0 min to
F8-53 0.0 min This parameter is valid
time threshold 6500.0 min
only for the current AC
drive running. Previous
running time is not
accumulated.
The F8-55 parameter
specifies the deceleration
time for emergency stop of
the terminal. The
emergency stop function
Deceleration time enables the AC drive to
Model
F8-55 for emergency 0.0s to 6500.0s decelerate within the
dependent
stop specified deceleration
time. In the V/f mode,
when the deceleration
time is 0s, the AC drive
decelerates within the
minimum unit time.

‑691‑
Communication

4 Communication

4.1 Parameter Communication Address

4.1.1 Parameter Introduction

The AC drive supports six communication protocols: Modbus-RTU, CANopen, CANlink,
PROFIBUS-DP, PROFINET, and EtherCAT. The user-programmable card and point-to-
point communication are derived from the CANlink protocol. The host controller
enables users to control, monitor, and change parameters of the AC drive through
these protocols. The communication data is classified into parameter data and non-
parameter data. The non-parameter data includes operation commands, operation
status, operation parameters, and alarm information.

Parameter data
Para. Data Group F F0, F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, F8, F9, FA, FB, FC, FD, FE, FF
(read/write)
Group A A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, A6, A7, A8, A9, AA, AB, AC, AD, AE,
(read/write) AF
Group B B0, B1, B2, B6
(read/write)

The definition of parameter data communication address is as follows:

1. Parameter data read through communication
For groups F0 to FF and A0 to AF, the high-order 8 bits of the communication
address indicate the group number and the low-order 8 bits indicate the parameter
number.

Example:

A communication address of F0-16 is F010H, where F0H represents group F0 and

10H is the hexadecimal data format of serial number 16 in the group.

A communication address of AC-08 is AC08, where ACH represents group AC and

08H is the hexadecimal data format of serial number 8 in the group.

2. Parameter data written through communication

For groups F0 to FF, the high-order 8 bits in the communication address are 00 to
0F or F0 to FF, which is decided by whether the high-order 8 bits are written to
EEPROM. The low-order 8 bits indicate the parameter number in the group.

Take writing F0-16 as an example.

If it is not written to EEPROM, the communication address is 0010H.

If it is written to EEPROM, the communication address is F010H.

‑692‑
 Communication

For groups A0 to AF, the high-order 8 bits in the communication address are 40 to
4F or A0 to AF, which is decided by whether the high-order 8 bits are written to
EEPROM. The low-order 8 bits indicate the parameter number in the group.

Take writing AC-08 as an example.

If it is not be written to EEPROM, the communication address is 4C08H.

If it is written to EEPROM, the communication address is AC08H.

Non-parameter data
Non-Parameter Status data Group U (monitoring parameters), AC drive fault
Data (read-only) description, and AC drive operation status
Control Control commands, communication references,
parameter (write- DO control, AO1 control, AO2 control, high-speed
only) pulse (FMP) output control, and parameter
initialization

1. Status data
Status data includes group U (monitoring parameters), AC drive fault description,
and AC drive operation status.
● Group U (monitoring parameters)
For U0 to UF, the high-order 8 bits in its communication address is 70 to 7F, and
the low-order 8 bits indicate the parameter number in the group. For example,
the communication address of U0-11 is 700BH.

● AC drive fault description

When the AC drive fault description is read via communication, the
communication address is 8000H. The host controller can obtain the current
fault code of the AC drive by reading the address. For the fault code description,
see the definition of F9-14.

● AC drive operation status

When the AC drive running status is read via communication, the
communication address is 3000H. The host controller can obtain the current
operation status of the AC drive by reading the address. The operation status is
defined in the following table.

Communication Status Definition

Address of the AC
Drive's Operation
Status
3000H 1: Forward run
2: Reverse run
3: Stop

‑693‑
Communication

2. Control parameters
Control parameters include control commands, communication references, DO
control, AO1 control, AO2 control, and parameter initialization
● Control command
When F0-02 (command source) is set to 2 (communication control), the host
controller can control the AC drive such as starting/stopping it by using the
communication address. The control commands are defined in the following
table.
Communication Status Definition
Address of the AC
Drive's Operation
Status
2000H 1: Forward run
2: Reverse run
3: Forward jog
4: Reverse jog
5. Coast to stop
6: Decelerate to stop
7: Fault reset
● Communication reference
The communication references apply to the data setting through
communication, such as the frequency, torque upper limit, V/f separation
voltage, PID reference, and PID feedback. If the communication address is
1000H, its range is -10000 to +10000 and the corresponding value range is
-100.00% to +100.00%.

● DO control
When a DO is assigned with function 20 (communication), the host controller
can control the DO of the AC drive through the communication address. Control
on the DO of the AC drive is defined as follows.
Communication Command Content
Address of the DO
Control
2001H Bit0: DO1 output control
Bit1: DO2 output control
Bit2: RELAY1 output control
Bit3: RELAY2 output control
Bit4: FMR output control

● AO1, AO2, high-speed pulse (FMP) output control

When AO1, AO2, and FMP are assigned with function 12 (communication), the
host controller can control the AO and high-speed pulse output terminal
through the communication addresses. The definition is described in the
following table.

‑694‑
 Communication

Communication Address of the Command Content

Output Control
AO1 2002H 0 to 7FFF indicates 0% to 100%.
AO2 2003H
FMP 2004H

● Parameter initialization
This function is required when you need to initialize parameters of the drive by
using the host controller.

If FP-00 (user password) is set to a non-zero value, password verification is

required. The host controller performs parameter initialization within 30s after
successful password verification.

The communication address of password verification through communication is

1F00H. Directly write the correct user password to this address to perform
password verification. The communication address of parameter initialization
through communication is 1F01H, as defined in the following table.

Communication Command Definition

Address of Parameter
Initialization
1F01H 0: No operation
1: Restore default settings (mode 1)
2: Clear records
4: Back up current user parameters
501: Restore user backup parameters
503: Restore default settings (mode 2)

4.1.2 Modbus Communication Protocol

Overview
The AC drive provides RS485 communication interfaces and supports the Modbus-
RTU slave communication protocol. You can implement centralized control, such as
setting commands, modifying parameters, and reading running state and fault
information of the AC drive, by using a computer or PLC.
This protocol defines the content and format of transmitted messages during serial
communication, including master polling (or broadcasting) format and master coding
method (parameters for action requirements, transmission data, and error check).
Slave response uses the same structure and includes action confirmation, returned
data, and error check. If an error occurs when the slave receives a message, or the
slave cannot complete the action required by the master, the slave returns a fault
message as a response to the master.

‑695‑
Communication

Application
The AC drive is connected to a "single-master multi-slave" PC or PLC control network
with RS485 bus.

Hardware interface
The RS485 extension card MD38TX1 must be inserted into the AC drive.

Topology
The system consists of a single master and multiple slaves. In the network, each
communication device has a unique slave address. One of the devices (usually a PC
host controller, a PLC, or an HMI) is the master and initiates communication to
perform parameter read or write operations on slaves. Other devices (slaves) provide
data to respond to query or operations from the master. Only one device is allowed to
transmit data at a time, whereas other devices should be in data receiving status.
The address range of the slaves is 1 to 247, and 0 is a broadcast address. A slave must
have a unique address in the network.

Communication transmission mode

The asynchronous serial and half-duplex transmission mode is used. During
asynchronous serial communication, data is sent frame by frame in the form of
message. According to the Modbus-RTU protocol, an interval of at least 3.5-byte
transmission time marks the end of the previous message. A new message starts to be
sent after this interval.

The communication protocol used by the AC drive is the Modbus-RTU slave

communication protocol, which allows the AC drive to provide data to respond to
"query/command" from the master or execute actions according to "query/
command" from the master.
The master can be a PC, an industrial control device, or a PLC. The master can
communicate with a single slave or send broadcast messages to all slaves. When the
master communicates with a single slave, the slave needs to return a message
(response) to "query/command" from the master. For a broadcast message sent by
the master, the slaves need not return a response.

4.1.3 Communication Data Frame Structure

The following figure shows the Modbus-RTU communication date. The AC drive
supports read and write of word-type parameters only. The read command is 0x03,

‑696‑
 Communication

the write command is 0x06, and the multi-write command is 0x10. The AC drive does
not support read and write of bytes or bits.

Theoretically, the host controller can read multiple continuous parameters at a time
(that is, n is up to 12). Do not stride over the last parameter in this parameter group;
otherwise, an error will be returned.

Multi-write is the same as multi-read and up to 12 parameters can be continuously

written.

If the slave detects a communication frame error or read/write failure due to other
causes, the slave returns a frame of error.

‑697‑
Communication

Note
No response is returned for CRC check error.

A read error returned from the slave is 0x83. A write error returned from the slave is
0x86. A multi-write error returned from the slave is 0x90.

Table 4–1 Data frame fields

Frame header (START) Idle time greater than 3.5-byte transmission time
Slave address (ADR) Communication address range: 1 to 247; 0 = Broadcast
03: Read slave parameters; 06: Write slave parameters; 10: Multi-
Command code (CMD)
write slave parameters
Parameter address (H) Internal parameter address of the AC drive, expressed in
hexadecimal. Parameters are divided into parameter type and
non-parameter type (for example, operation status parameters
Parameter address (L) and operation commands). See the definition of addresses.
Low-order bytes follow high-order bytes during transmission.
Parameter count (H) Number of parameters read in this frame. The value 1 indicates
reading one parameter. Low-order bytes follow high-order bytes
during transmission.
Parameter count (L)
According to this protocol, only one parameter can be rewritten
at a time without this field.
Data bytes The data length, which is twice the number of parameters
Data (H) Response data or data to be written. Low-order bytes follow
Data (L) high-order bytes during transmission.

CRC low bit Detection value: CRC16 check value. High-order bytes follow low-
order bytes during transmission.
CRC high bit For details of the calculation method, see the description of CRC
in this section.

‑698‑
 Communication

END 3.5-byte transmission time

CRC check:
Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) uses the RTU frame format. A Modbus message
includes a CRC-based error check field. The CRC field is used to check content of the
entire message. The CRC field contains two bytes, making up a 16-bit binary value.
The CRC field is calculated by the transmitting device, and then added to the
message. The receiving device recalculates a CRC value after receiving the message,
and compares the calculated value with the CRC value in the received CRC field. If the
two CRC values are unequal, a transmission error occurs.
The CRC is first stored to 0xFFFF. Then a procedure is invoked to process the
successive 8-bit bytes in the message and the value in the register. Only the eight bits
in each character are used for the CRC. The start bit, stop bit, and the parity bit do not
apply to the CRC.
During generation of the CRC, each eight-bit character is in exclusive-OR (XOR) with
the content in the register. Then, the result is shifted in the direction of the least
significant bit (LSB), with a zero filled into the most significant bit (MSB) position. The
LSB is extracted and examined. If the LSB is 1, the register then performs XOR with a
preset value. If the LSB is 0, no XOR is performed. This process is repeated until eight
shifts have been performed. After the last (eighth) shift, the next eight-bit byte is in
XOR with the register's current value, and the process repeats for another eight shifts
as described above. The final value of the register, after all the bytes of the message
have been applied, is the CRC value.
When CRC is added in a message, high-order bytes follow low-order bytes. The CRC
simple function is as follows:
unsigned int crc_chk_value (unsigned char *data_value,unsigned char length)
{
unsigned int crc_value=0xFFFF;
int i;
while (length–)
{
crc_value^=*data_value++;
for (i=0;i<8;i++)
{
if (crc_value&0x0001)
{
crc_value= (crc_value>>1) ^0xa001;
}

‑699‑
Communication

else
{
crc_value=crc_value>>1;
}
}
}
return (crc_value);
}
Definition of communication parameter addresses:
R/W parameter (some parameters cannot be modified as they are manufacturer-
specific parameters or for monitoring purpose only.)

4.1.4 Parameter Address Expression Rules

The parameter group number and parameter number are used to express a
parameter address.
High-order bytes: F0 to FF (group F), A0 to AF (group A), and 70 to 7F (group U)
Low-order bytes: 00 to FF
For example, the communication address of F3-12 is expressed as 0xF30C.
Group FF: Parameters cannot be read or modified. Group U: Parameters are ready-
only and cannot be modified.
Some parameters cannot be modified when the AC drive is running. Some parameters
cannot be modified regardless of the status of the AC drive. Modify a parameter
according to its range, unit, and description.

Parameter Group No. Communication Access Modified RAM Parameter

Address Address Through
Communication
F0 to FE 0xF000 to 0xFEFF 0x0000 to 0x0EFF
A0 to AC 0xA000 to 0xACFF 0x4000 to 0x4CFF
U0 0x7000 to 0x70FF
B0 to B6 0xB000 to 0xB6FF 0x5000 to 0x56FF

Note
Frequent storage to the EEPROM reduces its service life. Therefore, in communication
mode, change values of certain parameters in RAM rather than storing the setting.

‑700‑
 Communication

To implement the function of the parameter in group F, change the high-order F of

the parameter address to 0. To implement the function of the parameter in group A,
change the high-order A of the parameter address to 4.
The parameter addresses are expressed as follows:
High-order bytes: 00 to 0F (group F) and 40 to 4F (group A)
Low-order bytes: 00 to FF
Example:
If parameter F3-12 is not stored into EEPROM, the address is expressed as 030C. If
parameter A0-05 is not stored into EEPROM, the address is expressed as 4005. This
address indicates that the parameter can only be written to RAM, and is invalid when
being read.
The following table lists some stop/run parameters.

Para. Address Description Para. Address Description

1000H *Communication (decimal) 1010H PID reference
-10000 to +10000
1001H Running frequency 1011H PID feedback
1002H Bus voltage 1012H PLC process
1003H Output voltage 1013H Pulse input frequency
(basic unit: 0.01 kHz)
1004H Output current 1014H Feedback speed (basic
unit: 0.1 Hz)
1005H Output power 1015H Remaining running time
1006H Output torque 1016H AI1 voltage before
correction
1007H Running speed 1017H AI2 voltage before
correction
1008H DI input indication 1018H AI3 voltage before
correction
1009H DO output indication 1019H Linear speed
100AH AI1 voltage 101AH Current power-on time
100BH AI2 voltage 101BH Current running time
100CH AI3 voltage 101CH Pulse input frequency
(basic unit: 1 Hz)
100DH Count value input 101DH Current communication
(read-only)
100EH Length value input 101EH Actual feedback speed
100FH Load speed 101FH Display of main
frequency X
– – 1020H Display of auxiliary
frequency Y

‑701‑
Communication

Note
A communication reference is a percentage expressed as a fraction of the maximum fre-
quency (F0-10). +10000 and –10000 correspond to +100.00% and –100.00% respectively. For
torque dimension data, this percentage is F2-10 or A2-48 (digital setting of torque upper
limit of the first or second motor).

Input of control commands to the AC drive (write-only)

Command Word Address Command Definition

2000H 0001: Forward running
0002: Reverse running
0003: Forward jogging
0004: Reverse jogging
0005: Coast to stop
0006: Decelerate to stop
0007: Fault reset

Reading AC drive state (read-only)

State Word Address State Word Function

3000H 0001: Forward running
0002: Reverse running
0003: Stop

Parameter locking password check: If an actual password is returned, password check

succeeds. If no password is set, namely, the password is 0, 0000H is returned.

Password Address Password Content

1F00H *****

DO control (write-only)

Command Address Command Content

2001H BIT0: DO1 control
BIT1: DO2 control
BIT2: RELAY1 output control
BIT3: RELAY2 output control
BIT4: FMR output control
BIT5: VDO1
BIT6: VDO2
BIT7: VDO3
BIT8: VDO4
BIT9: VDO5

‑702‑
 Communication

AO1 control (write-only)

Command Address Command Content

2002H 0 to 7FFF indicates 0% to 100%.

AO2 control (write-only)

Command Address Command Content

2003H 0 to 7FFF indicates 0% to 100%.

Pulse output control (write-only)

Command Address Command Content

2004H 0 to 7FFF indicates 0% to 100%.

AC drive fault description

AC Drive Fault AC Drive Fault Information

Address
8000H 0000: No fault 0015: Parameter read-write error
0001: Reserved 0016: AC drive hardware fault
0002: Overcurrent during 0017: Motor short circuit to
acceleration ground
0003: Overcurrent during 0018: Reserved
deceleration 0019: Reserved
0004: Overcurrent during 001A: Running time reach
operation at constant speed 001B: User-defined fault 1
0005: Overvoltage during 001C: User-defined fault 2
acceleration 001D: Power-on time reach
0006: Overvoltage during 001E: Load lost
deceleration 001F: PID feedback loss during
0007: Overvoltage during operation
operation at constant speed 0028: Fast current limit timeout
0008: Snubber resistor overload 0029: Motor switchover fault
0009: Undervoltage fault during operation
000A: AC drive overload 002A: Excessive speed deviation
000B: Motor overload 002B: Motor overspeed
000C: Input phase loss 002D: Motor overtemperature
000D: Output phase loss 005A: Encoder PPR reference error
000E: IGBT overtemperature 005B: Encoder not connected
000F: External fault 005C: Initial position error
0010: Communication fault 005E: Speed feedback error
0011: Contactor fault
0012: Current detection fault
0013: Motor auto-tuning fault
0014: Encoder/PG card fault

‑703‑
Communication

4.1.5 Group Fd: Communication Parameters

Parameter Fd-00 is used to set a data transmission rate between the host controller
and the AC drive. Note that the baud rate of the host controller must be consistent
with that of the AC drive. Otherwise, communication will fail. A high baud rate means
faster communication speed.

Para. No. Name Default Value Range

Ones (Modbus)
0: 300 bps
1: 600 bps
2: 1200 bps
3: 2400 bps
Fd-00 Baud rate 5005 4: 4800 bps
5: 9600 bps
6: 19200 bps
7: 38400 bps
8: 57600 bps
9: 115200 bps

The data format of the host controller must be consistent with that of the AC drive.
Otherwise, communication will fail.

Para. No. Name Default Value Range

0: No check <8,N,2>
1: Even parity check <8,E,1>
Fd-01 Data format 0
2: Odd parity check <8,O,1>
3: No check <8,N,1>

When the local address is set to 0 (broadcast address), the broadcasting function of
the host controller is implemented. The local address is unique (except the broadcast
address) and is the precondition to implementing point-to-point communication
between the host controller and the AC drive.

Para. No. Name Default Value Range

Fd-02 Local address 1 1 to 247 0: Broadcast address

Response delay: Indicates the interval from the end of data receiving by the AC drive
to the start of data transmission to the host controller. If the response delay is shorter
than the system processing time, the former is subject to the latter. Otherwise, after
the system finishes data processing, the system waits until the response delay time
expires before sending the data to the host controller.

Para. No. Name Default Value Range

Fd-03 Response delay 2 ms 0 ms to 20 ms

‑704‑
 Communication

When this parameter is set to 0.0s, the system does not detect communication
timeout.
When the interval between communication messages exceeds the communication
timeout time, the system reports a communication fault (Err16). The parameter is
generally set to invalid. In applications with continuous communication, you can use
this parameter to monitor the communication state.

Para. No. Name Default Value Range

Communication
Fd-04 0.0s 0.0s (invalid) 0.1s to 60.0s
timeout time

‑705‑
Fault Codes

5 Fault Codes

5.1 List of Fault Codes

The following faults may occur during the use of the AC drive. Troubleshoot and
rectify faults by taking actions described in the following table.

‑706‑
 Fault Codes

Table 5–1 Fault codes

Fault Name Display Possible Cause Action

Overcurrent during E02.00 Grounded or short-circuited Check whether the motor or relay contactor is
acceleration output circuit of the AC drive short-circuited.

Auto-tuning is not performed in Set motor parameters according to the motor

SVC or FVC control mode. nameplate and perform motor auto-tuning.

Excessively short acceleration Increase the acceleration time (F0-17).

time
Inappropriate overcurrent stall Ensure that overcurrent stall suppression (F3-19)
suppression is enabled.
If the value of F3-18 (overcurrent stall suppression
level) is too large, adjust it to a level between
120% and 160%.
If the value of F3-20 (overcurrent stall suppression
gain) is too small, adjust it to a level between 20
and 40.
Inappropriate customized torque Adjust the customized torque boost or V/f curve.
boost or V/f curve

Startup of a running motor Use flying start or restart the motor after the
motor stops.

External interference to the AC View the fault records to check whether the fault
drive current has ever reached the overcurrent
suppression level (F3-18). If not, check for external
interference source. If no external interference
source is found, the driver board or Hall device
might be damaged. Contact Inovance for
replacement.

‑707‑
Fault Codes

Fault Name Display Possible Cause Action

Overcurrent during E03.00 Grounded or short-circuited Check whether the motor is short-circuited or
deceleration output circuit of the AC drive open-circuited.

Auto-tuning is not performed in Set motor parameters according to the motor

SVC or FVC control mode. nameplate and perform motor auto-tuning.

Excessively short deceleration Increase the deceleration time (F0-18).

time
Inappropriate overcurrent stall Ensure that overcurrent stall suppression (F3-19)
suppression is enabled.
If the value of F3-18 (overcurrent stall suppression
level) is too large, adjust it to a level between
120% and 150%.
If the value of F3-20 (overcurrent stall suppression
gain) is too small, adjust it to a level between 20
and 40.
The braking unit and braking Install a braking unit and a braking resistor.
resistor are not installed.
External interference to the AC View the fault records to check whether the fault
drive current has ever reached the overcurrent
suppression level (F3-18). If not, check for external
interference source. If no external interference
source is found, the driver board or Hall device
might be damaged. Contact Inovance for
replacement.

Overcurrent during E04.00 Grounded or short-circuited Check whether the motor is short-circuited or
operation at output circuit of the AC drive open-circuited.
constant speed Auto-tuning is not performed in Set motor parameters according to the motor
SVC or FVC control mode. nameplate and perform motor auto-tuning.

Inappropriate overcurrent stall Ensure that overcurrent stall suppression (F3-19)

suppression is enabled.
If the value of F3-18 (overcurrent stall suppression
level) is too large, adjust it to a level between
120% and 150%.
If the value of F3-20 (overcurrent stall suppression
gain) is too small, adjust it to a level between 20
and 40.
Inadequate power rating of the If the running current exceeds the rated motor
AC drive current or rated output current of the AC drive
during stable running, select an AC drive with a
higher power rating.

External interference to the AC View the fault records to check whether the fault
drive current has ever reached the overcurrent
suppression level (F3-18). If not, check for external
interference source. If no external interference
source is found, the driver board or Hall device
might be damaged. Contact Inovance for
replacement.

‑708‑
 Fault Codes

Fault Name Display Possible Cause Action

Overvoltage during E05.00 High input grid voltage Adjust the voltage to the normal range.
acceleration External force driving the motor Cancel the external force or install a braking
during acceleration resistor.
If the value of F3-26 (frequency rise threshold
during overvoltage suppression) is too small,
adjust it to a level between 5 Hz to 15 Hz when an
external force drives the motor.
Inappropriate overvoltage Ensure that overvoltage suppression (F3-23) is
suppression enabled.
If the value of F3-22 (overvoltage suppression) is
too large, adjust it to a level between 700 V and
770 V.
If the value of F3-24 (frequency gain for
overvoltage suppression) is too small, adjust it to
a level between 30 and 50.
The braking unit and braking Install a braking unit and a braking resistor.
resistor are not installed.
Excessively short acceleration Increase the acceleration time.
time
Overvoltage during E06.00 Inappropriate overvoltage Ensure that overvoltage suppression (F3-23) is
deceleration suppression enabled.
If the value of F3-22 (overvoltage suppression) is
too large, adjust it to a level between 700 V and
770 V.
If the value of F3-24 (frequency gain for
overvoltage suppression) is too small, adjust it to
a level between 30 and 50.
External force driving the motor Cancel the external force or install a braking
during deceleration resistor.
If the value of F3-26 (frequency rise threshold
during overvoltage suppression) is too small,
adjust it to a level between 5 Hz to 15 Hz when an
external force drives the motor.
Excessively short deceleration Increase the deceleration time.
time
The braking unit and braking Install a braking unit and a braking resistor.
resistor are not installed.

‑709‑
Fault Codes

Fault Name Display Possible Cause Action

Overvoltage during E07.00 Inappropriate overvoltage Ensure that overvoltage suppression (F3-23) is
operation at suppression enabled.
constant speed If the value of F3-22 (overvoltage suppression) is
too large, adjust it to a level between 700 V and
770 V.
If the value of F3-24 (frequency gain for
overvoltage suppression) is too small, adjust it to
a level between 30 and 50.
External force driving the motor Cancel the external force or install a braking
during operation resistor.
If the value of F3-26 (frequency rise threshold
during overvoltage suppression) is too small,
adjust it to a level between 5 Hz to 15 Hz when an
external force drives the motor.
Undervoltage E09.00 Instantaneous power failure Enable the power dip ride-through function (F9-
59).

AC drive input voltage out of Adjust the voltage to a value within the normal
range range.

Abnormal bus voltage Contact Inovance for technical support.

Abnormal rectifier, IGBT driver Contact Inovance for technical support.

board, or IGBT control board

AC drive overload E10.00 Excessively heavy load or stalled Reduce the load and check the motor and
motor mechanical conditions.
Inadequate power rating of the Use an AC drive with a higher power rating.
AC drive
Auto-tuning is not performed in Set motor parameters according to the motor
SVC or FVC control mode. nameplate and perform motor auto-tuning.

Excessively high torque boost Decrease the value of F3-01 by 1.0% each time or
(F3-01) in V/f control mode set F3-01 to 0 (automatic torque boost).

Output phase loss on the AC Check the output wiring of the AC drive.
drive
Motor overload E11.00 Inappropriate F9-01 (motor Increase the value of F9-01 to prolong the motor
overload protection gain) setting. overload time.

Excessively heavy load or stalled Reduce the load and check the motor and
motor mechanical conditions.
Input phase loss E12.00 Input phase loss Ensure proper input RST cables and three-phase
input voltage.

Output phase loss E13.00 Motor fault Check whether the motor is disconnected.
Abnormal lead wire connecting Rectify external faults.
the AC drive to the motor
Unbalanced three-phase output Ensure proper functioning of the motor three-
of the AC drive during motor phase winding.
operation

Abnormal driver board or IGBT Contact the agent or Inovance for technical
support.

‑710‑
 Fault Codes

Fault Name Display Possible Cause Action

IGBT E14.00 High ambient temperature Lower the ambient temperature.

overtemperature Blocked air filter Clean the air filter.
Damaged fan Replace the damaged fan.

Damaged thermistor of the IGBT Contact the agent or Inovance for technical
support.

Damaged IGBT Contact the agent or Inovance for technical

support.

External fault E15.01 External fault signal input to the Rectify the external fault, and ensure that the
multi-function DI terminal mechanical condition allows restart (F8-18).
(normally open)

E15.02 External fault signal input to the Rectify the external fault, and ensure that the
multi-function DI terminal mechanical condition allows restart (F8-18).
(normally closed)

Communication E16.01 Modbus communication timeout Ensure proper wiring of the RS485
fault communication cable.
Ensure proper settings of FD-04 and PLC
communication cycle.

E16.11 CANopen communication Ensure proper connection of the CAN

timeout communication cable.
Check the values of FD-15 to FD-17 and eliminate
interference.
E16.12 Inconsistency between the Check the PDO mapping of parameters in group
configured CANopen-based PDO AF.
mapping and the actual mapping

E16.21 CANlink heartbeat timeout Ensure proper connection of the CAN

communication cable.
Check the values of FD-15 to FD-17 and eliminate
interference.
E16.22 CANlink station number conflict Change the value of FD-13 to make CANlink
station numbers different from each other.
Contactor fault E17.00 Abnormal driver board and Replace the driver board or power supply board.
power supply

Abnormal contactor Replace the contactor.

Abnormal lightning protection Replace the lightning protection board.

board
Damaged current E18.00 Abnormal AC drive current Power on the main circuit.
sampling circuit sampling If the Hall sensor or sampling current circuit is
damaged, contact Inovance.

‑711‑
Fault Codes

Fault Name Display Possible Cause Action

Motor auto-tuning E19.02 Fault in auto-tuning on the Ensure that the motor is connected and there is
fault magnetic pole position angle of no output phase loss.
the synchronous motor

E19.06 Fault in auto-tuning on the stator Ensure that the motor is connected.
E19.07 resistance Set F1-03 (rated motor current) according to the
E19.08 motor nameplate.

E19.09 Fault in auto-tuning on the Check whether the motor is connected or output
E19.10 transient leakage inductance of phase is normal without loss.
the asynchronous motor Ensure that the motor is connected properly.

E19.11 Inertia auto-tuning fault Set F1-03 (rated motor current) according to the
motor nameplate.
Increase the value of F2-43 (inertia auto-tuning
and dynamic speed reference).

E19.20 Timeout of auto-tuning on the Check the Z feedback signal.

no-load zero position angle of
the synchronous motor

E19.23 Fault in auto-tuning on the Set F1-03 (rated motor current) according to the
magnetic pole position of the motor nameplate.
synchronous motor Decrease the value of F2-29 (synchronous motor
initial angle detection current).

E19.24 Errors in auto-tuning on the Check whether the power rating of the AC drive is
transient leakage inductance of low. If yes, use an AC drive with a proper power
the asynchronous motor rating matching the motor power.

‑712‑
 Fault Codes

Fault Name Display Possible Cause Action

Encoder fault E20.00 Encoder disconnected Restore the connection.

E20.01 Encoder fault Ensure proper wiring of the PG cable.
E20.02 Encoder disconnected Ensure proper wiring of the PG cable and power

E20.03 Encoder fault during no-load supply.

auto-tuning of the synchronous Ensure consistency between the encoder pulses

motor per revolution and the value of F1-27.

Ensure proper wiring of the AB signal cable.
E20.04 Encoder fault during no-load
auto-tuning of the synchronous
motor
E20.06 Encoder fault during with-load
auto-tuning of the synchronous
motor
E20.07 Encoder fault during no-load
auto-tuning of the synchronous
motor
E20.08 Encoder fault during no-load
auto-tuning of the synchronous
motor
E20.09 Encoder fault during auto-tuning Check the encoder Z signal and wiring of the PG
of the synchronous motor card.

E20.10 Synchronous motor encoder

fault
E20.11 The encoder is faulty during FVC Ensure that the encoder is properly connected.
no-load auto-tuning of the Ensure consistency between the encoder pulses
asynchronous motor. per revolution and the value of F1-27.

E20.12 Excessive deviation between the Check for encoder disconnection.

encoder feedback speed and the Ensure proper setting of motor parameters.
speed estimated by SVC Ensure that motor auto-tuning is performed.

E20.13 Resolver encoder disconnected Check the wiring of the encoder.

E20.17 23-bit encoder disconnected Check the wiring of the 23-bit encoder.

EEPROM read/write E21.01 EEPROM read/write abnormality For communication write parameters, check the
fault E21.02 RAM addresses and the RAM address mapping of
E21.03 the parameters. For details, see 6.2.4 Parameter

E21.04 Address Rules.

If the EEPROM chip is damaged, contact Inovance
to replace the control board.

‑713‑
Fault Codes

Fault Name Display Possible Cause Action

Motor auto-tuning E22.00 Auto-tuned stator resistance out Correctly set F1-02 (rated motor voltage) and F1-
error of range 03 (rated motor current) in group F1 according to
the motor nameplate.

E22.01 Auto-tuned rotor resistance of Ensure that auto-tuning is performed after the
the asynchronous motor out of motor stops.
range

E22.02 The no-load current and mutual Set motor parameters in group F1 according to
inductance of the asynchronous the motor nameplate.
motor obtained through auto- Ensure that the motor has no load before auto-
tuning exceed the allowed range. tuning.
If this alarm is reported, the AC
drive calculates the mutual
inductance and no-load current
values based on known motor
parameters. The calculated
values may not be the optimal
values.
E22.03 Auto-tuned back EMF of the Set F1-02 (rated motor voltage) according to the
synchronous motor out of range. motor nameplate.
Ensure that the motor has no load before auto-
tuning.

E22.04 Inertia auto-tuning fault Set F1-03 (rated motor current) according to the
motor nameplate.

Short circuit to E23.00 Motor shorted to the ground Check and replace the motor cables and motor if
ground necessary.

Motor inter-phase E24.00 Motor inter-phase short circuit Check whether a two-phase short circuit occurs
short circuit on the output UVW.

Rectifier fault E25.00 Rectifier fault Rectify corresponding faults, such as input phase
loss and overtemperature.
1: Operation enabled
2: Incoming circuit breaker feedback
3: Auxiliary circuit breaker feedback
4: Leakage protection switch feedback. If there is
no feedback signal, an alarm is reported.
6: Inverter unit operation inhibited
7: Inverter unit coast-to-stop
8: User-defined inverter unit stop. If the terminal
is active, an alarm is reported.

Accumulative E26.00 The accumulative running time Clear the record through parameter initialization.
running time reach has reached the reference value.

User-defined fault 1 E27.00 The user-defined fault 1 signal is Perform a reset.

input via the DI.

The user-defined fault 1 signal is Perform a reset.

input through the virtual I/O
function.

‑714‑
 Fault Codes

Fault Name Display Possible Cause Action

User-defined fault 2 E28.00 The user-defined fault 2 signal is Perform a reset.

input via the DI.

The user-defined fault 2 signal is Perform a reset.

input through the virtual I/O
function.
Accumulative E29.00 The accumulative power-on time Clear the record through parameter initialization.
power-on time has reached the reference value.
reach
Load lost E30.00 Running current of the AC drive Check for load disconnection and mismatching
less than the value of F9-64 between the values of F9-64 and F9-65 and actual
working conditions.

PID feedback loss E31.00 PID feedback less than the value Check the PID feedback signals or set FA-26 to a
during operation of FA-26 proper value.

Pulse-by-pulse E40.00 Excessively heavy load or stalled Reduce the load and check the motor and
current limit fault motor mechanical conditions.
Inadequate power rating of the Use an AC drive with a higher power rating.
AC drive
Excessive speed E42.00 Incorrect setting of encoder Set encoder parameters properly.
deviation parameters

Auto-tuning is not performed on Perform motor parameter auto-tuning.

parameters.

Inappropriate setting of F9-69 Set the parameters correctly based on actual

and F9-70 conditions.
Motor overspeed E43.00 Incorrect setting of encoder Set encoder parameters properly.
parameters

Auto-tuning is not performed on Perform motor parameter auto-tuning.

parameters.

Inappropriate setting of F9-67 Set the parameters correctly based on actual

and F9-68 conditions.
Motor E45.00 Temperature sensor loosely Check the wiring of the temperature sensor.
overtemperature connected
High motor temperature Increase the carrier frequency or take other heat
dissipation measures to cool the motor.

Excessively low value of F9-57 Adjust the threshold to a level between 90°C and
(motor overtemperature 100°C.
protection threshold)

AC drive E60.00 High internal temperature of the Replace the fan in the AC drive.
overtemperature AC drive Contact Inovance.
Braking transistor E61.00 Excessively low resistance of the Use a braking resistor with higher resistance.
overload braking resistor

Braking transistor E62.00 Braking transistor short circuit Ensure proper functioning of the braking
short circuit transistor.
Check whether an external braking resistor is
installed.
Low liquid level E63.00 Low liquid level of the water tank Add coolant.
alarm

‑715‑
Fault Codes

Fault Name Display Possible Cause Action

Water cooling E64.00 Water-cooling system control Perform a reset.

system fault unit fault Replace the control unit.

‑716‑
 Copyright © Shenzhen Inovance Technology Co., Ltd.

*19011580A04*
19011580A04

Shenzhen Inovance Technology Co., Ltd. Add.: Inovance Headquarters Tower, High-tech Industrial Park,
Guanlan Street, Longhua New District, Shenzhen
www.inovance.com Tel: (0755) 2979 9595 Fax: (0755) 2961 9897

Suzhou Inovance Technology Co., Ltd. Add.: No. 16 Youxiang Road, Yuexi Town,
Wuzhong District, Suzhou 215104, P.R. China
www.inovance.com Tel: (0512) 6637 6666 Fax: (0512) 6285 6720